AVS4YOU Programs Help

Transcription

AVS4YOU Programs Help
www.avs4you.com
Online Media Technologies Ltd. © Copyright 2004 - 2007
AVS4YOU
Send comments on this topic.
Introduction
Contact Us
If you have any comments, suggestions or questions regarding AVS4YOU programs or if you have a
new feature that you feel can be added to improve our product, please feel free to contact us.
When you register your product, you may be entitled to technical support.
General
information
[email protected]
Technical support [email protected]
Sales
[email protected]
© 2004 - 2007 Online Media Technologies Ltd., London, UK. All rights reserved.
http://www.avs4you.com/
AVS4YOU
Introduction
Technical Support
AVS4YOU programs do not require a professional knowledge of audio editing. If you experience any
problem or have a question, please refer to the AVS4YOU Programs Help . If you cannot find the
solution, please contact our support staff.
Note : only registered users receive technical support.
AVS4YOU staff provides several forms of automated customer support:
E-mail Support
You can submit your technical questions and problems via e-mail to [email protected]
.
Note : for more effective and quick resolving of the difficulties we will need the following
information:
Name and e-mail address used for registration
System parameters (CPU, hard drive space available, etc.)
Operating System
The information about the audio device connected to your computer (manufacturer and
model)
Detailed step by step describing of your action
Please do NOT attach any other files to your e-mail message unless specifically requested by
AVS4YOU.com support staff.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio CD Creator
Overview
AVS Audio CD Creator is a wizard-styled application, which allows you to burn audio CDs from audio
files of the most common formats such as MP3, WAV, OGG and others. Easy and understandable
interface of AVS Audio CD Creator makes working with the program simple and convenient.
Following detailed step-by-step instructions of the program you will be able to make a combined
playlist of your favorite music or other audio and burn audio CD. For the most comfortable usage of
the application you can play the selected files directly from AVS Audio CD Creator to make sure
you've chosen the correct files. Also there is an opportunity to verify already written files.
To start AVS Audio CD Creator go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU ->
Audio -> AVS Audio CD Creator .
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio CD Creator
Step 1: Adding Files and Burning Audio CD
AVS Audio CD Creator wizard starts with the Step 1 window. Please select the CD-RW drive you are
going to use for audio CD creation. If you have only one CD-RW drive at your computer, it'll be chosen
by default.
After that you should create a list of audio tracks you want to burn onto a CD clicking the Add file(s)
button:
To add or remove files from the list please use the Add file(s) and Remove file(s) buttons
accordingly. If you right click the list of audio tracks you can find an additional menu, which allows you
to perform the following operations:
Operation
Keyboard Shortcut
Add file(s)...
Ins
Delete file(s)
Del
Select all
Ctrl+A
Invert selection
Ctrl+I
You can also change the files order using the Track up and Track down buttons.
It is possible to see the size of added files with the help of Size Control Bar :
To make sure you've chosen the correct file you can play it directly from AVS Audio CD Creator . To
do that highlight the necessary file in the file list and use the following buttons:
To playback the selected file
To pause the selected file
To stop the selected file
To go to the previous track
To go to the next track
It is also possible to rewind or fast-forward the selected file using Seeking Bar . Just click the
Seeking Bar cursor
and drag it.
The writing process will start after clicking Burn>> button. You can visually judge the completion of
writing process.
You can also cancel writing process clicking the Cancel button.
Note : it's impossible to cancel writing during Buffer filling or Closing Track operation.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio CD Grabber
Overview
AVS Audio CD Grabber is designed for grabbing audio tracks from CDs and saving them to your hard
drive selecting the output file formats according to your wish. The interface of this application is also
wizard-styled, so one can use AVS Audio CD Grabber without any difficulties.
Besides simple grabbing audio tracks from audio CDs AVS Audio CD Grabber lets you receive
information from the source of CDDB, edit it, select the specific details you want to include in the
output file name, such as Track Number , Song Title , Artist or Album . You can also add the
information to your output file, for example Title , Artist , Album or Comment .
To start AVS Audio CD Grabber go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU ->
Audio -> AVS Audio CD Grabber .
AVS4YOU
Step 1: Getting Started
At Step 1 the application will ask you to select the CD drive where the audio disc is located. If you
have only one CD drive in your computer, it'll be chosen by default.
You can see a list of tracks at the audio CD. All of the available tracks will be selected automatically for
grabbing, but in case you don't want any of them to be included into the list, simply uncheck the
unnecessary track. If you right click the the list of audio tracks you can find an additional menu, which
allows you to Select all tracks (Ctrl+A) or Invert selection (Ctrl+I).
To make sure you've selected the correct tracks you can play the highlighted track directly from AVS
Audio CD Grabber . For that please use the following buttons:
To play the selected file
It is also possible to rewind or fast-forward the highlighted file using Seeking Bar . Just click the
Seeking Bar cursor
and drag it.
When copying files to your hard drive AVS Audio CD Grabber will name the grabbed files. You can
specify the details you want to include in the file name, such as Track number , Song Title , Artist
and Album . Click the Options button at the bottom of the window and File Name Options window
will appear.
Use Move Up
and Move Down
buttons to change the order of file name details. Remove the
unnecessary details just unchecking them. It is also possible to select a Separator for file name
details from the Separator list. It could be Space , Dash , Dot , Underline , Space Dash Space or
None . You can see the preview of a file name at the bottom of File Name Options window.
Using the CDDB options tab you can specify the source of CDDB information:
In this window you can replace, add or delete servers using the Replace , Add or Delete buttons
accordingly. You can also move servers up and down with the Move Up
and Move Down
buttons. You can also specify the Proxy , User Name , Port and TimeOut details if you would like
to. Click the OK button to save changes and close the Servers window.
After you finished, please click the Next>> button.
AVS4YOU
Step 2: Setting Output File Parameters
At Step 2 AVS Audio CD Grabber will suggest that you set the following output file parameters:
File format
Grab mode
File format
There are nine available output file formats in AVS Audio CD Grabber . They are: MP3 , MP2 , MP+
, AAC , M4A , AMR , WAV , Ogg Vorbis , WMA . It is possible to change the default output file
format setting for MP3 and Ogg Vorbis formats by clicking the Advanced... button. See also:
Available MP3 Parameters Combinations
Available Ogg Vorbis Parameters Combinations
Grab mode
In the table below you can find the description of available grab modes:
Grab Mode
Burst Mode (Fast, no Error
Corrections)
Description
Optimal for fast grab.
No jitter correction. Normal block read at once.
Optimal for precision grab.
Synch Mode (Correct Jitter
Errors)
Synchronous by time marks reading (jitter errors correction).
Normal block read at once. AVS Audio CD Grabber reading
will be synchronized by time marks on the audio disc (In the
subchannel Q) during audio data grabbing. This will slow the
disc grabbing process but this method will guarantee more
exact grabbing - without samples loss. But the most of the
modern drives (created after about 2002 year) have such
synchronizing embedded. This feature is stream accurate.
Optimal for precision grab of old and very used CD.
Secure
Mode
(Double
Precision Error Correction)
Small block read at once. Every block reads and re-reads
before the number of the blocks, contains the same data will
be 50% or more from the number of read blocks. AVS Audio
CD Grabber reading will be synchronized by time marks on
the audio disc (In the subchannel Q) during audio data
grabbing. This will slow the disc grabbing process but this
method will guarantee more exact grabbing - without samples
loss. But the most of the modern drives (created after about
2002 year) have such synchronizing embedded. This feature is
stream accurate.
Optimal only for grab on unreadable (scratched) CD.
Paranoid
Mode
(Small
Blocks Read, drive cache
disable)
Very small block read at once. If CD drive caches audio data,
catch will be disable. Every block reads and re-reads before
the number of the blocks, contains the same data will be 50%
or more from the number of read blocks. AVS Audio CD
Grabber reading will be synchronized by time marks on the
audio disc (In the subchannel Q) during audio data grabbing.
This will slow the disc grabbing process but this method will
guarantee more exact grabbing - without samples loss. But
the most of the modern drives (created after about 2002
year) have such synchronizing embedded. This feature is
stream accurate.
After selection of the Grab Mode, please click the Next>> button.
AVS4YOU
Step 3: Setting Output File Location
AVS Audio CD Grabber will automatically locate all of the output files in My Music folder at your
computer. You will be able to change output file location at Step 3 . For that click the Change...
button and select desired output file location.
There is an opportunity to create Artist Name Folder and Album Name Folder in the folder
selected as Media location . In case you do not want to create any of them, just uncheck them
accordingly. You can see the resulting location of the grabbed files under Final Output Folder line. At
the bottom of the Step 3 window you can also find Free Space size available on the selected drive
and Required space , which is the size of free space needed for copying of the tracks selected at
Step 1 .
After you finished, please click the Start button.
AVS4YOU
Step 4: Grabbing Process
The grabbing process will start after clicking Start button. You can visually judge the completion of the
grabbing process with the Progress Bar .
You can also cancel grabbing process clicking the Cancel button. After grabbing process is complete
the program will offer you grabbing of another disc or closing the AVS Audio CD Grabber window.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio CD to iPod
Overview
AVS Audio CD to iPod is a software for transferring your favorite CDs collection to iPod. You will only
need to follow easy steps to rip audio CDs and convert them into audio formats supported by your
iPod. AVS Audio CD to iPod directly uploads audio files to iPod once the conversion is over. Up-todate iPod models are supported!
To start AVS Audio CD to iPod go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Audio
-> AVS Audio CD to iPod .
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio CD to iPod
Selecting Audio Tracks and Uploading to iPod
AVS Audio CD to iPod program starts with the following window:
Make sure that the iPod is connected to your computer. The Apple iTunes program should be closed so
that there were no conflict of two programs trying to get access to the same iPod at the same time.
If you connect your iPod to the personal computer after the program is started, you might need to click
the Refresh
button to see your iPod in the device list.
Note : if you have more than one iPod connected to your personal computer, you can select the
necessary one clicking the drop-down box under iPods: label.
You can also change the playlist name or select one of the existing playlists from the drop-down box
under the Set existing playlist or Enter new one label. To enter your own playlist name, select the
name of the current playlist with the mouse and type in a new name:
When you insert an audio CD you can see a list of tracks on it. All of the available tracks will be selected
automatically for grabbing:
To add or remove audio tracks from the list of the grabbed and uploaded files please check the box near
the track name. You can also rename the selected track so that it could be displayed in the iPod playlist
using the name you assign to it. If you right click the list of audio tracks you can find an additional menu,
which allows you to perform the following operations:
Operation
Description
Select all
Use this option to select all the audio tracks to be ripped and
uploaded to your Apple iPod.
Invert selection
Use this option to deselect all the selected audio tracks and
select all the deselected tracks.
Rename
Use this option to rename the selected audio track and give
it a name you want it to be displayed in your iPod playlist
(the program will automatically rename the track while
grabbing so that it will look like Artist - Track number Song title ).
You can get the information from the online database for your audio CD if there is some. Click the
Options button at the top of the window and CDDB options window will appear.
In this window you can specify the source of CDDB information, replace, add or delete servers using the
Replace , Add or Delete buttons accordingly. You can also change the order of the servers with the
Move Up
and Move Down
buttons. You can also specify the Proxy , User Name , Port and
TimeOut details if you would like to. Click the OK button to save changes and close the Servers
window.
You can select the quality of the resulting MP3 files. To do that select one of the available presets in the
Quality drop-down list. The files will be converted into the compatible format with the selected bitrate
automatically.
The size of added files can be seen and controlled with the help of Size Control Bar :
Note : the size of the added files will change automatically depending on the audio files quality
preset selected.
To make sure you've chosen the correct file you can play it directly from AVS Audio CD to iPod . To do
that highlight the necessary file in the file list and use the following buttons:
It is also possible to rewind or fast-forward the selected file using Seeking Bar . Just click the Seeking
Bar cursor
and drag it.
The conversion and uploading process will start after clicking the
You can visually judge the completion of the uploading process.
button.
You can also cancel the uploading process clicking the Cancel Upload button.
After the grabbing and uploading is done you will see the appropriate message:
Now you can grab more audio CDs or finish the work with AVS Audio CD to iPod .
Note : being connected to your personal computer your iPod will show the message of the type:
You can still disconnect your iPod from the computer, no data will be lost in case you haven't tried to
copy it to iPod using some other software.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Converter
Overview
AVS Audio Converter's purpose is converting audio files from one format to another according to
your wish and saving them to your hard drive. The following audio formats are available for
conversion: MP3 , MP2 , MP+ , Ogg Vorbis , AAC , M4A , AMR , WMA , WAV , ADPCM , GSM ,
VOX . The interface of this application is also wizard-styled, so one can use AVS Audio Converter
without any difficulties.
Converting audio files AVS Audio Converter user will find the opportunity to specify frequency,
number of channels, bitrate and other parameters of output files. You can also play the converted files
directly from AVS Audio Converter to make sure you've got the desired quality. Besides you'll be
able to modify text information in existing files and edit the output audio files using AVS Ringtone
Maker .
To start AVS Audio Converter go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Audio
-> AVS Audio Converter .
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Converter
AVS Audio Converter wizard starts with the Step 1 window:
You can create a list of files you want to convert using the following buttons:
Button
Shortcut
Description
Ins
Adds one or several files selected from the specific
folder to the file list.
Shift+Ins
Adds all of the audio files contained in the selected
folder.
Del
Removes the highlighted file from the file list.
Shift+Del
Removes all of the files from the file list.
If you right click the file list you can find an additional menu, which allows you to perform the
operations listed above, plus you can select all of the files by clicking the Select All or using the
Ctrl+A shortcut. You can include files of different formats and from various locations in the file list.
If you would like to see or edit the additional file information, click the File Info button.
Note : it is possible to play the selected file directly from AVS Audio Converter to make sure
you've chosen the correct file for conversion. For that highlight the necessary file in the file list and
use the following buttons:
To go to the previous
track
Seeking Bar cursor
and drag it.
After you finished, please click the Next>> button.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Converter
Step 2: Selecting Output File Format
At Step 2 AVS Audio Converter will suggest that you select the output file format and specify the
output file format parameters such as Sample rate (Frequency) , Bitrate and the number of
Channels .
Note : it is possible to specify Additional parameters for MP3 and Ogg Vorbis formats clicking
the Advanced button. You can find the detailed information about these settings in the Appendix
section. See also:
Available Ogg Vorbis Parameters Combinations
Note : some formats, such as AAC , M4A , WMA and WAV allow you to select more than two
channels. You can set up to eight channels depending on your desires and the devices that will be
used to playback the resulting audio files.
After the desired output format is selected please click the Next>> button.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Converter
Step 3: Selecting Output File Location and Converting Files
AVS Audio Converter will automatically locate all of the output files in My Music folder at your
computer. You will be able to change output file location at Step 3 . For that click the Change...
Under Output File Location line you can also find Free Space size available at the selected drive
and Required space , which is the size of free space needed for copying the converted files selected
at Step 1 of 4 . The Required free space depends on the selected format and its parameters.
You can also tic the Close the program after conversion is finished check-box, if you do not plan
to convert any other files afterwards. Nevertheless, it might be useful to leave this check-box
unmarked to be able to verify the resulting files or to edit them using the AVS Ringtone Maker
application.
When you are done, click the Start button to start the conversion process.
You can visually judge the completion of the conversion process with the Progress Bar .
You can also cancel converting process clicking the Stop button. After the conversion is complete AVS
Audio Converter will automatically take you to Step 4 window.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Converter
Step 4: Verifying Files
At this step you can verify converted files playing the highlighted file directly from AVS Audio
Converter.
To make sure you have obtained the desired quality of the output files you can play them using the
following buttons:
It is also possible to rewind or fast-forward the highlighted file using the Seeking Bar . Just click the
Seeking Bar cursor
and drag it.
Right clicking the the file list you can find an additional menu, which allows you to remove the selected
file, remove all of the converted files or select all of the files. For that choose the appropriate item in
the additional menu.
Note : in case the quality of output files does not satisfy you, there is an opportunity to go back to
Step 2 to set another output file format parameters and reconvert them.
You can also edit the resulting files with the help of the AVS Ringtone Maker program. To do that
click the Edit button to launch the application. See the appropriate section on how to work with AVS
Ringtone Maker .
AVS Audio Converter also allows you to modify extra text information in existing files. To do that
click the File Info button and the Information window will appear.
Here you can change all of the available details such as Track number , Title , Artist , Album , you
can add any Comment , specify Year and Genre .
After you finished, please click the Step 1 button to return to the first step or Close to finish the
work with the AVS Audio Converter program.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Overview
Welcome to AVS Audio Editor, powerful, full-featured and easy to use digital audio editor!
AVS Audio Editor will be of interest to professionals and amateurs, it is very easy to use, it lets you
perform a lot of operations without any difficulties. Once you get started you will be surprised to see
the variety of possibilities this program offers to you.
So what are the main functions of AVS Audio Editor ? Suppose you have recorded some audio data,
now you can do whatever you want with it: cut it, copy, paste, move - the same operations that you
can do with the text in a word processor. In case you make a mistake, press the Undo button, and try
again.
Friendly interface allows you to perform lots of different operations in an easy way. You can use it to
record your own music, voice or other audio material, edit it, mix it with other audio or musical parts,
add various effects to it, and master it so that you can burn it onto a CD, post it on the World Wide
Web, or e-mail it. AVS Audio Editor supports all major audio file formats.
AVS Audio Editor has a great variety of audio effects and tools: Delay , Flanger , Reverb , Phaser
, Amplify and lots of others.
You don't need to be a professional to use AVS Audio Editor , in case you need some help, refer to
this AVS4YOU Programs Help . If you cannot find something here or you need some explanation or
assistance, just e-mail us [email protected] or visit us on the World Wide Web
www.avs4you.com .
To start AVS Audio Editor go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Audio ->
AVS Audio Editor .
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Main Window
AVS Audio Editor main window comprises the following parts:
Main Menu
Top Toolbar
Effects and Filters Panel
Waveform Editing Space
Bottom Toolbar
Status Bar
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Main Menu
AVS Audio Editor can be operated with the help of Main Menu elements. Flexible system of menu
elements is a perfect tool for navigating and operating the application, controlling all the processes.
The Main Menu has the following structure:
Section
File
Item
Shortcut
New
Ctrl+N
Use it to create a new audio file.
Open
Ctrl+O
Use it to open an existing audio file. AVS Audio
Editor supports a wide variety of data types.
When you load a file for editing, AVS Audio
Editor converts the audio file type to its own
internal temporary file type for faster editing and
better handling of larger file sizes.
Save
Ctrl+S
Use it to save the active audio file with its current
file name and location.
Save as...
Shift+Ctrl+S
Use it to save the active audio file with a different
file name and/or location, in a different file format.
Save
selection as...
Description
Use it to save just the highlighted selection to a
file.
Exit
Use it to terminate the program and exit.
Use it to reverse the last command, such as
deletion, transforms, etc. If this option is not
available, it means there is no action to undo.
AVS Audio Editor allows virtually unlimited
(limited only by hard drive space) levels of Undo .
Undo
Ctrl+Z
Redo
Shift+Ctrl+Z
Delete
selection
Del
Use it to remove the current selection. The
deleted portion is not copied to the clipboard, and
can only be retrieved through Undo .
Trim to
selection
T
Use it to delete everything except the selected
portion (the exact opposite of Delete selection ).
Cut
Ctrl+X
Use it to remove the selection from the active file
and place it to the program internal clipboard.
Copy
Ctrl+C
Use it to copy the selection into the program
internal clipboard. It is used when you work with
one file within one copy of AVS Audio Editor .
Use it to repeat your last command or action.
Use it to copy the selection into the windows
clipboard so that it would be available to the other
Edit
Copy to
Edit
Copy to
clipboard
Paste
View
Record
opened programs. It is used when you work with
two or more copies of AVS Audio Editor and
want to copy/paste from one program to the
other.
Ctrl+V
Use it to insert the contents of the internal
clipboard at the insertion point or to replace any
selection.
Paste from
file...
Use it to insert the contents of an audio file at the
insertion point or to replace any selection.
Paste from
clipboard
Use it to insert the contents of the windows
clipboard at the insertion point or to replace any
selection.
Paste mix
Use it to insert the contents of the internal
clipboard at the insertion point mixing the audio
tracks.
Paste mix
from file...
Use it to insert the contents of tan audio file at the
insertion point mixing the audio tracks.
Delete Silence
Use it to to remove periods of silence between
words or other sounds.
Waveform
Use it to choose a Waveform View mode for
viewing data. It displays audio data in the familiar
sound wave format, where x-axis (vertical)
represents amplitude and y-axis (horizontal)
represents time.
Spectral
Use it to choose a Spectral View mode for
viewing data. It displays a waveform by its
frequency components, where x-axis is frequency,
and y-axis is time. This allows you to analyze your
audio data to see which frequencies are most
prevalent.
Envelope
Use it to choose a Envelope View mode for
viewing data. It displays audio data in the familiar
sound wave format, where x-axis (vertical)
represents amplitude and y-axis (horizontal)
represents time. It is the same as the Waveform
View but its boundaries are smoothed.
Start record
Use it to start recording from the device selected
in the Configure...
Stop record
Use it to stop the recording.
Configure...
Use it to select
parameters.
the
input
device
and
Amplify
Use it to apply the Amplify effect to the audio.
Fade In
Use it to apply the Fade In effect to the audio.
Fade Out
its
Use it to apply the Fade Out effect to the audio.
Normalize
Use it to apply the Normalize effect to the audio.
Compressor
Use it to apply the Compressor effect to the
audio.
Expander
Use it to apply the Expander effect to the audio.
Flanger
Use it to apply the Flanger effect to the audio.
Chorus
Use it to apply the Chorus effect to the audio.
Effects
Delay
Use it to apply the Delay effect to the audio.
Phaser
Use it to apply the Phaser effect to the audio.
Vibrato
Use it to apply the Vibrato effect to the audio.
Reverb
Use it to apply the Reverb effect to the audio.
Time Stretch
Use it to apply the Time Stretch effect to the
audio.
Pitch Shift
Use it to apply the Pitch Shift effect to the audio.
Reverse
Use it to apply the Reverse effect to the audio.
Invert
Use it to apply the Invert effect to the audio.
Wah Wah
Filters
Use it to apply the Wah Wah filter to the audio.
Notch
Use it to apply the Notch filter to the audio.
Noise
Remover
Use it to apply the Noise Remover filter to the
audio.
Use it to apply DirectX filters installed on your
system to the audio.
DXFilters
Help file
F1
Use it to open Help File Window.
Our Site
Use it to see the links to AVS4YOU.com on the
web.
Buy now
Use it to go online to the AVS4YOU.com web site
and use the online pay system to buy our
software.
Help
Registration...
Use it to register the program.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Top Toolbar
The Top Toolbar consists of the following buttons:
In the table below you will find the functions you can perform with the help of each button:
Button
Name
New...
Description
Use it to create a new audio file.
Open
Use it to open an existing audio file. AVS Audio Editor supports a wide
variety of data types. When you load a file for editing, AVS Audio Editor
converts the audio file type to its own internal temporary file type for faster
editing and better handling of larger file sizes.
Save
Use it to save the active audio file with its current file name and location.
Save as
Use it to save the active audio file with a different file name and/or
location, in a different file format.
Cut
Use it to remove the selection from the active file and place it to the
program internal clipboard.
Copy
Use it to copy the selection into the program internal clipboard. It is used
when you work with one file within one copy of AVS Audio Editor .
Paste
Use it to insert the contents of the internal clipboard at the insertion point
or to replace any selection.
Paste mix
Use it to insert the contents of the internal clipboard at the insertion point
mixing the audio tracks.
Delete
Use it to remove the current selection. The deleted portion is not copied to
the clipboard, and can only be retrieved through Undo .
Trim
Use it to delete everything except the selected portion (the exact opposite
of Delete selection ).
Undo
Use it to reverse the last command, such as deletion, transformation, etc.
If this option is not available, it means there is no action to undo. AVS
Audio Editor allows virtually unlimited (limited only by hard drive space)
levels of Undo .
Redo
Use it to repeat your last command or action.
Record
Use it to start recording from the device selected in the Configure... item
of the Main Menu .
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Effects and Filters Panel
Effects and Filters Panel is a universal easy-to-use tool to perform many different operations with
audio files. On this panel you will find plenty of different Effects and Filters .
You can create lots of presets for every Effects and Filters Panel option or use the already existing
ones.
Effect Panel Menu consists of the following submenus:
Amplitude Effects
Delay Effects
Special Effects
Filters
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Waveform Editing Space
Waveform Editing Space consists of four main parts:
Waveform Display
Display Range Bar
Amplitude Ruler
Time Ruler
Waveform Display
Waveform Display is the area where you view your audio material. There are many mouse
operations available in the Waveform Display to select data:
Left-click anywhere in the waveform and you will change the position of the playback cursor.
With stereo or multichannel waveforms, use the Control key of the keyboard together with
the mouse pointer (the cursor will acquire L or R letter - L f , R f , C f , LFE , Lr and R r for six
channel audio) and left-click to enable only the necessary channel for editing (the disabled
channels will gray-out), another left-click within the disabled channel will re-enable it.
Left-click and drag in the waveform display to make a selection.
Double left-click in the waveform display to select the entire visible portion of the waveform
(when zoomed in this does not select unseen areas which may be to the right or left).
[Back to the Top ]
Display Range Bar
The Display Range Bar on the top of the Waveform Display window indicates which part of the
entire waveform is currently being viewed in the Waveform Display . When zooming in or out, this
bar will get smaller or larger, as the portion being viewed changes with respect to the entire waveform
or session.
Left-click (the mouse cursor should change to a hand) and drag the bar to scroll forward or backward
in time. As with dragging in the Time Ruler , the zoom level is retained, only the viewing range is
altered.
[Back to the Top ]
Amplitude Ruler
Amplitude Ruler measures the relative volume of audio data. The ruler displays the volume
of the audio in Decibels .
Time Ruler
Time Ruler shows the current location at any point in the waveform display. The
time markings are subdivided into more detail when zoomed in, and less detail when
zoomed out.
Left-click (the mouse cursor should change to a hand) and drag the ruler to scroll
forward or backward in time. As with dragging in the Display Range Bar , the zoom
level is retained, only the viewing range is altered.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Bottom Toolbar
Bottom Toolbar consists of 3 main parts:
Audio player and zooming toolbar
Current position field
Time display
Audio Player and Zooming Toolbar consists of the following buttons:
In the table below you will find the functions you can perform with the help of each button:
Button
Name
Description
Play
Starts playback of the current selection, or of the current audio file from
either the left edge of the selection, or from the beginning of the file, to
either the right edge of the selection or to the end of the file.
Play Loop
Plays the current audio file or selection repeatedly, looping it until the
Stop button is pressed.
Play to
End
Starts playback of the current selection, or of the current audio file from
either the left edge of the selection, or from the beginning of the file, to
the end of the file.
Stop
Pause
Stops playback.
Pauses playback.
Vertical
Zoom In
Increases the vertical resolution scale of the waveform and Amplitude
Ruler .
Zoom In
Zooms in on the center of the current audio file window. After zooming,
use the Time Ruler to scroll to the desired location.
Zoom Out
Zooms out from the current location.
Full Zoom
Zooms all the way out to fit the entire waveform or session in the display
window.
Vertical
Zoom Out
Decreases the vertical resolution scale of the waveform and Amplitude
Ruler .
[Back to the Top ]
Current Position Field displays the current position of the active window cursor:
[Back to the Top ]
Time Display consists of 6 fields:
These fields display start, end, and length information for the visible portion of the current waveform
or session, as well as for the currently selected range. The top row of fields shows the selection time,
and the bottom row the viewing range.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Status Bar
Status Bar displays information relating to the file properties and free resources.
In the left part of the bar you can see information on the format of the current waveform or session,
with sample rate, the number of channels and bitrate properties. In the right part of the bar you can
see the duration of the audio.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
To speed up your editing AVS Audio Editor offers you a wide variety of keyboard shortcuts. Use the
table below to learn how to edit audio data in a fast and easy way.
Keyboard
Controls
File Controls
Shortcut
Key
Ctrl+N
Creates a new, initially blank file
Ctrl+O
Opens an existing waveform
Ctrl+S
Saves the current waveform to disk
Shift+Ctrl+S
Editing
Controls
Zoom
Controls
Miscellaneous
Description
Saves the active audio file with a different file name and/or
location, in a different file format.
Ctrl+A
Selects Entire Waveform
Ctrl+Z
Undo, reverses the last command or action
Shift+Ctrl+Z
Redo, repeats the last command or action
Ctrl+X
Cuts a waveform to internal clipboard
Ctrl+C
Copies a selection to internal clipboard
Ctrl+V
Pastes from internal clipboard
T
Trims to selection
Del
Deletes selection
Ctrl+Up
Arrow
Ctrl+Down
Arrow
F1
Zooms In
Zooms Out
Brings up the current Help File
Mouse Operations
Left click and drag a waveform to make a selection.
Double left-click a waveform to select the entire visible portion of the waveform (when zoomed in this
does not select unseen areas which may be to the right or left).
Left-click anywhere in the waveform and you will change the position of the playback cursor.
With stereo or multichannel waveforms, use the Control key of the keyboard together with the mouse
pointer (the cursor will acquire L or R letter - L f , R f , C f , LFE , L r and R r for six channel audio) and
left-click to enable only the necessary channel for editing (the disabled channels will gray-out), another
left-click within the disabled channel will re-enable it.
Left-click (the mouse cursor should change to a hand) and drag the Display Range Bar to scroll
forward or backward in time.
Click and drag on the Time Ruler to scroll horizontally.
Rest mouse over any toolbar button to get an explanation of the button's function.
Double-click title bar to Maximize/Restore .
Wheel mouse specific
Roll the mouse wheel forward to zoom in. Roll the mouse wheel backwards to zoom out.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Playing and Recording
In AVS Audio Editor you can operate Play and Record as well as other transport functions like you
do on "real-world" tape recorders. Audio Player Toolbar is situated in the left bottom corner of the
Main Window .
- Click Play to play the portion of the waveform that is currently being viewed, or the portion
that is highlighted.
- Click Pause to pause the playback.
- Click Stop to end waveform playback.
- Click Record on the Top Toolbar to start recording at the current insertion point. Any waveform
data after that will be recorded over.
Note : the Record button will change into Stop when you start the recording process. Just press
it to stop the recording and return to the editing.
You can configure your input devices right from the AVS Audio Editor , without need to go to the
windows Control Panel . To do that you can select the Configure item in the Main Menu . The form
that will let you change the device settings will appear:
Here you can:
1. select the device that will be used for sound recording. Press the drop-down combo-box and
select the necessary device from the list, if you have more than one input device installed on
your computer;
2. select the input jack active on the device. The following input jacks might be available
depending on your input device configuration:
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mono Mix - allows you to record the sound from a program player or a hardware tuner
connected to your personal computer in mono mode;
Stereo Mix - allows you to record the sound from a program player or a hardware
tuner connected to your personal computer in stereo mode;
SPDIF - allows you to record the sound from any external device connected to the
digital input jack of your computer sound card;
Aux - allows you to record the sound from any external device connected to the Aux
(auxiliary) input of your computer sound card;
CD Player - allows you to record the sound from a laser audio disc in you computer
CD/DVD-ROM drive;
Line In - allows you to record the sound from any external device connected to the
Line In input of your computer sound card;
Microphone - allows you to record the sound from a microphone connected to the
Microphone input of your computer sound card;
Phone Line - allows you to record the sound from an external device connected to the
Phone Line input of your computer sound card;
set the device Balance - the difference of the sound volume between the right and the left
channel;
set the input device Gain - the loudness of the device input;
test the device pressing the Test button to make sure that the device is in working order and
the Balance and Gain are set correctly;
for some devices it is also possible to change some advanced settings clicking the
Advanced... button. The Advanced Properties window will pop up to let you configure the
advanced device settings. You should consult your hardware documentation for more details
on these settings:
After you select all the settings for your input device you can click the OK button to accept the
changes made and go on recording the sound from the selected and configured device.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Zooming
Use the Horizontal Zoom buttons, that you can find on Zooming Toolbar at the bottom of the Main
Window , to get more or less detailed view of the current waveform. You can zoom all the way down
to the individual samples of a waveform, which are displayed as small squares on a line (the line itself
represents an analog interpretation of the digital data).
In the table below you will find the description of each button:
Button
Name
Description
Zoom In
Zooms in on the center of the current audio file window. After zooming,
use the Time Ruler to scroll to the desired location.
Zoom Out
Zooms out from the current location.
Full Zoom
Zooms all the way out to fit the entire waveform or session in the display
window.
The Vertical Zoom buttons increase or decrease the vertical scale in the Amplitude ruler . You can
zoom way in to get fine detail on the amplitude of your waveform.
In the table below you will find the description of each button:
Button
Name
Description
Vertical
Zoom in
Increases the vertical resolution scale of the waveform and Amplitude
Ruler .
Vertical
Zoom Out
Decreases the vertical resolution scale of the waveform and Amplitude
Ruler .
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Saving in Different Formats
You can change the format of the edited file when you save it. It can be done to reduce the size of the
audio file, to change the number of the channels or to make it possible to playback the file using
mobile devices, such as mobile phones, portable players, etc.
To change the file format and save it using this selected format, you can press the Save as... button
of the Top Toolbar or select the Save as... item of the Main Menu . The following window will open:
Here you can select the output file format and specify the output file format parameters such as
Sample rate (Frequency) , Bitrate and the number of Channels .
Note : it is possible to specify Advanced MP3 parameters clicking the appropriate button. You
can find the detailed information about these settings in the Appendix section. See also:
After you select all the parameters, click the Save button to accept the changes and save the audio file
or Close to discard the changes and close this window.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Editing Options
The main audio editing options of the AVS Audio Editor include:
Amplitude effects
Delay effects
Special effects
Filters
All of them are available through either the Edit item of the Main Menu or on the Effects and Filters
Panel .
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Amplitude Effects
Using these Effects and Filters Panel options you can increase or decrease the volume of a
waveform or selection. The following Amplitude Effects are available:
Amplify
Fade In
Fade Out
Normalize
Compressor
Expander
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Amplify
Amplify effect is used to increase or decrease the amplification of the sound in the media file. If you
select a part of the file with the mouse, this effect will amplify or attenuate this exact part of the file.
Otherwise the sound of the whole file will be amplified or diminished.
To apply the effect you should do the following:
1. Add the audio file to the Waveform Editing Space .
2. Select a part of the file you would like to apply the effect to or leave it unselected to apply the
effect to the whole file.
3. Click the Amplify effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
4. Adjust the effect parameters or select one of the available presets from the list.
Note : if you change the effect settings, you can save them as a preset to be able to use
them afterwards.
5. Click the Preview button to make sure that the changes are correct.
6. Click the OK button to return to the audio file editing.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Fade In and Fade Out
Use the Fade In effect to fade in the sound in the media file. If you select a part of the file with the
mouse, this effect will fade in the sound of this exact part of the file. Otherwise the sound of the
beginning of the file will be faded in.
Use the Fade Out effect to fade out the sound in the media file. If you select a part of the file with the
mouse, this effect will fade out the sound of this exact part of the file. Otherwise the sound of the end
of the file will be faded out.
3. Click the Fade in or Fade out effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Normalize
Use this effect to achieve the greatest amount of amplification that will not result in clipping. If you
select a part of the file with the mouse, this effect will amplify the highlighted selection to the
percentage of the maximum level. Otherwise the sound of the whole file will be normalized.
3. Click the Normalize effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Compressor
Compressor effect is used to reduce the dynamic range of an audio signal. For example, compressors
can be used to eliminate the variations in the peaks of an electric bass signal by clamping them to a
constant level (thus providing an even, solid bass line.) Compressors can also be useful in
compensating for the wide variations in the level of a signal produced by a singer who moves
frequently or has an erratic dynamic range.
3. Click the Compressor effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Expander
Expander effect is used to expand the dynamic range of an audio signal. Expander boosts the highlevel signals and attenuates low-level signals. If you select a part of the file with the mouse, this effect
will be applied to this exact part of the file. Otherwise the sound of the whole file will be altered.
3. Click the Expander effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Delay Effects
Using this Effects and Filters Panel option you can apply different effects to your audio. The
following Delay Effects are available:
Flanger
Chorus
Delay
Phaser
Vibrato
Reverb
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Flanger
The Flanger effect is one of the other elaborated audio effects that is created by mixing a signal with a
slightly delayed copy of itself, where the length of the delay is constantly changing. With the Flanger
filter you can "shape" the sound through controlling how much delayed signal is added to the original.
Use it if you want to create the "whooshing" sound effect in some fragment of your audio track.
Flanger is a special case of the Chorus effect: it is created in the same way that Chorus is created.
In days gone by, flanging used to be created by sound engineers who put their finger onto the tape
reel's flange, thus slowing it down. Two identical recordings are played back simultaneously, and one is
slowed down to give the flanging effect.
Flanger gives a "whooshing" sound, like the sound is pulsating. It is essentially an exaggerated
Chorus .
3. Click the Flanger effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Chorus
The Chorus effect allows you to make your audio sound fuller. It can make a single instrument sound
like there are actually several instruments being played. It adds some thickness to the sound, and can
be described as 'lush' or 'rich'.
The Chorus effect is so named because it makes the recording of a vocal track sound like it was sung
by two or more people singing in chorus. This is achieved by adding a single delayed signal (echo) to
the original input.
The Chorus differs from the Flanger in only a couple of ways. One difference is the amount of delay
that is used. The delay times in a Chorus are larger than in a Flanger . This longer delay doesn't
produce the characteristic sweeping sound of the Flanger . The Chorus also differs from the Flanger
in that there is generally no feedback used.
3. Click the Chorus effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Delay
The Delay effect allows you to create an echo effect of your audio track by replaying the sounds of the
selected audio portion after a certain period of time. Applying of this filter can bring life to dull mixes,
widen and fill out your instrument's sound.
You can use this function to create single echoes, as well as a number of other effects. Delays of 35
milliseconds (ms) or more will be perceived as discrete echoes, while those falling within the 35-15 ms
range can be used to create a simple chorus or flanging effect. (These effects will not be as effective as
the actual Chorus or Flanger effects, as the delay settings will be fixed and will not change over
time).
3. Click the Delay effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Phaser
The Phaser filter makes the selected portion of your audio thinner or fuller through mixing the
automatically filtered and unfiltered audio signals. You can apply this filter to give a "synthesized" or
electronic effect to natural sounds.
The Phaser achieves its distinctive sound by creating one or more notches in the frequency domain
that eliminate sounds at the notch frequencies.
Phasing is very similar to flanging. If two signals that are identical, but out of phase, are added
together, then the result is that they will cancel each other out. If, however, they are partially out of
phase, then partial cancellations, and partial enhancements occur. This leads to the phasing effect.
3. Click the Phaser effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Vibrato
Vibrato equals to a cyclical changing of a certain frequency of the input signal. If you select a part of
the file with the mouse, the Vibrato effect will be applied to this exact part of the file. Otherwise whole
file will be changed.
3. Click the Vibrato effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Reverb
The Reverberation filter helps you apply the particular effect when the sound stops but the
reflections continue, decreasing in amplitude, until they can no longer be heard.
You can use this function to set Reverb effect that is used to simulate acoustic space, and consists of
both early reflections and echoes that are so closely spaced that they are perceived as a single fading
sound. Reverb is different from the basic echo function in that the delays are not repeated at regularly
spaced intervals. Reverb function can create a wide range of high-quality reverb effects.
It is the sound you hear in a room with hard surfaces where sound bounces around the room for a
while after the initial sound stops. Reverb is used to simulate the acoustical effect of rooms and
enclosed buildings. In a room, for instance, sound is reflected off the walls, the ceiling and the floor.
The sound heard at any given time is the sum of the sound from the source, as well as the reflected
sound. An impulse (such a hand clap) will decay exponentially.
3. Click the Reverb effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Special Effects
Using this Effects and Filters Panel option you can apply different effects to your audio. The
following Special Effects are available:
Time Stretch
Pitch Shift
Reverse
Invert
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Time Stretch
The Time Stretch effect allows to change the tempo, but keep the pitch the same throughout. If you
select a part of the file with the mouse, this effect will change the tempo of this exact part of the file.
Otherwise the tempo of the whole file will be changed.
3. Click the Time Stretch effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Pitch Shift
The Pitch Shift effect shifts the frequency spectrum of the input signal. It can be used to disguise a
person's voice, or make the voice sound like that of the "chipmunks", through to "Darth Vader". It is
also used to create harmony in lead passages, although it is an "unintelligent" harmonizer.
3. Click the Pitch Shift effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Reverse
With the help of this function you can make a selection play backwards by reversing the order of its
samples. It is useful for creating special effects.
If you select a part of the file with the mouse, this effect will applied to this exact part of the file.
Otherwise the sound of the whole file will be changed.
3. Click the Reverse effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Invert
With the help of this function you can simply invert the samples, so that all positive offsets are
negative and all negative offsets are positive. Inverting does not produce an audible effect, but it can
be useful in lining up amplitude curves when creating loops, or pasting. On stereo waveforms, both
channels are inverted.
If you select a part of the file with the mouse, this effect will be applied to this exact part of the file.
Otherwise the sound of the whole file will be altered.
3. Click the Invert effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Filters
Using this Effects and Filters Panel option you can apply different filters to your audio. The following
Filters are available:
Wah Wah
Notch
Noise Remover
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
WahWah
WahWah is the sound of altering the resonance of musical notes to extend expressiveness that makes
the audio sound just like that guitar sound so popular in the 1970's. This effect uses a moving
bandpass filter to create its sound, sounding much like a human voice saying the syllable 'wah' .
The WahWah effect automatically adjusts the phase of the left and right channels when given a
stereo recording, so that the effect seems to travel across the speakers.
3. Click the WahWah effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Notch
The Notch filter cuts specified frequency from audio data. If you select a part of the file with the
mouse, this effect will be applied to this exact part of the file. Otherwise the sound of the whole file will
be affected.
3. Click the Notch effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Noise Remover
The Noise Remover effects lets the user attenuate the noise sound of a certain frequency based on
the Fast Fourier Transformation. If you select a part of the file with the mouse, this effect will be
applied to this exact part of the file. Otherwise the sound of the whole file will be altered.
3. Click the Noise Remover effect button on the Effects and Filters Panel .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Editor
Using DirectX Filters
AVS Audio Editor supports DirectX audio plug-ins and filters installed on your computer. DirectX is a
development platform designed by Microsoft which provides an open standard for multimedia plug-ins.
DSP modules, and other audio tools based on this standard, can be used by any application that
supports the DirectX architecture.
With the help of DirectX plug-ins you can easily extend the range of powerful effects available in AVS
Audio Editor .
In case you do not have DirectX installed on your computer, you can download it from Microsoft web
site.
DirectX plug-ins are very easy to use. To enable any of them just highlight an area to process and
choose a filter from DXFilters item of the Main Menu .
Most DirectX plug-ins have there own settings dialog where you can configure the parameters of the
effect. Some plug-ins may support real-time preview. But, of course, if you have some problems you
will need to consult the documentation provided by the plug-in manufacturer.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Recorder
Overview
AVS Audio Recorder is a wizard-styled application, which allows you to record your own music, voice
or other audio files of such popular formats as MP3 , MP2 , MP+ , AAC , M4A , AMR , WMA , WAV
, ADPCM . Just follow detailed step-by-step instructions of the program to create high-quality
recordings.
Besides basic recording AVS Audio Recorder allows you to add the information to your output file
such as Title , Artist , Album and Comment . For the most comfortable usage of the application you
can play the recorded files directly from AVS Audio Recorder to make sure you've got the desired
quality.
To start AVS Audio Recorder go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Audio > AVS Audio Recorder .
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Recorder
AVS Audio Recorder wizard starts with the Step 1 of 2 window. Please select the recording device
you are going to use for recording. You can configure your input devices right from the AVS Audio
Recorder , without need to go to the windows Control Panel . You can do that using the Device and
Input drop-down lists in the AVS Audio Recorder main window:
You can:
your computer;
CD/DVD-ROM drive;
3. for some devices it is also possible to change some advanced settings clicking the
on this settings:
4. test the device pressing the Test device button to make sure that the device is in working
order:
You can visually judge the sound feedback during testing process. To stop testing click the Stop Test
button.
After that you can select the output file format and specify the output file format parameters such as
Sample rate (Frequency) , Bitrate and the number of Channels :
Note : it is possible to specify Advanced MP3 parameters clicking the appropriate button. You
can find the detailed information about these settings in the Appendix section. See also:
After the desired output format is selected please click the Next>> button.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio Recorder
Step 2: Recording and Verifying Files
AVS Audio Recorder will automatically locate all of the output files in My Music folder at your
computer. You will be able to change output file location at Step 2 . To do that click the Change...
Note : you can split the recorded file into several parts. AVS Audio Recorder will suggest that
you split your recordings by time. For example, if you want the recorded file to be split into several
parts and you want each of these parts to be 60 minutes long, you should set the parameters as
shown in the picture below:
Warning! If you don't want to split the output file, make sure that Split file check-box is
unchecked!
You can also select between auto and manual gain control. If you prefer to change the volume of the
recording manually, please uncheck the Auto Gain Control check-box and use the Gain slider to
select the gain level. Otherwise you can let the program automatically control the sound level during
recording.
After that you can start recoding with the recording parameters you've set previously. To do that
simply press the Record button and the recording will start:
To stop or pause recording use the Stop or Pause buttons accordingly. You can visually judge the
sound feedback during testing process with the help of graphic representation area.
When the recording is done you can playback the recorded file or files to make sure you've got the
desired quality.
Please use the following buttons to verify your file:
To playback the selected
file
Ringtone Maker .
AVS Audio Recorder also allows you to modify extra text information in existing files. To do that click
the File Info button and the Information window will appear.
After you finished, please click the Step 1 button to return to the first step or Close to finish the
work with the AVS Audio Recorder program.
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio to iPod
Overview
AVS Audio to iPod is a software for transferring your favorite audio files to iPod. You will only need to
follow easy steps to convert your music files of all the major today formats into audio formats
supported by your iPod. AVS Audio to iPod directly uploads audio files to iPod once the conversion is
over. Up-to-date iPod models are supported!
To start AVS Audio to iPod go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Audio ->
AVS Audio to iPod .
AVS4YOU
AVS Audio to iPod
Adding Audio Files and Uploading to iPod
AVS Audio to iPod program starts with the following window:
Make sure that the iPod is connected to your computer. The Apple iTunes program should be closed so
that there were no conflict of two programs trying to get access to the same iPod at the same time.
If you connect your iPod to the personal computer after the program is started, you might need to click
the Refresh
button to see your iPod in the device list.
Note : if you have more than one iPod connected to your personal computer, you can select the
necessary one clicking the drop-down box under Your iPod label.
You can also change the playlist name or select one of the existing playlists from the drop-down box
under the Playlist name label. To enter your own playlist name, select the name of the current playlist
with the mouse and type in a new name:
Note : Note, that if you want to delete one or several letters in the playlist name, you will need to
use the Backspace button rather than Delete . The Delete button is used to remove the audio files
from the list.
After that you should create a list of audio tracks you want to upload to your iPod. To do that, click the
Add
button and select the audio files from your hard disk drive:
To add or remove files from the list please use the Add
and Remove
buttons accordingly. If you right click the list of audio tracks you can find an additional menu, which
allows you to perform the following operations:
Operation
Add file(s)...
Add folder
Delete file(s)
Remove all
File info
Keyboard
Shortcut
Description
Ins
Use this option to add one or more audio files to
the list of files to be uploaded to your iPod.
Shift+Ins
Use this option to add folder containing audio files
to the list of files to be uploaded to your iPod.
Del
Use this option to delete one or more selected files
from the list of files to be uploaded to your iPod.
Shift+Del
Use this option to remove all the files from the list
of files to be uploaded to your iPod.
Use this option to open the window that will allow
you to view and modify the ID3v1/2 tags of your
audio files.
If you select the last option, the following window will be opened:
Here you can view and change all the information, concerning the audio track that will be displayed in
the iPod playlist.
You can select to reconvert the MP3 files so that all the files could have the same quality (bitrate). To do
that check the Reconvert MP3 check-box and select one of the available presets. The files that are not
compatible with the iPod will be reconverted into the compatible format automatically.
The size of added files can be seen and controlled with the help of Size Control Bar :
Note : the size of the added files will change automatically depending on the audio files quality
preset selected.
To make sure you've chosen the correct file you can play it directly from AVS Audio to iPod . To do
that highlight the necessary file in the file list and use the following buttons:
It is also possible to rewind or fast-forward the selected file using Seeking Bar . Just click the Seeking
Bar cursor
and drag it.
The uploading process will start after clicking the
button. You can visually
judge the completion of the uploading process.
You can also cancel the uploading process clicking the Cancel Upload button.
After the uploading is done you will see the appropriate message:
Now you can upload more audio files or finish the work with AVS Audio to iPod .
AVS4YOU
AVS Capture Wizard
Overview
AVS Capture Wizard is a special separate utility that enables you to capture video from any video
capture device connected to your computer. You can transfer video from DV and VHS cameras and
recorders to hard drive and create movie DVDs, capture video from TV tuners, DVB cards and WEB
cameras, encode video directly to MPEG4 instead of native hardware uncompressed video format and
save free space on your computer.
To capture video please launch AVS Capture Wizard by clicking the corresponding icon on your
desktop. After that AVS Capture Wizard application will start. Depending on video capture device its
interface will look differently.
© 2006 Online Media Technologies Ltd., London, UK. All rights reserved.
AVS4YOU
AVS Capture Wizard
Step 1: Selecting Device and Setting Parameters
As has been mentioned before, the wizard window will look differently depending on the capture device
used. For example, if you are using a TV tuner as capture device, you should set the following
parameters for video capturing at Step 1 :
1. Select Video Device from the list of the available video devices. It is the list of devices
available in the system.
Note : it's possible to change video device parameters by clicking the Configure button.
2. Set Video Input . It will define the type of the input that receives the video signal.
3. Set Video Standard from the list of available video standards. Sometimes it can be
necessary to change this setting so that the video picture became colored instead of blackand-white.
4. Select the Output size in the drop-down combo box.
Note : you can change the Frame Rate clicking the appropriate button.
5. To modify audio parameters, first select Audio Device or mute it checking the appropriate
check-box and select Audio Input and the output Audio Format .
6. You can also adjust Audio input device parameters by clicking the Configure button
located near Audio Device Parameters box.
After you finished please click the Next>> button to proceed to the second step.
AVS4YOU
AVS Capture Wizard
Step 2: Output File Format Settings
At Step 2 of AVS Capture Wizard you should specify output file format settings.
Note : you can select between the several types of format: XviD (MPEG4) or DVD (MPEG2), and
set the parameters of each format in the drop-down boxes below. In case you select XviD (MPEG4)
video format you can modify video codec parameters clicking the Advanced... button.
You can also change the audio track settings of the output video file.
After it, please click the Next>> button to go to step 3.
AVS4YOU
AVS Capture Wizard
Step 3: Output File Name and Location
At the next step of AVS Capture Wizard you should enter the file name for your saved movie and set
the location. Select Browse... in the Path drop-down box to open the standard windows explorer
menu and select the movie location. At this step you can also split the output file by size or by time.
Besides all, it's possible to set start/stop capture parameters for your convenience.
After you done, click the Next>> button.
AVS4YOU
AVS Capture Wizard
Step 4: Capturing Video
You can find the capturing information at Step 4 . To start/pause/stop capturing please use the
appropriate buttons. You can visually judge the capturing process with the help of Preview . To switch
the sound off or back on use the Mute check-box.
After you record all the necessary video, click the Next>> button to proceed to the final step.
AVS4YOU
AVS Capture Wizard
Step 5: Preview the Result
After capturing process is complete, you get to the final step where you can preview and check the
captured material by clicking the Play button located under preview window.
Note : you can rename, remove the captured files and burn them to an optical disc if you need to.
To do it, just click Rename , Remove , Burn to disc buttons at the bottom of the AVS Capture
Wizard Step 5 window.
After it click the Close button to finish the work with AVS Capture Wizard .
AVS4YOU
AVS Capture Wizard
Configuring Capture Device
You can configure your capture devices to better handle the capturing process. To adjust the
necessary video properties please press the Configure... button on the AVS Capture Wizard
window. In the opened window you can manually set the audio parameters required:
1.
2.
3.
4.
click the Default button,
left-click and move the slide forward or backward the line of the chosen property,
select if available the necessary Flicker and Light Condition parameters.
press the Apply button and after it the OK button.
Note : you can also enable color by checking the appropriate box in the Properties
window.
You can also select configure options for your audio data:
1. in the drop-down menu of the Audio Device parameters box located in the AVS Capture
Wizard window choose the corresponding parameter of audio device you use.
2. select audio input and audio format in the appropriate boxes,
3. you can also mute the audio data by checking the Mute box,
4. click the Configure... button on the same window,
5. in the opened new window you will see the available mixer properties for the selected Audio
Device parameter.
5.
Note : the number of properties available for configuring depends on the Audio Device you use.
You can also use the alternative way of configuring your audio data:
1. double-click the Volume icon at the rightside bottom of the desktop,
2. in the opened window Volume Control select the box Options >> Properties ,
by clicking the selected box you will open a new window - Properties where you can adjust
the necessary volume parameters by checking the appropriate boxes on the same window.
After selection click the Ok button and close the window.
Note : the windows that are shown above will look differently depending on the capture
device used, sound card installed on the computer and the operation system used.
AVS4YOU
AVS Clone CD
Overview
AVS Clone CD is a wizard-styled application, which allows you to copy the information from a CD to
another CD or create CD images to be able to burn a CD later. You can also create CDs using CD
images located at your hard disk drive. With this little and simple program you can copy one CD to
another in two easy steps.
The opportunity to save CD images allows you to keep them at your hard disk drive and burn CDs
later.
To start AVS Clone CD go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Burning ->
AVS Clone CD .
AVS4YOU
AVS Clone CD
AVS Clone CD wizard starts with the Step 1 window:
Please select the source CD-drive that you are going to copy from.
Note : in the source drive drop-down combo box a path to any CD image located at your hard
drive could be specified. After that you should set the destination drive, which also could be a CDdrive as well as a CD image at your hard drive. We'd like to draw your attention to the fact that in
case your destination drive is HDD, AVS Clone CD will let you select the destination folder using
the common windows explorer.
If you clone a CD having only one disc drive, a temporary image on your computer HDD will be created
to let you record the resulting disc using the same disc drive. In this case please make sure that you
have enough free hard drive disk space available for the created temporary disc image. Its size could
be up to 800 megabytes.
You can see that there is an opportunity to ignore reading CD sectors errors at the bottom of Step 1
window. This can be done to restore a damaged audio CD, for instance.
After you finished please click the Start>> button.
AVS4YOU
AVS Clone CD
Step 2: Copying Process
At the Step 2 window the copying process starts. The writing process will start right away. You can
visually judge the completion of writing process with the Progress Bars . If the destination disc that
you inserted into the disc drive is not empty, you will be allowed to erase it.
You can also cancel writing process clicking the Cancel button.
Note : it's impossible to cancel writing during Buffer filling or Closing Track operations. It can
be also impossible to read the disc with the interrupted recording afterwards.
After the writing process is finished AVS Clone CD will offer you the choice to clone another disc or to
finish the work with the program.
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Overview
AVS Cover Editor is a compact and fully functional application that lets the user create different
labels for optical discs and box covers, edit them and print or save into graphical files. You can use
AVS Cover Editor together with all the other AVS4YOU products or as a separate application.
The program does not require any specific knowledge but at the same time has extended editing
capabilities that will let you create labels and covers to your taste and needs. Using AVS Cover Editor
you can add a touch of individuality to your optical discs collection and label them so that you could
find the necessary discs faster.
To start AVS Cover Editor go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Burning > AVS Cover Editor .
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Main Window
AVS Cover Editor has a simple and user-friendly interface. Its Main Window consists of the
following areas:
Main Menu - is used to get access to all the main functions and features of the program.
Top Toolbar - is used to get quick access to the basic features, such as work with projects,
copy-paste functions, zoom, etc.
Side Toolbar - is used to quickly select the main editing tools.
Presets List - is used to let the user select the existing and saved presets.
Editing Area - is used to apply different tools and effects and preview the result.
Layers Area - is used to view the list of the applied layers and adjust the selected layer
settings.
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Main Menu
The Main Menu lets the user select all the main actions to be done with the AVS Cover Editor
program and consists of the following items:
Menu
Item
Shortcut
New
Ctrl+N
Start a new AVS Cover Editor project.
Open
Ctrl+O
Open an existing or previously saved AVS Cover Editor
project.
Recently
opened
Description
Shows the list of the AVS Cover Editor projects that
have been recently opened or saved.
Save
Ctrl+S
Save the currently edited AVS Cover Editor project.
Save As
Save the currently edited AVS Cover Editor project
under a different name.
Save as preset
Save the currently edited AVS Cover Editor project as a
preset, so that it will be available from the preset list
later on.
File
Print
Export
Images
Ctrl+P
to
Save the created disc and box artwork as an image to
the selected computer hard disk drive folder.
Close the AVS Cover Editor and finish the work with
the program.
Exit
Edit
Print the created disc and box artwork using a printer
connected to the personal computer.
Undo
Ctrl+Z
Undo the last editing action.
Redo
Ctrl+Y
Redo the last editing action that has been undone.
Copy
Ctrl+C
Copy the selected layer to the clipboard, so that you
could paste it later.
Paste
Ctrl+V
Paste the previously copied layer from the clipboard to
the Editing Area .
Ctrl+X
Cut the selected from the Editing Area to the clipboard.
It will be removed from the Editing Area but added to
the clipboard. You will be able to paste it later to the
Editing Area .
Cut
Delete
Delete the selected area from the Editing Area .
Line
Draw straight lines with no angles or bends.
Draw
Fill
Polyline
Draw lines with angles and bends. As many turns and
bends as needed can be added to the line after it is
drawn.
Rectangle
Draw rectangles of various sizes.
Polygon
Draw different types of polygons. As many angles as
needed can be added to the polygon after it is drawn.
Circle
Draw circles of different sizes.
Ellipse
Draw ellipses of different sizes elongated in the vertical
or horizontal planes.
Pie
Draw pie-like shapes of different sizes and completeness.
Sector
Draw parts of circumference of different sizes and
completeness.
Text
Add common text to your created image.
Text around
Add rounded text to your image.
Image
Add different images to your project. You can select any
previously saved image on your computer hard disk
drive.
Solid
Fill the layer with a selected solid color.
Gradient
Fill the layer with a gradient of two selected colors.
Texture
Fill the layer with a texture taken from an image file. It
can be selected from the preset list or loaded from any
image file on your computer hard disk drive.
Hatch
Fill the layer with a hatch composed of two selected
colors.
Zoom In
Zoom in the image in the Editing Area .
Zoom Out
Zoom out the image in the Editing Area .
Zoom All
Change the zoom scale of the image in the Editing Area
to the 100% view.
Disc
Switch to the Disc editing window.
Front
Switch to the Front cover editing window.
Back
Switch to the Back cover editing window.
View
Content
AVS4YOU
web
Help
Buy Now
F1
on
View the contents of the Help file.
Visit the AVS4YOU - www.avs4you.com - home page
on the Internet.
Buy the AVS Cover Editor program using the online pay
system.
Register
Open the registration window to enter the User name
and Serial number to register the program.
About
Open the About window of the AVS Cover Editor
program.
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Top Toolbar
Top Toolbar is used to get quick access to the basic features, such as work with projects, copy-paste
functions, zoom, etc. It has the following buttons:
Button
Caption
Description
Create new project
Start a new AVS Cover Editor project.
Save current project
Save the currently edited AVS Cover Editor
project.
Open project
Open an existing or previously saved AVS Cover
Editor project.
Print
Print the created disc and box artwork using a
printer connected to the personal computer.
Undo
Undo the last editing action. The depth of the undo
action can be selected pressing the down-arrow
symbol on the right side of the button.
Redo
Redo the last editing action that has been undone.
The depth of the redo action can be selected
pressing the down-arrow symbol on the right side
of the button.
Copy layer
Copy the selected layer to the clipboard, so that
you could paste it later.
Paste layer
Paste the previously copied
clipboard to the Editing Area .
Cut layer
Cut the selected from the Editing Area to the
clipboard. It will be removed from the Editing
Area but added to the clipboard. You will be able
to paste it later to the Editing Area .
Remove layer
Delete the selected area from the Editing Area .
Zoom
Change the zoom scale of the image in the Editing
Area to the selected view. The scale can be
selected from the drop-down box ranging from
25% to 400%.
Zoom in
Zoom in the image in the Editing Area .
Zoom out
Zoom out the image in the Editing Area .
layer
from
the
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Side Toolbar
The Side Toolbar is used to add different shapes and effects to the created cover image and has the
following buttons:
The subitems are opened when you press with the mouse button one of the items and hold down the
mouse button for a couple of seconds.
Button
Selection
tool
Description
This tools is used to select the layers in the Editing Area so that you could edit
them.
This tool is used to draw different types of lines and has the following subitems:
Line tool
- Use this option to draw straight lines with no angles or bends.
- Use this option to draw lines with angles and bends. As many
turns and bends as needed can be added to the line after it is
drawn.
This tools is used to draw rectangles and polygon shapes and has the following
subitems:
Rectangle
tool
- Use this option to draw rectangles of various sizes.
- Use this option to draw different types of polygons. As many
angles as needed can be added to the polygon after it is drawn.
This tools is used to draw circles and circle-like shapes and has the following
subitems:
Circle
tool
- Use this option to draw circles of different sizes.
- Use this option to draw ellipses of different sizes elongated in the
vertical or horizontal planes.
- Use this option to draw parts of circumference of different sizes
and completeness.
- Use this option to draw pie-like shapes of different sizes and
completeness.
This tools is used to add text to your created image and has the following subitems:
Text tool
- Use this option to add common text to your created image.
- Use this option to add rounded text to your image.
Image
tool
This tools is used to add different images to your project. You can select any
previously saved image on your computer hard disk drive.
This tools is used to select the filling of the selected layer and has the following
subitems:
Fill tool
- Use this option to fill the layer with a selected solid color.
- Use this option to fill the layer with a gradient of two selected
colors.
- Use this option to fill the layer with a texture taken from an
image file. It can be selected from the preset list or loaded from
any image file on your computer hard disk drive.
- Use this option to fill the layer with a hatch composed of two
selected colors.
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Presets
AVS Cover Editor comes with a number of presets for your convenience. You can use them for your
projects, change them to fit your design, or you can create new presets and save them for future use.
To select the preset from the Presets List , you need to double-click it with the mouse or drag it with
the mouse cursor to the Editing Area . After that you can edit the selected preset according to your
wish and taste.
Clicking the right mouse button on the preset you will activate the contextual menu. It will let you
select either to Apply the selected preset to the Editing Area and edit or print it, or Remove the
selected preset from the Presets List .
Note : deleting presets is irreversible and cannot be undone afterwards.
You can also Rename the selected preset using the contextual right-click menu. When you select the
appropriate menu item, the following window will be opened:
You will need to enter a new preset name and click OK to apply changes or select Cancel to leave the
preset name unchanged.
You can save the currently edited project as a preset. To do that select Save as preset from the
Main Menu , choose a name for your new preset and save it on your hard disk drive. It will be saved
to the Presets folder of the AVS Cover Editor program and have *.cpr file extension. After that it
will become available from the Presets List where all the existing presets are listed alphabetically.
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Layers Area
All the tools used to edit the covers and labels form layers in the
Editing Area . You can manage these layers, changing their position
in relation to each other, adding or deleting layers and adjusting their
transparency. See the Organizing Layers section to find out how to
do all that.
The Layers Area contains the information about all the layers used
in the current project in the Layers List in the upper part of the
Layers Area .
When you click a shape in the Editing Area , the respective layer will
be highlighted in the Layers List and vice versa, when you click one
of the layers in the list, the shape that corresponds to it in the
Editing Area will be selected.
This is very useful especially when you try to edit layers placed
underneath other layers.
You can also copy, paste, cut and remove the selected areas, and
move them forward and backwards in the Editing Area . See the
appropriate section for more detail on how to do that.
In the lower part of the Layers Area the Layers Settings can be
viewed and changed. For each shape in the Editing Area Pen and
Brush Transparency settings are available. Some of the layers
have additional parameters that can be changed. See the Editing
sections for more details on how to change settings of different
layers.
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Overview
Working with AVS Cover Editor is quite simple and intuitive and consists of the following main parts:
Before you can start editing the label or cover for your discs, you should create new
projects . However, the program automatically creates a project named 'Untitled' so that you
could begin editing it right after the program start.
Note : you can load previously created or edited project if you saved it.
After that you can begin to edit covers and labels . It can be done using the presets
included into the installation or creating your own labels and covers from scratch.
When all the editing part is done, you can go to printing the projects results - print the
created covers and labels using a printer or save them as an image file to print them later.
That is applicable to any cover or label for optical discs and their boxes. Consult this AVS4YOU
Programs Help to find the answers to most of your questions concerning AVS Cover Editor .
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Overview
AVS Cover Editor lets the user create different disc labels and box covers or edit existing presets. All
the actions you perform in the program are stored in projects when you save them.
A project contains all the arrangements information of the images and layers included in your cover
and all the modifications made. A saved project file in AVS Cover Editor has a *.cov file name
extension. By saving your projects, you can open the project file later and begin editing it in AVS
Cover Editor from where you stopped.
Working with projects includes the following:
Creating new projects - you need to create a new project to start drawing a new disc label
or box cover.
Saving the created projects - you need to save the created project to be able to access it
in the future and modify or print the resulting labels and covers. You might also save the
created project as a preset, so that it would be available from the Presets List .
Opening existing or saved projects - you might need to open an already saved project to
further modify it or print the project covers and labels.
Printing the projects results - you can print the created covers and labels using a printer or
save them as an image file to print them later.
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Creating Projects
When you launch AVS Cover Editor , it begins with all the presets loaded and the 'Untitled' project
started. However, you can create a project of your own from the very beginning. To do that click the
Create new project button in the Top Toolbar or select the New item in the Main Menu . First of
all you will need to choose the type of project you would like to start:
There are several options to select from:
DVD Boxes - use this option to create labels for different DVD discs, covers for DVD boxes
and cases (the presets include DVD Clear Case, 14 mm DVD 4 disc case, 14 mm double DVD
case, 14 mm single DVD case, 7 mm double DVD case, 7 mm single DVD case, 9 mm double
DVD case, 9 mm single DVD case).
CD Boxes - use this option to create labels for different CD discs, covers for CD boxes and
cases (the presets include Single CD case, Slim CD case, 2 CD case, Jewel CD case for 6CD,
DDPack, Double VCD Box).
CD 3.5" Boxes - use this option to create labels for different 3.5 inch CD discs, covers for 3.5
inch CD boxes and cases (the presets include CD 3.5" and Slim CD 3.5").
After you select the discs set for your cover design, you can click the Next button (if available) to see
the existing Templates for the selected project:
You can return to the projects selection window, clicking the Back button or press the OK button to
accept your choice.
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Saving Projects
When you modify your project in some way, you will need to save it to be able to use it later. Saving
can be done in the following way:
click the Save current project button of the Top Toolbar or select the Save item in the
Main Menu ;
or select the Save As Main Menu item if you plan to save the existing project under a
different name.
The following window will be opened and will let you save the project under the name you select:
Note : the AVS Cover Editor projects have the *.cov file name extension.
You can also save the currently edited project as a preset, so that it will be displayed in the Presets
List afterwards and you will get instant access to it from the AVS Cover Editor Main Window . To
do that click the Save as preset item of the Main Menu . The following window will let you enter the
new preset name, that will be displayed in the Presets List :
After you type in the name of the preset and click the OK button the new preset will be saved on your
computer hard disk drive.
The file that will contain data for your created preset will be saved
with the *.cpr extension and the preset will be added to the
Presets List in the AVS Cover Editor Main Window .
Now you can use the saved preset to label your discs, edit it
changing to your taste and needs and create other presets based
on it.
Note : all the changes to the saved preset will not be saved
unless you select the Save as preset item of the Main
Menu and save the preset with the same name and the same
file name once again.
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Opening Projects
You can open previously saved projects using the Main Menu Open item or the Open project button
of the Top Toolbar . The following window will open:
The AVS Cover Editor projects will be displayed in the opened window and will have the *.cov file
name extension.
You can also open the projects, that you recently worked with, directly from the Main Menu . To do
that click the Recently opened menu item and choose the necessary project. The selected project will
load automatically and you will not need to look for it on your computer hard disk drive.
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Printing and Saving as Images
After the images for your disc label and box cover are ready, you can print them using a printer. To do
that click the Print button in the Top Toolbar or select the Print item in the Main Menu . The
following window will open:
You can select here:
Printer - select the printer from the list of available ones. If you have only one printer
connected to your personal computer, it will be selected by default. Otherwise, the printer
marked as default by your system will be selected until you choose some other one.
Discs Layout - the position and the number of the discs on the sheet of paper depending on
the paper size and type.
Views to Print - you can select to print all the created labels and covers or only some of
them - the Disc label, the box Front or Back cover.
View position - you can set the additional position parameters of the disc label or box cover
on the paper - namely, Top and Left margins - in the appropriate fields.
Print borders on paper - use this option to print the box cover borders on paper. It might
be especially useful, if your cover background is white and you will not know where the
boundaries are unless you print them on the paper.
Print borders on disc - use this option to print the disc label borders on paper. It might be
especially useful, if your label background is white and you will not know where the boundaries
are unless you print them on the paper.
To adjust the printer parameters, specific to each printer, click the Print Settings button to open the
printer setup window. The parameters of the printer will differ depending on the printer type and
model and the printer drivers installed.
After you select the necessary settings, you can click the Print button to start printing the images or
Cancel to close this window.
However, if you do not plan to print the result right now or have not got an available printer at the
moment, you can save your resulting covers and labels as images. Select the Export to Images item
in the Main Menu to open the following dialog window:
Here you can choose:
Folder to save the resulting images. The My Documents folder on your computer will be
chosen by default. Click the Browse button to find a specific folder on your computer hard
disk drive.
Views to Export - you can select to export all the created labels and covers or only some of
them - a Disc label, a box Front or Back cover.
File prefix - the title that the project is saved with.
Image format - the image file format selected from the list. You can use most of the
currently known formats - *.bmp, *.jpg, *.wmf, *.emf, *.gif, *.png, *.tiff, *.pcx, *.tga, *.ras.
After you select the necessary settings, you can click the Export button to save the images or Cancel
to close this window.
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Overview
Editing the covers and labels is quite easy and does not require any specific skills. You only need to
select a proper tool from the list in the Main Menu or from the Side Toolbar and put it to the cover
or label in the Editing Area . After that it can be adjusted using the mouse - you can change its
shape, position, transparency and color.
Most tools have got two primary colors - Pen and Brush . The Pen is used to draw the
contour of the selected tool, and the Brush is used to fill the inner part of the shape, drawn
with the selected tool, with the chosen color.
To change the color of either Pen or Brush , just click them with the mouse button and
select the color in the opened window. You can also use the Picker
color:
to select the needed
You should also bear in mind, that the Brush can have not only some solid color, but can also be filled
using Gradient , Texture or Hatch patterns. See the Filling Layers section for more detail on how
to do that.
The transparency of both the Pen and the Brush can be also changed. Use the sliders under the
Layers List to do that.
The main tools currently included into the AVS Cover Editor program are:
Line and PolyLine tools ;
Rectangle and Polygon tools ;
Circle and circle-like shapes tools ;
Text and Text around tools ;
Image tool ;
Filling tools .
Please see the respective chapters for more detail on each of the tools.
When the tools are used to edit the covers and labels, each of them forms a layer in the Editing Area
. You can manage these layers, changing their position in relation to each other, adding or deleting
layers and adjusting their transparency. See the Organizing Layers section to find out how to do all
that.
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Organizing Layers
When any tool is used to edit the covers and labels it forms a layer in the Editing Area . You can
manage these layers, changing their position in relation to each other, adding or deleting layers and
adjusting their transparency.
All the layers are displayed in the Layers List :
When you click any of the layers in the Layers List , it will become selected in the Editing Area , and
vice versa. This way you can edit layers placed under the other layers when you cannot reach them
easily.
If you want to change the layers position in relation to each other, you just need to select the layer to
be moved with the mouse button and move it upwards or downwards in the Layers List . The upward
movement of a layer will place it in the background position in relation to the layers below it in the list
and the other way round - the downward movement of a layer will place it in the foreground position in
relation to the layers above it.
To delete a layer, select it in the Layers List or Editing Area and click the Delete button on the
keyboard or the Remove layer button in the Top Toolbar . To copy a layer, select it in the Layers
List or Editing Area and click the Copy layer button in the Top Toolbar . After the layer is copied to
the computer clipboard, it can be added to the other place, for instance, from the disc label Editing
Area to the disc box cover Editing Area . Use the Paste layer button in the Top Toolbar to insert
the copied layer into the new location.
You can also cut the layer from one place and insert it into the other. Use the Cut layer and Paste
layer buttons in the Top Toolbar to do that.
If you would like to adjust the layer transparency, you will need to use the sliders in the Layers
Settings area to do that. You can change separately Pen and Brush Transparency of the selected
layer using the appropriate slider.
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Draw Lines
You can use the Line tool to draw different types of lines on your disc or box cover.
There are two variants of the Line tool that can be used (to select either press with the
mouse button the Line tool item on the Side Toolbar and hold down the mouse button for
a couple of seconds or select one of the items from the Draw section of the Main Menu ):
- Use this option to draw straight lines with no angles or bends.
- Use this option to draw lines with angles and bends. As many turns and
bends as needed can be added to the line after it is drawn.
When you select either of the Line tool modes, the line draw panel will appear in the upper part of the
AVS Cover Editor window (under the Top Toolbar ):
It lets you select the Pen type, used to draw the Lines and PolyLines , and its Thickness from the
drop-down boxes.
Here are the examples of Line and PolyLine tools use:
Line example
PolyLine example
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Draw Rectangles and Polygons
You can use the Rectangle tool to draw rectangles and polygon shapes on your disc or box cover.
There are two variants of the Rectangle tool that can be used (to select either press with
the mouse button the Rectangle tool item on the Side Toolbar and hold down the mouse
button for a couple of seconds or select one of the items from the Draw section of the Main
Menu ):
- Use this option to draw rectangles of various sizes.
- Use this option to draw different types of polygons. As many angles as
needed can be added to the polygon after it is drawn.
When you select either of the Rectangle tool modes, the rectangle draw panel will appear in the
upper part of the AVS Cover Editor window (under the Top Toolbar ):
It lets you select the Pen type, used to draw the Rectangles and Polygons , and its Thickness from
the drop-down boxes.
Here are the examples of Rectangle and Polygon tools use:
Rectangle example
Polygon example
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Draw Circle-like Shapes
You can use the Circle tool to draw circles and circle-like shapes on your disc or box cover.
There are four variants of the Circle tool that can be used (to select either press with the
mouse button the Circle tool item on the Side Toolbar and hold down the mouse button
for a couple of seconds or select one of the items from the Draw section of the Main Menu
):
- Use this option to draw circles of different sizes.
- Use this option to draw ellipses of different sizes elongated in the vertical or
horizontal planes.
- Use this option to draw parts of circumference of different sizes and
completeness.
- Use this option to draw pie-like shapes of different sizes and completeness.
When you select either of the Circle tool modes, the circle draw panel will appear in the upper part of
the AVS Cover Editor window (under the Top Toolbar ):
It lets you select the Pen type, used to draw the Circles , Ellipses , Sectors and Pies , and its
Thickness from the drop-down boxes.
Here are the examples of Circle , Ellipse , Sector and Pie tools use:
Circle example
Ellipse example
Sector example
Pie example
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Add Text
You can use the Text tool to add some captions and inscriptions on your disc or box cover.
There are two variants of the Text tool that can be used (to select either press with the
mouse button the Text tool item on the Side Toolbar and hold down the mouse button for
a couple of seconds or select one of the items from the Draw section of the Main Menu ):
- Use this option to add common text to your created image.
- Use this option to add rounded text to your image.
When you select either of the Text tool modes, the text panel will appear in the upper part of the
AVS Cover Editor window (under the Top Toolbar ):
It lets you select the Font type, Font size , font decorations (bold , italics , underlined ), Text
alignment and pick one of the Text presets , included into the AVS Cover Editor installation.
The text itself can be entered into the text area in the bottom right corner of the program window.
To select some additional text settings you will need to click the Advanced button, placed under the
text area.
You will see the window that will let you change the text Shadow settings (Color , Transparency ,
Blur , Horizontal (X) and Vertical (Y) Distance from the text and Rotation angle). You will be
also able to select to either show or hide the text Shadow (the Drop Shadow setting) and the text
Background :
Here are the examples of Text and Text around tools use:
Text example
Text around example
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Add Images
You can add an image to your created disc label or box cover. It will serve as a background or as a part
of the disc label or box cover.
- Use this button to add an image to your created project. After that click the mouse button
within the created label or cover.
The following window will open to let you select an image in one of the graphic formats in the
Textures folder of the AVS Cover Editor program directory. You can also select an image
from any folder present on your computer hard disk drive:
After the image is selected, you can change the picture size in the Editing Area , select its
transparency or choose some other image to replace the current one, clicking the Load Image button.
Here is how the above selected image will look like on your disc box back cover:
The same way an image can be placed on a disc label or disc box front cover.
AVS4YOU
AVS Cover Editor
Filling Layers
The Brush can fill the layer with a single Solid color, and can also use Gradient , Texture
or Hatch patterns. When you added a shape with the help of some tool, you can select it and
click the Fill tool button on the Side Toolbar .
The program will let you select one of the following Fill tools that will be used for the Brush :
Solid color - use this option to fill the inner part of the shape with a single solid color that you
select.
Gradient - use this option to fill the inner part of the shape with the smooth transition of two
different colors into each other.
Texture - use this option to fill the inner part of the shape with some texture taken from the
presets or from any supported image from your computer hard disk drive.
Hatch - use this option to fill the inner part of the shape with a pattern formed by two different
colors.
Note : you can change the fill type for the layer any time, clicking the layer to be edited in the
Editing Area or in the Layers List and selecting a new Fill tool instead of a previous one. To
change the colors used in the Fill tool , you should again select the necessary layer and click the
Brush icon to the left of the Editing Area .
Solid color
When you select the Solid color fill type the program will let you choose the color that
will be used as Fill tool . The following window will open to let you select the color:
You can choose the color from the color list on the left side, adjust the components of the color
manually entering the colors values (Red , Green and Blue ) in the appropriate boxes, or use the
Color Picker
to click within the area of a certain color to select it. You should first click the Color
Picker icon with the mouse and, without releasing it, drag it to the place on your computer screen
where the desired color is and release it there.
It is also possible to pick a color from the color model clicking the Models tab of the Select Color
window:
You can also control the selection of the color using the reference between the Old Color and the New
Color in the right upper box.
To accept the color and continue editing, click the OK button. To return to the editing without color
change, click Cancel .
[Back to the Top ]
Gradient
When you select the Gradient fill type the program will let you choose the colors that
will go into each other and will be used as Fill tool . The following window will open:
When you click the Color 1 and Color 2 icons the Select Color window will be opened to let you
choose the necessary colors.
You can also set the colors Transparency and Gradient type that will be used for the transition of the
colors into each other. Currently there are the following Gradient types - Horizontal , Vertical ,
Diagonal 1 , Diagonal 2 , Center , Cylinder 1 and Cylinder 2 . You can select one of them that will
suit your cover best. The preview is available in the Sample area of the window.
To accept the colors and their parameters and continue editing, click the OK button. To return to the
editing without color change, click Cancel .
[Back to the Top ]
Texture
When you select the Texture fill type the program will let you choose the image from
the preset list that will be used as Fill tool . The following window will open:
But it is certainly possible to select any of the supported images present on your computer hard disk
drive. Click the Load other button to open the window that will let you find images:
After the image is loaded, you can change its Transparency using the slider or click the Load Image
button in the lower right corner to select some other image.
[Back to the Top ]
Hatch
When you select the Hatch fill type the program will let you choose the colors that will
form the pattern with each other and will be used as Fill tool . The following window will
open:
When you click the Color 1 and Color 2 icons the Select Color window will be opened to let you
choose the necessary colors.
You can also set the colors Transparency and Hatch type that will be used to form the pattern. You
can select one of the available patterns that will suit your cover best. The preview is available in the
Sample area of the window.
To accept the colors and their parameters and continue editing, click the OK button. To return to the
editing without color change, click Cancel .
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Overview
AVS DVD Copy is a compact and fully functional application that lets the user copy, clone or compile
own CDs, DVDs and new generation Blu-Ray discs. It also supports shrinking DVD video to let the user
backup a double layer video DVD onto one single layer DVD±R/RW and burning previously saved ISO
images onto different types of optical discs. The software has a very easy-to-use and understandable
interface that lets you create your own data and video discs effortlessly in just several mouse clicks.
AVS DVD Copy supports writing to the following disc types: CD-R, CD-RW, CD-RW High Speed, DVDR, DVD-RW, DVD+R DL, DVD-RAM, D-R, BD-RE, BD DoubleLayer-R, BD DoubleLayer-RE. See the
Appendix section for more detail on different disc types.
To start AVS DVD Copy go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Burning ->
AVS DVD Copy .
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Main Window
AVS DVD Copy has a simple intuitive interface that is easy to understand and very easy to use. When
you launch the application you will see the Main Window where the basic controls of the program are
placed.
AVS DVD Copy Main Window consists of the following principal parts:
Top Toolbar - the toolbar with the main action buttons that let the user select the work mode
of the AVS DVD Copy program.
Main Area - the central part of the AVS DVD Copy program window that lets the user select
the main burning parameters or add files.
Note : the Main Area looks different depending on the work mode of the program.
Disc size meter - the panel that shows the size of the most common disc media types and
the size of the data that is going to be written onto the disc. It is available in the Burn DVD ,
Burn DATA and Burn ISO work modes.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Top Toolbar
The Top Toolbar consists of the action buttons that can be used to select the work mode of the AVS
DVD Copy program. You should use the appropriate buttons depending on the task you are going to
perform:
Button
Description
Use this button to copy your input DVD video onto a disc or your computer hard
disk drive folder with the size selected in the box in the lower part of the main
area. The DVD video will be remastered if needed to fit the selected disc size. You
can also cut out all the unnecessary languages, menus and extras present on the
DVD.
Use this button to get an exact copy of the input CD or DVD onto the other disc.
No compression will be used to record the files onto the target disc, so you should
bear in mind that it is necessary to use the same disc type and capacity for the
recording to be performed correctly.
Use this button to burn your DVD video files onto a disc so that it become
readable on your home hardware or software DVD player. You can also create an
ISO image of the DVD video disc, so that you could burn it later onto a disc if you
do not have such a possibility right now.
Use this button to burn any kind of data onto a CD/DVD/BD disc. You can also
create an ISO image of the disc you would like to record, so that you could burn
it later onto a disc if you do not have such a possibility right now.
Use this button to burn a previously created ISO image onto a CD/DVD/BD disc.
Use this button to open this AVS4YOU Programs Help .
Use this button to visit the AVS4YOU web site on the Internet.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Main Area
The Main Area is the central part of the AVS DVD Copy program window that lets the user select the
main burning parameters or add files. It looks different depending on the program work mode. For
instance, for the Copy DVD work mode it will look the following way:
Here one can select the Source and Target drive or HDD folder, Copy mode for the DVD, check or
uncheck the Languages that will be included into the output DVD, set the folder for the temporary
files and the target DVD size. See the Copy DVD section for more on all these parameters.
If you select Burn DVD , Burn DATA or Burn ISO work mode, the Main Area will look the following
way:
Here you can select the target disc drive or ISO-image to record your data to (please, note, that using
ISO-image as target is disabled in Burn ISO work mode ) and the files to record to your compilation. You can
use the buttons below to add files, ISO-images or folders, erase the inserted disc, set the burning
parameters and start disc burning or ISO-image creation . Please see the respective chapters for
more details on these actions.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Disc Size Meter
Disc Size Meter is available in the Burn DVD , Burn DATA and Burn ISO work modes. It shows the
size of the current disc inserted into the CD/DVD/BD drive and the size of the data that is going to be
written onto the disc. Thus, depending on the disc type and its capacity the Disc Size Meter will look
differently for a CD , DVD Single Layer or DVD Double Layer and Blu-Ray discs of different
capacities.
For instance, for a Double Layer Blu-Ray disc it will look like this:
For a DVD Single Layer it will look like this:
For a CD the Disc Size Meter appearance will change like this:
The Marker shows the standard capacity of a CD-R or a CD-RW - about 700 Megabytes.
When you add data to your compilation the Disc Size Meter will show whether your added data is
going to fit your CD/DVD/BD or if it exceeds its capacity.
If the data size is greater than the capacity of a CD/DVD/BD you should either split your data into
parts and record these parts onto several CDs/DVDs/BDs or select another disc type with a larger
capacity. See the Appendix section for more information on different disc types.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Express Menu
The Express Menu is used to facilitate access to the main features of the AVS DVD Copy . It can be
activated clicking the right mouse button within the Main Area of the program in the Burn DVD ,
Burn DATA and Burn ISO work modes:
Item
Description
Level Up
Use this option to go to a level that is parent to the current one.
Add...
ISO)
(DVD,
Use this option to add more files, DVD video or ISO-image to your
compilation.
New Folder
Use this option to create a new folder in your compilation list.
Delete
Use this option to remove the selected files or folders from the compilation
list.
Delete All
Use this option to remove all the files and folders and clear the compilation
list.
Rename
Use this option to change the names of files and folders in your compilation
list.
Settings
Use this option to open the Settings window and change the burning
parameters.
Erase
Use this option to erase the disc in the optical disc drive.
Start burning!
Use this option to start burning the created compilation.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Overview
The main work modes of the AVS DVD Copy are:
1. Copy DVD - use this mode to copy video DVD from one disc to another. The source disc will
be analyzed and, if you would like to copy from a greater size disc to a smaller size one,
recompressed to fit the target size. You can also remove unwanted languages, menus and
extras, if needed.
2. Copy CD - use this mode to create exact copies of DVDs, CDs and BDs. No data will be
changed, so you will need to use the identical disc types for both source and target.
3. Burn Discs - use these modes to record different type of files onto CDs, DVDs and BDs. You
can record DVD video (Burn DVD ), all kind of data (Burn DATA ) and ISO-images (Burn
ISO ) onto your target disc.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Overview
Copy DVD work mode is used to copy video DVDs and recompress the DVD video recorded on doublelayer media to fit single-layer discs.
The work with the Copy DVD mode is quite easy. It can be done in several steps:
1. Select the Source and the Target DVD drive (or hard disk drive folder, if you have your DVD
video on your computer HDD). You might also need to select the folder for the temporary files.
If you copy a DVD having only one disc drive, a temporary image on your computer HDD will
be created to let you record the resulting disc using the same disc drive. In this case please
make sure that you have enough free hard drive disk space available for the created
temporary disc image. Its size could be up to almost 9 gigabytes for a double-layer DVD. You
should also set the target disc size in the appropriate box.
2. Select the Copy mode . You can either copy the entire DVD with all the menus and extras, or
copy the DVD retaining its structure and menus but removing all the extras, or copy only the
main movie.
3. Select the necessary Languages and audio streams and remove the unwanted or unneeded
ones. This can enhance the quality of the output video.
4. When all the settings are selected, press the Start copying! button to begin the DVD copying
process. Its progress will be shown on the progress bar:
Note :
in case the source and destination disc drives coincide, the process will be stopped after
the Shrinking source DVD phase, and the program will wait for you to insert the
DVD±R(W) disc so that the copying could be continued.
if you save the output DVD video onto your computer hard disk drive, the copying
process will consist of Opening source DVD and Shrinking source DVD phases only.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Source and Target
To start burning the discs you will need to select source and target drives.
Source (input) drive - the optical disc drive or a hard disk drive folder used to read the
information from. It can be either DVD video disc or hard drive folder containing DVD video
files. It can be selected from the drop-down list:
In this list you can see:
Drives - the list of all the optical disc drives that are present on your personal computer
(including virtual drives);
HDD folders - the list of three most recently opened hard disk drive folders, containing
DVD video files;
Open DVD from folder - select this option to open the standard explorer window and
choose the folder on your computer hard disk that contains DVD video files.
Target (output, destination) drive - the optical disc drive or a hard disk drive folder used
to record the information to. It can be either a recordable (rewritable) optical disc or hard
drive folder. As well as the source it can be selected from the drop-down list:
In this list you can see:
Drives - the list of all the optical disc drives that are present on your personal computer
(including virtual drives);
HDD folders - the list of three hard disk drive folders most recently used to save your
files to;
Copy DVD to folder - select this option to open the standard explorer window and
choose the folder on your computer hard disk to save the files to.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Copy Modes
There are three main modes used to copy a video DVD onto the other one:
Copy the entire DVD
Copy DVD without extras
Copy only main movie
Button
Description
ENTIRE DVD
with menus and
extras
Use this button to copy the source DVD with all its structure - main movie,
menus and extras - onto the other DVD. If the size of the source DVD is
bigger than that of the target DVD, the video will be recompressed retaining
the structure of the original DVD.
WITHOUT
EXTRAS
extras will
removed
Use this button to copy the source DVD and its structure onto the other DVD.
Although the structure will be retained, the extras will be removed and will
become unavailable from the DVD menu. At the same time this can enhance
the main movie quality in case the recompression is needed as sometimes
extras occupy quite a considerable part of the video DVD.
be
ONLY MOVIE
copy only the
movie
Use this button to copy only the main DVD movie onto the target DVD. The
DVD will be remastered and all the menus and extras will be removed in order
to prevent the movie from being too much compressed. It is very helpful if
you prefer to have the main movie in a better quality and would like to get rid
of the extras or if the extras contain commercials and trailers mainly.
The selected mode will be marked with the
sign.
Depending on your needs and the input and the output disc size you can select the mode that will suit
better. For instance, if you would like to save a DVD-9 onto one DVD-5 disc, you will need to
recompress it so that it could fit the lesser capacity disc. If you do not need all the menus and extra
materials from the input disc, you can use the ONLY MOVIE mode to record the main movie only and
delete all the other materials to keep the quality better.
If you want to retain the disc structure (it can be helpful if the disc contains the deleted scenes from
the original movie or the director's cut that can only be selected from the DVD menu), you will need to
select the second mode - WITHOUT EXTRAS .
And finally, if all of the disc contents are important to you, you should select the ENTIRE DVD mode
to preserve the original DVD structure and contents.
Note : you can remove the unnecessary Languages in all the modes, thus enhancing the quality
of the output video.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Language Selection
It often happens so that the source DVD contains more than one language. It is very useful when you
can speak these languages or learn them. But if you do not need them, they can be easily removed.
Moreover, if you compress the source DVD to fit the target disc, removing the unneeded languages can
help avoid stronger compression of the video, thus enhancing the quality of the output video.
When the disc or a hard disk drive folder is opened, all the available
languages for this DVD video can be found in the Languages window. You
can either check all of them or uncheck the languages you consider
unnecessary.
Note : there can be not only other languages but also audio variants of
one language that differ in the number of channels and audio codec
used to record them. It is usually done so that the DVD could be better
played on different hardware or software players. If you are sure, what
track is best played by your DVD player, you can leave only this track
on the target DVD and uncheck all the other audio tracks.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Setting DVD Drive Region Code
Region code - the software protection used on DVD discs to prevent unauthorized playback and
duplication of the discs made in one country to be played in another country.
Motion picture studios want to control the home release of movies in different countries because
theater releases aren't simultaneous. They have required that the DVD standard include codes that
can be used to prevent playback of certain discs in certain geographical regions. Each player is given a
code for the region in which it's sold. The player will refuse to play discs that are not allowed in that
region.
Most DVD-ROM drives let you change the region code a few times, usually between 0 and 5. Once a
drive has reached the limit it can't be changed again unless the vendor or manufacturer resets the
drive. This limitation cannot be overridden.
There are 6 main regions: (1) Canada, U.S., US Territories; (2) Europe, Japan, South Africa, Middle
East (including Egypt); (3) Southeast Asia, East Asia (including Hong Kong); (4) Australia, New
Zealand, Pacific Islands, Central America, Mexico, South America, Caribbean; (5) Former Soviet Union,
Indian Subcontinent, Africa (also North Korea, Mongolia) and (6) China.
Before you can start copying your DVD, you will need to set up your DVD drive region code so that it
would coincide with the disc region code. In case they differ the following window will appear that will
let you set the drive region:
If you have several DVD drives on your computer, you might try and insert the disc into the other
drive that could have the region code matching the region code of the disc. If you still need to change
the code of your drive, you should bear in mind, that this will decrease the number of the drive region
changes left. When you change the drive region a certain number of times, you will not be able to
change it again using any software means, even reinstalling Windows or taking the drive to another
computer.
To set the new drive code press Yes , to leave it unchanged select No .
Note : you will not be able to copy the DVD if you choose to leave the drive region unchanged.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Copying DVD-9
It happens quite often that you need to backup your double-layer DVD (so called DVD-9 ) onto one
single layer DVD (known as DVD-5 ). As a matter of fact, you will need to recompress it so that it
could fit the lesser capacity disc. The quality of the video could deteriorate in this case, so you will
need to decide what you need more - the best available quality or all the materials on the disc. There
is one more way out: you can take a double-layer DVD to record the video onto it.
You should use a standard DVD to reconvert the input DVD and shrink it so that it will fit the output
DVD-5 if your DVD-drive does not support writing onto double-layer DVDs or if you do not have a
double-layer DVD available. See below to find out how you can improve the output video quality if you
record onto a standard DVD.
At the same time you should use a double-layer DVD if you have a possibility to record the input DVD
onto a double-layer output DVD. The disc will be simply copied without any recompression and thus
any quality loss.
Some tips when copying DVD-9 onto a single DVD-5 :
If you do not need all the menus and extras from the input disc, you can use the ONLY
MOVIE mode to record the main movie only and delete all the other materials to keep the
quality better.
If you want to retain the disc structure (it can be helpful if the disc contains the deleted scenes
from the original movie or the director's cut that can only be selected from the DVD menu),
you will need to select the second mode - WITHOUT EXTRAS .
And finally, if all of the disc contents are important to you, you should select the ENTIRE DVD
mode to preserve the original DVD structure and contents.
Note : you can remove the unnecessary Languages in all the modes, thus enhancing the quality
of the output video.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Overview
Copy CD work mode is used to create an exact copy of the source disc. No data will be changed and
no video will be compressed on the target disc as compared to the source disc.
Select the source drive that you are going to copy from.
Note : in the source drive drop-down combo box a path to any previously created image located
at your hard drive could be specified.
After that you should set the destination drive, which also could be a CD/DVD/BD-drive as well as an
image at your hard drive. In case your destination drive is HDD, AVS DVD Copy will let you select the
destination folder using the common windows explorer.
If you clone a CD/DVD/BD having only one disc drive, a temporary image on your computer HDD will
be created to let you record the resulting disc using the same disc drive. In this case please make sure
that you have enough free hard drive disk space available for the created temporary disc image. Its
size could be up to almost 200 gigabytes for a six-layer BD.
The option Ignore reading CD sectors errors lets you copy damaged discs. In case you know that
your disc is physically damaged (scratched, for instance) the program will still let you copy such a disc,
replacing the defective areas with zero bytes. Thus the disc will become readable again, though some
of the information might be lost.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Copying Discs
After you select all the settings click the Start copying! button to start the copying process. You will
see the progress of the current operation and the buffer state at the moment:
You can click the Cancel button to abort the recording, although it is not recommended to do that
during the burning to the destination disc as the disc might become unreadable afterwards if the
burning process is not complete. You won't be able to read or write a CD-R, a DVD-R or a BD-R after
you press this button in the middle of the burning process.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Overview
The Burn Discs work modes include three types of work depending on what type of data you are
going to burn:
1. Burn DVD - use this mode to record DVD video discs if you have video files that compose the
DVD structure (files with .vob , .ifo and .bup extensions) on your computer hard disk drive.
As a result of adding these files a DVD video disc will be recorded that will be compatible with
your software or hardware DVD player. (Please read your hardware DVD player manual to
make sure it supports DVD±R/RW discs so that it could read them after burning.)
2. Burn DATA - use this mode to record different type of data to CD, DVD or BD discs.
3. Burn ISO - use this mode to record onto a CD, a DVD or a BD ISO-images you already have
on your computer hard disk drive. The program will add the files that the ISO-image contains
to your compilation. See the Working with Images section for more detail.
Using all the Burn Discs modes is similar to each other and comprise the following steps:
Select the Burn Discs mode - Burn DVD , Burn DATA or Burn ISO - depending on the data
type that you are going to burn.
Select the target drive - optical disc or computer hard drive (when recording ISO-image).
Add the files to your compilation - DVD video files when in the Burn DVD mode, ISO-image
when in the Burn ISO mode and any data type when Burn DATA mode. Use the Add button
for that.
Adjust the burning settings for your compilation clicking the Settings button.
Erase the disc if it is not empty using the Erase button.
Note : this step can be skipped as the program will offer you to erase the non-empty disc
before the burning starts.
Click the Start burning! button to begin the recording or image creation process.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Adding Files
Before you start burning your discs you should compile a list of all the files you would like to record
onto your disc.
To do that use the Add button or the Express Menu , clicking with the right mouse button within the
File list area and selecting Add... The window will open that will let you navigate through your
personal computer drives and find the necessary files and folders:
Button
Description
Use this button to move up one level from the current one on
your computer hard disk drive.
Use this button to move directly to My Computer folder of
your computer hard disk drive to add files from there.
Use this button to move directly to My Documents folder of
your computer hard disk drive to add files from there.
Use this button to move directly to My Videos folder of your
computer hard disk drive to add files from there.
Use this button to move directly to My Music folder of your
computer hard disk drive to add files from there.
Use this button to move directly to view your network to add
files from a network drive.
You can also drag the files and folders from the standard windows explorer and drop them to the File
list area.
If you would like to add a new folder to your compilation you can use the Express Menu , clicking
with the right mouse button within the File list area and select New Folder . To remove files and
folders, select them and press the Delete button on the keyboard or again, use the Express Menu .
If you already have some data on the CD/DVD/BD and it was recorded using multisession mode you
can add some more data. When you insert such a disc the files already present on it will be displayed
in the Files list and marked in blue. The newly added files will be displayed in black font color:
Note : if there are some files already recorded on the disc they will not be removed from the list
when you select Delete All in the Express Menu .
See also the Working with Images section for more detail on how to create and record ISO-images.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Adjusting Settings
Before you start burning, you might want to view and if needed change the additional settings. To do
that you will need to click the Settings button when you are in the Burn DVD , Burn DATA or Burn
ISO work mode. The following window will be opened:
Here you can change the following parameters:
Disc label
The name of the disc. You can select any you like best.
Speed
Possible recording speeds for this drive and disc.
Verify disc
Mark this check-box to verify the burned data after the recording process is
over to make sure the disc was recorded without any errors.
Finalize disc
Close the disc after the data is written. You will not be able to add any data
to the disc if this check-box is ticked. If you want to record a multisession
disc you should leave this check-box unchecked.
UDF
Universal Disk Format - the modern file system supporting larger files, larger
filenames (up to 256 characters in length), larger discs and more information
about individual files and folders. It includes support for special file properties
and other OS-specific data.
Joliet
The extended ISO file system that allows the user use an additional set of
filenames (up to 64 characters in length) with Unicode multilanguage
support.
The same settings are available for ISO-image burning.
In case you are going to record DVD-video, the Finalize disc setting will be enabled and no change of
this setting will be possible. That is done to ensure compatibility with the hardware DVD players. The
Joliet structure also cannot be used as DVD-video discs use only UDF file structure:
After you select all the parameters you can close the window clicking the appropriate button. The
changes will be applied automatically.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Erasing Discs
If you use a rewritable disc (CD-RW, DVD-RW or BD-RE), you might need to erase it prior to recording
your compilation. To do that you should press the Erase button when you are in the Burn DVD ,
Burn DATA or Burn ISO work modes. The erase dialog window will appear to let you delete all the
information from the rewritable disc:
Here you should select:
Drive - the name of the drive that you use to record your discs.
Erase type - Quick erase or Full format of the rewritable disc.
If you select the Quick erase , the data on the disc will not be actually erased as in this
mode only the Table of Contents of the disc is deleted, the disc will appear empty and
ready for burning but the data can be restored later using special software.
If you select the Full format , all the data on the rewritable disc will be physically
erased and you will not be able to restore it later. This mode will take much more time.
Use this type of erase if you have some confidential data on the disc that must be
erased.
You can also enable the Eject disc after erasing check-box, if you do not plan to work with the disc
afterwards. If you plan to use the same disc for burning after erasing, it might be useful to leave it
unchecked.
When all the erasing parameters are set, you can press the Erase button to start the erasing process
itself. Once the erasing is started, it cannot be stopped. Please, wait for the erasing process to be
finished.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Burning Discs and Images
After you select all the settings click the Start burning! button to start the recording process. You will
see the progress of the burning, the current operation and the file that is being written at the moment:
You can click the Cancel button to abort the recording, although it is not recommended as the disc
might become unreadable afterwards if the burning process is not complete. You won't be able to read
or write a CD-R, a DVD±R or a BD-R after you press this button in the middle of the burning process.
If you already have some data on the CD/DVD/BD and it was recorded using multisession mode you
can add some more data. When you insert such a disc the files already present on it will be displayed
in the Files list and marked in blue. The newly added files will be displayed in black font color:
After that you can click the Start burning! button to record the new data onto the disc.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Copy
Working with Images
Sometimes you might need to create an image for your disc prior to recording it onto a CD, a DVD or a
BD. You can do that with the help of the AVS DVD Copy . Currently it supports ISO-type images,
compatible with all the main programs on the market nowadays. You can burn this image onto a CD, a
DVD or a BD later if you would like to with AVS DVD Copy or mount it to some third party virtual
drive.
You can select the ISO-image creation from the program main window:
After that you should set the file name and destination for your image and then you can record the
files and folders to the image as if it were a common optical disc.
If you already have ISO-images on your computer hard disk drive you can burn them onto a CD, a
DVD or a BD using the AVS DVD Copy software. To do that you should switch into Burn ISO work
mode, locate the image file on your computer and add it to your compilation (using drag-and-drop
method, the Add button or the Express Menu ). The program will add the files that the ISO-image
contains to your compilation.
Note : if you would like to record the ISO-image as a single file to be able to transfer it to a
different computer you will need to switch to Burn DATA work mode and add the needed ISOimage as if it were an ordinary file. In this case the files and folders "recorded" into the image will
be left inside it and you will not be able to see them without additional software.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
Overview
AVS DVD Player is a fully functional software DVD player that has all the features and controls of a
common hardware player. Our software has a number of great possibilities, which makes watching
digital video easy and pleasant. It will let the user experience the full spectrum of DVD video on a
personal computer or TV screen (if the computer's video card output is connected to the TV input).
AVS DVD Player has a simple user-friendly interface that allows you to start watching DVD movies
with no additional software and special knowledge on DVD video.
AVS DVD Player allows the user to watch not only DVD videos but also different types of video media
files. All you need is to choose the source files that you would like to watch and click Play . See the
Supported video file formats section of the Appendix to find out the list of the formats supported
by the AVS DVD Player .
If you like to listen to music you can use the AVS DVD Player software to listen to the audio files and
to watch the visualizations meanwhile. The program supports most of the audio formats known
nowadays.
To start AVS DVD Player go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Video ->
AVS DVD Player .
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
Main Controls
Button (Control)
Details
1
Eject button
Ejects the disk from the computer CD/DVD-ROM
drive
2
Rip button
Launches the AVS Video to GO application to let
the user rip a DVD movie and save it in one of the
supported video formats.
3
Title indicator
Shows the number of the current title of the DVD
movie
4
Jump to previous chapter button
Quick jump to the previous chapter of the DVD
movie (See Jump functions section for more
detail) or the previous file in the file playback list
(See the Audio files playback section for more
detail).
5
Chapter indicator
Shows the number of the current chapter of the
DVD movie
6
Jump to next chapter button
Quick jump to the next chapter of the DVD movie
(See Jump functions section for more detail) or
the next file in the file playback list (See the Audio
files playback section for more detail).
7
Elapsed time (hours: minutes:
seconds) indicator
Shows the time elapsed from the beginning of the
media file playback
8
Snapshot button
Lets you take a snapshot of the current video file
frame (See Preferences section for more detail).
9
Playlist button
Opens media files playlist (See Video files
playback and Audio files playback sections for
more detail).
10
Preferences button
Opens the Preferences window to let the user set
the program parameters (See Preferences
section for more detail)
11
AVS4YOU home page link
Links directly to AVS4YOU web site
12
Volume down button
Decreases the sound volume strength
13
Mute/Unmute button
Switches the sound on or off
14
Volume up button
Increases the sound volume strength
15
Volume indicator
Shows the current sound volume value and lets
change the volume strength
16
Navigation slider
Indicates the playback progress. The user can click
and drag the slider to jump to a different playback
point in time.
17
Step backward button
Lets the user step one frame backward (See Step
frame functions section for more detail)
18
Playback controls
The buttons used for movie playback
Playback controls section for more detail)
19
Step forward button
Lets the user step one frame forward (See Step
frame functions section for more detail)
20
Select source button
Lets the user choose the movie source (See Video
files playback , DVD playback , DVD files on
hard disk drive playback and Audio files
playback sections for more detail)
21
Menu button
Lets the user choose the DVD movie menu (See
Menus section for more detail)
22
Help button
Opens this help file
23
Navigation pad
Lets the user navigate through the DVD menus
(See Navigation pad section for more detail)
(See
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
Playback Controls
Button
Details
1
Pause
Use this button to pause the media file during playback.
2
Fast backward
Use this button to search the media file in fast reverse mode.
3
Fast forward
Use this button to search the media file in fast forward mode.
4
Stop
Use this button to stop the media file during playback. If you press this
button twice the file will be unloaded and you will need to load it again or
open another file to resume playback.
Play
Use this button to:
1. start playback when the Player is in stop mode;
2. resume playback when paused or in frame step mode;
3. return to normal playback when in fast forward or fast rewind mode.
5
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
Menus
Press the Menu
button to choose between the DVD movie menus:
Root menu - shows the root menu of the DVD movie;
Title menu - lets the user choose the title of the DVD movie to watch, if there are several
titles in the DVD;
Chapter menu - lets the user go directly to the specific chapter.
Audio menu - lets the user choose the desired audio language from the present in the DVD
movie;
Subtitle menu - lets the user choose the subtitles to be displayed during the movie playback
(if there are several of them) or switch the subtitles off;
Angle menu - lets the user choose the desired angle (if there are several) to watch the DVD
movie;
Note : not all the menus might be available depending on their presence or absence on the DVD.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
Navigation Pad
For the user's convenience the Navigation pad can be used to navigate through the DVD menus, just
like on a common DVD player remote control.
Use the arrow buttons to choose among the DVD menu entries.
To confirm the choice use the OK button.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
Keyboard Shortcuts
Main window keyboard shortcuts
Button (Button combination)
Function
-
Volume down
+
Volume up
E
Ejects the disc from the current active
drive
F
Fast forward
M
Mute/Unmute sound
N
Jump to next chapter
O
Open menu
P
Jump to previous chapter
R
Fast backward
S
Stop
U
Step forward
Y
Step backward
Enter (Space)
Play
Space
Pause/Play
Ctrl + O
Open video file
Alt + Enter
Go to full screen
Ctrl + X
Close the application and finish the work
with the AVS DVD Player
F1
Help file
Playlist window keyboard shortcuts
Button (Button combination)
Function
X
Playback of the currently selected file in the playlist
C
Pause the currently selected file in the playlist
V
Stop the currently selected file in the playlist
Ctrl+D
Add DVD video to the playlist
Shift+Ctrl+O
Add a new folder to the playlist
Ctrl+O
Add new files to the playlist
Ctrl+L
Load a previously saved playlist to the playlist window
Ctrl+S
Save the current playlist
Ctrl+N
Create a new playlist
Delete
Delete the selected file(s) from the playlist
Note : you need to activate the playlist window to use these playlist window shortcuts.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
DVD Playback
Watching DVD movies is simple. To start playback of a DVD movie located on a DVD disc it is
necessary to do the following:
1. Insert a DVD disc into the DVD-ROM drive. Click Play . Make sure that the source is correct. If
not, click the Select source
button and choose the right drive.
2. A warning message or copyright information will appear depending on the DVD title. Usually,
this content cannot be skipped over.
3. After the promotional content, the main menu will be presented. With the mouse or
Navigation pad select by clicking the line in the menu.
4. The DVD will begin playing.
5. To Stop or Pause , click them accordingly (see Playback controls ).
Note : to use the Navigation pad , click the outer button to the farthest right of the user
interface and the pad will appear.
Note : for the AVS DVD Player to work properly it is recommended that you should enable DMA
mode of your CD/DVD drive controller. See the Appendix section on how to do it.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
DVD Files on Hard Disk Drive Playback
AVS DVD Player supports playing your own personal DVD files on your hard disk drive so you can
preview them before burning the movie onto a DVD-writable or CD-writable disc. All you need to do is
specify the video source and select the folder that contains your video.
1. Click the Select source
button on the user interface and then select Open DVD File on
hard disk drive .
2. Select the folder that contains your video and then click the OK button when you are done.
Your DVD file will begin playback just like any other DVD title.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
Video Files Playback
Watching video files is simple. To start playback of a video file located on a CD/DVD disc it is necessary
to do the following:
1. Insert a disc into the CD/DVD-ROM drive. Click Play . Make sure that the source is correct. If
not, click the Select source
2. The video file will begin playing.
The same can be done to play the video file from the personal computer hard disk drive. Click the
Select source
button and choose Open Video File... option. If you would like to add several
video files you can select them with the mouse and click Open . The playlist with the added files will
open to show you the list of files that are going to be played.
The other way to open video files is use the Playlist
playlist window will open:
button. When you click this button the
You can add files using the Add button and delete the files from the
list choosing the file name and clicking the right mouse button to
select the Delete options, or using the Delete button on the
keyboard. It is also possible to drag-and-drop the files from the
Windows Explorer to the Playlist directly using the mouse.
Note : if the video file contains more than one language stream
you can choose between the available languages with the help
of Express Menu - click the right mouse button on the player
main window and select Audio Streams - Track 1 or Track 2
.
Note : you can change the order of the files on the playlist at
your own choosing and select several files at once. To do that,
press the control button and select the files you need. After that
you can move all these files upwards or downwards as related
to the unselected files. You can also delete these selected files
using the Delete button on the keyboard or the Playlist
express menu .
You can also use the Playlist express menu to facilitate control of
the Playlist items.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
Audio Files Playback
To start playback of audio files located on a CD/DVD disc it is necessary to do the following:
1. Insert a DVD disc into the CD/DVD-ROM drive. Click Play . Make sure that the source is
correct. If not, click the Select source
2. The audio file will begin playing.
The same can be done to play the audio files from the personal computer hard disk drive. Click the
Select source
button and choose Open Audio File... option. If you would like to add several
audio files you can select them with the mouse and click Open . The playlist with the added files will
open to show you the list of files that are going to be played.
The other way to open audio files is use the Playlist
playlist window will open:
button. When you click this button the
You can add files using the Add button and delete the files from the
list choosing the file name and clicking the right mouse button to
select the Delete options, or using the Delete button on the
keyboard. It is also possible to drag-and-drop the files from the
Windows Explorer to the Playlist directly using the mouse.
To jump to the next file in the playlist you can double-click it with the
mouse or use the Jump to next chapter button of the main
controls panel . To return to the previous file use the Jump to
previous chapter button of the main controls panel .
Note : you can change the order of the files on the playlist at
your own choosing and select several files at once. To do that,
press the control button and select the files you need. After that
you can move all these files upwards or downwards as related
to the unselected files. You can also delete these selected files
using the Delete button on the keyboard or the Playlist
express menu .
You can also use the Playlist express menu to facilitate control of
the Playlist items.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
Preferences
You can change the main system settings using the Preferences window. To activate the window
please click the Preferences
button. The window contains the following main items:
Skins - lets the user select the skins to change the appearance of the AVS DVD Player
program.
View - lets the user select the AVS DVD Player windows that will be open.
Aspect Ratio - lets the user select the aspect ratio of the video file/DVD video.
Speaker Environment - lets the user select the number and configuration of the speakers.
Audio Visualization - lets the user select the visualization type used during audio files
playback.
Region Settings - lets the user set the region parameter of the DVD drive.
Options - lets the user adjust the additional parameters.
About - shows the information about the AVS DVD Player program.
Our Products - shows the information about other AVS4YOU products.
Skins
AVS DVD Player supports skins and lets the user select the appearance that is liked better. To do
that please select the Skins item in the Preferences window and choose the available skins from the
list:
[Back to the Top ]
View
Use the View item to select the main AVS DVD Player windows that will be open or closed during the
playback:
Stay on top - use this option to make AVS DVD Player stay on top of all the other
applications.
Show window controls - use this option to show or hide the main controls panel.
Show screen - use this option to show or hide the main screen window.
Show playlist - use this option to show or hide the Playlist window.
Full screen - use this option to change the view mode to full screen when the player is in the
Window mode and to Window mode from the Full screen mode.
Screen without border - use this option to hide the borders of the AVS DVD Player screen
window.
Note : you can also save the selected view settings as a preset to use them in future and quickly
switch between your preferences. To do that click the Presets of view button and enter the name
of a new preset to save it. After that you can save the preset clicking the appropriate button. To
load the previously saved preset select it from the drop-down list and click Load. The same is done
for deleting the unnecessary presets, simply select the preset and click the Delete button.
[Back to the Top ]
Aspect Ratio
Aspect Ratio - the ratio of the horizontal and vertical sides to each other. You can select the available
variants of aspect ratio values from the list or set an aspect ratio of your own:
Auto - use this option to let the AVS DVD Player select the aspect ratio automatically.
4:3 - use this option to set the aspect ratio fit 4:3 screen.
16:9 - use this option to set the aspect ratio fit 16:9 wide screen.
1.85:1 - use this option to set the aspect ratio fit 1.85:1 wide screen.
Custom Ratio... - use this option to set the custom aspect ratio. You can select the ratio of X
(width) to Y (height) of the video image and click the Apply button to accept the changes.
[Back to the Top ]
Speaker Environment
You can set the number of the channels for your media files if it does not coincide with the number of
the speakers your computer has connected to it. The program will on-the-fly automatically convert the
audio component of the media file to suit the hardware better:
You can select any of the variants above and listen to the one selected to see which sounds best.
You can also click the Environment settings>> link to open the Speaker Environment Settings
window:
The number and configuration of speakers is selected from the upper drop-down box. The speakers
will be displayed schematically together with the user position in the room:
FL
- F ront L eft speaker
FC
- F ront C enter speaker
LFE
- L ow-F requency E ffects (subwoofer) speaker
FR
- F ront R ight speaker
SL
- S urround L eft speaker
SR
- S urround R ight speaker
BSL
- B ack S urround L eft speaker
S
- S urround (rear) speaker
BSR - B ack S urround R ight speaker
You can select between the measurement units - feet and meters and adjust the room length and
width . After that you can use the mouse to move the figure of the listener to establish the position in
the room. You will see the distances between the listener and the speakers change and the sound
change together with them. To place the listener into the center of the room place the Center button.
[Back to the Top ]
Audio Visualization
When you playback audio files it might be very useful to switch on visualization, that will be shown in
the main screen window. You can select the visualization type:
Switch the main screen window on to view the visualization or off if you prefer to hide the visualization
window.
[Back to the Top ]
Region settings
Region code - the software protection used on DVD discs to prevent unauthorized playback of the discs
made in one country to be played in another country.
Motion picture studios want to control the home release of movies in different countries because
theater releases aren't simultaneous. They have required that the DVD standard include codes that
can be used to prevent playback of certain discs in certain geographical regions. Each player is given a
code for the region in which it's sold. The player will refuse to play discs that are not allowed in that
region.
This means that discs bought in one country may not play on players bought in another country.
Regional codes are entirely optional for the maker of a disc. Discs without codes will play on any player
in any country.
There are 7 regions: (1) Canada, U.S., US Territories; (2) Europe, Japan, South Africa, Middle East
(including Egypt); (3) Southeast Asia, East Asia (including Hong Kong); (4) Australia, New Zealand,
Pacific Islands, Central America, Mexico, South America, Caribbean; (5) Former Soviet Union, Indian
Subcontinent, Africa (also North Korea, Mongolia); (6) China and (7) Transcontinental - used for
watching DVD movies onboard the planes, ships and so forth.
When you buy a new DVD drive the regional code in it is usually not set and it will refuse to play discs
that have region code settings. Before you start playback of such a disc a window will appear that will
let you set a region:
Here you should select the DVD drive you use for DVD playback (if you have several), region code of
the country you live in, and press the Set Region Code button. In the window lower part you will see
the number of changes remained until the last one, when your drive will be locked and no further
changes will be possible.
[Back to the Top ]
Options
There are several options that can be changed to make it more comfortable when you watch a video or
take snapshots of the video file being played:
Fit screen to video on start - use this option to change the screen window size so that it
represented the full dimensions of the video or DVD file picture.
Location for snapshots - use this option to select the location for the snapshots taken. The
windows standard explorer window will open to let you choose the directory for the snapshot
output files.
Sticky windows - use this option to make the AVS DVD Player windows stick to each other
and to the desktop borders. You can also select the distance in pixels within which the
windows will start to stick to each other.
On Screen Display - use this option show the information on the AVS DVD Player screen
during playback, pause or any other operation with video.
Show Fullscreen Controls - use this option to get access to the AVS DVD Player controls
when the FullScreen mode is selected. You will need to move your mouse to the bottom of the
screen for the controls to pop up.
Note : the snapshots will be saved in the BMP format and will have the following file name:
For a video file - video file name + frame number in brackets (e.g. My video (frame
39).bmp ).
For a DVD video file - video file name + title number, chapter number and frame
number in brackets (e.g. VIDEO_TS (title 2 ch 5 frame 42459).bmp ).
[Back to the Top ]
About
Here you can see the information on the AVS DVD Player version, AVS4YOU web site address and
e-mail addresses:
[Back to the Top ]
Our Products
Here you can see the information about other AVS4YOU products and find links to the web pages with
these products:
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
Jump Functions
During playback it is possible to skip some chapters or to return to the other chapters:
To advance to the next chapter, click the Next Chapter
To go back one chapter, click the Previous Chapter
button.
button.
The same can be done using the Hotkeys :
Press <N> on the keyboard to advance to the next chapter.
Press <P> on the keyboard to go back one chapter.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
Step Frame Functions
These functions are available anytime:
1. Click the Step forward
or Step backward
2. Click the Step forward
button again to advance to the next frame.
3. Click the Step backward
button to freeze the video.
button to return to the previous frame.
4. To return to normal playback mode, click the Play button.
The same can be done using the Hotkeys :
1. Press the <U> or <Y> buttons on the keyboard to freeze the video. Press <U> again to
advance the video to the next frame.
2. Press the <Y> button to return to the previous frame.
3. To return to normal playback mode, press the <Space> bar or <Enter> .
There is no audio in this mode.
After you have clicked on either of the Step functions, playback will be paused.
Note : this function steps backward but will only return to the I-frames within a group of frames.
In other words, stepping forward will result in a greater number of frames than stepping backward.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
Search Function
[Time search ]
[Frame search ]
[Chapter search ]
Time search
It is possible to find a specific place in the movie if its exact time is known. To do that it is necessary
to:
1. Open the Search panel selecting the Search item in the Express menu .
2. Choose the Time search option.
3. Enter the desired time using the mouse clicks or entering the digits from the keyboard.
4. Press the View button to go to the chosen scene.
[Back to the Top ]
Frame search
To find a specific place in the DVD movie by its frame number it is necessary to:
2. Choose the Frame search option.
3. Enter the desired frame number using the mouse clicks or entering the digits from the
keyboard.
[Back to the Top ]
Chapter search
To find a favorite chapter in the DVD movie by its number it is necessary to:
2. Choose the Chapter search option.
3. Enter the desired chapter number using the mouse clicks or entering the digits from the
keyboard.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
Basic and Navigation Controls
Express menu is a quick and handy feature. It can be activated by clicking on the right button of the
mouse when the cursor is positioned on the video window. Express menu buttons are grouped.
The first group is Basic and navigation controls . It consists of the following entries:
Playback - use this option to control the playback of the media files in the AVS DVD Player
program:
Play - use this option to start playback when the player is in the Stop mode and to
resume playback when the player is in Pause or Step frame mode. It is the same as to
press the Play
button of the AVS DVD Player .
Pause - use this option to pause the playback when the player is in the Play mode to
pause the media file playback. It is the same as to press the Pause
button of the
AVS DVD Player .
Stop - use this option to stop the playback when the player is in the Play mode to
cancel the media file playback. It is the same as to press the Stop
button of the
AVS DVD Player .
Previous chapter - use this option to go to the previous chapter when the player is in
the Play mode. It is the same as to press the Previous chapter
button of the AVS
DVD Player .
Next chapter - use this option to go to the next chapter when the player is in the Play
mode. It is the same as to press the Next chapter
button of the AVS DVD Player
.
Volume - use this option to change the loudness of the volume when the player is in the Play
mode. It is the same as to press the Volume control buttons of the AVS DVD Player . The
submenus include Volume up , Volume down and Mute options.
Eject - use this option to eject the DVD disc from the computer DVD drive. It is the same as
to press the Eject
View - use this option to select the appearance of the AVS DVD Player program:
applications.
Controls - use this option to show or hide the main controls panel.
Screen - use this option to show or hide the main screen window.
Playlist - use this option to show or hide the Playlist window.
Go to - use this option to get access to the submenu with the list of all available Titles and
Chapters to freely navigate among them.
Search - use this option to search a specific place in the DVD movie based on its time in the
movie, frame number or chapter number. The option brings up the Search panel .
Playlist - use this option to open Playlist window .
FullScreen - use this option to change the view mode to full screen when the player is in the
Window mode and to Window mode from the Full screen mode. It is the same as to press
the Alt + Enter button combination.
Snapshot - use this option to take the snapshot of the current video file frame. It is the same
as to take the Snapshot button of the AVS DVD Player . See the Preferences section for
more detail on this.
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
System Controls
mouse when the cursor is positioned on the video window. Express Menu buttons are grouped.
The second group is System controls . It consists of the following entries:
Speaker Environment Calibration... - use this option to open the Speaker environment
calibration window and set your position in the room in relation to the speakers.
Speaker Configuration - use this option to switch between main work modes:
Original - in the Original mode the sound of the movie and audio file will remain
unchanged thus letting the you enjoy the advantages of the multichannel sound in case
you have a multichannel acoustic system.
2 (Stereo) - it might be a good idea to use this mode if you watch the movie and listen
to audio using stereo headphones or stereo speakers. AVS DVD Player convert the
sound to two channels to fit your headphones or speakers.
3.1 (Stereo to Surround) - use this mode to watch a movie and listen to audio with
the stereo soundtrack on a 3.1 surround acoustic system to experience the full
spectrum of the surround sound.
spectrum of the Dolby ProLogic sound.
spectrum of the Dolby ProLogic sound.
More Presets - use this mode to select additional presets from the list of available
ones. See the Preferences section for more detail on this.
Aspect Ratio - the ratio of the horizontal and vertical sides to each other. The possible values
include:
Auto - use this option to let the AVS DVD Player select the aspect ratio automatically.
4:3 - use this option to set the aspect ratio fit 4:3 screen.
16:9 - use this option to set the aspect ratio fit 16:9 wide screen.
Custom Ratio... - use this option to set the custom aspect ratio. See the Preferences
section for more detail on this.
Source - use this option to open the source menu that lets you choose the following source
paths for the DVD files and video files:
DVD or CD drives available on your computer - use this option to playback DVDs
and video files from your DVD/CD drive.
Note : the DMA mode should be enabled for proper work of the DVD player in this
mode. See the DVD playback section for more detail.
Open DVD From Folder... - use this option to open a DVD movie stored on your
personal computer hard disk drive. See the DVD files on hard disk drive playback
section for more detail.
Open Video File... - use this option to open a video file on a CD/DVD disc or on your
personal computer hard disk drive. See the Video files playback section for more
detail.
Open Audio File... - use this option to open an audio file on a CD/DVD disc or on your
personal computer hard disk drive. See the Audio files playback section for more
detail.
Preferences - use this option to set the additional AVS DVD Player settings. See the
Preferences section for more detail on this.
Note : selecting the Source menu entry is the same as to press the Select source
of the AVS DVD Player .
button
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
DVD Menu Controls
The third group is DVD menu controls . It consists of the following entries:
Audio Language - use this option to quickly switch between the available languages of the
DVD movie when the player is in the Play mode. You can also use this option to choose
between the available languages of any video file if the file contains several languages.
Subtitle - use this option to quickly switch between the available subtitles of the DVD movie
when the player is in the Play mode. The option also allows to switch the subtitles on or off.
Disc menus - use this option to quickly switch to the available DVD movie menus. It is the
same as to press the Menu
Audio Streams - use this option if your video file contains more than one audio track. You
can select Track 1 and Track 2 , for instance, if your video movie has two audio streams in
it.
Region settings... - use this option to set the region of the DVD drive. See the Preferences
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
Additional Player Controls
The fourth group is Additional player controls . It consists of the following entries:
Help - use this option to open this Help file . It is the same as to press the Help button of
the AVS DVD Player .
About the AVS DVD Player - use this option to open the information window about the
AVS DVD Player .
Exit <Ctrl + X> - use this option to close the application and finish the work with the AVS
DVD Player . It is the same as to click the close box in the upper-right hand corner of the
AVS DVD Player .
AVS4YOU
AVS DVD Player
Playlist Express Menu
Playlist express menu is a quick and handy feature. It can be activated by clicking on the right
button of the mouse when the cursor is positioned on the Playlist window. Express menu buttons are
grouped.
The first group is Playback controls . It consists of the following entries:
Play - use this option to start playback when the player is in the Stop mode and to resume
playback when the player is in Pause or Step frame mode. It is the same as to press the
Play
Pause - use this option to pause the playback when the player is in the Play mode to pause
the media file playback. It is the same as to press the Pause
button of the AVS DVD
Player .
Stop - use this option to stop the playback when the player is in the Play mode to cancel the
media file playback. It is the same as to press the Stop
The second group is Playback order options. It consists of the following entries:
Shuffle - use this option to randomize the media files playback order.
The third group is Files management controls . It consists of the following entries:
Add - use this option to add files and folders with files to the playlist:
Add DVD video - use this option to add DVD folders to the playlist.
Add folder - use this option to add folders with media files to the playlist.
Add files - use this option to add separate media files to the playlist.
Playlist - use this option to perform operations with the file lists:
Add list - use this option to add a playlist to the current one in the Playlist window.
Load list - use this option to load a previously saved playlist.
Save list - use this option to save the current list of the media files as a playlist.
New list - use this option to start creating a new playlist.
Sort list - use this option to change the order of the files on the list and to sort them
alphabetically.
Remove - use this option to remove different files and groups of files:
Remove selected - use this option to delete the selected files from the playlist.
Remove all - use this option to delete all the files from the playlist and clear it.
Crop - use this option to delete all unselected files from the playlist and leave only
selected ones.
View - use this option to select the appearance of the AVS DVD Player program:
applications.
Controls - use this option to show or hide the main controls panel.
Screen - use this option to show or hide the main screen window.
Playlist - use this option to show or hide the Playlist window.
The fourth group is Preferences controls . It consists of the following entries:
Preferences - use this option to set the additional AVS DVD Player settings. See the
Preferences section for more detail on this.
AVS4YOU
AVS DV to DVD
Overview
AVS DV to DVD is used to transfer video from DV cameras to DVD or your computer hard disk drive.
You can cut the unnecessary scenes, and create DVDs with menus or save it as MPEG-2 video on your
computer. Simply leave the scenes you need, delete the ones you don't.
To start AVS DV to DVD go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Video ->
AVS DV to DVD .
AVS4YOU
AVS DV to DVD
Main Window
The main window of the AVS DV to DVD program consists of the following main parts:
Main Panes - the panes that let the user switch between the work modes.
Preview Area - the area that shows the current position of the cursor and in case the
selection is made - the starting and the ending selection points.
Capture Controls - the controls used to quickly navigate through video and control the DV
camera.
Timeline - the tool that lets the user make the principal selections of the areas to be deleted.
Deletion Toolbar - the toolbar with the main action buttons that let the user perform basic
deletion operations with video files.
Player Buttons - the buttons that let the user navigate - playback, stop, rewind - through
the captured video file.
Status Bar - the panel that shows the current selected positions on the Timeline .
See the appropriate sections for more detail on each of the main window component.
AVS4YOU
AVS DV to DVD
Main Panes
The Main Panes are placed in the left part of the AVS DV to DVD window and consist of the following
items that let the user quickly and conveniently switch between the work modes:
Menu
Description
Use this button to switch into Capture mode, where you can
select a DV camera (if you have several connected to your
computer), configure the selected camera, set the capture mode
and the temporary files place, and capture video from the
camera.
Use this button to switch into Preview Video mode, where you
can navigate through the video files that you have captured in
the Capture mode. You will be able to playback the video files,
stop them, rewind them fast forward and backward, and also
select the necessary episodes to be deleted. You will be also able
to add markers to create chapters and add them to the DVD
menu afterwards.
Use this button to switch into Create DVD Menu , where you
can customize the menu for your captured video files. You can
add chapters to the menu and select its style from the preset
list. It is also possible to test the created menu using the
Remote Control Emulator that has the functions of a hardware
DVD player remote control.
AVS4YOU
AVS DV to DVD
Top Menu
The Top Menu consists of the following items that let the user quickly and conveniently access the
main program functions:
Menu
Item
Shortcut
Save Now!
Ctrl+R
Description
Used to begin the scenes deletion and file
saving process.
File
Used to close the AVS DV to DVD window and
finish the work with the program.
Exit
Undo
Ctrl+Z
Redo
Shift+Ctrl+Z
Add Area of
Deletion
Remove Area
of Deletion
Edit
Remove All
Areas of
Deletion
Used to redo the last undone action.
Del
Used to add the area that is going to be
deleted after the Start button is pressed. See
the Deleting Scenes section for more detail
on this.
Ctrl+D
Used to remove the currently selected area
that is going to be deleted after the Start
button is pressed. See the Deleting Scenes
Shift+Ctrl+D
Used to remove all the selected areas to be
deleted after the Start button is pressed. See
the Deleting Scenes section for more detail
on this.
Invert
Selections
Used to change places between the selections
and the deselected areas.
Go to Start
Frame
Home
Used to quickly move to the video start frame.
Go to End
Frame
End
Used to quickly move to the video end frame.
Selection
Range...
F4
Capture
View
Used to undo the last performed action.
Used to switch to video capturing mode.
Preview Video
Used to switch to video preview mode.
DVD Menu
Help
Used to open the selection range window to set
the precise selection boundaries.
Used to switch to DVD menu creation mode.
F1
Used to open the help file.
Technical
Support
Used to write an e-mail to the AVS4YOU
technical support using your default e-mail
client.
Help
AVS on the
web
About...
Used to go to the AVS4YOU web site.
Used to open the About window with the
information on the AVS DV to DVD program.
AVS4YOU
AVS DV to DVD
Timeline and Preview Area
The Timeline tool is used to navigate quickly and easily through your captured video. You can make
selections using the Timeline . To do that just click the left mouse button and drag the slider along
the navigation line. The selected area will become highlighted:
To further ease the use of the Timeline the following controls are used:
Control
Caption
Description
Zoom in
Used to scale up the area displayed in the Timeline .
Zoom out
Used to scale down the area displayed in the Timeline .
Full zoom
Used to display the whole video file area in the Timeline .
Selection
Shows the current selection of the video file on the Timeline
.
Mark start
Marks the current cursor position as the beginning of the
deletion area.
Mark end
Marks the current cursor position as the end of the deletion
area.
You can control all the changes and selections you make using the Preview area . In case you select
some area of the video file, the first window of the Preview area will show the beginning frame of the
selection and the second one - the ending frame of the selection.
You can also set the precise boundaries of the selection you make. To do that click the Set Selection
Range button of the Deletion Toolbar or the Selection Range... item in the Top Menu . The
following window will be opened:
You can set the selection starting point (hours: minutes: seconds: thousandths of seconds) and the
final point for the selection (hours: minutes: seconds: thousandths of seconds). If the View changes
immediately option is marked, you will be able to see the changes in the Preview Area in real time
when you make them. But it can slow down the process of the boundaries change especially when
editing very long files. So it could be advisable to unmark this option, change the selection boundaries
and click the respective Set button to see the changes of the selection starting or final point.
AVS4YOU
AVS DV to DVD
Deletion Toolbar
The Deletion Toolbar consists of the action buttons that let the user quickly and conveniently access
the main program functions:
The buttons possess the following functionality:
Button
Caption
Description
Set Selection
Range
Used to open the Selection Range window to let the
user set the exact range of the selection area.
Invert Areas of
Deletion
Used to change places between the areas of deletion and
the areas that will be left in the video.
Add Area of
Deletion
Used to add the area that is going to be deleted after the
Start button is pressed. See the Deleting Scenes
Remove Area of
Deletion
Used to remove the currently selected area that is going
to be deleted after the Start button is pressed. See the
Deleting Scenes section for more detail on this.
Remove All
Areas of
Deletion
Used to remove all the selected areas to be deleted after
the Start button is pressed. See the Deleting Scenes
Undo
Redo
AVS4YOU
AVS DV to DVD
Camera Controls Toolbar
The Camera Controls Toolbar consists of the action buttons that let the user quickly and
conveniently navigate through the recording and control the DV camera right from the AVS DV to
DVD program:
Button
Caption
Description
Play
Used to playback the video recording stored on the camera cassette.
Pause
Used to pause the playback of the video recording stored on the
camera cassette.
Stop
Used to stop the playback of the video recording stored on the
camera cassette.
Step Frame
Forward
Used to step a frame forward in the video recording stored on the
camera cassette. Can be used for precise navigation.
Step Frame
Back
Used to step a frame backward in the video recording stored on the
camera cassette. Can be used for precise navigation.
Fast Forward
Used to go a fast forward in the video recording stored on the
camera cassette to skip the unnecessary episodes. When pushed
after the play button is pressed the preview will be enabled.
Fast Backward
Used to go a fast backward in the video recording stored on the
camera cassette to skip the unnecessary episodes. When pushed
after the play button is pressed the preview will be enabled.
Preview on/off
Used to turn the preview of the recording on the cassette on and off.
Sound on/off
Used to turn the sound of the recording on the cassette on and off.
AVS4YOU
AVS DV to DVD
Player Buttons
The Player buttons are used to navigate through the video file.
They comprise the following controls:
Button
Caption
Description
Start Play
Used to start playback of the video file.
Stop Play
Used to stop the playback, fast forward and fast backward functions.
Fast Backward
Used to quickly go back through the video file. Every time use press
the button the speed of the fast backward function is changed to 2x,
4x, 8x, 16x and 20x, and then back to 2x.
Fast Forward
Used to quickly go forward through the video file. Every time use
press the button the speed of the fast forward function is changed to
2x, 4x, 8x, 16x and 20x, and then back to 2x.
Go to Start
Frame
Used to quickly go to the very first frame in the video file.
One Frame
Back
Used to go one frame back from the current position.
One Frame
Forward
Used to go one frame forward from the current position.
Go to End
Frame
Used to quickly go to the very last frame in the video file.
Previous Scene
Used to quickly go to the beginning of the scene that precedes the
current one.
Next Scene
Used to quickly go to the beginning of the scene that follows the
current one.
AVS4YOU
AVS DV to DVD
Status Bar
The Status Bar shows the current selections values of the video file:
Selection
(hh:mm:ss.ms)
Start
Shows the beginning time of the current selection made in the
video file.
Selection
(hh:mm:ss.ms)
End
Shows the ending time of the current selection made in the video
file.
Deletion
(hh:mm:ss.ms)
Start
Deletion End (hh:mm:ss.ms)
Shows the beginning time of the last selection added for deletion.
Shows the ending time of the last selection added for deletion.
AVS4YOU
AVS DV to DVD
Keyboard Shortcuts
AVS DV to DVD interface allows you to use keyboard shortcuts to facilitate the access to the main
program features:
Shortcut Key
Del
Ctrl+D
Ctrl+Shift+D
Left Arrow
Right Arrow
Function
Add area of deletion
Remove area of deletion
Remove all areas of deletion
Move the selection or cursor to the left on the Timeline
Move the selection or cursor to the right on the Timeline
Alt+Left Arrow
Move the selection or cursor 10 frames to the left on the Timeline
Ctrl+Left Arrow
Alt+Right Arrow
Move the selection or cursor 10 frames to the right on the Timeline
Ctrl+Right Arrow
Home
End
Down Arrow
Up Arrow
Shift+Right Arrow
Go to the beginning of the video
Go to the end of the video
Go to the beginning of the selection
Go to the end of the selection
Enlarge the selection by 1 frame
Alt+Shift+Right Arrow
Enlarge the selection by 10 frames
Ctrl+Shift+Right Arrow
Shift+End
Shift+Home
Shift+Left Arrow
Alt+Shift+Left Arrow
Ctrl+Shift+Left
Enlarge the selection to the end of the video
Enlarge the selection to the beginning of the video
Narrow the selection by 1 frame
Narrow the selection by 10 frames
+
Zoom in
-
Zoom out
/
Full zoom
Space
Start/stop playback
Ctrl+R
Start saving video
Ctrl+Z
Undo the last performed action
Shift+Ctrl+Z
Redo the last performed action
Ctrl+O
Open video file
Ctrl+1
Quickly switch to Capture pane
Ctrl+2
Quickly switch to Preview Video pane
Ctrl+3
Quickly switch to Create DVD Menu pane
F8
Add chapters for DVD menu creation
F4
Open Selection Range window
F1
Open help file
AVS4YOU
AVS DV to DVD
Capturing Video
Capturing process is really very easy. You will need to connect your DV camera to your personal
computer using FireWire (IEEE 1394) or USB cable, depending on what is supported by your computer
and your camera. After that you can launch the AVS DV to DVD program.
It will be opened with the following window:
Here you can set the following parameters:
Select miniDV camera - use this option to select the camera you need from the drop-down
list if you have several of them connected to your personal computer.
Select capture mode - use this option to set the mode, used to capture your video. Two
modes are to select from - Capture the entire tape automatically and Capture parts of
the tape manually . The first is used to copy the entire tape and the second should be used
if you will need to select what to capture and what to skip.
Select temporary directory - use this option to set the directory on your computer hard
disk drive where the temporary files will be stored.
Note : you will need quite a lot of free space - up to several dozens of Gigabytes - to
store captured video. The temporary files will be deleted once the program is closed.
You can also use the information displayed to see if the capturing process goes smoothly:
Capturing information :
Time (hours:minutes:seconds) - the length of the captured video.
File size (Megabytes) - the size of the captured video on your computer hard disk drive.
CPU Usage (percent) - the current processor load.
Summary information :
Time (hours:minutes:seconds) - the total length of all the captured video files.
Size (Megabytes) - the total size of all the captured video on your computer hard disk drive.
Files count - the number of files that have been captured.
You will also be able to see the free space on the hard drive partition used to store temporary files.
Before you start capturing the video from the camera, you might need to navigate through it to find
the exact place. Please use the Camera Controls Toolbar to do that.
To start capturing video, set the parameters above and press the Start Capture button. To stop the
capturing process click the Stop Capture button.
After all the video is captured you can view the resulting files in Preview Video mode, search and
delete scenes or go to Create DVD Menu mode.
AVS4YOU
AVS DV to DVD
Deleting Scenes in Preview Video Mode
To delete the unwanted scenes in the Preview Video mode you will need to switch into this mode
using the appropriate button of the Main Panes . After that select the scene with the mouse. First
select the beginning of the scene with the left mouse button and without releasing it drag it to the
ending limit of the scene. You can move the boundaries after that with the mouse.
Use the Zoom buttons to change the scale of the movie on the Timeline . This is done to simplify the
accurate search for the place where the scene begins and ends:
- use this button to scale up the video timeline representation, that
is very useful when you would like to find the exact place in your
captured video;
- use this button to scale down the video timeline representation,
that can be useful when you search for the next place in your
captured video;
- use this button to return to actual video representation in the
Timeline , that can be useful to view all the changes you've made
to your captured video.
After you select an area with the mouse or using the Selection Range window, you can use the
Delete buttons of the Deletion Toolbar to set the deletion areas:
- use this button to add an area of deletion, it will be
added to the area that is currently selected and
highlighted in the lower part of the Timeline ;
- use this button to remove the currently selected
area of deletion, you can select it just clicking it with
the left mouse button;
- use this button to remove all the areas of deletion
that you currently have on the Timeline , you can
make new selections afterwards.
After you make all the selections and set all the areas of deletions, you can press the Save Now!
button to start the scenes removing process. The Save File window will open:
Here you can select the output file Name , destination Path , video Format and decide whether you
would like to save all the parts of the file, that will be formed after the deletions are made, into one file
or into several files. See the Saving the Captured Video section for more on that. The Burn movie
to disc after processing option is also available. When it is enabled, the AVS DV to DVD will record
the resulting files onto an optical disc using the internal burn engine. After that you will need to press
the Start button and will see the deletion progress on the progress bar. It will take some time
depending on the file length and your computer configuration.
Note : the program will let you save the video into MPEG2/DVD PAL or NTSC format, that can be
selected in the Format drop-down list.
AVS4YOU
AVS DV to DVD
Creating DVD Menus
After capturing the video it might be useful to create DVD menu for it. To do that click the Create
DVD Menu button of the Main Panes . The program will change view:
You can also Change background or even Customize your DVD menu using the respective buttons.
In the right part of the program window the DVD Chapters area is placed. It lets you select the
episodes that will be used as chapters in your movie:
To add chapters, please click with the mouse cursor within the Timeline area in the place, where you
want the chapter to begin. After that use the Add button to create a chapter. The same way all the
other chapters are created. You can delete the unwanted chapters using the Remove button or all the
chapters using the Clear button.
AVS4YOU
AVS DV to DVD
Saving the Captured Video
It sometimes might be necessary to split one video file into several parts or, quite the other way
round, save several separate captured files as a single one. To do that you should do the following:
Capture video with AVS DV to DVD in the Capture mode.
Select the unnecessary scenes to be cut out in the Preview Video work modes. Mark them
for deletion using the Deletion Toolbar .
Use the Player Buttons in the Preview Video mode to make sure that you marked the right
scenes for deletion.
If necessary Create DVD Menu in the appropriate mode.
When all the preparations are made, click the Save Now! button to start processing of the
file. The following window will open:
Here you can select the output file Name , destination Path and video Format .
If you plan to split the file into several parts, select the Save all sections into separate
files option. All the episodes present between the areas of deletion will be saved as separate
files having the same name as has been selected but with the ordinal notation added (1, 2, 3
and so on) after the selected file name.
If you plan to merge several files into one or if you do not plan to split the single file into
separate parts, select the Save all sections into a single file option. All the sections of the
single file together with all the video files in the file list will be joined into one single file.
Note : the Split option is only available if you save your captured video into MPEG2 format and is
disabled for DVD video.
The Burn movie to disc after processing option is also available. If you mark it, AVS DV to DVD
will record the resulting files onto an optical disc using the internal burn engine. After that you will
need to press the Start button and will see the deletion progress on the progress bar. It will take some
time depending on the file length and your computer configuration.
AVS4YOU
AVS iDevice Explorer
Overview
AVS iDevice Explorer can be used to copy audio and video files between your computer and portable
devices: mobile phones, portable video and music players. For example you can synchronize content
between two iPods or iPod and a mobile phone or PC and iPod, etc. AVS iDevice Explorer supports
USB, Bluetooth and Infrared connections.
All major portables on today market are supported - Sony PSP , Apple iPod , Archos DVR
AV500/AV700 , 404/504/604 , Samsung YP series players , Epson P-2000/P-4000 ,
SanDisk Sansa e200 series players , iRiver H10 player , Portable Media Player (PMP) ,
mobile phones for GSM and CDMA networks.
To start AVS iDevice Explorer go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU ->
Mobiles -> AVS iDevice Explorer .
AVS4YOU
Program Interface
AVS iDevice Explorer has a simple and intuitive user-friendly interface that looks like follows:
The Top Menu and the Top Toolbar -
- have the following items and buttons:
Menu
Item
Open
Properties
Top
Toolbar
Button
Shortcut
Description
Used to open the selected folder/file using
the default program associated with the
file.
Used to open the window
selected file/folder properties.
with
the
Select All
Used to select all files and folders in the
chosen panel.
Deselect
All
Used to deselect all the files and folders in
the chosen panel.
Invert
Selection
Used to invert the selection - make the
selected files/folders deselected and vice
versa.
File
Exit
Alt+F4
Used to close AVS iDevice Explorer and
exit.
Back
Ctrl+Z
Used to return to the previously used
directory.
Forward
Ctrl+Y
Used to go to the next directory (available
only if the Back command has already
been used).
Fast
Detect
Devices
F4
Used to quickly refresh the list of the
devices connected to your personal
computer.
Used to perform a full search for all the
devices connected to your personal
computer. All the newly connected
Bluetooth devices will be also found.
Full
Detect
Devices
Commands
View
Refresh
F2
Used to refresh the
current folder.
contents
of the
New
Folder
F7
Used to create a new folder in the current
directory.
Delete
Files
F8
Used to delete the selected files/folders.
Rename
File
F6
Used to rename the selected file/folder.
Copy Files
F5
Used to copy the selected files/folders to
the directory in the other panel.
Show
Tree
Ctrl+T
Used to show/hide the directory tree
view.
Vertical /
Horizontal
Splitting
F3
Used to arrange the panels vertically or
horizontally.
Used to go to the AVS4YOU home page
and register the program.
Register
Help
Help
F1
Used to open this help file.
As can be seen from the figure above some of the Top Toolbar buttons and Top Menu items are
duplicated in the Express Menu that can be opened with the right mouse button. This is done to
facilitate the user's access to the program main commands and features.
To start working with AVS iDevice Explorer , connect your mobile devices to your personal computer
and see the next chapter for detail.
AVS4YOU
Working with Mobile Devices
Working with mobile devices using AVS iDevice Explorer is quite easy and does not require any additional
software or knowledge. It comprises the following steps:
1. Connect your mobile device to your personal computer using the connection type supported by this
exact device - Bluetooth, Infrared or USB.
Note : to use Bluetooth or Infrared connection you might need a proper adapter connected to
your computer as well. To use the USB connection simply use a proper USB cable.
2. Launch AVS iDevice Explorer . The list of the connected mobile devices will be automatically
updated and you will see them in the panels.
3. Alter the view of the AVS iDevice Explorer window so that it would suit you needs and taste better.
For instance, you can change the panels layout from vertical to horizontal and bring into view the
directory tree in one or both panels. Use the Show Tree
button to do that:
4. Select (using the mouse or with the keyboard) the files and folders on your computer or one of the
mobile devices to be sent to the other mobile device or downloaded to your computer hard disk
drive.
5. Select the destination folder on your mobile or computer where the files/folders should be placed.
5.
Note : some devices would not understand and playback certain types of files (e.g. audio,
video) if they are not placed in the correct folder on this device - i.e. Music or Video folder or
alike. Such devices usually have an Inbox folder in their folder structure, so if you are not sure
where to place a file, you can copy it into the device Inbox folder and the device will relocate
the file into the correct folder itself.
You can also create a folder if it does not exist, using the New Folder
existing one, using the Rename
6. Click the Copy button
button or rename an
button.
to start the copying process.
Note : it might take some time if the size of the files is large. Please note that in case the video
or audio format is not supported by the target device, AVS iDevice Explorer will ask you
whether it should convert it into a compatible format:
If you agree to convert the file, the program will show the conversion progress for you:
Note : in case you decline the file conversion, the selected file will be uploaded to the selected
device anyway but in this case there is a possibility that the device will be unable to playback
the uploaded file.
Once the conversion is over, the uploading will continue automatically.
And that's it!
After the uploading is done you can upload more files or finish the work with AVS iDevice Explorer .
AVS4YOU
AVS iRadio Recorder
Overview
AVS iRadio Recorder is a wizard-styled application, which allows you to record music off the internet
radio. With the help of this utility you will be able to manage radio stations, search for a needed radio
station, schedule your recording sessions, split the audio stream into separate files according to song
names.
Radio playback option allows you to listen to what you are about to record. Audio is recorded in MP3
format.
To start AVS iRadio Recorder go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Audio
-> AVS iRadio Recorder .
AVS4YOU
AVS iRadio Recorder
AVS iRadio Recorder wizard starts with the Step 1 window. You will find a list of default stations,
randomly picked. You can choose a station from this list or select the Search Other Stations option
to carry out a radio station search. Here you can also delete the stations from default Favorites list.
When you select the Search Other Stations option, the AVS iRadio Recorder will open the station
search window:
Here you can configure your search options. Select Top 10! option to show the list of ten most sited
radio stations or Most Popular to pick from a list of 20 most popular stations. Select Advanced
option to configure advanced search. At this step you can search stations according to Genre ,
Bitrate , by Keywords . You can also choose the number of stations to be reflected within a single
page. The maximum stations display number is 100.
Click Start Search button to search for the stations after you finished configuring search parameters.
After you have searched for the stations, pick the one you need to record from. Click Listen to make
sure you have found the station you need. You can also add stations to the Favorite list, and they will
be displayed at the startup of the AVS iRadio Recorder .
After everything is ready, you can click Next>> to proceed to the second step .
AVS4YOU
AVS iRadio Recorder
Step 2: Configure Recording Options
At Step Two of the AVS iRadio Recorder program you can set the recording options:
Manual - use this option to control the recording manually.
Auto Split By Name - use this option to split the audio stream automatically according to the
name of the played song into separate files.
Run Schedule - use this option to schedule your recording session.
If you are scheduling your recording session, you should specify the time of the beginning and end.
Make sure that beginning time is not earlier than your current time! You can also enable or disable
auto split by song name option, ticking the corresponding check-box under the time settings. After you
finished please click the the Next>> button to pass to the Recording and verification step.
AVS4YOU
AVS iRadio Recorder
Step 3: Recording and Verification
When you have configured recording options and passed to Step 3 , AVS iRadio Recorder changes
to a recording window:
The radio will start playing after you mark the Turn On Radio check-box. To mute the sound check
the Mute check-box. To start the recording press the Record button. To pause or stop the recording
press the Stop or Pause button accordingly.
After you finished recording you can verify the newly recorded file to make sure the quality is good.
Please use the following buttons to verify your file:
To playback the selected
file
Ringtone Maker .
AVS iRadio Recorder also allows you to modify extra text information in existing files. To do that
click the File Info button and the Information window will appear.
After you finished, please click the Previous button to return to the second step and change the
recording settings or Close to finish the work with the AVS iRadio Recorder program.
AVS4YOU
AVS Mobile Uploader
Overview
AVS Mobile Uploader is a wizard-styled application, which allows you to upload the media files from
your personal computer to your mobile devices: mobile phone, personal digital assistant, Sony PSP
and alike.
Device selection option allows you to choose between different mobile devices depending on means of
their connection to your personal computer.
To start AVS Mobile Uploader go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU ->
Mobiles -> AVS Mobile Uploader .
AVS4YOU
AVS Mobile Uploader
Using AVS Mobile Uploader
First of all you should select the type of device you would like to upload your media file to:
Press Find Devices button to start searching for the available mobile devices.
After that you should select one of the devices to which you would like to upload your media files using
the drop-down box.
Now you can select the media files that you would like to upload to your mobile device.
Buttons
Description
Used to select one or several media files that should be uploaded to your mobile
device and add them to the list.
Used to select a folder containing media files that you would like to upload to your
mobile device and add them to the list.
Used to remove the selected media file from the list of the files that you would like
to upload to your mobile device.
Used to remove all the media files from the list of the files that you would like to
upload to your mobile device.
After you are satisfied with the list of the media files that you would like to send to the mobile device
press the Upload >> button to start the uploading process.
The duration of the upload process depends on the number of media files selected, their size and the
type of the communication used between the personal computer and the mobile device selected.
You can upload the same files to a different device using the drop-down box to select a new device.
Note : if you upload your files to an Apple iPod, while it is connected to your personal computer it
will show the message of the type:
You can still disconnect your iPod from the computer, no data will be lost in case you haven't tried
to copy it to iPod using some other software.
AVS4YOU
AVS MP3 Disc Creator
Overview
AVS MP3 Disc Creator is a compact full-featured application, which allows you to easily create MP3,
WMA and AAC audio CDs from MP3, WAV, OGG and other digital music formats, so that you can listen
to your favorite music at any MP3 CD-player such as hardware CD player, musical centers, car audio.
It allows you to create MP3, WMA and AAC CDs for playing them with any MP3 compatible CD-player,
record R/RW discs on-the-fly without need to create intermediate uncompressed file at your hard
drive, erase the information from a CD-RW and visually judge the progress of the writing process.
To start AVS MP3 Disc Creator go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU ->
Burning -> AVS MP3 Disc Creator .
AVS4YOU
AVS MP3 Disc Creator wizard starts with the Step 1 window. Please select the CD-RW drive you are
going to use for audio CD creation. If you have only one CD-RW drive at your computer, it'll be chosen
by default.
After that you will need to set the output file parameters.
Note : it's possible to change Bitrate of output MP3 files. See also Available MP3 Parameters
Combinations .
You can also select to reconvert the source files with the parameters set above. It means, that all the
files, even of the same type, having bitrate different from the selected one will be converted so that
their bitrate were equal to the set value.
When you are ready, please click the Next>> button to proceed to the next step.
AVS4YOU
Step 2: Adding Files and Burning Disc
At Step 2 AVS MP3 Disc Creator will suggest that you create file structure of your MP3 CD. In
Directories part you can create and rename directories, and in Name part you can see all of the files
that the highlighted directory contains.
Note : you can add separate files as well as folders containing audio files.
To add files or folders or remove them from the list please use Add file(s) , Add Folder and
Remove buttons accordingly. To create a new folder in Directories part please use Create Folder
button. If you right click the Directories list you can find an additional menu, which allows you to
perform the following operations:
Operation
Add Files...
Add Folder...
Remove
Remove all
Rename
Keyboard Shortcut
Ins
Shift+Ins
Del
Shift+Del
F2
Right click menu at the Name part differs from the one described above. It allows you to:
Operation
Add Files...
Add Folder...
Remove
Remove all
Keyboard Shortcut
Ins
Shift+Ins
Del
Shift+Del
Select All
Ctrl+A
File Info..
Ctrl+F
Rename
F2
Selecting File Info... item from this menu allows you to call up the Information window where you can
add extra text information about the highlighted file, such as Track number , Artist , Title ,
Comments and others. To save the entered information click the Save button, to load the extra text
information contained in the existing file use Reload button.
You can also control the size of added files with the help of Size Control Bar :
To make sure you've chosen the correct file you can play it directly from AVS MP3 Disc Creator . In
order to do that highlight the necessary file in the Name list and use the following buttons:
To pause the selected
file
To go to the previous file
To go to the next file
Seeking Bar cursor
and drag it.
The writing process will start after clicking the Burn>> button. You can visually judge the completion
of writing process with the Progress Bar .
You can also cancel writing process by clicking the Cancel button.
AVS4YOU
AVS Music Mix
Overview
AVS Music Mix is a compact and simple loop-based music composition and production tool for original
music creation. The application allows you to save the created music or a part of the project with such
popular audio formats as MP3, WAV, AMR, AAC, WMA and M4A. This easy program provides the most
powerful, user-friendly environment for music and songs creation.
AVS Music Mix software has more than 120 loops included into installation, plus the additional loops
package is available for registered users at www.avs4you.com .
Note : you can also import any supported audio to AVS Music Mix to improve or change it.
AVS Music Mix also gives you an ability to add various audio effects and filters, fade them in and out.
To start AVS Music Mix go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Audio ->
AVS Music Mix .
AVS4YOU
AVS Music Mix
Interface Description
The interface of AVS Music Mix application could be metaphorically divided into five parts. They are:
Top Toolbar
Explorer
Timeline
Explorer Player Toolbar
Timeline Player Toolbar
AVS4YOU
AVS Music Mix
Top Toolbar
Top Toolbar contains the following main buttons to let the user perform common operations quickly.
You can find the description of each button in the table below:
Button
Name
Description
Delete samples
from collection
Use this button to delete the selected sample(s) from the
collection.
Import your audio
track
Use this button to import any supported audio file to AVS Music
Mix .
Sample sounds
from Internet
Samples/Effects
New project
Use this button to load samples from the AVS4YOU web site.
Use this button to switch between the Effects and Samples
mode.
Use this button to create a new project.
Save mix-project
Use this button to save the created project.
Load mix-project
Use this button to load an existing project.
Delete all tracks
Use this button to delete all of the tracks from the Timeline .
Delete the selected
track
Use this button to delete the highlighted track from the
Timeline .
Duplicate the
selected track
Use this button to duplicated the highlighted track at the
Timeline .
Add new line
Delete loop
Duplicate loop
Add loop from the
selected collection
Undo
Use this button to add a new empty track to the Timeline .
Use this button to delete the highlighted loop.
Use this button to duplicate the highlighted loop.
Use this button to add loop from the collection to the Timeline .
Use this button to undo Timeline operation.
Redo
Show Help
Use this button to redo Timeline operation.
Use this button to run AVS4YOU programs Help file.
Use this button to save the created project or the selected part
of it into one of the supported digital audio formats.
AVS4YOU
AVS Music Mix
Explorer
At Explorer part you can find the collections containing loops or imported audio tracks.
Note : you can organize the imported files into collection for their further comfortable use in your
project.
To play a loop or imported audio just double click it in the Explorer part. You also can use Explorer
Player Toolbar . You can find the description of each button in the table below:
Button
Name
Description
Play Loop
Use this button to play the selected loop from the collection.
Stop
Use this button to stop playing the loop.
Repeat Play
Use this button to replay the selected sample from the
collection.
To import audio to AVS Music Mix:
1. Click the Import your audio track button.
2. In standard explorer window please select file(s) to be imported.
3. Select the location for the imported files. It could be one of the existing collections or you can
create a new one. Note that you can set the name of new created collection.
3.
4. Click the Import button.
AVS4YOU
AVS Music Mix
Timeline
AVS Music Mix has an easy to use working area which has a set of buttons. They let the user
introduce various effects and modify the parameters of these effects.
AVS Music Mix allows you to apply one or several audio tracks/loops to your project. For convenience
of use you can change the sequence of audio reflection or resize them at the Timeline. It's possible to
create one track using fragments from several tracks. The simplest way to do that is use drag-anddrop method.
Note : this is how the way of displaying the whole audio track differs from the trimmed one:
Whole
Audio
Track
Trimmed
Audio
Track
Timeline Toolbar
Timeline toolbar allows to perform tasks such as introducing the limits of effect, boundaries of fade-in
and fade-out areas, zooming in or out the details of your media.
Button
Description
Zooms the selection in
Zooms the selection out
100% view
Frames navigation
Active Track
Passive Track
Envelope
At each audio track reflected at the Timeline you can see an envelope that depicts the volume
control. You can regulate it differently according to your project's details. To add a control point to the
envelope, double-click within the envelope line (where the mouse cursor changes to a hand) and drag
the control point to the location where you want it.
To move a point on the envelope, click and hold the point and drag it to a new location.
Note : in case you move the point more than 20 pixels over the track line up or down, the point
will be deleted. You can use this feature to create smooth transition between two tracks. When the
mouse cursor is located over a point, you will see it change from an arrow to a rhombus.
Selection
To select a part of your project, click the left mouse button and drag the slider along the navigation
line. The selected area will be highlighted.
Timeline Player Toolbar
Timeline Player Toolbar consists of four buttons. See the detailed description of each button in the
table below:
Button
Name
Description
Play Mix
Use this button to play your project from the beginning to the
end.
Stop
Use this button to stop playing.
Play from current
position to the end
Use this button to play from current cursor position to the end of
your project.
Repeat Play
Use this button to replay.
AVS4YOU
AVS Music Mix
Saving
AVS Music Mix offers the opportunity to save the created audio project in several common audio
formats. To save the whole project click the Save/Upload>> button at the Top Toolbar . The
program will suggest you to select the output file format and specify the output file format parameters
such as Sample rate (Frequency) , Bitrate and Channels .
It is also possible to save a part of your project as a separate file. For that please select the necessary
part at the Timeline and click Save/Upload>>
Note : it is possible to specify Fine tuning parameters for MP3 format clicking the Advanced...
button. You can find the detailed information about these settings in the Appendix section. See
also:
If you would like to upload the created audio to your mobile phone, make sure that it supports the
format that you have selected, and click the Upload>> button. See the AVS Mobile Uploader
program description for more detail on how to use it.
AVS4YOU
AVS Music Mix
Working with Projects
Creating a project
At AVS Music start pane please select Create new mix-project item and click Next>> .
After that you should enter the file name for your project and set it's location. Click the Browse...
button to open the standard Windows explorer menu and select the project location. After you are
done, click the Finish button to finish creating a project. Please take into account that you will get an
info message in case a project with the name you have typed already exists.
Saving a project
Saving your project lets you keep your current work, and then later open the file in Music Mix to
make further changes. You can continue editing your project from where you left off when you last
saved the project. When you save a project, the arrangement of loops added to the timeline and any
other changes you have made are retained. To save the created project click the Save mix-project
button
.
Opening existing projects
You can use Open existing mix-project item in Welcome to AVS Music Mix window, that opens
on the application start, and click Open... button. After that select the project to be opened in the
standard explorer window and click Open . To open an existing project when the program is running,
you should click the Load mix-project button
. After that select the project to be opened in the
standard explorer window and click Open .
Editing projects
To start a project and begin creating your music masterpiece, you need to add the imported audio to
the Timeline . The loops on timeline become the contents of your project. The timeline displays your
work in progress, as it reflects the timing of loops.
AVS4YOU
AVS Music Mix
Effects and Filters
AVS Music Mix gives you an opportunity to apply various effects and filters to your mix projects.
Using them you can achieve the desired sound. Below is the list of all the effects and filters and their
brief description.
Effects and Filters:
Amplify
Low Pass
High Pass
Band Pass
Notch Filter
Low Shelf
High Shelf
Vibrato
Delay
Pitch Shift
Flanger
Chorus
Reverberation
Compressor
Expander
Normalize
Phaser
Amplify
This function enables you to apply the same amount of gain change throughout the audio file.
[Back to the Top ]
Low Pass
The Low Pass filter lets you hear only low frequencies; it blocks higher frequencies.
[Back to the Top ]
High Pass
High Pass filter lets you hear only high frequencies. It attenuates frequencies below the certain cutoff
frequency.
[Back to the Top ]
Band Pass
The Band Pass filter lets you hear a certain band of frequencies within an upper and lower range.
Frequencies above and below this band are attenuated. The distance between the higher and lower
cutoff frequencies in a band pass filter is called the bandwidth of the filter. The center frequency of a
band pass filter is the maximum point of amplitude.
[Back to the Top ]
Notch Filter
The Notch Filter cuts specified frequency from audio data.
[Back to the Top ]
Low Shelf
The Low Shelf filter boosts or cuts frequencies below the cutoff, and passes frequencies above the
shelf cutoff with no change made to their gain. Use this effect to enhance or diminish any amount of
low frequency material in a sound.
[Back to the Top ]
High Shelf
The High Shelf filter boosts or cuts frequencies above the cutoff, and passes frequencies below the
shelf cutoff with no change made to their gain. Use this effect to enhance or diminish any adjustable
amount of high frequency material in a sound.
[Back to the Top ]
Vibrato
Vibrato equals to a cyclical changing of a certain frequency of the input signal.
[Back to the Top ]
Delay
the actual chorus or flanging effects, as the delay settings will be fixed and will not change over time).
[Back to the Top ]
Pitch Shift
The Pitch Shift effect shifts the frequency spectrum of the input signal. It can be used to disguise a
person's voice, or make the voice sound like that of the "chipmunks", through to "Darth Vader". It is
also used to create harmony in lead passages, although it is an "unintelligent" harmonizer.
[Back to the Top ]
Flanger
You can use this function to create a flanging effect by slightly delaying and phasing a signal at
predetermined or random intervals. In the pull-down menu you will find a great variety of different
flanger effects, to choose any of them just click the necessary one.
[Back to the Top ]
Chorus
You can use this function to set Chorus Effect that is used to mix the signal with a slightly delayed
copy of itself, where the length of the delay is constantly changing.
[Back to the Top ]
Reverberation
You can use this function to set Reverb Effect that is used to simulate acoustic space, and consists of
[Back to the Top ]
Compressor
This function enables you to reduce the dynamic range of an audio signal. For example, compressors
can be used to eliminate the variations in the peaks of an electric bass signal by clamping them to a
constant level (thus providing an even, solid bass line.) Compressors can also be useful in
compensating the wide variations in the level of a signal produced by a singer who moves frequently or
has an erratic dynamic range.
[Back to the Top ]
Expander
Expander effect is used to expand the dynamic range of an audio signal. Expander boosts the highlevel signals and attenuates low-level signals.
[Back to the Top ]
Normalize
You can use the Normalize effect to achieve the greatest amount of amplification that will not result
in clipping.
[Back to the Top ]
Phaser
Here you can choose the desired effect from the options that you will find in the pull-down menu, in
case you want to set your own Delay Time , Mix Depth and Feedback Gain , go to
View/Show/Hide Effect Panel , on the effect panel open Delay Effects/Phaser .
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Music Mix
Working with Effects and Filters
AVS Music Mix gives you an opportunity to apply various effects and filters to your mix projects.
Using them you can achieve the desired sound. All effects and filters are applied using the timeline
tool.
Use this
button on the Top Toolbar to switch between the Effects mode and Samples mode.
Select an effect to apply from the Effects and Filters list. You can move it along the timeline, to
affect a certain audio fragment, adjust the coverage, Fade In and Fade Out areas.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Overview
AVS Ringtone Maker is a compact and simple music tool for media files editing. The application
allows you to load and save the music with such popular audio formats as MP3, WAV, AMR, AAC, WMA
and M4A. This easy program provides the most powerful, user-friendly environment for your mobile
phone ringtone creation.
AVS Ringtone Maker also gives you an ability to apply several simple audio effects and filters, fade
the music in and out.
You no longer need to download music files from the Internet sites or be satisfied with the standard
phone sounds. You can create your own individual ringtones and upload them to your mobile phone.
To start AVS Ringtone Maker go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU ->
Mobiles -> AVS Ringtone Maker .
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Program Interface
AVS Ringtone Maker has a simple and user-friendly interface that looks as follows:
Top Toolbar - used to navigate through media files on your computer and apply effects to
the files on the Timeline .
Source Panel - used to show the files on your computer hard disk to let you select the ones
you need to apply effects and upload .
Timeline - used to represent the media file so that you could see the file duration, details and
the place of the desired music in the file
Player Toolbar - used to playback the media file to listen to the changes made and estimate
them.
To start working with the media files you will need to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Choose the folder that contains media (music) files.
Choose the media files from the selected folder.
Place the files to the Timeline to start working with them.
Apply some effects to the file (optional).
Save and upload the file to a portable device.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Top Toolbar
The Top Toolbar is placed in the upper part of the AVS Ringtone Maker :
The function buttons are used in the following way:
Button
Caption
Description
My Computer
Use this button to switch to My Computer folder to start browsing
the drives and folders with files that you have on your personal
computer.
My Music
Use this button to switch to My Music folder in case you would like to
edit and upload some media files located in this folder. My Music
folder is created automatically with the Windows installation and is
situated in the folder with the user's documents.
My Ringtones
Use this button to switch to My Ringtones folder to start browsing
the ringtone files that you put in that folder. The folder is created
automatically on the program first run and is placed into My Music
folder of the user's documents.
Level up
Use this button to go to the folder that is located a level higher than
the current one. That is if you are now in the folder C:\Documents
and Settings\User\My Documents\My Music\My Ringtones\
after pressing the Level Up button you will get to the folder
C:\Documents and Settings\User\My Documents\My Music\ .
Views
Use this button to change the way of the files list representation. The
possible Views are: Thumbnails , Icons , List and Details - they
correspond to the Windows standard file list representation modes.
Help
Use this button to open the AVS Ringtone Maker Help file .
Zoom out
Use this button to zoom the music file timeline out. You might do this
to find the next specific place in the music composition to apply an
effect to it or to return to the actual file length representation.
Full zoom
Use this button to to return to the actual music file length
representation. You might do this to find the next specific place in the
music composition to apply an effect to it or to return to the actual
file length representation.
Zoom in
Use this button to zoom the music file timeline in. You might need this
to find a specific place in the music composition file to apply an effect
to it. If you selected a part of the file with the mouse, this button will
zoom in this exact part of the file. Otherwise the whole file will be
zoomed in.
Amplify
Use this button to add Amplify audio effect to your file to increase or
decrease the amplification of the sound in the media file.
Fade in
Use this button to add Fade in audio effect to your file or a part of it.
Fade out
Use this button to add Fade out audio effect to your file or a part of
it.
Normalize
Use this button to add Normalize audio effect to your file to achieve
the greatest amount of amplification that will not result in clipping.
Reverse
Use this button to add Reverse audio effect to your file.
Flanger
Use this button to add Flanger audio effect to your file mixing a
signal with a slightly delayed copy of itself.
Chorus
Use this button to add Chorus audio effect to your file adding a single
delayed signal (echo) to the original input.
Delay
Use this button to add Delay audio effect to your file replaying the
sounds of the selected audio portion after a certain period of time.
Phaser
Use this button to add Phaser audio effect to your file giving a
"synthesized" or electronic effect to natural sounds.
Vibrato
Use this button to add Vibrato audio effect to your file cyclically
changing a certain frequency of the input signal.
Reverb
Use this button to add Reverb audio effect to your file of the sound
that stops but the reflections continue, decreasing in amplitude, until
they can no longer be heard.
Time Stretch
Use this button to add Time Stretch audio effect to your file
changing the tempo, but keeping the pitch the same throughout.
WahWah
Use this button to add WahWah audio effect to your file altering the
resonance of musical notes to extend expressiveness.
Pitch Shift
Use this button to add Pitch Shift audio effect to your file shifting the
frequency spectrum of the input signal.
Trim
Use this button to keep the highlighted part of the music file and to
delete the unselected part.
Delete
Use this button to delete the highlighted part of the music file and to
keep the unselected part.
Undo
Use this button to undo the changes you have made to the media file.
Redo
Use this button to repeat the changes you have made in case you
have undone them.
After you double-click the selected file you can start editing it right away.
If you want to apply the effects to a part of the file you need to select that specific part with your
mouse.
If you want to apply the effects to the whole file you might select the whole file timeline or leave
everything unselected.
It is also possible to record the music from an external device connected to your personal computer (to
the line-in jack or to the microphone input jack) or from a software (hardware) playback device
installed on your computer - software player or TV/FM tuner.
To do that you will need the following:
connect an external device or a microphone to your personal computer;
run AVS Ringtone Maker ;
configure the input device that you would like to use clicking the Configure button ;
on the Player Toolbar press the Record button -
;
start the playback of the external device, or start speaking into the microphone, or start the
playback of the software player or the hardware tuner;
to stop the recording process press the Record button once again.
After the recording is complete you can apply effects to the output file just as if it were a common
media file.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Player Toolbar
To facilitate your control of the modifications you can use the following buttons:
Button
Description
Used to playback the media file.
Used to continuously repeat the selection or the whole media file.
Used to stop the media file.
Used to start the recording.
Used to configure the input device.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Configuring Input Devices
You can configure your input devices right from the AVS Ringtone Maker , without need to go to the
windows Control Panel . To do that you can click the Configure button in the AVS Ringtone Maker
main window. The form that will let you change the device settings will appear:
Here you can:
your computer;
CD/DVD-ROM drive;
3.
3. set the device Balance - the difference of the sound volume between the right and the left
channel;
4. set the input device Gain - the loudness of the device input;
5. test the device pressing the Test button to make sure that the device is in working order and
the Balance and Gain are set correctly;
6. for some devices it is also possible to change some advanced settings clicking the
on these settings:
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Timeline
The Timeline represents the media file so that you could see the file duration, details and the place of
the desired music in the file.
In the lower part of the Timeline you can see file duration information expressed in hours: minutes:
seconds. milliseconds , so that you could see the real-time correlation between the Timeline of the
media file and the place of the music fragment in the file.
Note : the timeline will represent different number of separate channels depending on the music
file: two channels for a stereo music file, one common channel for a mono music file and six
separate channels for a 5.1-channel file. Moreover, you can select and edit any of the channels
using the Ctrl button. Hold the Ctrl button and select the necessary channel with the mouse. After
that you can edit the selected channel leaving the other channels unchanged.
To select a part of the file for applying effects you need to highlight it with the left or the right mouse
buttons:
After you selected a part of the file you might start applying effects to it.
If you would like to apply effects to the whole media file you can leave it not highlighted and it will be
selected automatically.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Applying Effects
You can apply the following effects before uploading the file to your mobile device:
Amplify
Fade in and Fade out
Normalize
Reverse
Flanger
Chorus
Delay
Phaser
Vibrato
Reverb
Time Stretch
WahWah
Pitch Shift
Note, that you can select the effects presets clicking the right mouse button on the selected effect
button and choosing the necessary preset from the opened list.
Besides, it is possible to Trim the selected part of the audio file and to Delete it:
Trim - Use this effect to keep the highlighted part of the music file and to delete the
unselected part. After you press the Trim
button only the selection will be left and all the
other fragments of the music file will be cut off.
Delete - Use this effect to delete the highlighted part of the music file and to keep the
unselected part. After you press the Delete
button the selection will be cut off and all the
other fragments of the music file will be kept.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Amplify
Amplify effect is used to increase or decrease the amplification of the sound in the media
file. If you select a part of the file with the mouse, this button will amplify or attenuate this
exact part of the file. Otherwise the sound of the whole file will be amplified or diminished.
1. Add the audio file to the Timeline .
3. Click the Amplify effect button on the Top Toolbar .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Fade In and Fade Out
Use this button to fade in the sound in the media file. If you select a part of the file with the
mouse, this button will fade in the sound of this exact part of the file. Otherwise the sound of
the beginning of the file will be faded in.
Use this button to fade out the sound in the media file. If you select a part of the file with
the mouse, this button will fade out the sound of this exact part of the file. Otherwise the
sound of the end of the file will be faded out.
3. Click the Fade in or Fade out effect button on the Top Toolbar .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Normalize
Use this button to achieve the greatest amount of amplification that will not result in
clipping. If you select a part of the file with the mouse, this button will amplify the
highlighted selection to the percentage of the maximum level. Otherwise the sound of the
whole file will be normalized.
3. Click the Normalize effect button on the Top Toolbar .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Reverse
The Reverse effect reverses the existing audio data. If you select a part of the file with the
mouse, this button will reverse this exact part of the file. Otherwise the whole file will be
reversed.
3. Click the Reverse effect button on the Top Toolbar .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Flanger
The Flanger effect is one of the other elaborated audio effects that is created by mixing a
signal with a slightly delayed copy of itself, where the length of the delay is constantly
changing. With the Flanger filter you can "shape" the sound through controlling how much
delayed signal is added to the original. Use it if you want to create the "whooshing" sound
effect in some fragment of your audio track.
Flanger is a special case of the Chorus effect: it is created in the same way that Chorus is created.
In days gone by, flanging used to be created by sound engineers who put their finger onto the tape
reel's flange, thus slowing it down. Two identical recordings are played back simultaneously, and one is
slowed down to give the flanging effect.
Flanger gives a "whooshing" sound, like the sound is pulsating. It is essentially an exaggerated
Chorus .
3. Click the Flanger effect button on the Top Toolbar .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Chorus
The Chorus effect allows you to make your audio sound fuller. It can make a single
instrument sound like there are actually several instruments being played. It adds some
thickness to the sound, and can be described as 'lush' or 'rich'.
The Chorus effect is so named because it makes the recording of a vocal track sound like it was sung
by two or more people singing in chorus. This is achieved by adding a single delayed signal (echo) to
the original input.
The Chorus differs from the Flanger in only a couple of ways. One difference is the amount of delay
that is used. The delay times in a Chorus are larger than in a Flanger . This longer delay doesn't
produce the characteristic sweeping sound of the Flanger . The Chorus also differs from the Flanger
in that there is generally no feedback used.
3. Click the Chorus effect button on the Top Toolbar .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Delay
The Delay effect allows you to create an echo effect of your audio track by replaying the
sounds of the selected audio portion after a certain period of time. Applying of this filter can
bring life to dull mixes, widen and fill out your instrument's sound.
the actual Chorus or Flanger effects, as the delay settings will be fixed and will not change over
time).
3. Click the Delay effect button on the Top Toolbar .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Phaser
The Phaser filter makes the selected portion of your audio thinner or fuller through mixing
the automatically filtered and unfiltered audio signals. You can apply this filter to give a
"synthesized" or electronic effect to natural sounds.
The Phaser achieves its distinctive sound by creating one or more notches in the frequency domain
that eliminate sounds at the notch frequencies.
Phasing is very similar to flanging. If two signals that are identical, but out of phase, are added
together, then the result is that they will cancel each other out. If, however, they are partially out of
phase, then partial cancellations, and partial enhancements occur. This leads to the phasing effect.
3. Click the Phaser effect button on the Top Toolbar .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Vibrato
Vibrato equals to a cyclical changing of a certain frequency of the input signal. If you select
a part of the file with the mouse, this button will apply the Vibrato effect to this exact part
of the file. Otherwise whole file will be changed.
3. Click the Vibrato effect button on the Top Toolbar .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Reverb
The Reverberation filter helps you to apply the particular effect when the sound stops but
the reflections continue, decreasing in amplitude, until they can no longer be heard.
You can use this function to set Reverb effect that is used to simulate acoustic space, and consists of
It is the sound you hear in a room with hard surfaces where sound bounces around the room for a
while after the initial sound stops. Reverb is used to simulate the acoustical effect of rooms and
enclosed buildings. In a room, for instance, sound is reflected off the walls, the ceiling and the floor.
The sound heard at any given time is the sum of the sound from the source, as well as the reflected
sound. An impulse (such a hand clap) will decay exponentially.
3. Click the Reverb effect button on the Top Toolbar .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Time Stretch
The Time Stretch effect allows to change the tempo, but keep the pitch the same
throughout. If you select a part of the file with the mouse, this button will change the tempo
of this exact part of the file. Otherwise the tempo of the whole file will be changed.
3. Click the Time Stretch effect button on the Top Toolbar .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
WahWah
WahWah is the sound of altering the resonance of musical notes to extend expressiveness
that makes the audio sound just like that guitar sound so popular in the 1970's. This effect
uses a moving bandpass filter to create its sound, sounding much like a human voice saying
the syllable 'wah' ..
The WahWah effect automatically adjusts the phase of the left and right channels when given a
stereo recording, so that the effect seems to travel across the speakers.
3. Click the WahWah effect button on the Top Toolbar .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Pitch Shift
The Pitch Shift effect shifts the frequency spectrum of the input signal. It can be used to
disguise a person's voice, or make the voice sound like that of the "chipmunks", through to
"Darth Vader". It is also used to create harmony in lead passages, although it is an
"unintelligent" harmonizer.
3. Click the Pitch Shift effect button on the Top Toolbar .
them afterwards.
AVS4YOU
AVS Ringtone Maker
Saving and Uploading Files
Use this option to finish the work with the music file and start uploading it
to the mobile device connected to your personal computer.
After you press the Save and Upload button you will be prompted to select the format of the
uploading file (see the Appendix section on different music formats support by mobile phone devices):
Button
Description
MP3
Check this check-box if your mobile phone is capable of handling the media files saved in
*.mp3 format. See the table in the Appendix section and your mobile phone manual on
file formats supported by your model of the phone.
AMR
*.amr format. See the table in the Appendix section and your mobile phone manual on
AAC
*.aac format. See the table in the Appendix section and your mobile phone manual on
M4A
*.m4a format. See the table in the Appendix section and your mobile phone manual on
WAV
*.wav format. See the table in the Appendix section and your mobile phone manual on
WMA
*.wma format. See the table in the Appendix section and your mobile phone manual on
Press the Mobile overview button to see the table representing different mobile devices and formats,
supported by them.
To change the folder where the file is going to be stored press the
button and choose the new file
location.
After you choose the format of the file and press the Upload >> button, the file will be saved and the
AVS Mobile Uploader will be launched to begin the uploading process.
AVS4YOU
AVS TV Box
Overview
AVS TV Box is an easy to use application that will let you capture video from different devices, watch
programs using analog and digital TV tuners.
User-friendly and understandable interface allows you to enjoy working with broadcast video and
capture devices without frequent consulting with reference materials. You do not need to be a
professional to use this tool. Once you get started you will be surprised how smoothly you can combine
video from different capture devices in one program and switch from one to the other in just one
mouse click. You can also record video and preview the results to make sure that you recorded what
you had wanted.
There is no need to have many different programs for video capturing and television broadcast
watching - multifunctional and powerful AVS TV Box will easily deal with several tasks.
In case you need some help, please refer to this AVS4YOU Programs Help , if you cannot find
something here or you need some explanation or assistance, just e-mail us [email protected]
or visit us on the World Wide Web www.avs4you.com .
To start AVS TV Box go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Video -> AVS
TV Box .
AVS4YOU
AVS TV Box
Main Controls
Control
Description
1
Display
Shows current time or time elapsed since the file recording or playback
started and also the time remaining for the recording, taking into
account the recording settings and free space on computer hard disk
drive
2
Record button
Used to record video that is currently displayed in the main display
window
3
Pause button
Used to pause the video recording and playback
4
Timeshift
button
Used for timeshift video recording - pause, playback video fragments,
rewind forward and backward live video and television programs without
aborting the recording
5
Channel
button
up
6
Channel
button
down
7
Mastering
button
Used to edit recorded files
8
Mute button
Used to mute/unmute the sound
9
Snapshot
button
Used to take snapshots of the current video display image
level
Used to advance to the next channel in the favorite list
Used to return to the previous channel in the favorite list
10
Volume
control
11
Favorites
button
Used to open the Favorite window
12
Show recorded
files button
Used to open the recorded files list
Used to bring the level control up and down
Used to simultaneously view real-time video image and recorded files
13
Dual-view
mode button
within the same screen (like in picture-in-picture option in some TV
models).
Note : the multiviewing mode is only available when you playback
recorded files.
14
Favorite
channels
surfing button
Used to show several channels from the favorite list simultaneously
15
Playback
button
Used to playback the recorded files
16
Navigation
slider
Used to navigate through the playing file or in timeshift mode
17
Stop button
Used to stop playback and recording
18
AVS4YOU link
Used to go to the AVS4YOU Internet home page
19
Scheduling
On/Off button
Used to switch scheduling on or off. To configure scheduling use the
express menu
20
Electronic
program guide
button
Used to activate electronic program guide option
21
DV
camera
panel
activation
button
Used to show/hide the DV camera control panel
22
Settings button
Used to open the Configuration window
23
Full
button
Used to go to the full screen view mode
screen
DV camera control panel
Control
Description
1
Display
Shows the current position in the DV camera recording
2
Current state
Shows the current state of the camera
3
Hide
button
Hides the DV camera control panel
4
Slowplay
backward button
Returns to the previous frame of the recording
5
Play/Pause
button
Used to playback and pause the recording of the DV camera
6
Slowplay forward
button
Advances to the next frame of the recording
7
Stop button
Used to stop the playback, fast forward/backward and slowplay
forward/backward functions
8
Fast
backward
button
Lets the user search the DV camera video in fast reverse mode
9
Fast
button
Lets the user search the DV camera video in fast forward mode
panel
forward
AVS4YOU
AVS TV Box
Express Menu
Express Menu is an easy way to access the program's main controls with just one mouse click. You
can activate it by clicking the right button of the mouse when the cursor is positioned on the video
window. Express Menu buttons are grouped:
Favorites - use this option to switch between the Favorites list without the need to open
the Favorites window.
Full Screen - use this option to switch to the full screen view from the windowed mode and
back.
Always on Top - use this option to make the AVS TV Box program always stay on top all
other programs windows.
Preview - use this option to preview or hide the image from the capture device.
Note : in case you choose not to show the image, the sound will also be muted.
Mute - use this option to switch the sound off/on.
Aspect Ratio - use this option to select the aspect ratio of the displayed image. The possible
options include:
1. 4 x 3 - use this option to set the image width to height ratio equal to 4:3. It is
convenient to use for most of the displays and TV screens that have the same aspect
ratio.
2. 16 x 9 - use this option to set the image width to height ratio equal to 16:9. It is
convenient to use for widescreen displays, projectors and TV screens that have the
same aspect ratio.
Show Panels - use this option to show or hide the main controls panel and all the other
panels opened. You can select the panel to be shown or hidden from the opened submenu list
or you can select to open or hide all the panels.
[Back to the Top ]
Schedule... - use this option to set the schedule for the channels recording. It might be
useful when you want to record some programs but cannot do it at the time of the translation.
Settings... - use this option to go directly to the configuration window and change the
device and channels settings. See the Configuring section for more details on how to
configure different device parameters.
Help - use this option to open and read the AVS4YOU Programs Help .
About - use this option to view the information about AVS TV Box .
[Back to the Top ]
Exit - use this option to close the window and the main controls panel and finish the work with
AVS TV Box .
[Back to the Top ]
Favorites window express menu
Favorites window express menu is activated when you click the right mouse button within the limits of
the Favorites window. There are the following main items in this menu:
Rename - use this option to rename the currently selected channel.
Remove - use this option to delete the selected channel from the Favorites list.
Properties - use this option to open the window showing the selected channel properties.
Move Channel Up - use this option to move the selected channel up in the favorites window
list.
Move Channel Down - use this option to move the selected channel down in the favorites
window list.
Clear - use this option to remove all the channels from the Favorites list.
Show options - use this option to show or hide the Favorites window bottom options panel.
Show source - use this option to show the source device for the channel on the list. The
name of the source device will be shown to the right of the name of the channel. Tic this
option to show the source device and untic it to hide it.
Show header - use this option to show or hide the heading of the Favorites window.
Hide unavailable - use this option to hide the channels from currently disconnected devices.
If you deselect this option, the unavailable channels will be shown in the Favorites list
marked in other color.
Settings... - use this option to go directly to the configuration window and change the
device and channels settings. See the Configuring section for more details on how to
configure different device parameters.
[Back to the Top ]
Snapshots window express menu
Snapshots window express menu is activated when you click the right mouse button within the limits
of the Snapshots window. There are the following main items in this menu that correspond to the
buttons in this window:
Rename - use this option to change the name of the snapshot taken.
Save As... - use this option to save the currently selected snapshot into one of the supported
formats.
Select All - use this option to select all the taken snapshots and save them further into one of
the supported formats or delete them.
Clear Selection - use this option to deselect all the selected items.
Delete - use this option to delete the currently selected snapshots from the list.
Delete All - use this option to delete all the snapshots from the list.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS TV Box
Getting Started
AVS TV Box has a simple and intuitive interface and lets the user start watching the video right after
it is installed.
Nevertheless you will need to configure your device that is used as a capture device before you can
start watching the channels or capture video.
The configuration will include several easy steps:
1. Connect your capture device to your personal computer. You might need to turn down your PC
to install the internal devices, such as TV tuners and alike. If your device has a USB-interface,
it is usually possible to connect it while your personal computer is running. Please read the
manual that comes with your device to avoid damage and installation problems.
2. Start your computer and install the capture device drivers. They are usually placed onto the
CD/DVD that comes along with the device, or you can download them from the device
manufacturer's web site. For many of the devices connected via USB-cable no additional driver
software is needed as it is included into the windows installation package.
3. Launch the AVS TV Box software. Click the Settings button to select the channels that you
will be able to watch using AVS TV Box .
4. Select the Device Parameters tab of the Settings window. Select the device to be
configured and set its parameters. See the Device Parameters Settings section for more
detail on how to configure different capture devices.
5. Select the Channels tab of the Settings window. Click the Add Channel button to add the
cameras to the channels list or Scan for TV or Digital TV tuners to search for the existing
channels. After that you can tic the channels you would like to watch or capture and click the
Add to Favorites button. See the Channels Settings section on how to set different
channels and add them to the Favorites list.
6. To watch the channels now you need to click the OK button to accept all the changes and
close the configuration window. See the Watching Channels section on how to watch the
channels of the selected capture devices.
7. If you plan to record your video, you will need to set the Recording parameters first and
after that you will be able to capture video or take snapshots . See also the respective
sections on how to playback the recorded files and use the Electronic Program Guide .
AVS4YOU
AVS TV Box
Configuring
The configuration window is activated by pressing the Settings button on the main controls panel or
selecting the Settings... option in the Express menu .
The configuration window consists of six tabs:
General - use this tab to set program general parameters that will be applied to all the
devices installed on your computer.
Device params - use this tab to set the parameters of the devices installed on your
computer. The availability of the settings depends on the type of the device.
Channels - use this tab to set the channels that will be displayed in the Favorites window
and the program main window.
Paths - use this tab to set the recordings and snapshots paths.
Record - use this tab to set the video and audio parameters of the files that you will capture
your video with.
Colors - use this tab to set the parameters of the colors of the displayed video image.
AVS4YOU
AVS TV Box
General Settings
In the General settings tab of the configuration window you can set two parameters of the AVS TV
Box program:
Show advertisement on start up - use this option to turn on or off the advertisement
playback at the program startup.
Show tool tips - use this option to turn on or off the tool tips for the main buttons of the
AVS TV Box program.
Check for updates every (day, month, etc) - use this option to set the program update
interval. It will check for new updates at our web site within the set period.
Click OK to accept all the changes and continue work with AVS TV Box or Cancel to discard all the
changes.
AVS4YOU
AVS TV Box
Device Parameters Settings
Before you can start watching the channels you need to configure the capture device used. The
Device Parameters settings depend on the device and will look differently for a specific device:
Web camera - using the web camera you will need to set up the sound source for the video.
You can select the Audio device from the present devices drop-down list and the Audio
input depending on the selected audio device:
DV Camera or VCR - have not got any specific settings in the Device Parameters tab:
TV tuner - lets the user select the Country of the broadcast, TV Source (Antenna or Cable
), Video input , Video standard depending on the country and broadcast standard, Audio
device and Audio input that will serve as a sound source:
MPEG-2 TV tuner - lets the user select the Country of the broadcast, TV Source (Antenna
or Cable ), Video input , Video standard depending on the country and broadcast
standard.
Note : you cannot select Audio device and Audio input for a MPEG-2 TV tuner as this
parameter is set by the device itself:
Digital Terrestrial or Digital Cable TV tuner (DVB-T/DVB-C) - lets the user select the
Digital Terrestrial TV or Digital Cable TV from the list of available Device types ,
Provider and Network , that determines the frequency, inversion and bandwidth:
Switching between different providers and networks (if available), you can tune in the necessary
channels. You can also ask your service provider or visit the provider's web site for the proper settings.
Satellite tuner (DVB-S) - lets the user select the Digital Satellite TV from the list of
available Device types , Satellite and Transponder , that determines the frequency,
polarization and symbol rate:
You can also set the LNB (low-noise block converter) parameters:
Power - this option lets the user supply power to LNB or not.
Type - this option lets the user select the LNB type used. There are three main types of LNB:
1. Ku -band (uses low band of 9750 MHz and high band of 10600 MHz)
2. C-Band (uses low band of 5150MHz)
3. Circular (uses low band of 10750MHz)
Pressing the Configure button you will be able to adjust the additional LNB parameters:
You should select one of the above values to receive the satellite signal. You can also need to
set some additional parameters that include:
DiSEqC - stands for Di gital S atellite Eq uipment C ontrol - is a special communication
protocol that is used between a satellite receiver and a device such as a multi-dish
switch or a small dish antenna rotor. When you are using a DiSEqC switch, you may
choose the right passageway to the correct LNB (LNB A - LNB B - LNB C - LNB D)
according to your DiSEqC switch.
Tone data burst - is used to turn on/off the tone or data burst switching functions.
F22KHzTone - is used to turn on/off the 22 KHz tone switching function.
Note : In Europe, LNB type is usually K u -band . For example, if you want to watch Astra or
Hotbird satellites' programs, the default setting of Ku -band will be your right choice.
If you have no idea about what your antenna equipment information is, you should check the LNB
frequency on your LNB user's guide or consult your antenna manufacturer for more information.
changes.
AVS4YOU
AVS TV Box
Channels Settings
Before you can start watching the channels you need to configure them. The channels setting depends
on the capture device used and will look differently for a specific device:
Web camera - you can add the web camera video image to the favorite list so that it could
be displayed in the Favorite window and you could easily switch to it. Click the Add to
Favorites button to add the web camera channel to the favorite list.
DV Camera or VCR - you can add the DV Camera or VCR video image to the favorite list so
that it could be displayed in the Favorite window and you could easily switch to it. Click the
Add to Favorites button to add the DV Camera or VCR channel to the favorite list.
Digital TV tuner - before you can add the Digital TV tuner channels to the favorite list, you
need to configure the channels. To do that click the Scan button to start scanning for the
channels of the stations broadcasting on this satellite, cable or terrestrial network.
After the tuner finds the channels you can select the necessary stations from the list of the present
ones, set their additional properties and add them to the favorites list. Press the Properties button to
configure the channels:
In the opened window you can see the information on the channel and can select the Audio Stream
in your preferred language if there are several of them. To add the channels to the favorite list tic
them and click the Add to Favorites button. The channels already in the Favorites list will be
marked with a red dot on the list in the settings window.
Note : the channels protected from the free watching will be marked as Scrambled , the other
channels will be marked Free . To clear the list of the channels click the Clear button, after that
you can perform a new scan pressing the Scan button.
TV tuner - similarly to the Digital TV tuner setting, you will need to set the channels list first.
Click the Scan button to start scanning for the channels. You will be offered the opportunity to scan
all the channels the tuner supports, continue the channels scan , if you started some scan before
but interrupted for some reason or scan only the selected channels range , that can be set in the
below boxes. You can also clear the channels list before you start scanning for new channels or
leave it as it was to append the newly found channels to the list:
Note : you can add the channels with good signal to the favorites list during the channels scan. To
do that simply mark the Automatically add the channels with good signal to the favorites
list checkbox in the Scan Parameters window.
After the tuner finds the channels you can select the necessary stations from the list of the present
ones and add them to the favorites list, ticking them and clicking the Add to Favorites button. The
channels already in the Favorites list will be marked with a red dot on the list in the settings window.
To clear the list of the channels click the Clear list button, after that you can perform a new scan
pressing the Scan button.
To view the channels properties and change some of them you can click the Properties button. The
Note : you have a possibility of fine tuning the selected channel - use the Frequency field to tune
in the channel if the program could not find it due to, for instance, a weak signal.
changes.
AVS4YOU
AVS TV Box
Paths Settings
In the Paths settings tab of the configuration window you can set the paths for the main program
recorded and captured files. Here you can choose the paths for the
Recorded files - use this option to select the directory where the recorded files will be
placed.
Note : you might need quite much free space on your hard disk drive to keep the
recorded files of large length.
Timeshift option recorded files - use this option to select the directory where the program
saves files, recorded with the Timeshift option.
Note : you might need quite much free space on your hard disk drive to keep the
recorded files of large length.
Snapshot files - use this option to select the directory where the taken snapshots will be
placed.
changes.
AVS4YOU
AVS TV Box
Recording Settings
In the Record settings tab of the configuration window you can select the recording parameters of
the video. You can set video and audio parameters here, select them from the presets or change
manually:
Video properties:
Format - the format used to compress the video;
Size - the number of pixels that form the video image horizontally and vertically;
Frame Rate - the number of video frames displayed every second;
Bit Rate - the number of bits transferred per second.
Audio properties:
Format - the format used to compress the audio component of the recorded video;
Frequency - sampling frequency specified in hertz;
Channels - number of channels in the audio track (mono - one channel, stereo - two
channels, quadro - four channels, 4.1 - five channels, 5.1 - six channels, 6.1 - seven channels,
7.1 - eight channels);
Bit Rate - the number of data points used to approximate the true wave form (kilobits per
second).
changes.
Note : these settings can be changed for analog devices only. If you use the MPEG2 hardware
tuner, you can only change the driver settings. In case a satellite tuner is used no recording
parameters can be changed.
AVS4YOU
AVS TV Box
Colors Settings
In the Colors settings tab of the configuration window you can set the Brightness , Contrast , Hue
and Saturation parameters of the colors of the displayed video image. All the parameters are set in
percentage where the 0 value means that the selected parameter is represented in its least strength
and the 100 value will set the parameter to its most strength.
You can press the Default button to return to the AVS TV Box default values of the color settings.
changes.
AVS4YOU
AVS TV Box
Watching Channels
The Favorites window was designed to facilitate your navigation through the channels. Using it you no
longer need to select the capture device every time to watch the channels from different devices. All
you need is to add them to the favorites list in the Channels tab of the Configuration window and
after that you can watch them as if they were within the same device:
To open the Favorites window, you need to click the Favorites button on the Main Controls panel.
The following buttons are used to navigate and edit the Favorites window:
Move channel up
Use this button to move the channel up in the Favorites list.
Move channel down
Use this button to move the channel down in the Favorites list.
Rename channel
Use this button to change the channel name that is displayed in
the Favorites list.
Delete
from list
Use this button to remove the channel from the Favorites list.
Clear list
channel
Use this button to remove all the channels and clear the
Favorites list.
Note : that if some of the channels are unavailable at the moment due to the fact that the device
they belong to is disconnected, they will be shown in the Favorites list marked in a color different
from all the other channels:
If you wish to keep these unavailable channels in the list but prefer not to show it, you can select the
Hide unavailable option in the Favorites window express menu .
You can also use the Favorite channels surfing button to display all the channels on the favorites
list that belong to the same device. You will see the channels in the main display window. To view the
channel you like just click it. To expand the selected channel to the whole window you will need to
double-click it.
To watch the channels and the recorded files simultaneously the Dual-view mode button in the main
controls panel is used. If you have some files recorded, you can view them together with the channels
in the favorite list. Click the Playback button in the main controls panel and press the Dual-view
mode button. The screen of the AVS TV Box program will be divided into two parts - one
representing the recorded file and the second showing the currently selected channel:
To switch between the recorded video and the current channel just double-click the smaller window
area (current channel in the above figure) and they will change their positions in the AVS TV Box
screen.
AVS4YOU
AVS TV Box
Capturing and Recording
You can start recording the video just clicking the Record button on the main controls panel. After
that the recording will start and you will be able to stop it pressing the Stop button or pause with the
appropriate button .
But usually it is more convenient to use the scheduler option to record the video.
Using the scheduler to record the files
You can open the scheduling window using the express menu .
There are six buttons in this window:
Add...
- Use this button to add a new scheduling task. See below for details on how to add a
new task
Modify...
- Use this button to modify the currently selected task
Delete
- Use this button to delete the currently selected task
Delete
All
- Use this button to delete all the scheduled tasks from the list
OK
- Use this button to accept all the changes you have made and close this window
Cancel
- Use this button to discard all the changes you have made and close this window
The heading of the window consists of the following items:
Name
- The name of the scheduled task. By default will be Task 1, Task 2 and so on
Status
- The current status of the scheduled task
Channel
- The channel used as the scheduled task source
Action
- The action to be taken within the scheduled task
Length
- The duration of the scheduled task in minutes
Start
- The start time - date and time - of the scheduled task
All these parameters can be set when you press either Add... or Modify... button. The following
window will open:
You can also select a weekday instead of the date to set the task. To avoid the repetition of the same
task for several times you can tic the Check unique parameters and select this task now checkbox.
Click the OK button to accept all the changes or Cancel to discard all the changes and close the Add
Schedule Task window.
[Back to the Top ]
Taking snapshots
When you press the Snapshot button on the main controls panel the Snapshots window will open
with the images of the taken snapshots. You can use the following options to manage your snapshots:
Select
All
- Use this button to select all the taken snapshots and either
save them in the supported image formats or delete
Save
As...
- Use this button to save the selected snapshots into one of
the supported formats. See below on the main formats
supported and their settings
Delete
- Use this button to remove the selected snapshots from the
list
When you press the Save As... button the following window will let you modify the image file and
format properties:
Path
- The path to the file on your computer hard disk drive
File name
- The name that will be assigned to the image file to distinguish it from the other
image files on your computer. If you selected several snapshots at once, all of
them will be saved with the same name that you select and to distinguish them
their consecutive number will be added to the file name, starting with 1 (e.g.
my_file_1, my_file_2 and so on)
Format
- The format used to save the image file. You can select among different image file
formats depending on your needs
Additional
format
settings
- You can set some additional image format parameters, varying depending on the
format
Press the Save button to save the file with the selected parameters onto your computer hard disk
drive or Cancel to abort the file saving process.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS TV Box
Recorded Files Playback
If you select several files it might be convenient to view the list of all of them at once and select the
necessary one that you would like to playback. To open the recorded files window you need to press
the Show recorded files button on the main controls panel.
After that you can do the following:
Play
- Use this button to playback the recorded video files
Stop
- Use this button to stop the recorded files playback
Rename
- Use this button to change the names of the currently selected recorded files
Delete
- Use this button to remove the currently selected files from the list
Delete All
- Use this button to remove all the files from the list and clear it
The heading of the window consists of the following items:
Name
- The name of the recorded file as it is saved onto the computer hard disk drive
Length
- The length of the video in this file
Creation
- The time of the file creation
File Path
- The path to the file on your computer hard disk drive
To watch the channels and the recorded files simultaneously the Dual-view mode button in the main
controls panel is used. If you have some files recorded, you can view them together with the channels
in the favorite list. Click the Playback button in the main controls panel and press the Dual-view
mode button. The screen of the AVS TV Box program will be divided into two parts - one
representing the recorded file and the second showing the currently selected channel:
To switch between the recorded video and the current channel just double-click the smaller window
area (current channel in the above figure) and they will change their positions in the AVS TV Box
screen.
AVS4YOU
AVS TV Box
Using Electronic Program Guide
Electronic Program Guide (EPG) or is a on-screen guide to scheduled broadcast television
programs, allowing a viewer to navigate, select, and discover content by time, title, channel, genre,
etc.
The technology is based upon broadcasting data within the signal. EPGs are typically sent within the
broadcast transport stream or alongside it in a special data channel. The technology is predominant in
the digital television and radio world. These signals may arrive via cable TV, satellite TV, cable radio,
satellite radio, or via over-the-air terrestrial broadcast stations.
By navigating through an EPG on a receiving device, users can see more information about the current
program and about future programs. Combined with AVS TV Box , EPG enables a viewer to plan his
or her viewing and record broadcast programs to a hard disk for later viewing.
You can activate the EPG function using the Electronic program guide button on the main controls
panel. After that the EPG window will open:
Here you can see the following information on the program:
Time
The exact date and time of the program
Duration
The duration of the program (hours: minutes: seconds)
Language
The language this program is available in
Caption
The title of the program
In the lower part of the EPG window you can see the detailed description of each program.
To finish the work with the EPG you can click the Close button.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Overview
Friendly interface , a variety of supported formats and features and high performance make AVS
Video Converter one of the best available on the market today.
With the help of AVS Video Converter you can:
Convert files from one format to another.
Process your movies using the Batch Mode .
Edit video files applying different effects and filters during conversion.
Extract audio stream as audio file.
Delete parts of your video file.
Export single frames and save them as images .
Split a video file into several ones.
Merge a number of files in one movie.
Save parts of a file as new ones.
Add texts, running lines, banners and logos to your video.
Rotate your videos.
Change frame size, compression codec of video stream, frequency, and the number of
channels of audio stream and much more !
You can minimize AVS Video Converter window to the System Tray. After clicking the
icon the
program runs as a background application (or as a service in Windows NT/2000) and its presence is
represented by an icon in the System Tray.
It became also easier to add input files in the program. There's no need to browse them from Open
Input File window, you can simply drag and drop them from Explorer .
There is no need to have many different programs for video capturing, editing, converting or
DVD/SVCD/VCD creation - multifunctional and powerful AVS Video Converter will easily deal with
several tasks.
To start AVS Video Converter go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Video
-> AVS Video Converter .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Program Interface
AVS Video Converter is a dedicated tool for converting video files, including DVD video, between
different video formats and for creating DVD video discs. Go trough three easy steps to create a video
suitable for storage and playing on your computer, putting on your website, playing in your home DVD
player or to rip DVD:
Step 1 : Select the necessary output file format
Step 2 : Open your input file using the upper Browse... button
Step 3 : Press Convert now! to start converting.
If you wish to create video for computer
Select To AVI , To MPEG or To MOV to create high quality video to store and play it on your
computer.
Go to AVI Profile to select the codec that will be used to compress the video file. DivX
and XviD give the best quality and quite small file size.
Go to MPEG Profile to select the codec that will be used to compress the video file.
MPEG-1 gives VHS video quality and relatively small file size. MPEG-2 gives DVD quality
and big file size.
Go to Quick Time Profile to select the codec that will be used to compress the video
file.
If you wish to create video for Internet
Select To WMV , To RM or To SWF to create video suitable for putting on the website or
streaming through the local network or Internet. WMV, RM and SWF formats create small
video files suitable for Internet. The quality is not very good and depends on the targeted
Internet connection speed. Go to WMV Profile/Real Media Profile/SWF Profile to
select the preset to create a file suitable for a definite Internet connection speed.
Note : only RealPlayer can play RM files, while WMV file can be played by Windows
Media Player and many other players. To playback created SWF files you will need
the Macromedia Shockwave Flash Player installed.
If you wish to create video for a mobile device
Select To MP4 or To 3GP to create video to store and play it on your mobile device Sony PSP, iPod
or a mobile phone.
Go to MP4 Profile to select the codec that will be used to compress the video file. You
can select MPEG4 codec and file type for different mobile devices: mobile phone, Sony
PSP, iPod and other MP4 devices.
Go to 3GP Profile to select the codec that will be used to compress the video file. MPEG4 is recommended for use at higher bit rates when it sharpens the image. At lower bit
rates it would be better to use H.263 codec.
If you wish to create a video disc for home DVD players
Select To DVD if you wish to create a video disc compatible with your home DVD player:
VCD, SVCD or DVD. Check your player specification to find out what types of video discs
it supports. VCD gives the VHS video quality. SVCD gives a better quality, but stores
smaller files. VCD and SVCD require ordinary black CD-R/RW discs, so they may be
created with an ordinary CD burner.
DVD gives the best quality of the video, but requires DVD discs. A DVD burner is thus
required to for creating video DVD discs.
The conversion to VCD, SVCD or DVD may take several hours depending on your
computer capabilities. Wait for the program burn the converted video on a disc.
If you wish to rip a DVD
Insert the DVD disc into your computer DVD drive, select VIDEO_TS.IFO file. Next select the output file
format depending on purpose you want to create a file for. Press convert now! button to start
converting. Or use the AVS Video to GO application that will help you rip DVD easily and convert it to
any available format supported by the AVS Video Converter .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Main Window
AVS Video Converter has a comprehensive toolset to handle any video image converting and editing
task efficiently. To start capturing, converting, editing or burning just click the necessary button.
The main window comprises the following components:
Main Toolbar - the toolbar with the buttons that let the user select the necessary format for
conversion;
Main Area - the area where all the main controls are placed;
Advanced Settings button - the button that lets the user open the information panel with the
advanced video file parameters and aspect settings.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Main Toolbar
AVS Video Converter maintains its user-friendly and comprehensive toolbar. It is located at the top
of the main window .
The table below describes the function of the buttons of the toolbar.
Button
Name
Description
To AVI
Use this button to set AVI Output format
To DVD
Use this button to set VCD\SVCD\DVD Output format
To MP4
Use this button to set MP4 Format
To 3GP
Use this button to set 3GP Format
To MPEG
Use this button to set MPEG Output format
To Quick
Time
Use this button to set Quick Time format
To WMV
Use this button to set WMV Output format
To RM
To SWF
Use this button to set Real Media Output format
Use this button to set SWF Output format
Effects
About
Use this button to open the Effects window
Use this button to open the About AVS Video Converter window. There
you can get the program overview, license information, go to our web site
www.avs4you.com and register your program.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Main Area
AVS Video Converter menu with its set of self-explanatory buttons is a perfect tool for navigating
and operating the system.
Button
Description
Input File Name
Name of the input file
Output File Name
Name of the output file
WM Profile
Parameters of WMV profile
AVI Profile
Parameters of AVI profile
Real Media Profile
Parameters of RM profile
MPEG Profile
Parameters of MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 profiles
Quick Time Profile
Parameters of Quick Time profile
Burn To
Parameters of VCD, SVCD and DVD profiles
Convert Now !
Start conversion of the file
Browse
Open window explorer to identify the location of input or output file
Advanced >>
Open advanced setting window
Edit Profile...
Open one of the Profile Editors
Move selected files up and down Input File Name list
Delete or Insert in already existing Input File Name list
Note : it is possible to pause/resume the conversion process. For that select the appropriate entry
from drop-down menu:
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Advanced Settings
In the main window you can select input files, set output files names, destination and formats and set
most of the parameters you need to convert a video file.
Click the << Advanced button in the main window and you will be able to set the processing mode,
get information about input and output files parameters and set the output video file aspect
parameters.
To open Advanced Settings press the
button in the right bottom corner of the Main
Window twice and select the File Information tab. The advanced settings menu is located at the
bottom of the main window and provides the information on audio and video parameters of your
media. It allows you to preview the output file properties before you start the conversion.
Note : if your input file is a DVD file you will be able to manually select the audio track for your
output file. Particularly, you can select the language of your track, if such option is given on the
original DVD:
The same can way you can select the audio track for an .avi video file that has more than one audio
track in it.
If you want to split a file limiting the size of your output files or split by markers, follow the instructions
of the Split chapter.
When you click the Aspect Correction tab, you will be presented with the opportunity to change the
output video image aspect ratio :
Aspect Correction might be very helpful when you change the original file width and height. In this
case the image proportions can get affected and you will need to correct them so that the image in the
output file were not elongated or flattened. The main types of the aspect correction available for
different types of the output formats are:
Video
type
aspect
Description
No correction
The output file image will be resized according to the width and height settings
selected in the format profile editor . Use this setting only if you are sure that
the image is not going to be distorted with the parameters set. The setting is
available for all the output file formats except DVD .
Original
The output file image resizing will be corrected according to the input file width
to height ratio. This is done to retain the original file image proportions and
avoid the distortions. The setting is available for all the output file formats
except DVD .
4:3
(DVD,
MPEG1,
MPEG2)
The output file image resizing will be corrected so that its width to height ratio
equaled 4 to 3 ratio. This is done so that you could playback the output image
on a standard TV screen without distortions. The setting is available for DVD
and MPEG formats only.
16:9
(DVD,
MPEG1,
MPEG2)
The output file image resizing will be corrected so that its width to height ratio
equaled 16 to 9 ratio. This is done so that you could playback the output image
on a widescreen TV without distortions. The setting is available for DVD and
MPEG formats only.
Note : in case you are using the image aspect correction (Original , 4:3 or 16:9 ), black areas mattes - can be added to the image sides or upper and lower parts. To get rid of them you can use
the Crop function. To do that select the Crop Scale value but bear in mind that a part of the
image will also be lost to retain the aspect ratio (a function similar to pan-and-scan in some DVD
player models).
You can also read the Aspect Ratio section of the Appendix to learn more on different aspects.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Edit Input File(s)
AVS Video Converter has an easy to use working area which has a set of buttons and tools to
introduce various effects and modify their parameters.
To open this window, please follow the steps:
1. Start AVS Video Converter
2. Choose input file (the effects window becomes available)
3. Click Edit... button
In this window you can add different effects to your video. See the following sections for more detail:
Effects Toolbar
Adjust Effects Menu
Effects Menu
Draw effects Menu
Transform Effects Menu
Audio Effects menu
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Timeline Toolbar
Timeline toolbar allows to to perform tasks such as introducing the limits of effect, boundaries of
fade-in and fade-out areas, zooming in or out on details of your media.
Button
Description
Zooms the selection in
Zooms the selection out
100% view
Video files view
Frames navigation
Active link
Passive link
Edits DVD menu
Shows one preview window
Shows two preview windows
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Action Buttons
The Action buttons are located at the bottom of the main working area and allow to perform various
actions with media file.
Button
Description
Use this button to go to the video file initial frame.
Start
Fast
Backward
Play
Preview
Stop
Fast Forward
Note : if you loaded several files into AVS Video Converter you will go to
the initial frame of the current file.
Use this button to navigate quickly backwards through the edited media file.
Clicking this button each time changes the speed of the fast backward
navigation.
Use this button to start playback of the edited media file with sound playing.
Use this button to start previewing of the edited media file.
Use this button to stop playback or previewing of the edited media file.
Use this button to navigate quickly forward through the edited media file.
Clicking this button each time changes the speed of the fast forward navigation.
Use this button to go to the video file final frame.
End
Note : if you loaded several files into AVS Video Converter you will go to
the initial frame of the next file.
Export Audio
Use this button to export audio stream from your media file as audio file.
Export Frame
Use this button to export a frame as graphic file.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Timeline Status Bar
Timeline status allows you to see where the effects starts and ends, length of fade in and fade out phases.
Navigation is expressed in frames .
Description of tools
Panel
Description
Start Select
Shows the beginning of selection (in milliseconds)
End Select
Shows the end of selection (in milliseconds)
Start Effect
Shows the magnitude of effect
End Effect
Shows the end of effect (in frames)
FadeIn Len
Shows the length of fade-in area (in milliseconds)
FadeOut
Shows the length of fade-out area (in milliseconds)
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Effects Main Toolbar
AVS Video Converter has functional and extremely easy to use toolbars. The effects toolbar is
located in the right part of the working area.
Button
Add
Add copy
Remove
Description
Open groups of effects (adjust, effect, draw, transformation)
Add the copy of the active effect
Remove the active effect from the list
Remove All
Remove all the effects from the list
Move Up
Move the active effect up in queue
Move Down
Move the active effect down in queue
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Audio Effects Menu
These effects allow you to introduce various Amplify , Delay , Chorus , Flanger and similar
adjustments to your audio track.
Button
Amplify
Band Pass
Chorus
Compressor
Delay
Flanger
Description
Applies Amplify to amplify your audio.
Applies Band Pass effect to set and hear the certain number of frequencies of
your audio track
Applies Chorus effect to make your audio sound fuller.
Applies Compressor effect to regulate the dynamic volume of your audio track
Applies Delay effect to create an echo effect of your audio track
Applies Flanger effect by mixing the audio signal with its delayed copy
High Pass
Applies High Pass effect to emphasize only high frequencies of your audio track
Low Pass
Applies Low Pass effect to emphasize only low frequencies of your audio track
High Shelf
Applies High Shelf effect to enhance or diminish high frequency material in the
sound
Low Shelf
Applies Low Shelf effect to enhance or diminish low frequency material in the
sound
Noise Gate
Applies Noise Gate effect to increase the dynamic range of a signal
Notch Filter
Applies Notch Filter effect to remove a very narrow band of frequencies around
a given point
Peak EQ
Phaser
Reverberation
Applies Peak EQ effect to modify loud sounds
Applies Phaser effect to enrich your audio
Applies Reverberation effect to create an echo effect
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Adjust Effects Menu
Adjust effects allow you to introduce various color, tone, brightness and similar adjustments to your
media file.
Button
Description
Brightness
Opens Brightness effect to make simple adjustments to the tonal range of a file
RGB
Brightness
Opens RGB Brightness effect to make simple adjustments to the tonal range in a
color you choose
Contrast
Opens Contrast effect to adjust the contrast of an image
Auto
Contrast
Opens Auto Contrast command to adjust the overall contrast and mixture of
colors in an RGB image automatically
Auto Levels
Opens Auto Levels effect which defines the lightest and darkest pixels in each
color channel as white and black and then redistributes intermediate pixel values
proportionately
Gamma
Opens Gamma effect to measure the brightness of midtone values and modify
the pixel values in an image
Equalize
Opens Equalize effect to normalize the histogram of a file
Invert
Hue
Saturation
Temperature
Opens Invert effect to invert the colors in an image
Opens Hue effect to adjust the hue of the entire image
Opens Saturation effect to adjust the saturation of the entire image
Opens Temperature effect to adjust your video image to warm or cold colors
Grayscale
Opens Grayscale effect to convert color images to just two color levels: black (0)
and white (255)
Threshold
Opens Threshold effect to determine how much contrast there is between
neighboring pixels for the sharpening to affect them
Colorize
Posterize
Opens Colorize effect to colorize the entire file in a RGB-specified file
Opens Posterize effect to specify the tonal level (or brightness values) and then
map pixels to the closest matching level
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Effects Menu
These effects allow you to introduce various painting, mosaic, blur and similar adjustments to your
media file.
Button
Deinterlace
Blur
Gaussian
Blur
Motion Blur
Sharpen
Mosaic
Add Noise
Description
Applies Deinterlacing effect to remove interlacing effect.
Applies Blur effect to reduce contrast between adjacent pixels visually smoothing
and softening the image
Applies Gaussian Blur effect to reduce contrast between adjacent pixels according
to a mathematical equation
Applies Motion Blur effect to reduce contrast. This effect gives the impression of
motion.
Applies Sharpen effect increases contrast to seemingly bring the images into better
focus
Applies Mosaic effect by clumping pixels of similar color values in cells
Applies Add Noise effect to add some texture to an image by way of tiny pixel
dustings
Diffuse
Applies Diffuse effect to make the selection look less focused
Emboss
Applies Emboss effect to give an image a 3D look
Filter
Minimal
Applies Filter Minimal effect to emphasize the dark pixels in an image
Filter
Maximal
Applies Filter Maximal effect to emphasize the light pixels in an image
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Transform Effects Menu
Transformation effects allow you to introduce various transformations, such as rotation, shift and other to
your media file. It also lets you reproduce the entire image or a part of it.
Button
Flip
Perspective
Description
Opens Flip effect to flip an entire image horizontally or vertically.
Opens Perspective effect to transform the perspective in an image horizontally or
vertically.
Skew
Opens Skew effect to skew the entire image horizontally or vertically.
Shift
Opens Shift effect to move your image along X and Y axes.
Rotate
Resample
Opens Rotate effect to rotate the entire image.
Opens Resample effect to reproduce the entire image.
Zoom
Opens Zoom effect to magnify or reduce the image.
Mirror
Opens Mirror effect to duplicate a part of the image.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Draw Effects Menu
Draw effects allow you to introduce various objects, images and text messages to your media file.
Button
Line
Rectangle
Ellipse
Description
Opens Line effect to include various lines to your video file
Opens Rectangle effect to include various rectangular objects to your video
file
Opens Ellipse effect to include various ellipse-shaped to your video file
Crop Rectangle
Opens Crop Rectangle effect to highlight an object in the video by setting
out an rectangular-shaped "window" which remains free of color coverage
Crop Ellipse
Opens Crop Ellipse effect to highlight an object in the video by setting out
an ellipse-shaped "window" which remains free of color coverage
Image
Text
Opens Image effect lets you include any image to your video file
Opens Text effect to include any message to your video
Credits
Opens Credits effect to include subtitles to your video
Border
Opens Border effect to put a border around the media image
Color Transition
Opens Color Transition menu to select a variation of objects which would
cover up the image
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Keyboard Shortcuts
AVS Video Converter interface allows you to use keyboard shortcuts to facilitate the access to the
main program features:
Main Window Shortcuts
Shortcut
Key
Function
F1
Brings up the current Help File Window
F3
Terminates the program and exits.
F4
Opens Edit options where you will find a list of all the available effects .
F5
Opens the corresponding Profile Editor
Opens About AVS Video Converter window. Here you can get the program
overview, license information, go to our web site www.avs4you.com and register
your program.
F12
Note : when pressing F5 to open a profile editor, make sure that the button with the required
profile is activated.
Timeline Keyboard manipulation
Shortcut Key
Esc
Pg Up
Pg Down
End
Home
Left Arrow
Right Arrow
Left Ctrl+Left
Arrow
Function
Close the Effects window
Moves five effects up
Moves five effects down
Move cursor to the end of the file
Move cursor to the beginning of the file
Navigate along file towards the beginning by frame
Navigate along file towards the end by frame
Navigate along file towards the beginning by 10 frames
Left Ctrl+Right
Arrow
Navigate along file towards the end by 10 frames
Right Ctrl+Left
Arrow
Navigate along file towards the beginning by 100 frames
Right Ctrl+Right
Arrow
Navigate along file towards the end by 100 frames
Shift+Left Arrow
Increases selection towards the beginning by frame
Shift+Right Arrow
Alt+Left Arrow
Alt+Right Arrow
Left Ctrl+Shift+Left
Arrow
Left
Ctrl+Shift+Right
Arrow
Left Ctrl+Alt+Left
Arrow
Increases selection towards the end by frame
Decreases selection towards the beginning by frame
Decreases selection towards the end by frame
Increases selection towards the beginning by 10 frames
Increases selection towards the end by 10 frames
Decreases selection towards the beginning by 10 frames
Left Ctrl+Alt+Right
Arrow
Decreases selection towards the end by 10 frames
Right Ctrl+Alt+Left
Arrow
Decreases selection towards the beginning by 100 frames
Right
Ctrl+Alt+Right
Arrow
Top Arrow
Bottom Arrow
Decreases selection towards the end by 100 frames
Move upward along list of effects
Move down along list of effects
Ins
Add effect
Del
Delete effect
+
Zoom in
-
Zoom out
Space
F1
Start Preview
Starts AVS4YOU Programs Help
Note : make sure that the Timeline is activated.
Markers Keyboard manipulation
Shortcut
Key
Function
Esc
Close the Effects window
Pg Up
Moves five markers up
Pg Down
End
Move to the end of markers list
Home
Move to the beginning of markers list
Left Arrow
Right
Arrow
Navigate along the markers list towards the beginning by marker
Navigate along the markers list towards the end by marker
Top Arrow
Bottom
Arrow
Moves five markers down
Navigate along the markers list towards the beginning by marker
Navigate along the markers list towards the end by marker
Ins
Add marker
Del
Delete marker
F1
Starts AVS4YOU Programs Help
Note : make sure that the Markers list is activated.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Features Overview
AVS Video Converter is a powerful, full-featured and easy to use software to convert both
video and audio streams of video files from one format to another, burn DVDs, SVCDs or
VCDs, extract a part of a video file to get a new file, extract single frames to image files and
retrieve video files' information and much more.
AVS Video Converter supports many various video formats : AVI , WMV , RM , MPEG ,
MOV , Mobile phone and other Mobile devices formats, and also Macromedia Flash
format. The software allows you to convert your videos from one format to another in various
combinations. Additionally, you can adjust output file's technical profiles to satisfy your needs.
You can customize your files for worry-free transmission via Internet to share your movies
with friends, showcase your work online quickly or prepare an outstanding class-project.
AVS Video Converter can upload your created files to your mobile device. You can convert
your input files of every supported formats to MP4 or 3GP format and right after that upload
them to your Sony PSP device, iPod or mobile phone using AVS Mobile Uploader application.
Now you don't need to use any additional software to burn a video CD - AVS Video
Converter lets you create it in four easy steps. You will be able to play the output disc at any
DVD player and watch your favorite movie at your home TV.
In AVS Video Converter there is a possibility to record DVD, SVCD, VCD . You can convert
your input files of every supported formats to DVD, SVCD or VCD and right after that burn it
to a CD-R/RW or DVD-R/RW and DVD-R/RW DL using the internal burning engine. Now you
don't need to use any additional software to burn a video CD - AVS Video Converter lets
you do it. You will be able to play the output disc at any DVD player and watch your favorite
movie at your home TV.
AVS Video Converter gives an opportunity to merge two or more files in one, simply
dragging and dropping input files from the Explorer and split video files using markers or
limiting the size of output files. It also can automatically split files into equal-sized parts. It's
also possible to batch-convert a group of selected files.
AVS Video Converter has the advantage of various effects to help you achieve your
creative best. You do not need to be a professional to use this tool. Once you get started you
will be surprised how smoothly you go applying different effects and filters, trimming your files
and adding banners and text. You can also preview the results to make sure that you achieved
the desired effect.
AVS Video Converter has a unique timeline tool, which allows you to achieve accuracy and
precision in applying effects and editing your movies. You can use the following tools to
navigate your video file (frame navigation).
In AVS Video Converter there are two preview windows: in the left window you can see the
start position and in the right one - the end position of the selected area. It is also much more
convenient to preview videos with sound - it's available with help of Start Play action button.
At numerous requests of our clients we have included possibility to export audio stream from
your media file as audio file.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Converting to DVD/VCD/SVCD Formats and Burning DVDs
To burn DVD/VCD/SVCD you have to convert your video file to a format needed for VCD (MPEG 1),
SVCD (MPEG 2) or DVD (VOB) creation:
1. Press To DVD button on the Main Toolbar to select the necessary DVD format or To MPEG
to select the necessary VCD/SVCD format
2. Enter Input File Name
3. Enter Output File Name
4. Select VCD/SVCD/DVD format.
5. Click the Edit button to add the necessary effects
6. Preview Input and Output File properties in the Advanced Settings to make sure that the
result will satisfy your needs
7. Press the Convert Now! button
8. If the output file is too big the disk selection window will open:
If you have a double-layer disk you might want to record your movie onto it. In this case choose
Double-layer DVD disc option and click OK . If your file is still too big to fit a single double-layer disc
you might use an option to Shrink to 1 disc or Split to 2 (or more) discs . In the first case the
video will be converted with reduced quality so that it could fit a single disc. You should check if the
quality is enough for you before you burn the movie onto a disc.
If your DVD drive does not support double-layer DVD discs you have an option to record your resulting
movie onto one or several single-layer discs. To do that select Standard DVD disc and choose the
variant of your DVD recording: either Split to 2 or more discs or Shrink the file to fit it onto one
DVD disc.
Note : in this case the quality might be dramatically reduced, so you should playback the resulting
file prior to burning your compilation onto a DVD.
Note : you need a DVD-RW drive supporting double-layer DVD discs to be able to record them.
See your DVD drive manual to find that out.
After that AVS Video Converter will convert your input file to a format needed for creation
DVD/VCD/SVCD depending on chosen DVD/VCD/SVCD format. We'd like to draw your attention to the
following: creating DVD you should not set output file name, just select the folder where the folders
containing files needed for DVD creation will be located. These folders will be named as VIDEO_TS
and AUDIO_TS .
Note : in case you create VCD or SVCD and the output file size is over 700 Mb, it will be splitted
into several files, each of them under 700 Mb size. It's necessary to write them to several CDs.
You should also have at least 700 Mb free space at your hard drive after file conversion for disc
image creation. In case you choose the Standard DVD disc and Split to 2 (or more) discs
option to create DVD and the output file size is over 4,3 Gb, it will be splitted into several files,
each of them under 4,3 Gb size. It's necessary to write them to several DVDs.
Note : each of them will have it's own DVD menu.
After that the disc will be recorded using the internal program burning engine.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Creating DVDs with Menus
Now you are able to split your DVD files into chapters and manage simple DVD authoring. AVS Video
Converter allows you to add single-level menus to your DVDs and select which video to choose.
Please, follow these simple steps to create a menu for your DVD.
To learn how to create and burn DVDs, click here .
Step
Step
Step
Step
Step
Step
1: Open input file clicking the Browse... button
2: Select To DVD as output format
3: Click the Edit button
4: Add the markers indicating the beginning of each chapter using the timeline
5: Close the Edit window
6: Press the Convert now! button to start conversion.
To add markers :
Step 1: Put the timeline cursor at the position where you'd like to set a marker
Step 2: Click the Add button located in Markers area. The name of marker shown as
Position:# will appear in the markers list.
Note : in case you select several input files and click the Auto Add button in the Edit mode,
markers will be added automatically at the beginning of each file.
You can also select a DVD menu style in the Edit Mode . To do that click the
button:
If you click the the Chapters option, the following window will open. The initial frames of the chapters
(where you set the markers) will be placed as picture choices for your chapters.
Please mind, that the current version allows you to customize the background picture or select other
pictures for your chapters. To select the background image you need just to click the Change
background... button and to customize it use the appropriate button.
If you would like your movie to return to the beginning and start playback over again at the end then
you should mark the Loop DVD check-box. If you want that on playback end the DVD menu was
displayed then you should leave this check-box unmarked.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Converting DVD Files to Other Formats and Ripping DVD Discs
Usually converting DVD files causes troubles due to the fact that the structure of a DVD disc is rather
complicated. In this page you will find tips on how to optimize processing of DVD files.
When you open a DVD disc in Windows Explorer, usually you will find 2 folders there - VIDEO_TS and
AUDIO_TS . Usually AUDIO_TS folder is empty.
The VIDEO_TS folder contains files with BUP, VOB and IFO extension. AVS Video Converter uses
VOB and IFO files. VOB files contain the video and audio streams directly. They cannot be more than
approximately 1 GB in size. That's why most DVDs contain several VOB files. VOB files, which end with
the number 0 usually are menus and not the videos themselves. (E.g. - VTS_01_0.vob - is a menu
file).
IFO Files contain the information about the structure of the disc, of the sequence of chapters, etc.
When you convert a DVD to another format, we recommend that you follow this instruction in order to
avoid incorrect file reading and sound and desynchronization between audio and video in the output
file.
1. Convert from a DVD disc directly!
When you browse for your Input Video File, select your DVD-Drive, open the VIDEO_TS folder and
select the VIDEO_TS.IFO file. Do not select the file, the name of which ends on zero, as it is a menu
file. We encourage you to select the IFO file, because this file applies to the whole video stream and
not to separate chapters.
Note : in the field Files of type : All video files is selected, but in fact, VOB files are not
reflected to avoid confusion.
If you still would like to select VOB files, choose VOB in the list of file types and choose a necessary
VOB file.
Note : converting separate VOBs instead of referring to a single IFO file may cause
desynchronization between the audio and the video in your output file.
2. After you have selected the VIDEO_TS.IFO file - follow the instructions that are given for
converting.
If you prefer to convert files that are located on your hard disc drive, please make sure that you copy
not only VOB files, but IFO files as well. When you convert referring to VOB files, we cannot guarantee
that your output file will be in synch.
Note : many DVDs are multi-lingual . We provide an option of selecting the audio track for your
output file. To select the necessary audio track, click << Advanced button twice and in the field
below select the audio track in the combo box:
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Supported Formats
Most of the commonly used media file formats are supported by AVS Video Converter :
Format
Read
Write
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
(.flv only)
+
(.swf only)
AVI - Audio Video Interleave
(.avi, .divx, .xvid, .ivf, etc )
DivX codec *
Xvid codec
H.264 codec
DV codec
Cinepak codec
Indeo codec
MJPEG codec
Uncompressed codec
MS MPEG-4 codec
and other
*if necessary codec is installed
WMV - Windows Media Formats
(.wmv, .asf, .asx, .dvr-ms)
Windows Media Video
Advanced Systems Format
DVR-MS
RealNetworks
(.ra, .rm, .ram, .rmvb)
MPEG - Motion Picture Experts Group
(.mpg, .mpeg, .m1v, .mpe, .m2v, .dat, .ifo,
.vob, .vro, .mg4, .mod)
MPEG-1
MPEG-2
VCD, SVCD, DVD (PAL and NTSC)
VOB, VRO
MPEG-4
Mobile video formats
(.3gp, .3g2, .3gpp, .mp4)
MP4 (inc. Sony PSP and Apple iPod)
3GPP
3GPP2
Quick Time movie
(.mov, .qt)
Adobe Flash
(.swf, .flv)
Matroska
(.mkv)
+
-
Ogg Media
(.ogm)
+
-
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Converting to AVI Format
To convert your video file to AVI (Audio Video Interleave) format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press To AVI button on the Main Toolbar
Enter Input File Name
Enter Output File Name
Select AVI Profile . To edit AVI Profile, open AVI Profile Editor window.
Click the Edit button to add the necessary effects
Preview Input and Output File properties in the Advanced Settings to make sure that the
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Converting to MP4 Format
To convert your video file to Mp4 format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press To MP4 button on the Main Toolbar
Select MP4 Profile . To edit MP4 Profile, open MP4 Profile Editor window.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Converting to 3GP Format
To convert your video file to 3GP format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press To 3GP button on the Main Toolbar
Select 3GP Profile . To edit 3GP profile, open Profile Editor .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Converting to MPEG Format
To convert your video file to MPEG format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press To MPEG button on the Main Toolbar
Select MPEG Profile . To edit MPEG profile, open MPEG Profile Editor .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Converting to Quick Time Format
To convert your video file to Quick Time format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press To MOV button on the Main Toolbar
Select Quick Time Profile . To edit Quick Time profile, open Quick Time Profile Editor .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Converting to WMV Format
To convert your video file to WMV format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press To WMV button on the Main Toolbar
Select WMV Profile
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Converting to RM Format
To convert your video file to RM (Real Media) format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press To RM button on the Main Toolbar
Select RM Profile
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Converting to SWF Format
To convert your video file to SWF format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press To SWF button on the Main Toolbar
Select SWF Profile . To edit SWF profile, open SWF Profile Editor .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Profile Editor
AVS Video Converter allows you to adjust AVI, MPEG, WMV, RM, MOV, 3GP, MP4 or SWF file's
technical profiles to satisfy your needs. You can customize your files for worry-free transmission via
Internet to share your movies with friends, showcase your work online quickly or prepare an
outstanding class-project.
To start the Profile Editor , you have to open AVS Video Converter , choose the format (AVI,
MPEG, WMV, RM, MOV, 3GP, MP4 or SWF) and press Edit Profile... button on the main window .
For details on specific profile editors, please refer to the respective chapters:
AVI Profile Editor
MPEG Profile Editor
WMV Profile Editor
RM Profile Editor
Quick Time Profile Editor
3GP Profile Editor
MP4 Profile Editor
SWF Profile Editor
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
AVI Profile Editor
AVS Video Converter lets you customize your audio and video settings for AVI format:
To edit AVI Profile:
1. Select Video Format from the list of the available video formats. It is the list of video codecs
installed in the system. You can use the Configure button to change the video format (codec)
settings. See the AVS MPEG4 and AVS H.264 codecs settings for more detail on how to
configure AVS codecs.
2. Set Frame Size choosing the necessary Width and Height values. Setting Width and
Height values to 0 keeps the original parameters of the frame.
3. Select Audio Format in the Audio Format drop-down combo box.
4. Set a Frequency value. Greater frequency value improves quality and increases file size.
5. Set a number of Channels .
6. Enter the Description of the profile, if necessary.
7. Enter your Comments on the profile, if necessary.
8. Press the Save button to save the settings.
Note : if you want to change the settings, press the Reload button and enter the settings once
again.
Button
Description
Name
Use this entry to name your profile
Description
Use this line to describe your profile
Comment
Video
Format
Frame Size
Audio
Format
Use this line to make a comment on your profile
Use this entry to choose a video format of the profile
Use this line to choose a frame size
Use this entry to choose the audio format of the profile
Configure
Use this box to change configuration of the video format. See the AVS MPEG4
and AVS H.264 codecs settings for more detail on how to configure AVS codecs.
Framerate
Use this line to choose a framerate
Width
Use this box to set width
Height
Use this box to set height
Frequency
Channels
Save
Reload
Close
Use this box to set frequency
Use this box to set mono or stereo channel
Use this button to save your settings
Use this button to terminate your setting and return to original ones
Use this button to close the window
Navigation buttons
Button
Name
First Profile
Previous
Profile
Description
Use this button to select the first profile
Use this button to select the previous profile
Next
Profile
Use this button to select the next profile
Last Profile
Use this button to select the last profile
New Profile
Use this button to create a new profile. Choose the necessary video and
audio format, frame size, frequency and number of channels and press
Save button
Delete
Profile
Use this button to delete an existing profile. Choose the profile you want
to delete and press this button
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
MP4 Profile Editor
AVS Video Converter lets you customize your audio and video settings for MP4 format. To open this
Profile Editor , press Edit Profile... button in the main window .
To edit MP4 Profile:
installed in the system.
again.
Button
Description
Name
Description
Comment
Video
Format
Frame Size
Use this line to choose a file type: MP4, PSP, iPod or mobile, depending on the
device type
File Type
Framerate
Width
Height
Frequency
Channels
Save
Reload
Close
Navigation buttons
Button
Name
First Profile
Previous
Profile
Description
Next
Profile
Last Profile
New Profile
Save button
Delete
Profile
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
3GP Profile Editor
AVS Video Converter lets you customize your audio and video settings for 3GP format. To open this
To edit 3GP Profile:
3. Select Audio Format in the Audio Format drop-down combo-box.
again.
Button
Description
Name
Description
Comment
Video Format
Frame Size
Audio Format
File Type
Use this box to set video file type
Framerate
Use this box to set framerate value
Width
Height
Frequency
Channels
Save
Reload
Close
Navigation buttons
Button
Name
First Profile
Previous
Profile
Description
Next
Profile
Last Profile
New Profile
Save button
Delete
Profile
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
MPEG Profile Editor
AVS Video Converter lets you customize your audio and video settings for MPEG 1 and MPEG 2
formats.
To edit MPEG Profile:
1. Select Video Format from the list of the available video formats.
3. Select Audio bitrate in the Audio Bitrate drop-down combo box.
4. Set the Bitrate and Framerate values in the respective boxes.
again.
Button
Description
Name
Description
Comment
Video Format
Frame Size
Audio Bitrate
Bitrate
Use this entry to choose the audio bit rate of the profile
Use this box to set bitrate
Framerate
Use this box to set framerate of the profile
Width
Height
Frequency
Use this entry to choose the audio frequency of the profile
Channels
Use this entry to choose the audio channels of the profile
Save
Reload
Close
Navigation buttons
Button
Name
First Profile
Previous
Profile
Description
Next
Profile
Last Profile
New Profile
Save button
Delete
Profile
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Quick Time Profile Editor
AVS Video Converter lets you customize your audio and video settings for Quick Time format.
To edit Quick Time Profile:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select Video Format from the list of the available video formats.
Set Frame Size .
Select Audio format in the Audio Format drop-down combo box.
Set the File Type and Framerate values in the respective boxes.
Enter the Description of the profile, if necessary.
Enter your Comments on the profile, if necessary.
Press the Save button to save the settings.
again.
Button
Description
Name
Description
Comment
Video Format
Frame Size
Audio Format
File Type
Use this box to set file type of the profile
Framerate
Use this box to set framerate of the profile
Width
Height
Frequency
Channels
Save
Reload
Close
Navigation buttons
Button
Name
First Profile
Previous
Profile
Description
Next
Profile
Last Profile
New Profile
the Save button
Delete
Profile
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
WMV Profile Editor
AVS Video Converter lets you customize your audio and video settings for WMV format. To open this
To edit WMV Profile:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Video Codec from the list of the available video formats.
Set Frame Size choosing the necessary Width and Height values.
Select Audio codec in the Audio Codec drop-down combo box.
Set Audio Format in the Format box.
Click the advanced button and set the advanced WMV codec settings such as: video bit rate,
video quality, number of seconds between two keyframes and so on.
again.
Button
Description
Name
Description
Video codec
Use this line to select video codec for your profile
Frame Size
Audio Codec
Framerate
Use this entry to choose the audio codec of the profile
Use this entry to set the video framerate
Width
Height
Format
Use this box to set audio track format
Advanced
Save
Use this button to set additional WMV parameters
Reload
Close
Navigation buttons
Button
Name
First Profile
Previous
Profile
Description
Next
Profile
Last Profile
New Profile
Save button
Delete
Profile
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
RM Profile Editor
AVS Video Converter lets you customize your audio and video settings for RM format. To open this
To edit RM Profile:
1. Select RM Preset from the list of the available presets.
3. Select Encoding Type in the respective drop-down combo box.
4. Set the Quality value in the respective box.
5. Set the Video Complexity , Video Mode , Audio Complexity and Audio Mode values in
the respective boxes.
again.
Button
Description
Name
Description
Comment
RM Preset
Use this entry to choose RM preset for the file
Frame Size
Encoding Type
Quality
Framerate
Use this entry to choose the encoding type of your file
Use this entry to set the output video file quality
Width
Height
Video Complexity
Use this box to set video complexity value
Audio Complexity
Use this box to set audio complexity value
Video Mode
Use this box to set video mode depending on the output video type
Audio Mode
Use this box to set video mode depending on the output audio type
Save
Reload
Close
Navigation buttons
Button
Name
First Profile
Previous
Profile
Description
Next
Profile
Last Profile
New Profile
Save button
Delete
Profile
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
SWF Profile Editor
AVS Video Converter lets you customize your audio and video settings for SWF format. To open this
To edit SWF Profile:
3. Select Audio bitrate in the Audio Format drop-down combo box.
4. Set the Quality value in the respective box.
5. Set the Frequency , Channels and Framerate values in the respective boxes.
again.
Button
Description
Name
Description
Comment
Video Format
Frame Size
Audio Format
Quality
Use this box to change quality of the video file
Framerate
Width
Height
Frequency
Channels
Save
Reload
Close
Navigation buttons
Button
Name
First Profile
Previous
Profile
Description
Next
Profile
Last Profile
New Profile
Save button
Delete
Profile
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
MPEG-4 Video Codec Settings
MPEG-4 - ISO/IEC open standard for video encoding developed by MPEG (Moving Picture Experts
Group). It is characterized by a small output video file size and quite good picture quality even when a
relatively low bit rate is used. The most known resulting output when you use MPEG-4 format for
compression is the AVI file type which is commonly used in home video. It is coded with XviD, DivX,
3ivx, Nero Digital and other video codecs.
The codec settings can be changed when you press the Configure button in AVI Profile editor . The
following tabs of the codec settings window are available:
Main settings - include Profile @ level , Encoding type , Bitrate/Target
quantizer/Target size , Quarter pixel , Lumimasking enabled , Chroma optimizer ,
Grayscale enabled , Stat file .
Quantization settings - include Quantization type , Min I-frame quantizer , Max Iframe quantizer , Min P-frame quantizer , Max P-frame quantizer , Min B-frame
quantizer , Max B-frame quantizer and Trellis quantization .
Motion settings - include Motion search type , VHQ Mode , Frame drop ratio , Max key
interval , Global motion compensation , Use chroma motion , Cartoon mode and
Turbo mode .
B-VOPs settings - include Use B-VOPs , Max consecutive B-VOPs , Quantizer ratio ,
Quantizer offset .
Optimization settings
optimizations .
-
include
Automatically
detect
optimizations
,
Force
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Main
[Profile @ level ]
[Encoding type ]
[Lumimasking enabled ]
[Bitrate/Target quantizer/Target size ]
pixel ]
[Chroma optimizer ]
[Grayscale enabled ]
[Quarter
[Stat file ]
Profile @ level - restricts the usage of MPEG-4 tools and limits the encoded bit rate so that the
output movie is compatible with hardware decoders. If you are acquainted with XviD codec settings
you will find that the Profile levels coincide with the XviD profiles. In the table below you can see
which profile allows you to change the specific codec settings and use different quantization types,
what maximum resolution, frame rate or bit rate is recommended for every profile.
BRecommended Maximum
Lumimasking Frames
Profile level max resolution average
enabled
(Use Band frame rate bit rate
VOPs
176x144x15
not
Simple @ L0
64 kbps not allowed
fps
allowed
176x144x15
not
Simple @ L1
64 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
352x288x15
not
Simple @ L2
128 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
352x288x15
not
Simple @ L3
384 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
176x144x15
not
ARTS @ L1
64 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
352x288x15
not
ARTS @ L2
128 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
352x288x30
not
ARTS @ L3
384 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
352x288x30
2000
not
ARTS @ L4
allowed
fps
kbps
allowed
176x144x30
AS @ L0
128 kbps
allowed
allowed
fps
176x144x30
AS @ L1
128 kbps
allowed
allowed
fps
352x288x15
AS @ L2
384 kbps
allowed
allowed
fps
352x288x30
AS @ L3
768 kbps
allowed
allowed
fps
352x576x30
3000
AS @ L4
allowed
allowed
fps
kbps
720x576x30
8000
AS @ L5
allowed
allowed
fps
kbps
Quantization
type
Interlacing
encoding
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 or
MPEG
H.263 or
MPEG
H.263 or
MPEG
H.263 or
MPEG
H.263 or
MPEG
H.263 or
MPEG
Quarter Global motion
pixel
compensation
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
As can be seen Profile levels "Simple @ L0" , "Simple @ L1" , "Simple @ L2" , "Simple @ L3" ,
"ARTS @ L1" , "ARTS @ L2" and "AS @ L2" roughly correspond to the DivX Handheld Profile that
is intended to enable the decoding of DivX video content at bit rates and resolutions appropriate for
small handheld devices such as mobile phones and digital watches.
Profile levels "ARTS @ L3" , "ARTS @ L4" , "AS @ L0" , "AS @ L1" and "AS @ L3" can
correspond to the DivX Portable Profile which will enable high-quality DivX video content for portable
video devices, including video-enabled MP3 players and small video playback devices such as PDA.
Profile level "AS @ L4" can correspond to the DivX Home Theater Profile . The specifications for
this profile will ensure that DivX Certified home theater devices such as DVD players, set-top boxes,
and gaming consoles, can playback all versions of high-quality DivX content.
And Profile level "AS @ L5" can correspond to the DivX High Definition Profile that is intended for
any hardware device that can playback high-definition resolution DivX content.
Profile level setting can be chosen from the preset list only and cannot be altered.
[Back to the Top ]
The Encoding type section allows you to select the number of passes that the compression will take
and configure these passes. It can be selected from the list:
Single pass - Bitrate is used to convert the video file with a constant target bitrate. You can
use this option to convert the file with relatively fast speed when you need to get an output
file with a certain target bitrate. The target bitrate is selected in the Bitrate/Target
quantizer/Target size section.
Single pass - Quantizer is used to convert the video file with a constant quality. You can use
this option to convert the file so that the output video will have an unknown size, but the
quality will be better. The target quantizer is selected in the Bitrate/Target
Twopass - 1st pass is used for the first pass of the multipass conversion mode. See below to
learn more on how to perform multipass conversion.
Twopass - 2nd pass is used for the second and all the following passes of the multipass
conversion mode. See below to learn more on how to perform multipass conversion.
You can perform multipass conversion with the AVS Video Converter program. If you wish your
video to reach a specific accurate file size at the end of the encode and pertain a certain quality, you'll
need to use a multipass mode. To start encoding in the multipass mode, you need to select the
Twopass - 1st pass encoding type first, set all the parameters of the codec, click OK and, on closing
the AVI Profile editor , click the Convert Now! button. When the conversion is over, you will need
to open the AVI Profile editor for the second time and press the Configure button. Now you can
select the Twopass - 2nd pass encoding type, set the necessary codec parameters and repeat the
conversion once again.
Note : when you select the Twopass - 1st pass encoding type, no conversion actually takes
place. The codec only analyzes the input video and creates a log file - Stat file , where all the
information about the file is saved. And only when you select the Twopass - 2nd pass encoding
type and press the Convert Now! button, the conversion is done. You should bear it in mind, as
there will be no output Twopass - 1st pass mode.
[Back to the Top ]
Bitrate/Target quantizer/Target size - section allows the user to select the desired output bitrate,
quantizer or size values.
Note : the Average Bitrate will make the codec convert the output video with a constant average
bitrate, while the Quantizer will let the codec concentrate on the output file quality, not taking
into account the file size.
The Average Bitrate values can be between 0 and 5000 , the default values are 800 for low quality,
1200 for medium quality and 1400 for high quality presets.
The Target quantizer values can be between 0 and 51 , the default value is 26 . The higher the
value, the lower the quality of the output video file.
The Target size values can be selected only when you are going to perform a second pass in
Twopass mode. This can be especially useful, if you would like to save your output video file onto
some storage of a certain size - a CD-R/RW, for instance. The higher the value, the better the quality
of the output video file.
[Back to the Top ]
Quarter pixel - the codec works with quarter pixels for encoding with a more precise motion
compensation. Enabling this option increases the size of auxiliary data so when the bit rate is low the
quality can decrease. If you turn the setting on you should bear in mind that the coding and decoding
load on the CPU increases heavily and devices with slower CPU's might even not be able to playback
the output video files. The compression time with Quarter pixel setting On increases.
Quarter pixel setting can be either checked or unchecked.
[Back to the Top ]
Lumimasking enabled - used to apply more compression to very dark and very bright frames where
it cannot be easily noticed by the human eye. At the same time the algorithm releases the resources
allowing to decrease the compression of the other frames so the picture looks better. Recommended to
turn On if the movie contains lots of very dark or very bright scenes. Not recommended for music
video clips.
Lumimasking enabled setting can be either checked or unchecked.
[Back to the Top ]
Chroma optimizer - used to produce a better impression of objects edges by reducing the noise
around them. It is achieved by interpolating the colors in the dark and bright areas situated near the
object edges. As the compression ratio of the picture without the noise is higher the output video will
have better quality. Recommended to leave it On .
Chroma optimizer setting can be either checked or unchecked.
[Back to the Top ]
Grayscale enabled - lets the codec not to write the information about the color into the frames thus
reducing the video frames size in the output video file up to 10%. These saved resources will be used
to enhance the output video quality. Can be recommended if you need to convert a black-and-white
source video file.
Grayscale enabled setting can be either checked or unchecked.
[Back to the Top ]
In the Stat file section you can select the file that will be used to store the information on the input
video. This information will be used for the codec to perform a second pass. This option is enabled in
twopass mode only.
[Back to the Top ]
If you are not sure which settings to use you can press the Default button to discard the changes and
restore default settings.
When ready press the OK button to accept the changes you have made.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Quantization
[Quantization type ]
[Min I-frame quantizer ] [Max I-frame quantizer ]
quantizer ]
[Max P-frame quantizer ]
[Min B-frame quantizer ]
quantization ]
[Min P-frame
[Max B-frame quantizer ]
[Trellis
Quantization type - quantization matrices used to convert the movie. Depends on the video bit rate
used, movie type and picture quality.
Quantization
type
H.263
Details
Recommended to use with bit rates below 900 kbps for the movies with
average frame sizes (512x288 and alike - DivX/XviD movies that fit into one
CD) and smaller as this matrix blurs the picture thus increasing the
compression ratio and the quality of the output video on lower bit rates. But
if the resolution (frame size) is above average (for instance, 720x480) the
picture quality will be worse and it is recommended to use bit rates above
900 kbps.
Also suitable for coding the movies with very good picture quality and
cartoons.
MPEG
Recommended to use with bit rates above 900 kbps (movies that fit into two
CD's) as this matrix keeps the picture sharper using more bits of the
information to code the video image. Also suitable for coding the movies with
not very good picture quality. At higher bit rates sharpens the images.
Quantization type setting can be chosen from the preset list only and cannot be altered.
[Back to the Top ]
Min I-frame quantizer - lets the user configure the minimum quantizer for I-frames. It is strongly
recommended that you leave these settings at their default. See also the B-VOPs section for more
details on different frames types.
The possible values vary from 0 to 10000 . The default value is 1 .
[Back to the Top ]
Max I-frame quantizer - lets the user configure the maximum quantizer for I-frames. It is strongly
[Back to the Top ]
Min P-frame quantizer - lets the user configure the minimum quantizer for P-frames. It is strongly
[Back to the Top ]
Max P-frame quantizer - lets the user configure the maximum quantizer for P-frames. It is strongly
[Back to the Top ]
Min B-frame quantizer - lets the user configure the minimum quantizer for B-frames. It is strongly
[Back to the Top ]
Max B-frame quantizer - lets the user configure the maximum quantizer for B-frames. It is strongly
[Back to the Top ]
Trellis quantization - an advanced algorithm that lets the codec estimate the quality-size ratio and
choose the coding variant based on it. Can improve the quality keeping the file size smaller. At the
same time the conversion time increases as compared to the conversion with this setting disabled.
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Motion
[Motion search type ]
[VHQ Mode ] [Frame drop ratio ]
motion compensation ]
[Use chroma motion ]
[Cartoon mode ]
[Max key interval ]
[Global
[Turbo mode ]
Motion search type - decides mostly over the resulting quality at a given bit rate. The codec
searches for the motions of the objects in the movie and based on the objects motion estimation
compresses the output video. If set to low values, the codec will be faster at the costs of quality for the
given bit rate.
Motion
type
search
Details
Use this setting to switch Motion search off. The conversion process will
get faster but the quality of the output movie will be not too good. Really not
recommended.
0 (None)
Can be used only at very high bit rates as with Motion search off the codec
generates only I-frames (frames with a very small compression ratio) and in
this case the output video file quality will be very high, but the file size will
also be huge.
1 (Very Low)
Use this setting to set a very low level of Motion search . The codec
neglects most of the differences between the motions of the objects in the
movie thus the compression process gets faster but the size of the frames in
the output file is bigger and the quality is not too good. Recommended to
use only when the speed of conversion is critical.
2 (Low)
Use this setting to set a low level of Motion search . The codec neglects
most of the differences between the motions of the objects in the movie thus
the compression process gets faster but the size of the frames in the output
file is bigger and the quality is not too good. Recommended to use only when
the speed of conversion is critical.
3 (Medium)
Use this setting to set a medium level of Motion search . The codec
neglects many differences between the motions of the objects in the movie
thus the compression process gets faster but the size of the frames in the
output file is bigger and the quality is not too good. Recommended to use
only when the speed of conversion is critical.
4 (High)
Use this setting to set a high level of Motion search . The codec searches
for differences between the motions of the objects in the movie thus the
compression process gets a little slower but the size of the frames in the
output file is smaller and the quality is rather good. Recommended to use for
good quality when you need a faster conversion.
5 (Very High)
Use this setting to set a very high level of Motion search . The codec
searches for most of the differences between the motions of the objects in
the movie and uses an advanced algorithm to convert the picture in the
movie thus the compression process gets slower but the size of the frames
in the output file is smaller and the quality is good. Recommended to use for
good quality conversion if you want to fit your movie to two CD's.
6 (Ultra High)
Use this setting to set an ultra high level of Motion search . The codec
searches for most of the the differences between the motions of the objects
in the movie and uses an advanced algorithm to convert the picture in the
the best quality conversion if you want to fit your movie to one CD.
Motion search type setting can be chosen from the preset list only and cannot be altered.
[Back to the Top ]
VHQ Mode - an algorithm that decides which format will be used to store motion vectors thus
reducing the file size. Depends on the Motion search type used - the best compression and the best
quality can be achieved when Motion search is equal to 6 (Ultra High) and VHQ mode is equal to 4
(Wide search) . Cannot be used together with Global Motion Compensation .
VHQ Mode
Details
0 (Off)
Use this setting to switch VHQ Mode off. The biggest output file size and
the highest speed of conversion.
1 (Mode Decision)
Use this setting to set VHQ Mode to the lowest level. The big output file
size and the high speed of conversion.
2 (Limited Search)
Use this setting to set VHQ Mode to low level. The medium output file size
and the medium speed of conversion.
3 (Medium Search)
Use this setting to set VHQ Mode to medium level. The smaller output file
size and the lower speed of conversion.
4 (Wide Search)
Use this setting to set VHQ Mode to the highest level. The smallest output
file size and the lowest speed of conversion.
VHQ Mode setting can be chosen from the preset list only and cannot be altered.
[Back to the Top ]
Frame drop ratio - allows to set the percentage of frames that don't have any important information
and thus can be dropped. It is done to reduce the output file size and preserve the quality. The higher
the value the more frames are dropped and the picture might have a "jittering" effect. At the same
time the picture quality might increase due to the released resources that are redistributed to enhance
the quality of the frames that were not dropped so the Frame drop ratio setting should be picked
experimentally. When set to 0 no frames are dropped.
Frame drop ratio setting can be altered manually to suit your personal needs - you can enter the
values using the keyboard or with the mouse clicks. Possible values are 0 - 100 .
[Back to the Top ]
Max key interval - maximum number of delta frames (interframes) between two keyframes
(intraframes - frames with a very small compression ratio) compulsorily inserted by the codec in
addition to automatic I-frames insertion. This is used to reduce the seeking time for fast forward or
backward mode when watching the movie. It is necessary for the codec to use I-frames to increase
the output video quality as the P-frames (delta frames or interframes) situated between two
keyframes are compressed based on the preceding I-frames.
The recommended setting about 300 . It is possible to lower the value a little in fast-motion videos
although if the value is too small then too many keyframes (I-frames) are inserted and the video
cannot be compressed very effectively thus lowering the output video quality. At the same time it is
possible to increase the value in videos with a lot of slow-motion scenes as the codec is able to insert
I-frames by itself when needed.
Max key interval setting can be altered manually to suit your personal needs - you can enter the
values using the keyboard or with the mouse clicks.
[Back to the Top ]
Global motion compensation - helps while coding the objects that only change their size or place in
the picture but keep static (for instance, when the camera zooms in or out or moves shooting the
panoramic view). It is recommended to use this option when converting movies with nature views and
alike. The compression ratio can be increased up to 3% (the released resources will be used to
enhance the output video quality) but the conversion and decoding speed will be lower. Most effective
for compressing the videos with greater resolution. Cannot be used together with the VHQ Mode .
Global motion compensation setting can be either checked or unchecked.
[Back to the Top ]
Use chroma motion - an algorithm that lets the codec detect motion in an advanced way and
calculate the possibility to additionally compress the output file without the quality loss. The
compression ratio can be increased up to 7% thus increasing the final quality but the conversion speed
will be much lower.
Use chroma motion setting can be either checked or unchecked.
[Back to the Top ]
Cartoon mode - special possibilities for motion estimation when converting cartoons (animated
pictures).
Cartoon mode setting can be either checked or unchecked.
[Back to the Top ]
Turbo mode - lets the algorithm estimate the motion for b-frames and quarterpel faster.
Turbo mode setting can be either checked or unchecked.
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
B-VOPs
[Use B-VOPs ]
[Max consecutive B-VOPs ]
[Quantizer ratio ]
[Quantizer offset ]
Use B-VOPs - an option that allows the codec algorithm to use so called bidirectional frames that are
much smaller in size than usual frames and are predicted based on the frames before and after them.
They let the codec increase the compression ratio without quality loss.
In video compression three types of frames can be used: I-, P- and B-frames. I-frames are the frames
with a very small compression ratio. They are also called keyframes (intraframes) - see Max key
interval . When watching the film the navigation is done using the I-frames. Between two I-frames
the codec uses a succession of P-frames (delta frames or interframes), which have a much higher
compression ratio, for instance:
I
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
I
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
and so on. To further increase the video compression ratio, B-frames were introduced. They are
inserted between two less compressed frames - I-frames or P-frames, so that the succession of the
frames in the video file looks like
I
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
I
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
B
Compression ratio for the B-frames is the highest among all the frames as they are compared with the
previous and the following frames and only difference between them is written into B-frames. The
released compression possibility is redistributed between the I-frames and P-frames allowing to
compress them less but at the same time keeping the file size smaller. And though the quality of Bframes is worse than the quality of P-frames and I-frames, the picture quality remains quite good due
to the reduction of compression of the latters.
It is recommended to leave the Use B-VOPs setting On .
Use B-VOPs setting can be either checked or unchecked.
[Back to the Top ]
Max consecutive B-VOPs - maximum number of sequential bidirectional frames in the video stream.
The best result might be achieved when bidirectional frames and interframes are interleaved thus the
Max consecutive B-VOPs number is equal to 1 . If you set this number to 0 the result will be the
same as to uncheck the Use B-VOPs setting. At higher values the movie picture might flicker but you
might try to change the value to see the result for yourselves.
[Back to the Top ]
Quantizer ratio - the ratio used to calculate the bidirectional frames quantizer according to the
following formula:
B-frames quantizer = [(Quantizer of previous P-frame + Quantizer of following P-frame) * (B-frame
quantizer ratio)/200 + (B-frame offset/100)].
As can be seen, if you increase the default value the ratio of bidirectional frames compression will be
also increased decreasing the ratio of compression of the other frames thus improving their quality. At
the same time the quality of bidirectional frames will get worse so you should check the output result.
If the default value is decreased the ratio of bidirectional frames compression will also decrease thus
increasing the compression of the other frames and reducing their quality or increasing the size of the
output video file which is not recommended.
[Back to the Top ]
Quantizer offset - the offset used to calculate the bidirectional frames quantizer. It is not
recommended to change this value although you can try to change it to compare the results.
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Optimization
[Automatically detect optimizations ]
[Force optimizations ]
Automatically detect optimizations - this setting lets the codec automatically detect the CPU type
and the instructions set it can use best.
It is recommended to leave this setting On .
[Back to the Top ]
Force optimizations - this setting lets you override the codec internal CPU detection and use the
instructions set you consider necessary.
Usually, you should leave this on auto detection. If you get weird crashes or strange results, you might
first try to disable SSE + SSE 2, if still nothing changed disable 3DNow! + 3DNow! 2 and so on.
This is only for situations where the wrong CPU extensions get used and produce erroneous output.
3DNow! and 3DNow! 2 belongs to AMD (Advanced Micro Devices), while the rest are Intel Architecture
technology.
It is not recommended to change this setting.
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
H.264 Video Codec Settings
H.264 - H.264, or AVC, for Advanced Video Coding, is a digital video codec standard which is noted for
achieving very high data compression. It was written by the ITU-T Video Coding Experts Group
together with the ISO/IEC Moving Picture Experts Group as the product of a collective partnership
effort known as the Joint Video Team. The intent of the H.264/AVC project was to create a standard
that would be capable of providing good video quality at bit rate that are substantially lower (e.g., half
or less) than what previous standards would need (e.g., relative to MPEG-2, H.263, or DivX and XviD).
The codec settings can be changed when you press the Configure button in AVI Profile editor . The
following tabs of the codec settings window are available:
Bitrate - include Encoding type , Average bitrate/Quantizer , Stat file .
Rate Control settings - include Bitrate , Quantization Limits , Scene cuts .
MBs and Frames settings - include Partitions , B-Frames
More settings - include Motion Estimation , Miscellaneous options
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Bitrate
[Encoding type ]
[Average bitrate/Quantizer ]
[Stat file ]
file with a certain target bitrate.
quality will be better.
Multipass - First pass is used for the first pass of the multipass conversion mode. See below
to learn more on how to perform multipass conversion.
Multipass - First pass (Fast) is used for the fast first pass of the multipass conversion
mode. See below to learn more on how to perform multipass conversion.
Multipass - Nth pass is used for the second and all the following passes of the multipass
Multipass - First pass or Multipass - First pass (Fast) encoding types first, set all the parameters
of the codec, click OK and, on closing the AVI Profile editor , click the Convert Now! button. When
the conversion is over, you will need to open the AVI Profile editor for the second time and press the
Configure button. Now you can select the Multipass - Nth pass encoding type, set the necessary
codec parameters and repeat the conversion once again.
Note : when you select the Multipass - First pass or Multipass - First pass (Fast) encoding
types, no conversion actually takes place. The codec only analyzes the input video and creates a
log file - Stat file , where all the information about the file is saved. And only when you select the
Multipass - Nth pass encoding type and press the Convert Now! button, the conversion is done.
You should bear it in mind, as there will be no output video file after the Multipass - First pass
or Multipass - First pass (Fast) modes.
[Back to the Top ]
The Average bitrate/Quantizer section allows the user to select the desired output bitrate or
quantizer values.
The Quantizer values can be between 0 and 51 , the default value is 26 . The higher the value, the
lower the quality of the output video file.
[Back to the Top ]
multipass mode only.
[Back to the Top ]
If you are not sure which settings to use you can press the Restore Defaults button to discard the
changes and restore default settings.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Rate Control
[Bitrate ]
[Quantization Limits ]
[Scene cuts ]
The Bitrate section comprises the following codec parameters:
Keyframe boost controls how much the quality of key frames (I-frames) is boosted as
compared to the other frames (P-frames). Please, see the B-VOPs section of the MPEG-4
codec for more detail on different frame types used in video coding. The boost gives I-frames
some extra quality, so frames predicted from them will also be of better quality, leading to a
better visual impression. The higher the value, the more quality is given to the I-frames and
the less to the other frames. You can try the higher values for low-bitrate and low-quality
encodes or lower values for bright, continuously fast-moving videos where the background is
frequently changing. The possible values vary from 0 to 70 . The default value is 40 .
B-frames reduction controls how much the quality of B-frames is reduced as compared to
the other frames (P-frames). This cut in B-frame bitrate is hardly noticeable to the human
visual system because B-frames are used inconspicuously in between other frames to more
efficiently recreate the video's motion. It is possible to lower this value a little for highbitrate/low-quantizer video thereby ensuring a more uniform quality to details, motion and the
video as a whole. For animated content (cartoons, anime), you might use higher values. The
possible values vary from 0 to 60 . The default value is 30 .
Bitrate Variability controls the extent to which the codec can variate the quality throughout
the movie at the bitrate specified. The lower this option is set, the more unstable and erratic
the quality changes can become. The higher this setting is, the more equal the quality
becomes, producing a video with more stable quality. The possible values vary from 0 to 100
. The default value is 60 .
All the Bitrate settings can be altered manually to suit your personal needs - you can enter the values
using the keyboard or with the mouse clicks.
[Back to the Top ]
The Quantization Limits section comprises the following codec parameters:
Min QP sets the lowest quantizer your video can attain at any point. Very high values are not
recommended unless you plan video with an immensely high bitrate and low resolution. The
Max QP sets the highest quantizer you video can reach. It is strongly recommended leaving it
where at the default value of 51 . The possible values vary from 0 to 51 . The default value is
51 .
Max QP Step controls how how much the quantizer can change between two consecutive
frames. Setting this value too low forces the codec to switch quality levels slowly, which can
be devastating to the compression of certain scenes which, for example, could suddenly use a
lower quantizer to maintain similar visual quality. Setting it too high can lead to conspicuous
jumps in quality. The possible values vary from 0 to 50 . The default value is 4 .
All the Quantization Limits settings can be altered manually to suit your personal needs - you can
enter the values using the keyboard or with the mouse clicks.
[Back to the Top ]
The Scene cuts section comprises the following codec parameters:
Scene Cut Threshold determines how much a frame needs to change before being
considered a scene change by the codec. The higher the value, the less sensitive scene change
detection will be. For dark videos you might want to decrease this value so as to let the codec
more accurately determine scene changes. As a more general rule, videos with more subtle
scene changes need a higher scene cut threshold and bright high-contrast videos with very
prominent scene changes might actually be reason to attempt to set a lower threshold. The
Min IDR-frame interval sets the minimum number of frames between two keyframes. If this
value is set too high, too much time will go by without the codec detecting a scene change and
implementing the necessary keyframe. Setting it too low can result in a waste of bitrate and
sometimes flickering. The possible values vary from 0 to 100000 . The default value is 25 .
Max IDR-frame interval sets the maximum the minimum distance between two keyframes.
Setting this too low can result in an oversaturation of key frames, possible flickering, and
general bitrate waste, reducing overall quality. Setting this too high can result in seeking
issues, and any artifacts/encoding flaws during the time between key frames will remain on
the screen longer. The possible values vary from 0 to 100000 . The default value is 250 .
All the Scene cuts settings can be altered manually to suit your personal needs - you can enter the
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
MBs and Frames
[Partitions ]
[B-Frames ]
The Partitions section comprises the following codec parameters:
The partition search and decisions increase the accuracy and thus the quality and compression
efficiency of the codec, enabling higher quality output. As a general rule, the more searches types of
searches the codec performs on the visual information, the more accurately and efficiently it can
predict and encode them. Disabling any partition search and decision options will speed up the
encoding process at the expense of the quality.
The 8x8 Transform feature is a very powerful compression technique which acts upon larger blocks
of visual information and enables the usage of other high-quality partition options such as the 8x8
Intra search which would otherwise be unusable without the 8x8 Transform . Both of these options
increase quality to a significant degree, but the usage of the the 8x8 Transform would make your
video High Profile AVC compatible and would break the encoded video's compatibility with Main
Profile AVC . Thus you should make sure your device supports High profile AVC , otherwise you
might not be able to playback the resulting output video file.
All the Partitions settings can be either checked or unchecked.
[Back to the Top ]
The B-Frames section comprises the following codec parameters:
Use as reference allows a B-frame to reference another B-frame. Checking this setting
might increase quality slightly because these B-frames can be predicted from one another
instead of being limited to the P-frames around them for prediction and at the same time the
time of the conversion will also increase. This setting should be activated when using more
than 2 consecutive B-frames (See the Max consecutive setting below).
Max consecutive indicates how many B-frames will be used consecutively. You can use up to
5 consecutive B-frames, but using 2-3 is the most sensible choice. The possible values vary
from 0 to 5 . The default value is 0 .
Adaptive activates adaptive use of B-frames. Without this feature, the codec will always put
as many B-frames in a row as set in the Max consecutive field.
Bias lets the codec increase or decrease the probability that B-frames are being used. The
higher this number, the more frequently B-frames will be dropped in. Setting this parameter
to 100 , for instance, will force the codec to use the maximum number of B-frames specified
in the Max consecutive box - it will be the same as uncheck Adaptive check-box. Setting
this to -100 will mean that almost no B-frames are used. For most videos, the optimal
number of B-frames will be chosen at Bias value of 0 . The possible values vary from -100 to
100 . The default value is 0 .
Bidirectional ME parameter allows the codec to predict some B-frames using motion before
and after them. This increases quality of the output video.
Weighted bipredictional setting allows B-frames to be predicted more heavily from one P
frame or another. It results in more accurate and efficient B-frames, therefore increasing
quality.
Direct B-frame mode allows B-frames to use predicted motion vectors instead of coding the
actual motion, thus saving space and increasing compression efficiency. This setting indicates
how motion vectors for B-frames are derived: Spatial uses neighboring blocks in the same
frame, which may result in a higher PSNR (it can be used for animated content as it better
handles inconsistent motion jumps), whereas Temporal makes use of neighboring frames which many people perceive as higher quality (better used for real-life content with fluid
motion).
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
More Settings
[Motion Estimation ]
[Miscellaneous options ]
The Motion Estimation section comprises the following codec parameters:
Partition Decision parameter controls the precision of the motion estimation process. The
selection menu contains a list of 7 options, arranged from the least quality 1 (Fastest) to the
highest quality 6b (RDO on B-frames) options. It is strongly recommended to use the
options below 5 (High Quality) only in case the speed is crucial and the quality is
expendable. In all the other cases the values of 5 (High Quality) , 6 (RDO) and 6b (RDO
on B-frames) should be used. The higher the value, the better the quality at the expense of
the conversion speed.
Method indicates in which direction the motion estimation search is performed. The better the
method, the higher the likelihood of the codec finding and accurately recording motion,
thereby increasing the compression quality and efficiency. It is recommended to use either
Hexagonal search for slower machines or Uneven Multi-Hexagon for more powerful
configurations. The Exhaustive Search can be used only on extra-powerful computers as it
decreases encoding speed dramatically.
Range specifies the motion search range in pixels. The higher the range, the more pixels will
be analyzed, which is paid by slower encoding time. This parameter is only used together with
Uneven Multi-Hexagon and Exhaustive Search motion search methods. The possible
values vary from 0 to 64 . The default value is 16 .
Max Ref. frames indicates how many previous frames can be referenced by a P-frame or Bframe. The higher is this value, the better but the coding process gets slower at the same
time. The possible values vary from 0 to 16 . The default value is 0 .
Mixed Refs option offers the codec greater freedom to make references on a smaller scale
when checked. Requires the Max Ref. frames value to be more than 1 to be turned on.
Chroma ME uses the color information in the video's chroma plane to estimate motions,
which increases both the accuracy and visual quality of motion estimation. This almost always
leads to a significant quality increase, especially with animated material. It can be
recommended to switch this option on.
[Back to the Top ]
Threads should be equal to the number of encoding threads that can be used in the encoding
process. The number of threads should correspond with the number of processor cores the
computer has. Each single Hyper Treading processor can be counted as 2 threads. When not
sure how many cores your computer has, or whether or not it has HT, it's safe to keep this
setting at 1 . This option speeds up the encoding process on multi-core machines. The possible
CABAC - Context Adaptive Binary Arithmetic Coding - is a feature that allows syntax
elements of the video stream to be predicted by context. Basically, it increases compression
efficiency at no quality loss (10-15% varying by video and by bitrate), though the decoding
speed can slow down. This option should be unchecked only if you plan to playback the output
video on a portable device with a slow processor. It is On by default.
Noise reduction option switches on and off the image noise prefiltering. The value of 0 turns
this option off, the other values (1 to 65535) turn on the filter of small image noises. The
Trellis is an advanced algorithm that lets the codec estimate the quality-size ratio and choose
the coding variant based on it. Can improve the quality keeping the file size smaller. At the
same time the conversion time increases as compared to the conversion with this setting
disabled. It is only available if the CABAC setting is on.
Deblocking filter option switches on or off the in-loop deblocking filter. Enabling this feature
also increases the conversion time.
Strength determines how strong the deblocking effect needs to eliminate the blocks where
the Threshold identified them. The possible values vary from -6 to 6 . The default value is 0
.
Threshold determines how much of the material actually needs to be deblocked. The higher
the value is set, the more of the video will be perceived as blocks, so the more the deblocker
will act upon. The possible values vary from -6 to 6 . The default value is 0 .
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Applying Effects
AVS Video Converter has the advantage of various effects to help you achieve your creative best.
You can experiment with transformation and painting effects and patterns to turn your ideas into
images that stand out.
To apply any effect, click the Add button and select the desired effect from the menu (see the
picture).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start AVS Video Converter
Choose input file (the Edit window becomes available)
Click the Edit... button at the Main Toolbar
Click the Add button to chose any effect from the menu
Set fade-in and fade-out limits on the Timeline
Choose the effect parameters
Press the Start Preview button to see the result
Note : you can apply not one but several effects. If you want to disable any effect, check the
respective window off clicking the
icon. The active effect is highlighted.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Brightness
The Brightness effect lets you make simple adjustments to the tonal range of a file. Brightness is the
relative lightness or darkness of the color, usually measured in levels.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Brightness effect choose Add > Adjust > Brightness
Set the level of Brightness
Set fade-in and fade-out area
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
RGB Brightness
A large percentage of the visible spectrum can be represented by mixing red, green, and blue (RGB)
colored light in various proportions and intensities. The RGB Brightness effect lets you make simple
adjustments to the tonal range of a color you choose.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the RGB Brightness effect choose Add > Adjust > RGB Brightness
Set the parameters of the color
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Contrast
The Contrast effect adjusts the contrast of an image. Values can range from -100 to +100.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Contrast effect choose Add > Adjust > Contrast
Set the level of Contrast (in percentage)
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Auto Contrast
The Auto Contrast command adjusts the overall contrast and mixture of colors in an RGB image
automatically. When identifying the lightest and darkest pixels in an image, Auto Contrast clips the
white and black pixels by 0.5% - that is, it ignores the first 0.5% of either extreme. This ensures that
white and black values are based on representative rather than extreme pixel values.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
To apply the Auto Contrast effect choose Add > Adjust > Auto Contrast
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Auto Levels
The Auto Levels effect defines the lightest and darkest pixels in each color channel as white and black
and then redistributes intermediate pixel values proportionately. Because Auto Levels adjusts each
color channel individually, it may remove or introduce colors.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
To apply the Auto Levels effect choose Add > Adjust > Auto Levels
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Gamma
The Gamma effect measures the brightness of midtone values and modifies the pixel values in an
image. A higher gamma value yields an overall lighter image.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Gamma effect choose Add > Adjust > Gamma
Set the level of adjustment (in percentage)
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Equalize
The Equalize effect normalizes the histogram of a file. It is the automatically adjustment tool and you
cannot change settings manually.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
To apply the Equalize effect choose Add > Adjust > Equalize
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Invert
The Invert effect inverts the colors in an image. When you invert an image, the brightness value of
each pixel in the channels is converted to the inverse value on the 256-step color-values scale. For
example, a pixel in a positive image with a value of 255 is changed to 0, and a pixel with a value of 5
to 250.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
To apply the Invert effect choose Add > Adjust > Invert
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Hue
The Hue effect lets you adjust the hue of the entire image. Adjusting the hue, or color, represents a
move around the color wheel. Hue is the color reflected from or transmitted through an object. It is
measured as a location on the standard color wheel, expressed as a degree between 0° and 360°. In
common use, hue is identified by the name of the color such as red, orange, or green.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Hue effect choose Add > Adjust > Hue
Select the angle (in degrees)
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Saturation
Saturation , sometimes called chroma, is the strength or purity of the color. Saturation represents
the amount of gray in proportion to the hue, measured as a percentage from 0% (gray) to 100% (fully
saturated). On the standard color wheel, saturation increases from the center to the edge. The
Saturation effect lets you adjust the saturation of the entire image.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Saturation effect choose Add > Adjust > Saturation
Select the level of Saturation
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Temperature
The Temperature effect lets you adjust your video image to warm or cold colors. Negative values
represent cold colors and positive values transform to warm colors correspondingly.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Temperature effect choose Add > Adjust > Temperature
Select the level (in percentage)
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Grayscale
The Grayscale effect converts color images to gray scale palette: black (0) and white (255). The
effect has two variations: desaturate and intensity.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Grayscale effect choose Add > Adjust > Grayscale
Set the type of Grayscale
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Threshold
The Threshold effect determines how much contrast there is between neighboring pixels for the
sharpening to affect them. The higher setting exclude more and more pixels.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Threshold effect choose Add > Adjust > Threshold
Select the level and the threshold option
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Colorize
The Colorize effect lets you to colorize the entire file in a RGB-specified file. The video is colorized in
the tones of the selected color while the overall balance of the file is maintained.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Colorize effect choose Add > Adjust > Colorize
Set the dominant color
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Posterize
The Posterize effect lets you specify the tonal level (or brightness values) and then maps pixels to the
closest matching level.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Posterize effect choose Add > Adjust > Posterize
Set the tonal level
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Deinterlacing Effects
AVS Video Converter allows you to remove interlacing artifact using deinterlacing filter. For
interlaced video a frame is a top (odd) fields or a bottom (even) fields, for non-interlaced video frame
contains both even and odd field. One of these fields commence one field period later than the other
on a progressive display (monitor). Mostly this effect appears in video that was captured from TV
tuners or DV cameras. Applying Deinterlacing effect removes the interlacing artifacts.
Deinterlacing: You can use remove interlacing artifact by removing one field of a video (the Even
lines) and then blend (Interpolate ) the remaining lines.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
To apply the deinterlacing effect choose Add > Effect > Deinterlace
Check Even and/or Interpolate check-boxes, if needed.
Press Start Preview
Note : there is no need to apply this filter for high quality non-interlaced video.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Blur Effects
AVS Video Converter offers three blur variations:
Blur: reduces contrast between adjacent pixels by lightening pixels next to well-defined edges
and shadows, visually smoothing and softening the image.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
To apply the blur effect choose Add > Effect > Blur
Enter the level of blurring (in percentage)
Select the color representation of noise
Press Start Preview
Gaussian Blur: uses a mathematical equation (a bell-shaped curve) to calculate the
transition between adjacent pixels, resulting in most of the blurred pixels ending up in the
middle range between the two original colors. The Gaussian Blur adds low-frequency detail
and can produce a hazy effect.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the blur effect choose Add > Effect > Gaussian Blur
Enter the size (in pixels)
Press Start Preview
Motion Blur: gives the impression of motion in the image by adding directional and angle
controls for the blurring process. You can choose an angle between -90- to 90- and a distance
from 1 to 999 pixels to control the effects of the Motion Blur .
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the blur effect choose Add > Effect > Motion Blur
Enter the angle (in degrees) and distance parameters (in pixels)
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Sharpen
The Sharpen effect increases contrast to seemingly bring the images into better focus (although it
cannot substitute for an image that's properly focused in the first place). It focuses blurry images by
increasing the contrast of adjacent pixels.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the sharpen effect choose Add > Effect > Sharpen
Enter the magnitude of displacement (in percentage)
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Mosaic
The Mosaic effect defines a selection by clumping pixels of similar color values in cells. The pixels in a
given block are the same color, and the colors of the blocks represent the colors in the selection. It
produces irregularly-contoured squares at regularly-spaced intervals. There are two types of mosaic
effect. Simple mosaic is produced based on the color of the top left pixel; otherwise it is based on the
average color of all pixels in the given tile.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
To apply the mosaic effect choose Add > Effect > Mosaic
Enter the size of the block (in pixels)
Select the type of Mosaic
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Add Noise
The Add Noise effect adds noise, or pixels with randomly distributed color levels. This effect is used to
add some texture to an image by way of tiny pixel dustings. The Add Noise effect can be used to
conceal "touch-ups" of flat color on an image, or remove other problem areas.
The Monochromatic option applies the filter to only the tonal elements in the image without changing
the colors.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
To apply the add noise effect choose Add > Effect > Add Noise
Enter the amount of noise added (from 1 to 999)
Select the color representation of noise
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Diffuse
The Diffuse effect shuffles pixels in a selection to make the selection look less focused according to
the selected magnitude of the effect. The effect moves pixels to the selected distance randomly,
ignoring color values.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the diffuse effect choose Add > Effect > Diffuse
Enter the distance of pixel relocation (in pixels)
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Emboss
The Emboss effect is used to give an image a 3D look - as if it was raised or stamped. Options include
an embossing angle (from -360° - to lower (stamp) the surface, to +360° - to raise the surface),
height, and a percentage (1% to 500%) for the amount of color within the selection. The Emboss
effect turns the entire image gray, except to trace colors that occur if you use high settings.
Angle setting vary from 0-360° (though it may also give negative readings). This parameter controls
the direction of light. Distance, varying from 1 to 10, sets the elevation of the effect. Amount varies
from 1-500 and controls how much detail the filter sees to emboss. At low setting, almost nothing is
raised up.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the emboss effect choose Add > Effect > Emboss
Enter the angle (in degrees), elevation of the effect (pixels) and amount value (in percentage)
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Filter Minimal
The Minimal Filter effect emphasizes the dark pixels in an image.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the minimal filter choose Add > Effect > Filter Minimal
Enter the size of tile (in pixels)
Press Start Preview
Filter Maximal
The minimal filter emphasizes the light pixels in an image.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the maximal filter choose Add > Effect > Filter Maximal
Enter the size of tile (in pixels)
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Flip
The Flip transformation lets you flip an entire image horizontally or vertically.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the flip effect choose Add > Transform > Flip
Select the direction of Flip
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Perspective
The Perspective effect allows you to transform the perspective in an image. It has two variations:
horizontal and vertical transformations.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the perspective effect choose Add > Transform > Perspective
Select the angle and type of perspective transformations
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Skew
The Skew transformation lets you skew an entire image horizontally or vertically.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the skew effect choose Add > Transform > Skew
Select the direction of skewing
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Shift
The Shift transformation allows you to move you image along X and Y axes.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the shift transformation choose Add > Transform > Shift
Select the axial coordinates
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Rotate
The Rotate transformation allows you to rotate the entire image.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the rotation effect choose Add > Transform > Rotate
Select the angle of rotation
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Resample
The Resample transformation allows you to reproduce the entire image.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the resample effect choose Add > Transform > Resample
Select the number of reproductions
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Zoom
The Zoom feature lets you magnify or reduce your view of the image. The window's title bar displays
the zoom percentage.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the zoom effect choose Add > Transform > Zoom
Select magnitude of zoom
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Mirror
The Mirror effect lets you duplicate a part of the image.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the mirror effect choose Add > Transform > Mirror
Select the level and type of Mirror effect
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Line
The Line effect lets you include various lines to your video file. You can draw various lines by dragging
the mouse as you would do in any graphic editor. You can also locate the line image by setting the
numerical values.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the line effect choose Add > Draw > Line
Select the location, color, thickness (size) and alpha value (transparency)
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Rectangle
The Rectangle effect allows you to highlight an object in the video by setting out an rectangularshaped object which is covered with specified color while the rest of the picture remains untouched.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
To apply the rectangle effect choose Add > Draw > Rectangle
Set the location of rectangle
Select the color and alpha value (transparency)
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Ellipse
The Ellipse effect allows you to highlight an object in the video by setting out an ellipse-shaped object
which is covered with specified color while the rest of the picture remains untouched.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
To apply the ellipse effect choose Add > Draw > Ellipse
Set the location of ellipse
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Crop Rectangle
The Crop Rectangle effect allows you to highlight an object in the video by setting out an
rectangular-shaped "window" which remains free of color coverage.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
To apply the crop rectangle effect choose Add > Draw > Crop Rectangle
Set the location of rectangle
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Crop Ellipse
The Crop Ellipse effect allows you to highlight an object in the video by setting out an ellipse-shaped
"window" which remains free of color coverage.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
To apply the crop ellipse effect choose Add > Draw > Crop Ellipse
Set the location of ellipse
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Image
The Image effect lets you include any image to your video file.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To apply the image effect choose Add > Draw > Image
Click the Load button to open the standard windows explorer menu and select the image
location. After you select the location, press OK .
6. Select file Location Picture1
7. Select file Location Picture 2
8.
9.
10.
11.
Set the location of image on the video picture
Select the alpha value (transparency)
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Text
The Text effect allows you to include any message to your video.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
To apply the text effect choose Add > Draw > Text
Select the text properties following the menu
Type in the text you want to appear in your movie
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Credits
The Credits effect allow you to include subtitles to your video.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
To apply the credits effect choose Add > Draw > Credits
Select the type of appearance of subtitles
Select the font
Type in the text you want to appear in your movie
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Border
The Border effect let you put a border around your image. You can specify type, width and color of
the border.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
To apply the border effect choose Add > Draw > Border
Select the type of the border
Press Start Preview
Select the color and size of the Border
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Color Transition
With the Color Transition effect you can add a very entertaining feature to your movie From the
menu you can select a variation of objects which would cover up the image. You can also set up color,
number of divisions and transparency of objects (alpha value).
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
To apply the color transition effect choose Add > Draw > Color Transition
Select the type
Select the color and alpha value
Press Start Preview
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Audio Amplify
AVS Video Converter lets you edit audio track for your video and apply such an effect as Amplify .
By means of this effect you can amplify your audio recording as you wish.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Amplify effect choose Add > Audio > Audio Amplify
Choose the amount value of amplifying (in percentage)
On the Timeline select the area to which you want to apply the effect of amplifying
Press Start Play
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Band Pass
The Band Pass filter lets you hear a certain band of frequencies within an upper and lower range.
Frequencies above and below this band are attenuated. The distance between the higher and lower
cutoff frequencies in a band pass filter is called the bandwidth of the filter. The center frequency of a
band pass filter is the maximum point of amplitude.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Band Pass effect choose Add > Audio > Band Pass
Choose the necessary Frequency and Steepness parameters
On the Timeline select the area to which you want to apply the effect of Band Pass
Press Start Play
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Chorus
The Chorus effect allows you to make your audio sound fuller. It can make a single instrument sound
like there are actually several instruments being played. It adds some thickness to the sound, and can
be described as 'lush' or 'rich'. Sound Set 1 is example of the chorus effect in action.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Chorus effect choose Add > Audio > Chorus
Choose the necessary audio parameters
On the Timeline select the area to which you want to apply the effect of Chorus
Press Start Play
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Compressor
The Compressor is a variable gain device, where the amount of gain used depends on the level of the
input. In this case, the gain will be reduced when the signal level is high that makes louder passages
softer, reducing the dynamic range. This effect equals to dynamic volume regulator and makes loud
sounds quieter, and the quiet sounds louder.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Compressor effect choose Add > Audio > Compressor
Choose the necessary Compressor parameters
On the Timeline select the area to which you want to apply the Compressor effect
Press Start Play
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Delay
The Delay effect allows you to create an echo effect of your audio track by replaying the sounds of the
selected audio portion after a certain period of time. Applying of this filter can bring life to dull mixes,
widen and fill out your instrument's sound.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Delay effect choose Add > Audio > Delay
Choose the necessary Delay Time , Mix Depth and Feedback Gain parameters
On the Timeline select the area to which you want to apply the effect of Delay
Press Start Play
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Flanger
The Flanger effect is one of the other elaborated audio effects that allows you to edit your audio.
Flanging is created by mixing a signal with a slightly delayed copy of itself, where the length of the
delay is constantly changing. With the Flanger filter you can "shape" the sound through controlling
how much delayed signal is added to the original. Use it if you want to create the "whooshing" sound
effect in some fragment of your audio track.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Flanger effect choose Add > Audio > Flanger
Choose the necessary audio parameters
On the Timeline select the area to which you want to apply the effect of Flanger
Press Start Play
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
High Pass
AVS Video Converter allows you to shape frequencies of your audio track over time through applying
High Pass filter. High Pass filter lets you hear only high frequencies. It attenuates frequencies below
the specified cutoff frequency.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the High Pass effect choose Add > Audio > High Pass
On the Timeline select the area to which you want to apply the effect of High Pass
Press Start Play
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
High Shelf
The High Shelf filter boosts or cuts frequencies above the cutoff, and passes frequencies below the
shelf cutoff with no change made to their gain. Use this effect to enhance or diminish any adjustable
amount of high frequency material in a sound.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the High Shelf effect choose Add > Audio > High Shelf
Choose the necessary Frequency , Steepness and Gain parameters
On the Timeline select the area to which you want to apply the effect of High Shelf
Press Start Play
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Low Pass
AVS Video Converter allows you to shape frequencies of your audio track over time through applying
the Low Pass filter. The low pass filter lets you hear only low frequencies; it blocks higher frequencies.
An important property of a low pass filter is its cutoff frequency. This is the point in the frequency
range at which the filter reduces the signal to -3 dB of its original power. (In visual terms, a -3 dB
reduction in a waveform displayed on your monitor will result in a signal that appears to be half the
peak-to-peak height of the original.)
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Low Pass effect choose Add > Audio > Low Pass
On the Timeline select the area to which you want to apply the effect of Low Pass
Press Start Play
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Low Shelf
The Low Shelf filter boosts or cuts frequencies below the cutoff, and passes frequencies above the
shelf cutoff with no change made to their gain. Use this effect to enhance or diminish any amount of
low frequency material in a sound.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Low Shelf effect choose Add > Audio > Low Shelf
On the Timeline select the area to which you want to apply the effect of Low Shelf
Press Start Play
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Noise Gate
Noise Gate effect allows you to increase the dynamic range of a signal so that low level signals are
attenuated while the louder portions are neither attenuated or amplified. You can also use it to control
the volume of an audio signal. The mechanism of functioning of this effect is as follows:
a noise gate allows a signal to pass through only when it is above a set threshold: the gate is open. If
the signal falls below the threshold no signal is allowed to pass: the gate is closed. A noise gate is used
when the level of the 'signal' is above the level of the noise. The threshold is set above the level of the
'noise' and so when there is no 'signal' the gate is closed. A noise gate does not remove noise from the
signal. When the gate is open both the signal and the noise will pass through. With the help of
Release you can control how quickly the gate will close once the level has dropped below the
threshold. Using Attack Control you can also set the time for the gate that it will take to open.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Noise Gate effect choose Add > Audio > Noise Gate
Choose the necessary Noise Gate parameters
On the Timeline select the area to which you want to apply the Noise Gate effect
Press Start Play
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Notch Filter
The Notch Filter allows you to remove a very narrow band of frequencies around a given point. You
can also use it to remove a problematic frequency that causes feedback
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Notch Filter choose Add > Audio > Notch Filter
On the Timeline select the area to which you want to apply the Notch Filter
Press Start Play
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Peak EQ
Peak EQ filter allows you to modify sounds (the volume of peaks) where the amplitude is
comparatively high -- when there are spikes in the loudness of the track. This is helpful if you are
concerned about various instruments being so loud that they will cause interference in sound output
devices like speakers, amplifiers, and the like.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Peak EQ effect choose Add > Audio > Peak EQ
Choose the necessary Frequency and Steepness and Gain parameters
On the Timeline select the area to which you want to apply the effect of Peak EQ
Press Start Play
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Phaser
The Phaser filter makes the selected portion of your audio thinner or fuller through mixing the
automatically filtered and unfiltered audio signals. You can apply this filter to give a "synthesized" or
electronic effect to natural sounds.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Phaser effect choose Add > Audio > Phaser
On the Timeline select the area to which you want to apply the Phaser filter
Press Start Play
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Reverberation
The Reverberation filter helps you to apply the particular effect when the sound stops but the
reflections continue, decreasing in amplitude, until they can no longer be heard.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To apply the Reverberation effect choose Add > Audio > Reverberation
Choose the necessary Reverberation parameters
On the Timeline select the area to which you want to apply the effect of Reverberation
Press Start Play
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Using Timeline
The Timeline tool allows you to achieve accuracy and precision in applying effects and editing your
movies. You can use the following tools to navigate your video file (frame navigation).
Adding effects involves several steps:
1. Setting effect boundaries (see Selection )
2. Selection of the effect (see Applying Effects )
3. Setting fade-in and fade-out areas (see Fade-in/Fade-out )
AVS Video Converter allows you to apply one or several effects to your media file. For details on
specific effect, please refer to respective chapters.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Deletion and Selection
AVS Video Converter allows you to delete parts of your media file or apply one or several effects to
it.
To apply effect to a part of input file:
1. Choose the area where you want to apply the desired effect, click the left mouse button and,
without releasing the mouse button, drag the slider along the navigation line. The selected
area will be highlighted*.
Example
2. Close the editing window and return to main menu.
3. Set parameters of profile if applicable (consult AVI Profile Editor or MPEG Profile Editor )
4. Press Convert Now! to start conversion
*Note : the color of the cursor lines, marked in red on the picture above, can differ depending on
the skin used and become blue, red or even black.
To delete parts of your input file:
1. Choose the area you want to delete by clicking the left mouse button and, without releasing
the mouse button, drag the slider along the navigation line. The selected area will be
highlighted*.
2. Click the Add Area of Deleting button.
3. After you have added all the necessary areas of deletion - close the editing window and return
to the main menu. The selected areas will be deleted in the process of conversion.
Example
4. Set parameters of profile if applicable (consult AVI Profile Editor or MPEG Profile Editor )
5. Press Convert Now! to start conversion
*Note : the color of the cursor lines, marked in red on the picture above, can differ depending on
the skin used and become blue, red or even black.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Fade-in and Fade-out
AVS Video Converter allows you to apply one or several effects to your media file.
Fade-in is the area where the effect starts being reflected on your video. In the area of Maximum
representation the effect is applied to 100% capacity. In the Fade-out area the effect is being
reduced until it completely disappears.
After you choose the effect you want to apply, you should set fade-in and fade-out boundaries. You
can do it by clicking the left mouse button and dragging the boundaries inwards or outwards. Then set
the parameters for the selected effect.
Note : if you want to set Fade-out effect, drag the slide from the left side of the Timeline . To
apply the Fade-in effect, drag the slide from the right of the Timeline .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Markers
The Timeline tool allows you to put Markers to help you in applying effects and editing your movies.
Using markers can help you visually control working with files, but the basic purpose of using markers
is splitting (Splitting ).
To add marker:
1. Put the Timeline cursor at the position where you'd like to set marker.
2. Click the Add button located in Markers area. The name of marker shown as Position:# will
appear in the markers list:
To delete marker:
1. Select the marker you want to delete from markers list.
2. Click the Remove button located in Markers area.
OR
Right click the the name of marker and select Delete marker from menu.
OR
Press Backspace or Delete key.
When you edit several files at once or work in batch or merging mode, it might be useful to use Auto
Add button. Markers will be added automatically at the beginning of each file.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Merging
AVS Video Converter lets you merge two or more files in one. The maximum number of input files
you can select at a time is 35.
1. Start AVS Video Converter .
2. Choose input files clicking the Browse... button. You can also simply drag and drop files from
Explore into Input file name text box (multiselect is available). Use the Move up , Move
down , Delete and Insert buttons to remove and add files to the list.
Notice that adding files using the Browse... button will delete files from the Input File Name
list added before. If you want to include files in the already existing Input File Name list,
please use the Insert
button.
3. Select the output file location, format, set the necessary parameters.
4. Start converting.
Note : make sure that the Split check-box is not checked.
We'd like to draw your attention to the fact that Merging is disabled in case you are trying to merge
several RM files.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Split
AVS Video Converter allows you to split a video file into several files and save them to new video
files.
How to split:
1. Choose your input file
2. Click the Advanced button and make sure that the Split check-box is checked.
3. Choose the way you want to split the file - by size (Limit file size ), By markers .
If you selected splitting by size, please specify the size of your output files.
If you would like to split by markers click the Edit... button and set markers.
Note : in case you choose splitting by size you should specify the size of output files from above
10 MB. We'd like to draw your attention to possibility of inaccuracy of file size (+ - 0,5 Mb)
presence depending on the input file parameters.
If you use Split option creating VCD/SVCD notice:
1. If you split your input file By Marker make sure that each marked part size is under 700 Mb.
In case it's over 700 Mb the program will automatically split the marked part into two more
parts: first one - 700 Mb long from the beginning of a marked part, the second - from the end
of the first part to the marker.
2. If you split your input file By Size make sure you've set the output file size under 700 Mb. In
case it is over 700 Mb the program will automatically split the file into parts under 700 Mb.
Note : splitting is disabled during DVD creating. Also note that in case you select several input
files, markers will be added automatically at the beginning of each file.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Converter
Batch Mode
AVS Video Converter allows you to convert a number of video files into several files of selected
format.
Note : you can't select more than 35 input files at a time!
How to batch-convert:
1. Choose your input files
2. Click Advanced button and make sure that Split check-box is checked.
3. Make sure Batch mode check-box is checked.
Notice that is disabled during To DVD conversion. We would also like to draw your attention to the
way your output files will be named. In case you change your Output File Name manually, your
output files will be named as follows:
OutputFileName.avi
OutputFileName_01.avi
OutputFileName_02.avi, etc.
If you do not change neither Output File Name nor output file location, your output files will be
named this way:
FirstInputFileName_NEW.avi
SecondInputFileName_NEW.avi
ThirdInputFileName_NEW.avi, etc.
Note : you can't select more than 35 input files at a time!
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Overview
Welcome to AVS Video Editor , a powerful, full-featured and easy to use software for working with
video data! Our software has a number of great opportunities for creating the best possible video and
audio, which makes working with video easy and constructive. The unique interface is universal for any
categories of users as much as possible. Aren't you interested in imprinting the most remarkable
events of your life to video? Workmanship, reliability and exclusive opportunities of AVS Video Editor
will help you to get the highest quality of your video recordings. The multi-functional and advanced
AVS Video Editor software is necessary to keep the excellent quality of your home video.
Feel free to create your own movie masterpieces, burn DVD and share them with your family and
friends with the help of AVS Video Editor ! You can view your movies on your computer, send them
to people in e-mail messages, or post them to a Web server.
AVS Video Editor will suggest you a number of multi-purpose potentialities of video processing. You
are able to
Create, manage and master movies, using media source material
Edit video images by applying various effects and filters
Add various transitions to control how your movie sequence between clips
Capture video from any video capture device connected to your computer
Save both video and audio streams of created movie to one of the most common formats,
such as AVI, MPEG, WMV, MP4, 3GP, QuickTime or RealMedia specifying frequency, bitrate
and other parameters of your output file
Burn DVD/SVCD/VCD from digital video formats to be able to play the created movie at any
DVD-player
Create DVD menu
and much, much more...
Our software has unlimited resources to realize fantasies prompted by your imagination. Find out the
great opportunities of video creation with AVS Video Editor !
In case you need some help, refer to this AVS4YOU Programs Help , if you cannot find something
here or you need some explanation or assistance, just e-mail us [email protected] or visit us
on the World Wide Web www.avs4you.com .
To start AVS Video Editor go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Video ->
AVS Video Editor .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Interface Description
The working area of AVS Video Editor is divided into four main parts. They are:
Top Toolbar
Consists of a number of buttons allowing you to perform common tasks quickly
Media Library
Allows to organize audio and video files you are going to work with
Workspace
The Workspace is intended for files editing and could be presented as either the storyboard
or the timeline view
Menu Panes
Menu Panes allow you to perform common tasks quickly.
Info Tips
Show the short description of the main program features to let you start working right away
with no need to read the manual.
At the picture below all of the enumerated working areas are shown:
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Top Toolbar
Using Top Toolbar one can perform the common tasks quickly in AVS Video Editor . It consists of
the following buttons:
The table below describes the function of the buttons of the Top Toolbar .
Button
Name
Shortcut
Add To
Storyboard
Use this button to add the selected clip from the
Media Library to the storyboard.
Use this button to import some media files (image,
video, audio) to the Media Library .
Import
Merge
Selected
Clips
Use this button to merge the selected clip in the
Media Library item in one.
Use this button to view properties of the selected clip
in the Media Library item.
Properties
Delete
Item
Del
Undo
Deletion
Operation
Use this button to delete Media Library items or
clips in the Media Library .
Use this button to undo deletion operations with
Media Library items or clips.
Use this button to set Thumbnails, Icons or Details
view of clips in the Media Library item.
Views
Show Help
Description
F1
Use this button to run AVS Video Editor Help file.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Main Menu
Main Menu allows you to access common tasks quickly. To start completing one of the available
operation just click the necessary Menu Item and select the appropriate action.
Menu
Menu
Item
Submenu Item
Description
New Project
Select this option to start creating a new project
Open Project...
Select this option to open an existing project that has
been previously saved
Reopen Project
Select this option to open an existing project once again
Save Project
Select this option to save the created or edited project
Save Project As...
Select this option to save the created or edited project
using some other name
Save
Movie
File
File
Burn
Disc
To AVI
Select this option to convert and save the created movie
to AVI format
To MPEG
to MPEG format
To
Windows
Media (WMV)
to WMV format
To Real Media
(RM)
to RM format
To Quick Time
(MOV)
to Quick Time format
To 3GP
to 3GP format
To MP4
to MP4 format
DVD Menu
Select this option to create DVD menu using a number
of styles
Burn DVD
Select this option to convert created movie to DVD
format and burn DVD discs to share your movies with
family and friends
Burn
VCD/SVCD
Select this option to convert created movie to
SVCD/VCD format and burn SVCD/VCD discs to share
your movies with family and friends
Burn
DivX/XviD
Exit
Select this option to close the program and finish work
with AVS Video Editor
Start Page
Select this option to return to the Start Page of the
AVS Video Editor program
Capture
Select this option to capture video from any video
capture device connected to your computer and import
to AVS Video Editor Media Library
Import Media
Select this option to import video, audio and image files
into AVS Video Editor Media Library
Make Video
Select this option to start editing your video
Add Transitions
Select this option to add various transitions to help you
control how your movie sequences between clips
Add Audio
Select this option to add audio tracks to your movie and
mix them
Video Effects
Select this option to apply different effects to improve
video and to help you achieve your creative best
Text Overlay
Select this option to apply text overlay effect to your
video
Video Overlay
Select this option to apply video overlay effect to your
video clip
DVD Menu
Select this option to create DVD menu using a number
of styles
Step Back
Select this option to return to the previous editing
window
Step Forward
Select this option to go to the next editing window
Environment
Settings...
Select this option to set the main AVS Video Editor
environment parameters
Help Topics
Select this option to open AVS Video Editor Help file
Tutorials
Select this option to watch the Animated Tutorials
online or (if previously downloaded) offline
AVS Video Editor on
the Web
Select this option to visit AVS4YOU home page at
World Wide Web
Buy now
Select this option to purchase AVS Video Editor online
Register
Select this option to register AVS Video Editor to
access its full capabilities
Navigation
Options
Select this option to convert created movie to MPEG4
format and burn DivX/XviD discs to share your movies
with family and friends
Help
About
Editor
AVS
Video
Select this option to find out more information and the
last updates of AVS products
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Media Library
The Media Library is designed to display your Media Library items and clips the highlighted item
consists of. To add a clip to your current project just drag it to the Workspace . In the left part of the
Media Library all of the items are listed, and in the right part you can find the clips displayed
according to the selected view.
You can preview the video clips in your Media Library item before you add them to the Storyboard .
To do that you need to double-click the desired clip or right-click it and select Preview Clip . The
contents of the clip will be displayed in the Preview main window .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Workspace
The purpose of the Workspace is working with your projects. Here you can create, edit, add different
effects to your project. The Workspace could be represented in two views:
Storyboard view used to add clips and Transitions to the Workspace
and
Timeline view that is used when you add different effects - Audio Mixing , Video Effects ,
Text Overlay and Video Overlay - to your video.
Storyboard View
The storyboard view is default view for workspace. It has a storyboard menu and storyboard space
itself where you can change the order of clips in your project. To add clips to the workspace simply
drag them from Media Library and drop to the necessary place in the workspace. To start playing
your project from the specific object (clip or transition) just double click at the object. To play the
whole movie click Play button in Main Preview .
In the table below you can find the description of storyboard menu buttons.
Button
Name
Preview
Storyboard
Stop
Preview
Description
Use this button to start previewing from the selected storyitem.
Use this button to stop previewing the selected storyitem.
Duplicate
Storyitem
Use this button to duplicate the selected storyitem.
Delete
Storyitem
Use this button to delete the selected clip or to clear transition.
Show
Property
Use this button to see the properties of the selected object.
Show
Multitrim
Window
Use this button to open Multiple Trim window to split the video at
the Storyboard into scenes or to merge scenes in the selected video.
Note : this button is only enabled in case you select video clip at
the Storyboard .
Undo
Storyboard
Operation
Use this button to undo the storyboard operation.
Redo
Storyboard
Operation
Use this button to redo the storyboard operation.
Move to the
right
Use this button to move the selected object to the right.
Move to the
left
Use this button to move the selected object to the left.
Show Help
You can find a Main Preview menu in the right part of a storyboard menu. To open Main Preview
window please use Show/Hide Preview button.
Note : Main Preview is intended for previewing the whole project with audio and all of the
effects and changes you made.
Button
Description
Use this
preview.
button
to
playback
Use this button to pause preview.
Use this button to stop preview.
Use this button to go to the next
clip
Use this button
previous clip
to
go
to
Use this button
Preview window.
to
close
the
Main
[Back to the Top ]
Timeline View
The Timeline view allows you to achieve accuracy and precision in applying effects and editing your
clips.
AVS Video Editor allows you to apply one or several effects to your media file. For details on specific
effect, please refer to respective chapters. You can create transitions between two adjacent clips. The
time is displayed as hours:minutes:seconds.hundredths of a second (h:mm:ss.hs).
In the table below you can find the description of timeline menu buttons.
Button
Name
Description
Preview
Video
Effects
Use this button to start previewing video effects.
Stop
Preview
Use this button to stop previewing video effects.
Duplicate
Video Effect
Use this button to duplicate video effect.
Delete
Video Effect
Use this button to delete video effect.
Split/Delete
Selected
Area
Use this button to split a clip at the cursor position or to delete the
selected area.
Note : splitting is a storyboard operation. You will be able to
undo this operation in storyboard mode.
Undo
Use this button to undo last operation.
Redo
Use this button to redo last operation.
Move up
line
Use this button to move up the selected video effect.
Move down
line
Use this button to move down the selected video effects.
Show Help
Zoom In
Zoom Out
100% View
Use this button to zoom selection in.
Use this button to zoom selection out.
Use this button to set 100% view of selection.
The Timeline view displays all the possible editing options simultaneously. You can see the Audio
Mixing , Video Effects , Text Overlay and Video Overlay used to edit your video clip. To expand
any effect applied to the video you need to press the '+ ' button near it, to collapse it press the '- '
button. You can also lock the editing line to prevent changes to it pressing the Lock
button. To
allow the further changes you will need to press this button, that will have now the following
appearance
, once again.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Menu Panes
Menu Panes allow you to perform common tasks quickly. To start completing one of the available
operation just click the necessary Menu Pane and select the appropriate button.
Menu Pane
Start
Content
Description
Start Page
Return to the Start Page of the AVS Video Editor
program
Capture
Capture video from any video capture device connected
to your computer and import to AVS Video Editor
Media Library
Import Media
Import video, audio and image files into AVS Video
Editor Media Library
Make Video
Start editing your video
Add
Transitions
Add various transitions to help you control how your
movie sequences between clips
Add Audio
Add audio tracks to your movie and mix them
Video Effects
Apply different effects to improve video and to help you
achieve your creative best
Text Overlay
Apply text overlay effect to your video
Video Overlay
Apply video overlay effect to your video clip
To AVI
Convert and save the created movie to AVI format
To MPEG
Convert and save the created movie to MPEG format
To WMV
Convert and save the created movie to WMV format
To Real Media
Convert and save the created movie to RM format
To Quick Time
Convert and save the created movie to Quick Time
format
To 3GP
Convert and save the created movie to 3GP format
To MP4
Convert and save the created movie to MP4 format
DVD Menu
Create DVD menu using a number of styles
Burn DVD
Convert created movie to DVD format and burn DVD
discs to share your movies with family and friends
Burn
VCD/SVCD
Convert created movie to SVCD/VCD format and burn
SVCD/VCD discs to share your movies with family and
friends
Create Movie
Save Movie
Burn Disc
Help
Burn
DivX/XviD
Convert created movie to MPEG4 format and burn
DivX/XviD discs to share your movies with family and
friends
Tutorials
Watch the Animated Tutorials online or (if previously
downloaded) offline
Buy now!
Purchase AVS Video Editor online
E-mail Us
You may be entitled to technical support vie e-mail
Register...
Register AVS Video Editor to access its full capabilities
AVS On The
Web
Visit AVS4YOU home page at World Wide Web
About
Find out more information and the last updates of AVS
products
Help
Open AVS Video Editor Help file
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Multiple Trim Window
The Multiple Trim window is used to additionally split the clip at the Storyboard into scenes, or quite
the other way round, merge the scenes in the clip.
To open the Multiple Trim window click the
button in the Storyboard view of the Workspace or
click the clip you would like to edit with the right mouse button and select Multi Trim... You will see
the following window:
The following buttons are used to trim the selected video:
Button
Caption
Play/Pause
Stop
Previous/Next
Frame
Mute
Fade in
Description
Use this button to playback or pause the selected video to find the
scenes you need.
Use this button to stop the selected video playback.
Use this button to go to the next or return to the previous frame of
the selected video.
Use this button to mute the sound of the selected video.
Use this button to set the initial scene point of the selected video.
Fade out
Use this button to set the final scene point of the selected video.
Add/Split
Scene
Use this button to add a scene at current position or split the already
selected scene into two parts.
Start/Stop
Scene
Detection
Use this button to start the automatic scenes detection. When in
progress, this button is used to stop the scenes detection process.
Note : you can select two scene detection modes - Detect
scenes changes or Detect TV commercials from the dropdown box next to the button, depending on the type of the
video you edit.
All the scenes that have been found during the scene
detection process or that you selected manually will be
displayed in the scenes list. You can highlight any of them
with the mouse and delete them with the Delete button, if
you decide to remove them from the video.
It is also possible to merge two or several scenes into one.
To do that simply select several scenes with the mouse (you
can use the Shift or Control buttons on the computer
keyboard to simplify the selection process) and click the
Merge Scenes button to join the selected scenes together.
After you select all the scenes click the OK button. All the
scenes will be added to the Storyboard and will be
represented as separate clips there.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Getting Started
Starting work with AVS Video Editor it is good to get into the terms of the user interface and Help.
You can find the explanation of them and their main functions description below.
Project
A project contains the arrangement and timing information of audio and video clips, video
transitions and video effects you have added to the storyboard/timeline. A saved project file in
AVS Video Editor has a .vep file name extension. By saving your projects, you can open the
project file later and begin editing it in AVS Video Editor from where you stopped.
Movie
A movie is the final project you save. You can save a movie to a number of common formats,
such as AVI , MPEG , WMV , RM , MOV , MP4 or 3GP , or you can burn a video disc in VCD,
SVCD or DVD format. The saved movie can be watched in a media player or in a Web
browser.
After you launch AVS Video Editor the start page will appear. From here you can create a new
project, open the existing projects or view sample projects.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Settings
You can change the main settings on the AVS Video Editor program using the Main Menu . To be
able to do that you will need to select Options Menu and click Environment Settings... menu item.
Settings comprise the next main options:
General - used to set the program general parameters, such as Image resampling settings,
Default Transition and Image/Color length and also Maximum undo and steps levels.
Resize Mode - used to set the resize mode for your video.
Audio - used to set the audio parameters of the preview mode and recording.
Skins - used to select and change the appearance of the AVS Video Editor program.
The General settings allow the user to change the parameters that include:
1. The General tab allows you to change the following settings:
Automatically open last project at startup - use this option to let the AVS Video
Editor open the project that you edited during the last program session.
Enable project autosave - use this option to enable the project autosave function to
prevent data loss. AVS Video Editor will automatically save the project every 2
minutes.
Create project backups - use this option to let the program create backups of the
previous project save in the project folder. You can restore the previously saved project
from this folder, if necessary.
Ask to save project on close - use this option to let the program ask you to save the
currently edited project every time you close AVS Video Editor .
Temporary files folder - use this option to select the path for the temporary folder for
the program to save the files needed for proper work there. Use the Browse... button
to select this folder. You can see the hard drive space available for the temporary files
under the Free storage space in selected folder caption.
2. The Import tab allows you to change the following settings:
Default import folder - use this option to select the folder on your computer hard disk
drive that will be used for the files imported from different removable media by default.
You can also check the Browse every time check-box to select the folder each time
you import some files from removable media.
Import at Media Library step mode - use this option to select the type of the
importing process when you are at the Media Library mode. Use the Simple Mode to
quickly import the media files and the Advanced Mode to switch to the Import Media
step every time you want to import some media files.
3. The Environment tab allows you to change the following settings:
3.
Image Resampling - use this option to set the image resizing type. The available
values include - Keep Aspect (adjust the selected frame size so that it would fit the
image aspect) and Fit to Frame (change the aspect depending on the selected image
size). The default value is Keep Aspect .
Default transition length - the length of the Transitions set by default. Can be
changed later using the Transition properties window.
Default Image/Color length - the length of the images or colors in the movie set by
default. Can be changed later using Image properties window.
Maximum undo levels - maximum number of possible undo actions taken. The
available values are 0 to 500 . The default value is 200 .
Maximum steps levels - maximum number of possible steps that let the user return
to the previous editing window. The available values are 0 to 500 . The default value is
50 .
4. The Messages tab allows you to change the following settings:
4.
Show info tips - use this option to select the recurrence that will be used to show the
info tips. The available values include Always , Once per Session and Never . The
default value is Once per Session .
Message on voice recording start - use this option to enable or disable the
appearance of the message each time you start voice recording. The available values
include Show and Do not Show . The default value is Show .
5. The Update tab allows you to change the following settings:
Check every - use this option to select the frequency that will be used to check for the
program updates. The available options include - day , week , month , three months
and never . The default value is week . You can also update the program manually
clicking the Check for update now button.
Last check - shows the last update check date.
[Back to the Top ]
The Resize Mode settings allow the user to change the parameters that include different resize
interpolation filters that are used when the program resizes the image to adjust it to the selected size.
You can select between four different interpolation types.
[Back to the Top ]
The Audio settings allow the user to change the parameters that include:
1. The Audio tab allows you to change the following settings:
1.
Envelope default type - use this option to define the default type of the envelope
used on the Timeline in the Add Audio mode. The two types are supported - Linear
and Bezier .
Audio record folder - use this option to set the default folder for the recorded or
grabbed audio files.
Preferred audio editor - use this option to set the default audio editor that will be
used to edit the audio files.
Note : AVS Audio Editor included in the AVS Video Editor installation is used by
default.
Copy file on editing start - use this option to allow the program to copy the edited file
before the editing starts. You can also edit the original file, if you select such an option.
2. The Speaker Environment tab allows you to change the following settings:
2.
Speaker Environment - use this option to select the number of speakers used for
preview mode.
Note : it will not be the number of channels the audio will be saved with.
3. The Record Device tab allows you to change the following settings:
Audio device - use this option to select the recording device used to record sound
during editing. The list of the available audio devices will be different depending on the
devices connected to your personal computer.
Source - use this option to select the recording source from the list of the available
ones that will be used for recording.
You can also use the Auto gain option to let the program adjust the volume of the
recorded audio and specify its additional settings, such as Low level , High level and
Attack time .
4. The Record/Grab Format tab allows you to change the following settings:
Format - use this option to select the audio format that will be used to record sound or
grab audio from the audio compact disc. You can select the codec used to compress the
audio - MP3 (used by default), WMA , PCM and OGG Vorbis
Frequency - use this option to select the sampling frequency that will be used to record
sound or grab audio from the audio compact disc.
Bitrate - use this option to select bit rate that will be used to record sound or grab
audio from the audio compact disc.
Channels - use this option to select the number of channels for the output audio (1 (Mono) or 2 - (Stereo) ).
Note : if you select WMA format for audio recording the program will allow you to
select one of the available presets, that include different bit rate, frequency, and
the number of channels.
[Back to the Top ]
The Skins settings allow the user to select the AVS Video Editor program skin from list of available
ones:
[Back to the Top ]
When ready press the Apply and Close button to accept the changes you have made and close the
Settings window.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Working with Projects
Creating a project
At AVS Video Editor start page please click New Project button. Project Parameters wizard will
start. At the first step of Project Parameters wizard you should enter the file name for your project
and set it's location. Click the Browse... button to open the standard windows explorer menu and
select the movie location. After you finished, please click the Next>> button. Please take into account
that you will get an info message in case a project with the name you typed already exists.
At the next step you will be offered to set the parameters for your project. It is strongly recommended
to set project parameters according to the source file parameters or according to your output movie to
avoid quality losses. You can select the parameters from the number of available presets:
If you are sure that you need to select some additional parameters or change the settings, you can
click the Advanced Mode button to switch into the mode, where any parameters can be changed:
Here you can set the following parameters:
Option
Description
Presets
Use this drop-down box to select a preset from the available preset list. The values
of the other boxes will be changed according to the chosen preset settings.
Save
Preset
As
Use this button to save the current project settings as a preset to be able to use
them in future. It might be very helpful if you plan to use the same settings for
other presets.
Delete
Preset
Use this button to delete the current preset from the preset list. It might be useful
if you would like to delete an unwanted preset.
Video
Frame Size
Use this drop-down box to select video frame size from the list of the most popular
video picture frame sizes. The values of the Video Width and Video Height will
be changed accordingly.
Video
Width
Use this option to set the video image width.
Video
Height
Use this option to set the video image height.
Video
Framerate
Use this drop-down box to select the framerate of your video depending on the
device you are going to use for your video playback.
Video
Aspect
Use this drop-down box to select your video aspect ratio. See the Appendix
section for more detail on Aspect Ratio .
Ratio X
In this field you can see the current project horizontal ratio (width). This value is
given for the informational purposes only and cannot be changed manually.
Ratio Y
In this field you can see the current project vertical ratio (height). This value is
given for the informational purposes only and cannot be changed manually.
Crop, %
Use this option to set the default crop percentage of the black areas that the editor
will add to the input scenes to maintain the selected aspect ratio. This value can be
altered later manually changing the video clip properties . See the Appendix
section for more detail on changing aspect ratio in video file properties
Audio
Frequency
Use this drop-down box to select audio frequency of the soundtrack to your project
video file.
Audio
Channels
Use this drop-down box to select the number of channels the audio component of
your project video is going to have.
After you are done, click the Create button to create a project with the parameters you've set before.
Saving a project
Saving your project lets you keep your current work, and then later open the file in AVS Video Editor
to make further changes. You can continue editing your project from where you left off when you last
saved the project. When you save a project, the arrangement of clips added to the
storyboard/timeline, as well as any video transitions, video effects, credits, and any other edits you
made are retained.
To save the created project go to File menu -> Save project .
Opening existing projects
To open an existing project you should select the necessary project from Last Opened Project list
and click it. In case the desired project is not in the list please use Open Project button located under
Last Opened Projects list. After that select the project to be open in the standard explorer window
and click Open . You can also go to File menu -> Open Projects... In case you select Reopen
Project point you can find a list of recently opened project.
Editing projects
To start a project and begin creating your movie, you need to add any imported or captured video,
audio, or pictures to the Storyboard/Timeline . The clips on Storyboard/Timeline become the
contents of your project and future movie. You can use the Storyboard/Timeline to create and edit
projects. The Storyboard and Timeline both display your work in progress, but each provides a
different view of your work: the Storyboard displays the sequence of clips, and the Timeline displays
the timing of clips. You can switch between the Storyboard and Timeline as you work on a project.
After you add clips to the Storyboard/Timeline to create a project, you can do the following:
Rearrange the clips in the sequence you want working in Storyboard mode.
Create Transitions between clips.
Add Video Effects to video clips and pictures.
As you work on a project, you can preview it at any time to get an idea of the end result. You
can save your work-in-progress as a project and return to work on it again.
Previewing projects
To preview projects please use Play Preview and Stop Preview buttons located at Storyboard or
Timeline Toolbar depending on what stage of video editing you are at. We'd like to draw your
attention to the fact that preview will reflect your project differently. In case you work in storyboard
mode, after clicking the Preview Storyboard button you will see your project as sequence of clips
added to storyboard including transitions without sound feedback and without video effects. If you are
in Video Effects mode you will find the previewing of video effects and transitions added to your
project without sound feedback. In Add Audio mode when previewing a project you will see your
project without video effects you might add but you will be able to hear sound return.
Playing projects
To play the created project please use Main Preview . You can find a Main Preview menu in the
right part of a storyboard menu. To open Main Preview window please use Show/Hide Preview
button.
Note : Main Preview is intended for previewing the whole project with audio and all of the
effects and changes you made.
Resizing the Preview window
You can adjust the Preview window size so that the use of this tool could be much more comfortable
to you. To change the window size click the dotted rectangle in its upper part and drag it to make the
necessary size of the window. Or double-click it to expand it to the largest possible size.
Button
Description
Use this
preview.
button
to
playback
Use this button to pause preview.
Use this button to stop preview.
Use this button to go to the next
clip.
Use this button
previous clip.
to
go
Use this button
Preview window.
to
close
to
the
Main
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Working with Clips
You can change how your clips are displayed in the Media Library. The different views enable you to
see varying amounts of detail about the individual clips within the Media Library . You can see the
title and a bitmap image of each clip in the Thumbnails view, which is the default, or you can choose
the List view to see only the title of each clip. You can also use the Details view to see all the
properties of each clip in the Media Library .
Adding a clip to your project
You can use one of the following ways to add a clip to your current project:
From the Media Library drag the necessary clip and drop it to the storyboard
Select the necessary clip at the Media Library and click Add to Storyboard
Playing a clip
To play a clip in the Main Preview double click it in the Media Library . You can also right-click the a
clip you want to play and select Play point.
Renaming a clip
To rename a clip in the Media Library right click it and select Rename point from right-click menu.
Then type a new clip name. You can also highlight the clip you want to rename by clicking it and after
that press F2 and type a new name.
Deleting clip(s) from your project
You can use one of the following techniques to delete a clip from your current project:
Select clips to be deleted at storyboard and click the Delete Storyitem button.
Select clips to be deleted at storyboard and press Del .
Viewing the properties of an audio clip
To view the properties of a clip please follow the steps below:
1. Click at the clip displayed at the Media Library with the right mouse button.
2. Choose Properties :
1.
2.
Audio properties:
Duration - length of the movie soundtrack (hours:minutes:seconds.milliseconds);
Bitrate - the number of data points used to approximate the true wave form (kilobits per
second);
Codec - the codec used to compress the audio component of the clip.
Audio Description:
Title - name of the composition (if there is any), taken from the music file ID3 tag;
Comments - comments (if there is any), taken from the music file ID3 tag;
Artist - name of the author of the composition (if there is any), taken from the music file ID3
tag;
Album - title of the album the composition pertains to (if there is any), taken from the music
file ID3 tag;
Track - number of the track (if there is any), taken from the music file ID3 tag;
Viewing the properties of a video clip
To view the properties of a video clip please follow the steps below:
1. Click at the clip displayed at the Workspace in Storyboard view with the right mouse
button.
2. Choose Properties >> Video Properties .
3. At the Video Properties and the Audio Properties tabs of the Properties window you can
see the following properties of the selected clip:
Video properties:
Width - the number of pixels that form the video image horizontally;
Height - the number of pixels that form the video image vertically;
Aspect - the aspect ratio of the video image, if it is present in the video clip information (the
aspect is present only for videos in DVD, MPEG1 and MPEG2 formats);
Framerate - the number of video frames displayed every second;
Bitrate - the number of bits transferred per second;
Codec - the codec used to compress the video clip.
Audio properties:
Duration - length of the movie soundtrack (hours:minutes:seconds.milliseconds);
Bitrate - the number of data points used to approximate the true wave form (kilobits per
second);
Audio track - the audio tracks present in the video clip and the codecs used to compress
them.
Volume - the strength of the audio track in the video clip.
Trimming the beginning or end of a video clip
To trim a clip please follow the steps below:
button.
2. Choose Trim .
3. At the Trim tab of the Properties window you can see the start position of the selected clip,
in the right window - the end one.
3.
4. Drag the slider to the necessary position and click the OK button.
5. Preview the result using Main Preview window.
Note : the duration of your clip is counted according to the framerate you've set in project
parameters.
Changing the speed of a video clip
To change the speed of a clip please follow the steps below:
button.
2. Choose Properties >> Speed .
3. At the Speed tab of the Properties window you can choose the speed of the selected clip,
dragging the speed adjustment slider.
4. You will see the new clip duration in the field below the slider.
5. You can either stretch the sound of the clip to fit the new length or to mute it and record the
new one later on. To do that, please press the respective button.
6. Preview the result using the Play button in the Preview window.
5.
6.
Changing the video clip aspect ratio
You might need to change the video clip aspect ratio if it has been previously converted or recorded
with a wrong aspect ratio parameters, for instance, if the image seems to be stretched in width or in
height. To do that please follow the steps below:
button.
2. Choose Properties >> Aspect .
3. At the Aspect tab of the Properties window you can choose the width to height ratio of the
selected clip using the appropriate boxes:
4. You can preview the result in the preview window in the left part of the Aspect tab.
5. If you do not want the editor to add black areas to the sides of your video to maintain aspect
ratio, you can crop them using Video Crop Scale option.
Note : the image will be enlarged and not only the black areas will be cropped but also a
part of video. For instance, if you would like to crop the black areas on top and bottom of
your video, you will also need to crop a part of video image on the right and the left side
of your video. See the Appendix section for more detail on this.
Changing the duration of an image clip:
To change the duration of an image clip please follow the steps below:
1. Right-click at the clip displayed at the Workspace in Storyboard view.
2. At the Properties window you can set the duration of the selected clip and view image
properties.
2.
3. Using spin set the desired duration. If you do not want the editor to add black areas to the
sides of your image to maintain aspect ratio, you can crop them using Crop Scale option.
Note : the image will be enlarged and not only the black areas will be cropped but also a
part of image. For instance, if you would like to crop the black areas on top and bottom of
your picture, you will also need to crop a part of image on the right and the left side of
your picture.
You can also set the duration manually. Click the OK button to accept all the changes.
Merging several clips in one
To merge several clip in the Media Library in one please follow the steps below:
1. Select the files you want to merge.
2. Click Merge selected clips at the Top Toolbar .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Features Overview
AVS Video Editor is a powerful, full-featured and easy to use software designed to edit both
video and audio streams of video files.
With AVS Video Editor you can capture video from digital cameras or any other video
capture device connected to your computer, import video and images to your project, and
much more.
AVS Video Editor allows you to save the created movie into seven popular video formats:
AVI , MPEG , WMV , Quick Time , RM , 3GP and MP4 . The software allows you to convert
your videos from one format to another in various combinations. Additionally, you can adjust
output file's technical profiles to satisfy your needs. You can customize your files for worryfree transmission via Internet to share your movies with friends, showcase your work online
quickly or prepare an outstanding class-project.
In AVS Video Editor there is a possibility of recording DVD, SVCD, VCD . You can convert
your input files of every supported formats to DVD, SVCD or VCD, create DVD menu and
right after that burn it to a CD-R/RW or DVD-R/RW. With the help of this useful option you will
be able to play the output disc using any DVD player and watch the created movie on your
home TV.
AVS Video Editor gives an opportunity to add various transitions to control how your movie
sequences between clips. There are about 190 transitions to satisfy any taste.
AVS Video Editor has the advantage of various
best. You do not need to be a professional to use
surprised how smoothly you go applying different
adding banners and text. You can also preview the
desired effect.
effects to help you achieve your creative
this tool. Once you get started you will be
effects and filters, trimming your files and
results to make sure that you achieved the
AVS Video Editor has a unique timeline tool, which allows you to achieve accuracy and
precision in applying effects and editing your movies. You can use this tool to navigate your
video file (frame navigation).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Importing Files
To start creating a new project you should import the source material to AVS Video Editor first. For
that please use the Start menu pane. You can import a single file or multiple files in a folder. When
you import a source file, it remains in the same location from where it was imported. AVS Video
Editor does not store an actual copy of the source file; instead, a clip that refers to the original source
file is created and appears in the Media Library . After you import files into your Media Library ,
don't move, rename, or delete the original source files. If the source file is deleted, it must be placed
to your computer and then imported again.
If you import a video file you can choose the option to detect scenes. A new scene is created each time
an entirely different frame is detected in the video file. If you don't use scenes detection, the file you
import will appear as one clip.
You can create your movie by importing files of any supported file formats into AVS Video Editor,
which are:
Video
formats:
AVI (DivX, XviD, MS MPEG4, Uncompressed, Cinepak and other)
MPEG (MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 Video)
WMV (Windows Media Video, indexed only)
RM (Real Networks Video)
Quick Time (Apple video format for Macintosh)
3GP (Mobile phones format)
MP4 (Sony PSP, Apple iPod, mobile phones)
Audio
formats:
Uncompressed WAV PCM
Compressed WAV (GSM, ADPCM, DSP and others)
MP3 (MPEG 1/2 Layer 3, including VBR)
MP2 (MPEG 1/2 Layer 2)
WMA (Windows Media Audio 9)
Ogg Vorbis (ver 1.0)
MPC (MusicPack)
AIFF (Apple)
AU (UNIX)
Image
formats:
BMP (standard Windows Bitmap file format)
ICO (standard Windows Icon file format)
WMF (standard Windows Metafile format)
EMF (Enhanced Windows Metafile format)
JPEG (Joint Photographic Expert Group file format)
J2K (Jpeg 2000 File Format)
GIF (Graphics Interchange file Format)
PNG (Portable Network Graphics file format)
TIFF (Tagged-Image File Format)
PCX (ZSoft Paintbrush File Format)
TGA (Truevision Targa File Format)
RAS (Sun Raster Image File Format)
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Capture
AVS Video Editor has a feature of capturing video from almost any video capture device connected to
your computer. To capture video please click the Capture button in Start menu pane. After that AVS
Capture Wizard will start. Depending on video capture device AVS Capture Wizard will look
differently:
You can select three main tabs in the AVS Capture Wizard interface:
Device - to configure the capture device used,
Record - to manage the video file and format settings,
Schedule - to set the additional file duration parameters.
For example, using a TV tuner as capture device, you should set the following parameters for video
capturing at the Device tab:
1. Select Video Device from the list of the available video devices. It is the list of devices
available in the system.
Note : it's possible to change video device settings clicking the Configure button.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Set Video Input .
Set Video Standard from the list of available video standards.
Select Output size in the drop-down combo box.
Note that you can change Frame Rate clicking the appropriate button.
To modify audio parameters, first select Audio Device or mute it checking the appropriate
check-box and select Audio Input and output Audio Format .
6.
7. You can also configure TV Channels clicking the Configure... button at the bottom of preview
window.
8. After you finished please click the OK button.
At the Record tab of AVS Capture Wizard you should specify output file and format settings.
Note : you can select between the original or custom format settings. In case you select custom
video and audio settings, note the opportunity to modify video codec parameters clicking the
Advanced... button. Here you should also enter the file name for your saved movie and set the
location.
At the Scheduler tab you can select to split the output file by size or by time. Besides all, it's possible
to set stop capture parameters for your convenience.
To start/pause/stop capturing please use the appropriate buttons. You can visually judge the capturing
process with the help of Preview .
After capturing process is complete, you will need to import the captured material into AVS Video
Editor . To do that click the Next>> button to go to AVS Video Editor import interface:
After that you can import your video into the Import Area clicking Add Video button. You can
preview the imported files, using the Preview Panel . Click the Play/Stop button to start or stop file
playback and the slider to navigate through the file.
To detect the scenes in your movie that is going to be imported, tic the Enable Scene Detection
check-box. It might be useful if you plan to delete some scenes while editing or insert transitions inside
your movie.
You will need to use the right pane to select the scene search search type - Detect Scenes Changes
or Detect TV Commercials . As can be seen from the name of the search type, the first one is used
for any videos, whereas the second one is used primarily to detect the TV commercials and cut them
out.
Note : every scene containing commercial will be given a 'Commercial' caption.
When you selected all the parameters you can click the Import Media button to start the importing
process or the Back button to return to the video editing.
You will see the importing progress in the Preview Area .
You can visually judge the importing process with the help of Preview . To cancel importing click the
Stop button. You can also see the quantity of scenes found in the imported movie.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Import Media
To start creating your project you need to import source material to AVS Video Editor first. To import
media files please click the Import Media button in Start menu pane. After that Import Files
standard explorer window will appear.
After that you can add your media files into the Import Area clicking the appropriate button - Add
Video , Add Audio or Add Image depending on your media type. You can preview the added files,
using the Preview Panel . Click the Play/Stop button to start or stop media file playback and the
slider to navigate through the media file.
To detect the scenes in your movie that is going to be imported, tic the Enable Scene Detection
check-box. It might be useful if you plan to delete some scenes while editing or insert transitions inside
your movie.
You will need to use the right pane to select the scene search search type - Detect Scenes Changes
or Detect TV Commercials . As can be seen from the name of the search type, the first one is used
for any videos, whereas the second one is used primarily to detect the TV commercials and cut them
out.
Note : every scene containing commercial will be given a 'Commercial' caption.
When you selected all the parameters you can click the Import Media button to start the importing
process or the Back button to return to the video editing.
You will see the importing progress in the Preview Area .
Note : you can simply drag the files to be imported from Explorer and drop them to the Media
Library .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Create Movie
AVS Video Editor offers you a number of opportunities for movie editing. Movie editing involves the
following steps:
working with Media Library and clips
At this step you can organize the source material you record into Media Library and clips for
use in future projects. Media Library serves as a container for clips, which you can organize
in many ways.
improving video with applying different effects
This section provides information about how you can improve the quality of your video by
using a number of effects.
adding various transitions
With photo clips or previously trimmed video, you can create transitions between clips.
adding text overlay effects
This section provides information on how you can add text overlay effects to your video.
adding video overlay effects
This section provides information about how you can change your video by adding overlay
effects to it.
creating and improving audio
You can insert audio clips in your project so that different effects can be achieved. For
example, at the beginning of your movie, you may have a video playing with the included
audio track while having a separate audio clip playing.
To access the announced capabilities please use Create Movie menu pane.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Make Video
After clicking the Make Video icon in the Create Movie menu pane you will find your Media Library
items and clips present in the highlighted Media Library item and the Workspace displayed in
Storyboard mode. Working in this mode you can add or remove video or image clips to your project,
change the sequence of clips at storyboard, trim video clips or set the duration of image clips added to
your project.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Transitions
Transitions control how your movie sequences between clips. To start adding transitions please click
the Add Transitions button in Create Movie menu pane. AVS Video Editor will offer you a number
of various transitions to help you achieve your creative best. For the usage convenience all of the
transitions are divided into groups: Enhanced , Transform , Rotate , Swing , Shatter , Diffuse ,
Page , Fade , Mosaic , Clock , Wipe , Slide , Push , Stretch , and Graduate .
To add any transition select the desired transition icon reflected in the Media Library and drag it to
the workspace, which is represented in Storyboard View .
Note : you can select the transitions view type between Thumbnails or List .
To add the transition:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the Transitions button in Create Movie menu pane.
Navigating among transitions reflected in the Media Library select the desired transition icon.
Drag and drop it to the workspace or click the Add Transition button.
Preview the result using Main Preview window
You can also set the transition duration. The transition length is determined by the amount of overlap
between two clips.
Note : maximum transition length is limited to 5 seconds.
1.
To change the transition length:
1. Right-click at the transition displayed at the Workspace in storyboard view and select the
Properties item.
2. At the Transition Properties window you can see the start position of the selected
transition, in the right window - the end one.
3. Drag the slider to the necessary position and click the Apply button. The Apply All button will
set the same duration to all of the transitions in your project.
4. Clicking the Randomize All button will add random transitions to all the empty transition
windows between clips in your project with the duration set for current transition.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Add Audio
In AVS Video Editor project audio clips can be overlapped.
Note : you cannot add transitions between two audio clips. The length of time the two audio clips
play together is determined by the amount of overlap between the two clips. When two audio clips
overlap, the volume of each audio clip is lowered by 50 percent during the part where they
overlap. Two audio clips cannot completely overlap and play together. To start editing audio please
click the Add Audio button in Create Movie menu pane.
To add any audio select the desired track reflected in the Media Library and drag it to the workspace
which is represented in Timeline view .
Note : you can select the tracks view type between Thumbnails or List .
Follow the steps below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Add Audio button in Create Movie menu pane.
Navigating among audio tracks reflected in the Media Library select the desired track icon.
Drag and drop it to the workspace.
Set boundaries of audio on the Timeline .
Preview the result using Main Preview window.
AVS Video Editor has a great feature of editing audio tracks with advanced AVS Audio Editor
included into the installation or any of the audio editors installed on your computer. You can select the
audio editor to be used in the Audio section of the Environment Settings... Main Menu item or
using the Audio Settings button
in the Timeline menu . To start expanded audio editing with
AVS Audio Editor please click the Edit in Audio Editor button
or press F4 key.
You can adjust the audio levels between the two audio tracks (the audio that was recorded as part of a
video clip on the video track and the audio that was recorded or imported and added to the audio
track). Adjusting the audio levels determines which audio will play louder than the other. The default
setting plays the audio in both tracks at equal levels. The audio levels you select will play throughout
the entire portion of your movie. By adjusting the audio levels, it could be set so that dialog in your
video clip can be heard over the music that plays in the background. To adjust audio levels please use
Audio Balance slider at the Timeline Main Video section. Drag the slider and use the pop-up tip to
set necessary audio level.
Note : you can apply not one but several tracks. If you want to disable any audio track, check the
icon. The active audio track is highlighted.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Using Timeline in Add Audio Mode
The Timeline tool in Add Audio mode differs from Video Editing mode. We'd like to draw your
attention to the fact that AVS Video Editor offers you the opportunity to edit audio track you want to
include in your project with advanced AVS Audio Editor .
AVS Video Editor allows you to apply one or several audio tracks to your media file. For convenience
of use you can change the sequence of audio reflection or resize them at the Timeline . It's possible
to create one track using fragments from several tracks. For that use drag-and-drop method.
Note : this is how the way of displaying the whole audio track differs from the trimmed one.
Whole
Track
Audio
Trimmed
Audio Track
At each audio track reflected at the Timeline you can see envelope that depicts the volume control.
You can regulate it differently according to your project's details. To add a control point to the
envelope, double-click within the envelope line (where the mouse cursor changes to a hand) and drag
the control point to the location where you want it. To move a point on the envelope, click and hold the
point and drag it to a new location.
Note : in case you move the point more than 20 pixels over the track line up or down, the point
will be deleted. You can use this feature to smooth transition between two tracks. When the mouse
cursor is located over a point, you will see it change from an arrow to a rhombus.
It's a nice idea to use markers in file editing. It will help you designate specific cursor positions to
make editing process more effective.
Selection
To select a part of your project choose the area where you want to apply the desired audio, click the
left mouse button and drag the slider along the navigation line. The selected area will be highlighted.
Markers
AVS Video Editor offers the opportunity to set markers at the Timeline for convenient audio editing.
You can use markers for pointing necessary position or selecting the areas between two markers.
Makers will be useful for fragmentary file editing also.
Button
Description
Add
Adds marker at the Timeline cursor position.
Auto Add
Adds marker at the clips position.
Go To
Moves the Timeline cursor to the highlighted marker position.
Select
Select the area between two markers.
Delete
Deletes the highlighted maker.
Delete All
Deletes all makers from markers list.
To add Marker:
1. Put the Timeline cursor at the position where you'd like to set marker
2. Click the Add button. The name of marker shown as Position:# will appear in the Markers
List .
To delete Marker:
1. Select the marker you want to delete from the Markers List .
2. Click the Delete button.
3. To delete all markers please use the Delete All button.
To select the area between two Markers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the start position marker from the Markers List .
Click the Go To button.
Select the end position marker from the Markers List .
Click the Select button. The selected are will be highlighted at the Timeline .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Video Effects
To start editing video please click the Video Effects button in Create Movie menu pane. AVS Video
Editor has the advantage of various effects to help you achieve your creative best. You can
experiment with transformation and painting effects and patterns to turn your ideas into images that
stand out.
To add any effect select the desired effect reflected in Media Library and drag it to the workspace
Note : you can select the effects view type between Thumbnails or List .
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the Video Effects button in Create Movie menu pane.
Navigating among effects reflected in the Media Library select the desired effect icon.
Drag and drop it to the workspace or click the Add Effect button.
Set fade-in and fade-out limits on the Timeline .
Choose the effect parameters.
Note : You can apply not one but several effects. If you want to disable any effect, check the
icon.
To see the detailed information on each effect please refer to respective chapters.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Using Timeline in Video Editing
movies. You can use this tool to navigate through your video file (frame navigation).
You can add a number of different effects to improve your video. Adding effects involves several steps:
1. Setting effect boundaries (see Selection )
2. Selection of the effect (see Video Effects )
3. Setting fade-in and fade-out areas (see Fade-in/Fade-out )
AVS Video Editor allows you to apply one or several effects to your media file. For details on specific
effect, please refer to respective chapters. For convenience of use you can change the sequence of
effects reflection or resize them at the Timeline . It's nice idea to use markers in file editing.
Selection
AVS Video Editor allows you to apply one or several effects to parts of your media file.
To apply effect to a part of input file:
1. Choose the area where you want to apply the desired effect, click the left mouse button and
drag the slider along the navigation line. The selected area will become highlighted.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Navigating among effects reflected in the Media Library select the desired effect icon.
Choose the effect parameters.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS Video Editor allows you to apply one or several effects to your media file.
Fade-in is the area where the effect starts being reflected on your video. In the area of maximum
representation the effect is applied to 100% capacity. In the Fade-out area the effect is being reduced
until it completely disappears.
After you choose the effect you want to apply, the program automatically sets fade-in and fade-out
boundaries. You can change them by clicking the left mouse button and dragging the boundaries
inwards or outwards.
You can also move the entire selection along the media file by clicking left mouse button inside the
maximum effect area.
[Back to the Top ]
Markers
AVS Video Editor provides an opportunity to set markers at the Timeline for convenient video
editing. You can use markers for pointing necessary video frames or selecting the areas between two
markers. Markers will be useful for fragmentary file editing (applying video effect to the selected area)
also. To start working with Markers please click the Markers tab located in the right bottom part of
the workspace.
Button
Description
Add
Auto Add
Adds markers at the clips position.
Go To
Moves the Timeline cursor to the highlighted marker position.
Select
Selects the area between two markers.
Delete
Delete All
To add Marker:
List .
To delete Marker:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click the Select button. The selected area will be highlighted at the Timeline .
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Adjust Video Effects
The Adjust video effects include the following commands:
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Brightness
BrightnessEx
Contrast
Gamma
Equalize
Grayscale
Invert
AutoContrast
AutoLevels
Hue
Saturation
Posterize
Temperature
Colorize
Threshold
To select any one of them you can drag and drop it to the workspace or select it with the mouse and
click the Add Effect button.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Adjust Brightness
The Brightness effect lets you make simple adjustments to the tonal range of a file. Brightness is the
relative lightness or darkness of the color, usually measured in levels.
How to apply:
1. Select the Video Effects button in Create Movie menu pane.
2. Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Adjust Brightness effect
icon.
3. Drag and drop it to the workspace or click the Add Effect button.
4. Set the level of brightness.
5. Set fade-in and fade-out limits on the Timeline .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Adjust BrightnessEx
A large percentage of the visible spectrum can be represented by mixing red, green, and blue (RGB)
colored light in various proportions and intensities. The BrightnessEx effect lets you make simple
adjustments to the tonal range of a color you choose.
How to apply:
2. Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Adjust BrightnessEx effect
icon.
4. Set the parameters of the color.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Adjust Contrast
The Contrast effect adjusts the contrast of an image. Values can range from -100 to +100.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Adjust Contrast effect icon.
Set the level of contrast (in percentage).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Adjust Gamma
The Gamma effect measures the brightness of midtone values and modifies the pixel values in an
image. A higher gamma value yields an overall lighter image.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Adjust Gamma effect icon.
Set the level of adjustment (in percentage).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Adjust Equalize
The Equalize effect normalizes the histogram of a file. It is the automatic adjustment tool and you
cannot change settings manually.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Adjust Equalize effect icon.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Adjust Grayscale
The Grayscale effect converts color images to grayscale palette: black (0) and white (255). The effect
has two variations: desaturate and intensity.
How to apply:
2. Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Adjust Grayscale effect
icon.
4. Set the type of grayscale.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Adjust Invert
The Invert effect inverts the colors in an image. When you invert an image, the brightness value of
each pixel in the channels is converted to the inverse value on the 256-step color-values scale. For
example, a pixel in a positive image with a value of 255 is changed to 0, and a pixel with a value of 5
to 250.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Adjust Invert effect icon.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Adjust AutoContrast
The Adjust AutoContrast command adjusts the overall contrast and mixture of colors in an RGB
image automatically. When identifying the lightest and darkest pixels in an image, AutoContrast clips
the white and black pixels by 0.5% - that is, it ignores the first 0.5% of either extreme. This ensures
that white and black values are based on representative rather than extreme pixel values.
How to apply:
2. Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Adjust AutoContrast effect
icon.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Adjust AutoLevels
The AutoLevels effect defines the lightest and darkest pixels in each color channel as white and black
and then redistributes intermediate pixel values proportionately. Because AutoLevels adjusts each
color channel individually, it may remove or introduce colors.
How to apply:
2. Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Adjust AutoLevels effect
icon.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Adjust Hue
The Hue effect lets you adjust the hue of the entire image. Adjusting the hue, or color, represents a
move around the color wheel. Hue is the color reflected from or transmitted through an object. It is
measured as a location on the standard color wheel, expressed as a degree between 0° and 360°. In
common use, hue is identified by the name of the color such as red, orange, or green.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Adjust Hue effect icon.
Select the angle (in degrees).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Adjust Saturation
Saturation , sometimes called chroma, is the strength or purity of the color. Saturation represents
the amount of gray in proportion to the hue, measured as a percentage from 0% (gray) to 100% (fully
saturated). On the standard color wheel, saturation increases from the center to the edge. The
Saturation effect lets you adjust the saturation of the entire image.
How to apply:
2. Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Adjust Saturation effect
icon.
4. Select the angle (in degrees).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Adjust Posterize
The Posterize effect lets you specify the tonal level (or brightness values) and then maps pixels to the
closest matching level.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Adjust Posterize effect icon.
Set the tonal level.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Adjust Temperature
The Temperature effect lets you adjust your video image to warm or cold colors. Negative values
represent cold colors and positive values transform to warm colors correspondingly.
How to apply:
2. Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Adjust Temperature effect
icon.
4. Select the level (in percentage).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Adjust Colorize
The Colorize effect lets you to colorize the entire file in a RGB-specified file. The video is colorized in
the tones of the selected color while the overall balance of the file is maintained.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Adjust Colorize effect icon.
Set the dominant color.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Adjust Threshold
The Threshold effect determines how much contrast there is between neighboring pixels for the
sharpening to affect them. The higher setting exclude more and more pixels.
How to apply:
2. Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Adjust Threshold effect
icon.
4. Select the level and the threshold option.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Effect Video Effects
The Effect video effects include the following commands:
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Blur
Sharpen
Mosaic
GaussianBlur
Noise
Diffuse
MotionBlur
Emboss
Minimal
Maximal
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Effect Blur
Effect Blur reduces contrast between adjacent pixels by lightening pixels next to well-defined edges
and shadows, visually smoothing and softening the image.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Effect Blur effect icon.
Enter the level of blurring (in percentage).
Select the color representation of noise.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Effect Sharpen
The Sharpen effect increases contrast to seemingly bring the images into better focus (although it
cannot substitute for an image that's properly focused in the first place). It focuses blurry images by
increasing the contrast of adjacent pixels.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Effect Sharpen effect icon.
Enter the magnitude of displacement (in percentage).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Effect Mosaic
The Mosaic effect defines a selection by clumping pixels of similar color values in cells. The pixels in a
given block are the same color, and the colors of the blocks represent the colors in the selection. It
produces irregularly-contoured squares at regularly-spaced intervals. There are two types of mosaic
effect. Simple mosaic is produced based on the color of the top left pixel; otherwise it is based on the
average color of all pixels in the given tile.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Effect Mosaic effect icon.
Enter the size of the block (in pixels)
Select the type of mosaic.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Effect GaussianBlur
Effect GaussianBlur uses a mathematical equation (a bell-shaped curve) to calculate the transition
between adjacent pixels, resulting in most of the blurred pixels ending up in the middle range between
the two original colors. The Gaussian Blur adds low-frequency detail and can produce a hazy effect.
How to apply:
2. Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Effect GaussianBlur effect
icon.
4. Enter the size (in pixels).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Effect Noise
The Noise effect adds noise, or pixels with randomly distributed color levels. This effect is used to add
some texture to an image by way of tiny pixel dustings. The Noise effect can be used to conceal
"touch-ups" of flat color on an image, or remove other problem areas.
The Monochromatic (Mono) option applies the filter to only the tonal elements in the image without
changing the colors.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Effect Noise effect icon.
Enter the amount of noise added (from 1 to 999).
Select the color representation of noise.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Effect Diffuse
The Diffuse effect shuffles pixels in a selection to make the selection look less focused according to
the selected magnitude of the effect. The effect moves pixels to the selected distance randomly,
ignoring color values.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Effect Diffuse effect icon.
Enter the distance of pixel relocation (in pixels).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Effect MotionBlur
Effect MotionBlur gives the impression of motion in the image by adding directional and angle
controls for the blurring process. You can choose an angle between -90° to 90° and a distance from 1
to 999 pixels to control the effects of the Motion Blur .
How to apply:
2. Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Effect MotionBlur effect
icon.
4. Enter the angle (in degrees) and distance parameters (in pixels).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Effect Emboss
The Emboss effect is used to give an image a 3D look - as if it was raised or stamped. Options include
an embossing angle (from -360° - to lower (stamp) the surface, to +360° - to raise the surface),
height, and a percentage (1% to 500%) for the amount of color within the selection. The Emboss
effect turns the entire image gray, except to trace colors that occur if you use high settings.
Angle settings vary from 0-360° (though it may also give negative readings). This parameter controls
the direction of light. Distance, varying from 1 to 10, sets the elevation of the effect. Amount varies
from 1-500 and controls how much detail the filter sees to emboss. At low settings, almost nothing is
raised up.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Effect Emboss effect icon.
Enter the angle (in degrees), elevation of the effect (pixels) and amount value (in
percentage).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Effect Minimal
The Minimal Filter effect emphasizes the dark pixels in an image.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Effect Minimal effect icon.
Enter the size of tile (in pixels).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Effect Maximal
The Maximal Filter emphasizes the light pixels in an image.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Effect Maximal effect icon.
Enter the size of tile (in pixels).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Draw Video Effects
The Draw video effects include the following commands:
Draw
Draw
Draw
Draw
Draw
Draw
Draw
Line
Rectangle
Ellipse
InvRectangle
InvEllipse
Image
Border
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Draw Line
The Line effect lets you include various lines to your video file. You can draw various lines by dragging
the mouse as you would do in any graphic editor. You can also locate the line image by setting the
numerical values.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Draw Line effect icon.
Select the location, color, thickness (size) and alpha value (transparency).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Draw Rectangle
The Rectangle effect allows you to highlight an object in the video by setting out an rectangularshaped object of a specified color while the rest of the picture remains untouched.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Draw Rectangle effect icon.
Set the location of rectangle.
Select the color and alpha value (transparency).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Draw Ellipse
The Ellipse effect allows you to highlight an object in the video by setting out an ellipse-shaped object
of a specified color while the rest of the picture remains untouched.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Draw Ellipse effect icon.
Set the location of ellipse.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Draw InvRectangle
The InvRectangle effect allows you to highlight an object in the video by setting out an rectangularshaped "window" which remains free of color coverage.
How to apply:
2. Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Draw InvRectangle effect
icon.
4. Set the location of rectangle.
5. Select the color and alpha value (transparency).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Draw InvEllipse
The InvEllipse effect allows you to highlight an object in the video by setting out an ellipse-shaped
"window" which remains free of color coverage.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Draw InvEllipse effect icon.
Set the location of ellipse.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Draw Image
The Image effect lets you include any image to your video.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Draw Image effect icon.
click the Image button to load the image location
5. Click the Load button to open the standard windows explorer menu and select the image
location. After you select the location, click OK .
6.
7.
8.
9.
Set the location of image on the video picture.
Select the alpha value (transparency).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Draw Border
The Border effect let you put a border around your image. You can specify type, width and color of
the border.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Draw Border effect icon.
Select the type of the border.
Select the color and size of the border.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Transform Video Effects
The Transform video effects include the following commands:
Transform
Transform
Transform
Transform
Transform
Transform
Transform
Transform
Flip
Perspective
Skew
Shift
Rotate
Resample
Zoom
Mirror
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Transform Flip
The Flip transformation lets you flip an entire image horizontally or vertically.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Transform Flip effect icon.
Select the direction of flip.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Transform Perspective
The Perspective effect allows you to transform the perspective in an image. It has two variations:
horizontal and vertical transformations.
How to apply:
2. Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Transform Perspective
effect icon.
4. Select the angle and type of perspective transformations.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Transform Skew
The Skew transformation lets you skew an entire image horizontally or vertically.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Transform Skew effect icon.
Select the direction of skewing.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Transform Shift
The Shift transformation allows you to move you image along X and Y axes.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Transform Shift effect icon.
Select the axial coordinates.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Transform Rotate
The Rotate transformation allows you to rotate the entire image.
How to apply:
2. Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Transform Rotate effect
icon.
4. Select the angle of rotation.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Transform Resample
The Resample transformation allows you to reproduce the entire image.
How to apply:
2. Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Transform Resample effect
icon.
4. Select the number of reproductions.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Transform Zoom
The Zoom feature lets you magnify or reduce your view of the image. The window's title bar displays
the zoom percentage.
How to apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Transform Zoom effect icon.
Select magnitude of zoom.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Transform Mirror
The Mirror effect lets you duplicate a part of the image.
How to apply:
2. Navigating among effects reflected in Media Library select the Transform Mirror effect
icon.
4. Select the level and type of mirror effect.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Using Text Overlay
Text overlay effects let you place text - simple or animated - over the video clip you would like to edit.
To start adding text overlay effects please click the Text Overlay button in Create Movie menu
pane. AVS Video Editor will suggest that you choose the text effect to place over the edited video
clip.
AVS Video Editor has several samples of the text overlay effect to help you achieve your creative
best.
The main groups of the text overlay are:
Simple text - allows you to add moving subtitles to your video.
Static text - allows you to add any static message to your video.
Dynamic text - allows you to add composite text effects to your video.
You can experiment with them to turn your ideas into images. See the Using Timeline in Text
Overlay section for more detailed instructions on how to use different effects.
To add any text select the desired clip reflected in the Media Library and drag it to the workspace
Note : you can select the clips view type between Thumbnails , Icons or Details .
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the Text Overlay button in Create Movie menu pane.
Navigating among text effects reflected in the Media Library select the desired effect icon.
Drag and drop it to the workspace or click the Add Text Overlay button.
Choose the clip parameters in the Effects pane to the right of the Timeline .
Set fade-in and fade-out limits on the Timeline or clicking the Advanced button.
Note : you can overlay not one but several texts. If you want to disable any text overlay effect,
check the respective window off clicking the
icon.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Using Timeline in Text Overlay
movies. You can use this tool to navigate your video file (frame navigation).
You can use the Effects pane situated in the right part of the AVS Video Editor window to adjust the
used text overlay effects. Adjusting effects of the text overlay involves several steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Setting overlay boundaries (see Selection )
Selection of the text effect used for the overlay (see Using Text Overlay )
Setting the video overlay parameters (see Overlay Parameters )
Adding markers to the video (see Markers )
Setting fade-in and fade-out areas (see Fade-in/Fade-out )
Adjusting the advanced settings of the text overlay (see Text Overlay Advanced Settings )
AVS Video Editor allows you to apply one or several overlay effects to your media file. For
convenience of use you can change the sequence of overlay videos or resize them at the Timeline .
Selection
To apply overlay effect to a part of input file you need to:
1. Navigating among text overlay effects reflected in the Media Library select the desired text
overlay effect icon.
2. Drag and drop it to the workspace or click the Add to Timeline button.
3. Set the desired place of the text overlay by dragging it with the left mouse button.
4. Set the text overlay parameters , markers and fade-in and fade-out limits on the
Timeline .
5. Set the text overlay additional settings .
[Back to the Top ]
Overlay Parameters
In the Effects tab you can adjust the following text overlay settings:
Parameter
Description
Left
Use this box to adjust the video overlay clip position relative to the left side
of the edited video clip.
Top
Use this box to adjust the video overlay clip position relative to the upper
side of the edited video clip.
Font
Use this button to select the font used for the text overlay.
Text
Use this box to type in the text you would like to use as overlay to your
video.
Save preset
Use this button to save the resulting settings as a preset if you plan to use
them in future (used with Static text overlay effects).
Distance
Use this button to set the distance between the letters that compose the
text overlay (used with Dynamic text overlay effects).
Advanced
Use this button to to edit the advanced text overlay settings, such as
Shadow , Border , Rotate and Font face type .
[Back to the Top ]
Markers
AVS Video Editor allows the user to set markers at the Timeline for convenient video editing. You
can use markers for pointing necessary video frames or selecting the areas between two markers.
Markers will be useful for fragmentary file editing (applying text overlay effect to the selected area)
also. To start working with Markers please click the Markers tab located in the right bottom part of
the workspace.
Button
Description
Add
Auto Add
Adds markers at the clips position.
Go To
Moves Timeline cursor to the highlighted marker position.
Select
Select the area between two markers.
Delete
Delete All
To add Marker:
List .
To delete Marker:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click the Select button. The selected are will be highlighted at the Timeline .
[Back to the Top ]
Fade-in is the area where the effect starts being reflected on your video. In the area of maximum
representation the effect is applied to 100% capacity. In the Fade-out area the effect is being reduced
until it completely disappears.
After you choose the text overlay effect you want to apply, the program automatically sets fade-in and
fade-out boundaries. You can change them by clicking the left mouse button and dragging the
boundaries inwards or outwards.
You can also move the entire selection along the media file by clicking left mouse button inside the
maximum effect area.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Text Overlay Advanced Settings
Text overlay advanced settings can be modified after you click the Advanced button in the
Parameters tab. The properties that you can adjust include:
[Font face ]
[Shadow ]
[Border ]
[Rotate ]
Font face
To add more individuality and creativity to your text overlay effect you might want to adjust the Font
face settings. To start adjusting the font face you need to the Face tab of the text overlay advanced
settings.
Note : you can also select the Font used right from this window, clicking the box next to the text
font representation.
There are the following main font face types:
1. Solid - the text will be formed using a single solid color. You can only select this first color:
2. Gradient - the text will be formed using the smooth transition between two selected colors.
You can select the first color, the second color, their transparency and the mode of the
gradient:
3. Hatch - the text will be made up using a pattern formed by the two selected colors. You can
select the first color, the second color, their transparency and the mode of the hatch:
4. Texture - the text will be made up using a pattern formed by a selected image. You can
select the image on your computer hard disk drive clicking the Load button or double-clicking
the area that represents the texture thumbnail, set its transparency or delete it clicking Clear
:
You can use the preview window to see the result and to accept or discard the changes you have
made.
[Back to the Top ]
Shadow
You can add shadow to your text used to overlay the video clip. To do that you need to tic the checkbox next to the Shadow caption in the Effects tab of the text overlay advanced settings:
You can adjust the following shadow effect parameters:
Parameter
Description
Transparency
Use this slider to adjust the text overlay shadow transparency. The least
value is 0 , it makes the shadow totally opaque, the value equal to 255
makes the text overlay shadow totally transparent.
Color
Use this button to choose the color of the text overlay shadow.
Distance X, pix
Use this slider to adjust the text overlay shadow horizontal position. The
negative values move the shadow to the left of the text itself, the positive
values move the shadow to the right of the text. The value of 0 means that
the horizontal position of the text and its shadow coincide.
Distance Y, pix
Use this slider to adjust the text overlay shadow vertical position. The
negative values move the shadow upwards of the text itself, the positive
values move the shadow downward of the text. The value of 0 means that
the vertical position of the text and its shadow coincide.
Blur
Use this button to blur the shadow of the text overlay. The least value is 0 ,
it makes the shadow sharp, the value equal to 10 makes the text overlay
shadow most blurred.
[Back to the Top ]
Border
You can add borders to your text used to overlay the video clip. To do that you need to tic the checkbox next to the Border caption in the Effects tab of the text overlay advanced settings:
Parameter
Description
Color
Use this button to choose the color of the text overlay border.
Transparency
Use this slider to adjust the text overlay border transparency. The least
value is 0 , it makes the border totally opaque, the value equal to 255
makes the text overlay border totally transparent.
Width
Use this button to adjust the text overlay border width (in pixels).
[Back to the Top ]
Rotate
If you choose a static text overlay effect you can rotate it clockwise or counter-clockwise. To do that
you need to select an angle in the Rotate section in the text overlay advanced settings:
Positive degrees values will rotate the text clockwise while the negative values will rotate the text
overlay counter-clockwise.
Note : if you use Simple or Dynamic text overlay effects you will not be able to change the
Rotate parameter.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Using Video Overlay
Overlay effects let you superpose video image over the video clip you would like to edit. To start
adding overlay effects please click the Video Overlay button in Create Movie menu pane. AVS
Video Editor will suggest that you choose the video to place over the edited video clip.
AVS Video Editor has the advantage of adding various effects to the overlay video to help you
achieve your creative best. You can experiment with them to turn your ideas into images. See the
Using Timeline in Video Overlay section for more detailed instructions on how to use different
effects.
To add any video select the desired clip reflected in the Media Library and drag it to the workspace
Note : you can select the clips view type between Thumbnails , Icons or Details .
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the Video Overlay button in Create Movie menu pane.
Navigating among video clips reflected in the Media Library select the desired clip icon.
Drag and drop it to the workspace or click the Add to Timeline button.
Choose the clip parameters in the Effects pane to the right of the Timeline .
Set fade-in and fade-out limits on the Timeline or using the Advanced button.
5.
6.
Note : you can overlay not one but several video clips. If you want to disable any clip, check the
icon.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Using Timeline in Video Overlay
movies. You can use this tool to navigate your video file (frame navigation).
You can use the Effects pane situated in the right part of the AVS Video Editor window to adjust the
used video overlay. Adjusting effects of the video overlay involves several steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Setting overlay video boundaries (see Selection )
Selection of the video clip used for the overlay effect (see Using Video Overlay )
Setting the video overlay parameters (see Overlay Parameters )
Setting the video overlay main settings (see Main settings )
Setting borders to the overlay video (see Setting Borders )
Setting the video overlay Chromakey parameters (see Chromakey parameters )
Setting fade-in and fade-out areas (see Transitions )
AVS Video Editor allows you to apply one or several overlay effects to your media file. For
convenience of use you can change the sequence of overlay videos or resize them at the Timeline .
Selection
AVS Video Editor allows you to choose one or several clips for overlaying parts of your media file.
To apply overlay effect to a part of input file:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Navigating among videos reflected in the Media Library select the desired video clip icon.
Drag and drop it to the workspace or click the Add to Timeline button.
Set the desired place of the video overlay by dragging it with the left mouse button.
Set the clip parameters , position and fade-in and fade-out limits on the Timeline .
Change the additional Advanced parameters of the video overlay.
[Back to the Top ]
Overlay Parameters
In the Parameters tab of the Effects menu pane you can adjust the following video clip settings, that
is used to overlay your video:
Parameter
Description
Left
Use this box to adjust the video overlay clip position relative to the left side
of the edited video clip.
Top
Use this box to adjust the video overlay clip position relative to the upper
side of the edited video clip.
Width
Use this box to adjust the video overlay clip width (in pixels).
Height
Use this box to adjust the video overlay clip height (in pixels).
Constrain
proportions
Tic this option to keep the video overlay clip sides (width to height) ratio or
uncheck if you would like to stretch or reduce the video overlay clip width or
height.
Advanced
Use this button to edit the advanced video overlay settings, such as
Transparency , Audio volume , Border settings , Chromakey
parameters and Transition settings .
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Video Overlay Advanced Settings
Video overlay advanced settings can be modified after you click the Advanced button in the
Parameters tab. The properties that you can adjust include:
[Main settings ]
[Setting Borders ]
[Chromakey parameters ]
[Transitions ]
Main settings
The main properties of the video overlay comprise the following parameters:
Transparency - Use this option to set the transparency of the video overlay clip. The
maximal value in this field is 255 which will set the overlay clip non-transparent. The minimal
value is 0 , meaning the full transparency of the video overlay clip.
[Back to the Top ]
Setting Borders
You can set the borders to the overlay video in case you would like them to be seen:
Check the Border check-box to make the borders visible. Enter Size, pix in pixels or use the slider to
set the border width and choose the border Color .
[Back to the Top ]
Chromakey parameters
Before you start applying the Chromakey parameters it is recommended that you enable the
Show/Hide preview window to see the changes you make.
You can use not simple but composite effects with the video overlay function. You can add video
overlay that will be half transparent so that only part of it that has the specific color you need will be
visible and all the rest will disappear to reveal the video underneath. To do that you can use the
Chromakey function:
Check the Chromakey check-box, and select the Main color clicking the
window select the color that forms the area you would like to be transparent.
box. In the opened
You can select the color you need from the fixed colors or the color model on the left side or use the
color picker
to select a specific color from your video. After that set the selected color threshold
or select the secondary color that will set the limit of the chromakey. The video of the selected color
within the overlay video effect will be transparent to the threshold you set.
See the Online Animated Tutorials for the detailed instructions on how to apply video overlay effect
using chromakey of a specific color.
[Back to the Top ]
Transitions
Fade-in is the area where the overlay video clip starts being displayed on your video. In the area of
maximum representation the overlay is applied to 100% visibility set in the Main settings
Transparency section. In the Fade-out area the overlay video clip is being reduced until it
completely disappears.
After you choose the overlay video clip you want to superpose, the program automatically sets fade-in
and fade-out boundaries. You can change their duration by either clicking the left mouse button and
dragging the boundaries inwards or outwards or by setting them in the Transitions tab of the
Properties window:
In this tab you will also choose the transition for the fade-in and fade-out of the video clip used for the
overlay effect. You can use transition effects available in the AVS Video Editor for the overlay fade-in
and fade-out adjustment. To do that select the Group of the transitions you would like to use, then
the transition itself and its duration.
Note : the duration of the Appear transition is the Fade-in time of the video overlay effect.
Correspondingly the Fade-out time is equal to the Disappear transition duration.
Use the preview window to see the result and to accept or discard the changes you have made.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Saving Movie to Different Formats
AVS Video Editor offers the opportunity to save the created movie to several common video formats.
Among them:
AVI
AVI is short for "Audio Video Interleave", the original Microsoft file format for Microsoft's Video
for Windows standard. It is an audio video standard designed by Microsoft and is apparently
proprietary and Microsoft Windows specific. It is a format developed for storing video and
audio information. Files in this format have an .AVI extension. These files are limited to 320 x
240 resolution, and 30 frames per second, neither of which is adequate for full screen, full
motion video. However, Video for Windows does not require any special hardware, making it
the lowest common denominator for multimedia applications.
MPEG
MPEG (.mpg or .mpeg) - Gives excellent compression with little loss in quality of the video.
MPEG supports three types of data - video, audio and streaming. There are a number of
standards: among them there are two flavors of MPEG available today. MPEG-1 was designed
to provide VHS video quality and CD audio quality at a combined data rate of 150 kilobytes
per second. MPEG-1 is displayed at 30 frames per second in a frame that is 352x240
(horizontal x vertical) pixels in size. This allows relatively high quality video images to be
stored in relatively small file sizes for playback across computer networks or CD-ROM delivery.
MPEG-2 is the other side of the compression coin. It is a broadcast standard specifying a
playback size of 720 x 480 pixels at 60 fields per second. Data rates can range from 2 to 10
megabits per second. This means large file sizes and data rates that require specialized
hardware for playback. MPEG-2 is one of the core compression technologies for DVD. See the
MPEG site for more information.
WMV
Windows Media (.wmv or .asf) - This is Microsoft's new standard for audio and video which is
closely tied with the Windows Operating System. The player is able to play Windows Media
Video (.wmv) and Advanced Streaming Format (.asf) files, and also other formats such as
QuickTime, AVI, MPEG and MP3. See the Windows Media site for more information.
RM
RealMedia (.rm) provides one of the oldest and most widespread (85% of all web-accessing
computers have RealPlayer installed) Web delivery formats. The RealMedia files (.rm) can be
viewed using RealPlayer 3 and above. For more information see the RealNetworks site and
their user information site.
MOV
QuickTime describes a format for the creation and distribution of video, audio and other
formats. Although now an ISO standard, it was initially developed by Apple Inc. for use in
Macintosh computers. Although it comes with the System software distribution, it is updated
periodically by Apple. For more information see Apple site.
3GP
3GP is a file format which is used in mobile phones to store media (audio and video). This file
format is a simpler version of "ISO 14496-1 (MPEG-4) Media Format", which is similar to MOV
(used by QuickTime). 3GP stores video as MPEG-4 or H.263. Audio is stored in AMR-NB or
AAC-LC formats. 3GPP also describes image sizes and bandwidth, so content is correctly sized
for mobile display screens. The term "3GPP specification" covers all GSM (including GPRS and
EDGE) and W-CDMA specifications. The following terms are also used to describe networks
using the 3G specifications: UTRAN, UMTS (in Europe) and FOMA (in Japan). More information
can be found on The 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) web site.
MP4
MP4 is the global file extension for the MPEG-4 container format including all kinds of
multimedia content (video, natural and synthetic audio, 2D and 3D graphics, animated
avatars, user interactivity, etc.) that can be streamed over any kind of connection or network.
It exploits two primary coding strategies to reduce the amount of data needed to convey high-
quality digital audio: removing the signal components that are "perceptually irrelevant" and
can be discarded without a perceived loss of audio quality and eliminating the redundancies in
the coded audio signal. Usual bitrates values are 64 - 256 kbps.
To save your movie to the one of the media formats enumerated above, please use Save Movie menu
pane.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Save Movie to AVI
Audio Video Interleave (AVI) format is the standard Windows format for audio/video data. To save the
created movie to AVI format please click the To AVI button in Save Movie menu pane. Save Movie
To AVI wizard will start.
Here you should set the following parameters for file converting and saving:
6. Press the Save As Preset button to save the settings as preset so it will appear in Presets
list. You can also delete presets with the help of the Delete Preset button.
Note : you can change codec's properties clicking the Configure button.
7. After you finished please click the Next>> button.
7.
At the next step you will need to choose the video file aspect correction parameters:
Use aspect correction - use this option to change the image frame size to optimally fit the
aspect ratio.
No aspect correction - use this option to change aspect according to the frame size
selected.
Resize - use this option for free resize with no aspect correspondence.
See the Appendix section for more detail on saving the movies with aspect correction.
At the next step of Save Movie To AVI wizard you should enter the file name for your saved movie
and set the location. Click the Browse... button to open the standard windows explorer menu and
select the movie location. After you are done, click the Start button to start converting your movie to
AVI format. You can visually judge the converting process with the help of Conversion Preview . To
cancel converting click the Cancel button.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Save Movie to MPEG
MPEG is a video compression technology developed by the Moving Pictures Expert Group, a committee
of the international Organization for Standardization. To save the created movie to MPEG format
please click the To MPEG button in Save Movie menu pane. Save Movie To MPEG wizard will start.
3. Select Audio Bitrate in the Audio Bitrate drop-down combo box.
4. Set the Bitrate and Framerate values in the respective boxes.
8.
At the next step of Save Movie To MPEG wizard you should enter the file name for your saved movie
MPEG format. You can visually judge the converting process with the help of Conversion Preview .
To cancel converting click the Cancel button.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Save Movie to WMV
WMV is Microsoft's standard for audio and video which is closely tied with the Windows Operating
System. To save the created movie to WMV format please click the To WMV button in Save Movie
menu pane. Save Movie To WMV wizard will start.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select Video Codec from the list of the available WMV video codecs.
Set Frame Size choosing the necessary Width and Height values.
Select Framerate in the respective drop-down combo box.
Select Audio Codec from the list of available audio codecs.
Select Audio Format in the Audio Format drop-down combo box.
Press the Save As Preset button to save the settings as preset so it will appear in Presets
Note : you can change codec's properties clicking the Advanced button.
7.
aspect ratio.
selected.
At the next step of Save Movie To WMV wizard you should enter the file name for your saved movie
WMV format. You can visually judge the converting process with the help of Conversion Preview . To
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Save Movie to RM
RM stands for Real Media streaming format for audio/video data. To save the created movie to RM
format please click the To RM button in Save Movie menu pane. Save Movie To RM wizard will
start.
1. Set Frame Size choosing the necessary Width and Height values.
2. Select Audio Format in the Audio Format drop-down combo box
3. Set the Encoding Type . You can select between the constant bitrate (CBR) or several types
of variable bitrate (VBR).
4. Select Quality - low, medium or high.
5. Select Audio and Video Complexity type - low, medium or high.
Note : high values will result in better quality of the audio or video but will enlarge the
file size.
6. Set Video mode to Normal , Sharp , Smooth or Slideshow , depending on the output
result you need.
7. Set Audio mode to Music or Voice , depending on the soundtrack type.
9.
aspect ratio.
selected.
At the next step of Save Movie To RM wizard you should enter the file name for your saved movie
RM format. You can visually judge the converting process with the help of Conversion Preview . To
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Save Movie to MOV
To save the created movie to MOV format please click the To Quick Time button in Save Movie
menu pane. Save Movie To Quick Time wizard will start.
2. Set the File Format and Framerate values in the respective boxes.
3. Set Frame Size .
8.
aspect ratio.
selected.
At the next step of Save Movie To Quick Time wizard you should enter the file name for your saved
movie and set the location. Click the Browse... button to open the standard windows explorer menu
and select the movie location. After you are done, click the Start button to start converting your movie
to MOV format. You can visually judge the converting process with the help of Conversion Preview .
To cancel converting click the Cancel button.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Save Movie to 3GP
3GP is a standard for video used with different mobile devices. To save the created movie to 3GP
format please click the To 3GP button in Save Movie menu pane. Save Movie To 3GP wizard will
start.
2. Set the File Format and Framerate values in the respective boxes.
3. Set Frame Size .
8.
selected.
At the next step of Save Movie To 3GP wizard you should enter the file name for your saved movie
3GP format. You can visually judge the converting process with the help of Conversion Preview . To
After the conversion process is over the AVS Mobile Uploader application will start to let you upload
the resulting movie to a mobile device.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Save Movie to MP4
MP4 is a versatile standard for audio and video which is often used with the mobile devices. To save
the created movie to MP4 format please click the To MP4 button in Save Movie menu pane. Save
Movie To MP4 wizard will start.
2. Set the File Format (MP4, PSP, iPod or Mobile) and Framerate values in the respective
boxes.
3. Set Frame Size .
8.
aspect ratio (this option is disabled for the Mobile file format, see the Appendix section on
that).
selected.
At the next step of Save Movie To MP4 wizard you should enter the file name for your saved movie
MP4 format. You can visually judge the converting process with the help of Conversion Preview . To
After the conversion process is over the AVS Mobile Uploader application will start to let you upload
the resulting movie to a mobile device.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
The codec settings can be changed when you press the Configure button when you select to Save to
AVI . The following tabs of the codec settings window are available:
Main settings - include Profile @ level , Encoding type , Bitrate/Target
quantizer/Target size , Quarter pixel , Lumimasking enabled , Chroma optimizer ,
Grayscale enabled , Stat file .
Quantization settings - include Quantization type , Min I-frame quantizer , Max Iframe quantizer , Min P-frame quantizer , Max P-frame quantizer , Min B-frame
quantizer , Max B-frame quantizer and Trellis quantization .
interval , Global motion compensation , Use chroma motion , Cartoon mode and
Turbo mode .
Quantizer offset .
optimizations .
-
include
Automatically
detect
optimizations
,
Force
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Main
[Profile @ level ]
[Encoding type ]
[Bitrate/Target quantizer/Target size ]
pixel ]
[Chroma optimizer ]
[Grayscale enabled ]
[Quarter
[Stat file ]
Profile @ level - restricts the usage of MPEG-4 tools and limits the encoded bit rate so that the
output movie is compatible with hardware decoders. If you are acquainted with XviD codec settings
you will find that the Profile levels coincide with the XviD profiles. In the table below you can see
which profile allows you to change the specific codec settings and use different quantization types,
what maximum resolution, frame rate or bit rate is recommended for every profile.
Lumimasking Frames
enabled
VOPs
176x144x15
not
Simple @ L0
64 kbps not allowed
fps
allowed
176x144x15
not
Simple @ L1
64 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
352x288x15
not
Simple @ L2
128 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
352x288x15
not
Simple @ L3
384 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
176x144x15
not
ARTS @ L1
64 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
352x288x15
not
ARTS @ L2
128 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
352x288x30
not
ARTS @ L3
384 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
352x288x30
2000
not
ARTS @ L4
allowed
fps
kbps
allowed
176x144x30
AS @ L0
128 kbps
allowed
allowed
fps
176x144x30
AS @ L1
128 kbps
allowed
allowed
fps
352x288x15
AS @ L2
384 kbps
allowed
allowed
fps
352x288x30
AS @ L3
768 kbps
allowed
allowed
fps
352x576x30
3000
AS @ L4
allowed
allowed
fps
kbps
720x576x30
8000
AS @ L5
allowed
allowed
fps
kbps
Quantization
type
Interlacing
encoding
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 or
MPEG
H.263 or
MPEG
H.263 or
MPEG
H.263 or
MPEG
H.263 or
MPEG
H.263 or
MPEG
pixel
compensation
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
[Back to the Top ]
file with a certain target bitrate. The target bitrate is selected in the Bitrate/Target
quality will be better. The target quantizer is selected in the Bitrate/Target
Twopass - 1st pass is used for the first pass of the multipass conversion mode. See below to
learn more on how to perform multipass conversion.
Twopass - 2nd pass is used for the second and all the following passes of the multipass
Twopass - 1st pass encoding type first, set all the parameters of the codec, click OK and, on closing
the AVI Profile editor , click the Convert Now! button. When the conversion is over, you will need
to open the AVI Profile editor for the second time and press the Configure button. Now you can
select the Twopass - 2nd pass encoding type, set the necessary codec parameters and repeat the
conversion once again.
Note : when you select the Twopass - 1st pass encoding type, no conversion actually takes
place. The codec only analyzes the input video and creates a log file - Stat file , where all the
information about the file is saved. And only when you select the Twopass - 2nd pass encoding
type and press the Convert Now! button, the conversion is done. You should bear it in mind, as
there will be no output Twopass - 1st pass mode.
[Back to the Top ]
Bitrate/Target quantizer/Target size - section allows the user to select the desired output bitrate,
quantizer or size values.
The Target quantizer values can be between 0 and 51 , the default value is 26 . The higher the
value, the lower the quality of the output video file.
The Target size values can be selected only when you are going to perform a second pass in
Twopass mode. This can be especially useful, if you would like to save your output video file onto
some storage of a certain size - a CD-R/RW, for instance. The higher the value, the better the quality
of the output video file.
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
video clips.
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
source video file.
[Back to the Top ]
twopass mode only.
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Quantization
[Min I-frame quantizer ] [Max I-frame quantizer ]
quantizer ]
[Max P-frame quantizer ]
[Min B-frame quantizer ]
quantization ]
[Min P-frame
[Max B-frame quantizer ]
[Trellis
Quantization
type
H.263
Details
if the resolution (frame size) is above average (for instance, 720x480) the
900 kbps.
cartoons.
MPEG
[Back to the Top ]
Min I-frame quantizer - lets the user configure the minimum quantizer for I-frames. It is strongly
[Back to the Top ]
Max I-frame quantizer - lets the user configure the maximum quantizer for I-frames. It is strongly
[Back to the Top ]
Min P-frame quantizer - lets the user configure the minimum quantizer for P-frames. It is strongly
[Back to the Top ]
Max P-frame quantizer - lets the user configure the maximum quantizer for P-frames. It is strongly
[Back to the Top ]
Min B-frame quantizer - lets the user configure the minimum quantizer for B-frames. It is strongly
[Back to the Top ]
Max B-frame quantizer - lets the user configure the maximum quantizer for B-frames. It is strongly
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Motion
motion compensation ]
[Use chroma motion ]
[Cartoon mode ]
[Max key interval ]
[Global
[Turbo mode ]
given bit rate.
Motion
type
search
Details
recommended.
0 (None)
also be huge.
1 (Very Low)
2 (Low)
3 (Medium)
4 (High)
5 (Very High)
6 (Ultra High)
[Back to the Top ]
VHQ Mode
Details
0 (Off)
1 (Mode Decision)
2 (Limited Search)
3 (Medium Search)
4 (Wide Search)
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
will be much lower.
[Back to the Top ]
pictures).
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
B-VOPs
[Use B-VOPs ]
[Quantizer ratio ]
[Quantizer offset ]
I
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
I
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
I
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
I
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
B
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
following formula:
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Optimization
[Back to the Top ]
technology.
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
that would be capable of providing good video quality at bit rate that are substantially lower (e.g., half
or less) than what previous standards would need (e.g., relative to MPEG-2, H.263, or DivX and XviD).
The codec settings can be changed when you press the Configure button when you select to Save to
AVI . The following tabs of the codec settings window are available:
Bitrate - include Encoding type , Average bitrate/Quantizer , Stat file .
MBs and Frames settings - include Partitions , B-Frames .
More settings - include Motion Estimation , Miscellaneous options .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Bitrate
[Encoding type ]
[Average bitrate/Quantizer ]
[Stat file ]
file with a certain target bitrate.
quality will be better.
Multipass - First pass is used for the first pass of the multipass conversion mode. See below
to learn more on how to perform multipass conversion.
Multipass - First pass (Fast) is used for the fast first pass of the multipass conversion
mode. See below to learn more on how to perform multipass conversion.
Multipass - Nth pass is used for the second and all the following passes of the multipass
Multipass - First pass or Multipass - First pass (Fast) encoding types first, set all the parameters
of the codec, click OK and, on closing the AVI Profile editor , click the Convert Now! button. When
the conversion is over, you will need to open the AVI Profile editor for the second time and press the
Configure button. Now you can select the Multipass - Nth pass encoding type, set the necessary
codec parameters and repeat the conversion once again.
Note : when you select the Multipass - First pass or Multipass - First pass (Fast) encoding
types, no conversion actually takes place. The codec only analyzes the input video and creates a
log file - Stat file , where all the information about the file is saved. And only when you select the
Multipass - Nth pass encoding type and press the Convert Now! button, the conversion is done.
You should bear it in mind, as there will be no output video file after the Multipass - First pass
or Multipass - First pass (Fast) modes.
[Back to the Top ]
The Average bitrate/Quantizer section allows the user to select the desired output bitrate or
quantizer values.
The Quantizer values can be between 0 and 51 , the default value is 26 . The higher the value, the
lower the quality of the output video file.
[Back to the Top ]
multipass mode only.
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Rate Control
[Bitrate ]
[Scene cuts ]
[Back to the Top ]
51 .
[Back to the Top ]
sometimes flickering. The possible values vary from 0 to 100000 . The default value is 25 .
the screen longer. The possible values vary from 0 to 100000 . The default value is 250 .
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
MBs and Frames
[Partitions ]
[B-Frames ]
[Back to the Top ]
quality.
motion).
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
More Settings
[Back to the Top ]
.
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Burn Disc
AVS Video Editor allows you to create video discs in the following formats:
DVD
The DVD format has been called Digital Video Disc in the past, but is now more commonly
referred to as Digital Versatile Disc. The DVD format is one of the fastest growing consumer
electronic products in history.
VCD
A VCD is simply a video format of a movie copied to a CD-ROM. The exciting thing about this
format is that CD-ROMs, VCD players, or even DVD players can read it.
SVCD
SVCD is an enhancement to VCD developed by a Chinese government-backed committee of
manufacturers and researchers to create lower DVD player and disc prices in China. SVCD is
actually MPEG-2 video but recorded at a lower bit rate and resolution than full broadcast DVD
resolution.
DivX/XviD
DivX/XviD codecs are the most popular MPEG4 codecs used nowadays. They are characterized
by rather good quality/compression ratio and are supported by the most of modern software
and hardware DVD players.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
DVD Menu
For DVD creation AVS Video Editor will suggest that you create a DVD disc menu. In this connection
we'd like to draw your attention to the DVD Menu button in Burn Disc menu pane.
There is a number of styles you can select for DVD menu. You can change the way your styles are
displayed in the Media Library. The different views enable you to see varying amounts of detail about
the individual styles within the collection. You can see the title and a bitmap image of each style in the
Thumbnails view, which is the default, or you can choose the List view to see only the title of each
style. Or use the Details view to see all the properties of each style in the collection. To select the
style you like best please follow the steps below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the DVD Menu button in Burn Disc menu pane.
Navigating among styles reflected in the Media Library select the desired style icon.
Drag and drop it to the workspace or click the Apply Style button.
To preview DVD menu please use the Remote Control Emulator , which is located in the left
part of the workspace.
To start working with Chapters that will be reflected in your DVD menu please click the Chapters tab
at the bottom of workspace or select Chapters using arrows at the Remote Control Emulator and
click OK .
There are also two ways to create Chapters . The created movie will be divided into chapters
according to sequence of clips in your project. The markers will be set at the boundaries of each clip in
the project after clicking the Auto Add button. You can also split your movie into chapters using
Markers , which can be posted at Chapters Timeline .
Note : selecting a fragment of your movie at the top part of Chapters Timeline , you can see an
enlarged copy of it at the bottom part:
To add Chapter:
1. Put the Chapters Timeline cursor at the position where you'd like to set marker.
2. Click the Add button located under the Chapters Timeline area. The name of marker shown
as Chapter will appear in the Chapters List .
Note : you can change chapters' Caption according to your wish.
Note : Chapter 1 will be set automatically.
To delete Chapter:
1. Select the chapter you want to delete from the Chapters List .
2. Click the Delete button located under the Chapters Timeline area.
3. To delete all Chapters please use the Delete All button.
Note : If you set several markers and after that go back to project editing, don't forget to click the
Refresh button to refresh highlighted markers' position in project or click Refresh All to refresh
positions of all markers.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Burn DVD
To start burning DVD please click the Burn DVD button in Burn Disc menu pane. Right after that
Save Movie To DVD wizard will start.
Here you should select Profile from the list of the available Profiles depending on output quality for
file converting and burning. In case you want to include a DVD menu please make sure that the
Create DVD Menu check-box is checked. If you would like your movie to return to the beginning and
start playback over again at the end then you should mark the Loop DVD check-box. If you want that
on playback end the DVD menu was displayed then you should leave this check-box unmarked. After
you finished, please click the Next>> button.
At the next step of Save Movie To DVD wizard you should enter the file name for your saved movie
the selected format and burning it to DVD. You can visually judge the converting process with the help
of Conversion Preview .
Burning DVD
After the file structure for your slideshow is created, the disc will be recorded using the internal AVS
Video Editor burn engine. You do not need any other additional programs to burn your created discs.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Burn VCD / SVCD
To start burning VCD/SVCD please click the Burn VCD / SVCD button in Burn Disc menu pane. Right
after that Save Movie To VCD/SVCD wizard will start.
Here you should select Profile from the list of the available Profiles depending on output format and
quality for file converting and burning. After you finished, please click the Next>> button.
At the next step of Save Movie To VCD/SVCD wizard you should enter the file name for your saved
movie and set the location. Click the Browse... button to open the standard windows explorer menu
and select the movie location. After you are done, click the Start button to start converting your movie
to the selected format and burning it to CD. You can visually judge the converting process with the
help of Conversion Preview .
Burning VCD/SVCD
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Burn DivX/XviD Disc
To start burning an XviD disc please click the Burn DivX/XviD Disc button in Burn Disc menu pane.
Right after that Save Movie To AVI wizard will start.
Here you should select Quality from the list of the available Profiles depending on the output quality
for file converting and burning. You should also select the Disc Type (depending on the CD or DVD of
the capacity you have and the disc drive's capabilities). If the output file does not fit onto a single disc,
you can split it into more than one disc or shrink it to fit the number of the discs you need.
Note : shrinking usually results in quality losses, so it is not recommended if the output file quality
is of great importance. After you finished, please click the Next>> button.
At the next step of Save Movie To AVI wizard you should enter the file name for your saved movie
the selected format and burning it to CD. You can visually judge the converting process with the help
of Conversion Preview .
Burning CD/DVD
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Overview
AVS Project Mover is a wizard-styled application, which allows you to export your AVS Video Editor
project files and move them to another personal computer.
You might need this application in case you bought a new computer and would like to transfer all your
project files from your old computer to your new one. You might also use this program if you would
like to edit your projects, for instance, on your notebook.
AVS Project Mover has a simple user friendly interface and will guide you through all the steps
needed to export and import your AVS Video Editor projects.
You can launch the AVS Project Mover application from your computer Start menu. Select
Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Video -> AVS Video Editor Project Mover .
Just follow the instructions of explaining step-by-step wizard-styled application.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Step 1: Selecting Operation Type
At Step One of the AVS Project Mover application you will need to select the operation type that you
would like to perform - to export or to import the projects:
- use this button to create an intermediate project pack to move your AVS Video
Editor project to another computer.
- use this button to convert your previously created intermediate project pack to
AVS Video Editor project that you will be able to use on a new computer.
After you press either of the buttons you will get to the second step .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Step 2: Selecting Project Files and Folders
At the second step you will need to select the project that you want to transfer to another computer
and the folder on your computer where the intermediate project file will be stored so that you could
copy it to the other computer:
After you press the Browse... button the standard windows explorer window will let you choose a
project or a project pack.
Note : the AVS Video Editor projects have .vep extensions, while the intermediate project packs
have .vpp file name extensions:
When you are done with the project or project pack selection you can press the Next>> button to get
to Step Three .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Step 3: Copying Files
During Step Three the file copying process takes place:
You can watch the progress of the packing or unpacking process on the progress bar:
Usually the third step does not take too much time. After that you will go to the final fourth step .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video Editor
Step 4: Finishing the Process
At the fourth step the program will notify you that the packing/unpacking process is complete. You will
have the choice to return to Step One to start the project moving process all over again, if you have
some more AVS Video Editor projects that you would like to move or intermediate project packs to
unpack:
To return to Step One click First step . Or you can press the Close button to close the application
and finish the work with the AVS Project Mover .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video ReMaker
Overview
AVS Video ReMaker program is an easy and quick way to cut the unwanted scenes out of your
movie without the need to reconvert the file. Saving your time and effort it deletes the commercials,
scenes that you do not want to see in your final variant of the movie and joins the remaining parts
with just one mouse click. You can also merge several files if they have the same parameters - frame
size, frame rate, coded with one codec, etc, and add menus to DVD video files.
AVS Video ReMaker has a simple intuitive interface, you just need to select the area to be cut out
with the mouse and click the Remake Now! button - all the rest will be done by the program for you.
To start AVS Video ReMaker go to Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Video > AVS Video ReMaker .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video ReMaker
Main Window
The main window of the AVS Video ReMaker program consists of the following main parts:
Main Panes - the panes that let the user switch between the work modes.
Preview Area - the area that shows the current position of the cursor and in case the
selection is made - the starting and the ending selection points.
Timeline - the tool that lets the user make the principal selections of the areas to be deleted.
Deletion Toolbar - the toolbar with the main action buttons that let the user perform basic
deletion operations with video files.
Player Buttons - the buttons that let the user navigate - playback, stop, rewind - through
the video file.
Status Bar - the panel that shows the current selected positions on the Timeline .
See the appropriate sections for more detail on each of the main window component.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video ReMaker
Main Panes
The Main Panes are placed in the left part of the AVS Video ReMaker window and consist of the
following items that let the user quickly and conveniently switch between the work modes:
Menu
Description
Use this button to switch into Set Source mode, where you can
select video files on your computer hard disk drive, add them to
the files list, change their position in the list - move them up and
down, and remove them from the list. You can also view the
additional video file info and select audio tracks, if there are
several ones of them.
Use this button to switch into Preview Video mode, where you
can navigate through the video files that you have added in the
Set Source mode. You will be able to playback the video files,
stop them, rewind them fast forward and backward, and also
select the necessary episodes to be deleted. If your loaded files
are MPEG2/DVD video files, you will be able to add markers to
create chapters and add them to the DVD menu afterwards.
Use this button to switch into Detect Scenes mode, where you
can find scenes and detect commercials in your selected video
files and create a list of them. You can choose the necessary
scenes to be deleted and mark the commercials with captions so
that they could be found and deleted easily.
Use this button to switch into Create DVD Menu , where you
can customize the menu for your MPEG2/DVD video files. You
can add chapters to the menu and select its style from the
preset list. It is also possible to test the created menu using the
Remote Control Emulator that has the functions of a hardware
DVD player remote control.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video ReMaker
Top Menu
The Top Menu consists of the following items that let the user quickly and conveniently access the
main program functions:
Menu
Item
Shortcut
Open File...
Ctrl+O
Ctrl+S
File
Ctrl+R
Undo
Ctrl+Z
Redo
Shift+Ctrl+Z
Remove Area
of Deletion
Edit
Remove All
Areas of
Deletion
Invert Areas of
Deletion
Used to begin the scenes and commercials
deletion process.
Used to close the AVS Video ReMaker
window and finish the work with the program.
Exit
Add Area of
Deletion
Used to save the current work as a project.
See the Working with Projects section for
Used to save the current project under a
different name. See the Working with
Projects section for more detail on this.
Save Project
As...
Remake Now!
Used to open the video files that the user
would like to edit.
Used to open the previously saved projects.
See the Working with Projects section for
Open Project...
Save Project
Description
Del
Used to add the area that is going to be
deleted after the Start reconvert process
button is pressed. See the Deleting Scenes in
Preview Video Mode section for more detail
on this.
Ctrl+D
Used to remove the currently selected area
that is going to be deleted after the Start
reconvert process button is pressed. See the
Shift+Ctrl+D
Used to remove all the selected areas to be
deleted after the Start reconvert process
button is pressed. See the Deleting Scenes in
Preview Video Mode section for more detail
on this.
Used to change places between the areas of
deletion and the areas that will be left in the
video.
Go to Start
Frame
Home
Used to quickly move to the video start frame.
Go to End
Frame
End
Used to quickly move to the video end frame.
Selection
Range...
F4
Used to switch to files selection and organizing
mode.
Set Source
Preview Video
Used to switch to video preview mode.
Detect Scenes
Used to switch to scenes and commercials
detection mode.
View
Used to switch to DVD menu (only
MPEG2/DVD video files) creation mode.
DVD Menu
Help
Technical
Support
Help
Used to open the selection range window to set
the precise selection boundaries.
AVS4YOU
Home Page
About...
F1
Used to open the help file.
Used to write an e-mail to the AVS4YOU
technical support using your default e-mail
client.
Used to go to the AVS4YOU web site.
Used to open the About window with the
information on the AVS Video ReMaker
program.
for
AVS4YOU
AVS Video ReMaker
Timeline and Preview Area
The Timeline tool is used to navigate quickly and easily through your video. You can make selections
using the Timeline . To do that just click the left mouse button and drag the slider along the
navigation line. The selected area will become highlighted:
To further ease the use of the Timeline the following controls are used:
Control
Caption
Description
Zoom in
Used to scale up the area displayed in the Timeline .
Zoom out
Used to scale down the area displayed in the Timeline .
Full zoom
Used to display the whole video file area in the Timeline .
Selection
Shows the current selection of the video file on the Timeline
.
Scenes
Shows the quantity of scenes that the video file contains.
See the Deleting Scenes in Scenes Navigation Mode
section for more on how to find scenes in the video files.
Deletions
Shows the areas selected for deletion from the video file
after you press the Add area of deletion button in the
Deletion Toolbar .
Mark start
Marks the current cursor position as the beginning of the
deletion area.
Mark end
Marks the current cursor position as the end of the deletion
area.
You can control all the changes and selections you make using the Preview area . In case you select
some area of the video file, the first window of the Preview area will show the beginning frame of the
selection and the second one - the ending frame of the selection.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video ReMaker
Deletion Toolbar
The Deletion Toolbar consists of the action buttons that let the user quickly and conveniently access
the main program functions:
Button
Caption
Description
Set Selection
Range
Used to open the Selection Range window to let the
user set the exact range of the selection area.
Invert Areas of
Deletion
Used to change places between the areas of deletion and
the areas that will be left in the video.
Add Area of
Deletion
Used to add the area that is going to be deleted after the
Start reconvert process button is pressed. See the
Deleting Scenes in Preview Mode section for more
detail on this.
Remove Area of
Deletion
Used to remove the currently selected area that is going
to be deleted after the Start reconvert process button
is pressed. See the Deleting Scenes in Preview Mode
Remove All
Areas of
Deletion
Used to remove all the selected areas to be deleted after
the Start reconvert process button is pressed. See the
Deleting Scenes in Preview Mode section for more
detail on this.
Undo
Redo
AVS4YOU
AVS Video ReMaker
Player Buttons
The Player buttons are used to navigate through the video file.
They comprise the following controls:
Button
Caption
Description
Start Play
Used to start playback of the video file.
Stop Play
Used to stop the playback, fast forward and fast backward functions.
Fast Backward
Used to quickly go back through the video file. Every time use press
the button the speed of the fast backward function is changed to 2x,
4x, 8x, 16x and 20x, and then back to 2x.
Fast Forward
Used to quickly go forward through the video file. Every time use
press the button the speed of the fast forward function is changed to
2x, 4x, 8x, 16x and 20x, and then back to 2x.
Go to Start
Frame
Used to quickly go to the very first frame in the video file.
One Frame
Back
Used to go one frame back from the current position.
One Frame
Forward
Used to go one frame forward from the current position.
Go to End
Frame
Used to quickly go to the very last frame in the video file.
Previous Scene
Used to quickly go to the beginning of the scene that precedes the
current one.
Next Scene
Used to quickly go to the beginning of the scene that follows the
current one.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video ReMaker
Status Bar
The Status Bar shows the current selections values of the video file:
Selection
(hh:mm:ss.ms)
Start
Shows the beginning time of the current selection made in the
video file.
Selection
(hh:mm:ss.ms)
End
Shows the ending time of the current selection made in the video
file.
Deletion
(hh:mm:ss.ms)
Start
Deletion End (hh:mm:ss.ms)
Shows the beginning time of the last selection added for deletion.
Shows the ending time of the last selection added for deletion.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video ReMaker
Keyboard Shortcuts
AVS Video ReMaker interface allows you to use keyboard shortcuts to facilitate the access to the
main program features:
Shortcut Key
Del
Ctrl+D
Ctrl+Shift+D
Left Arrow
Right Arrow
Function
Add area of deletion
Remove area of deletion
Remove all areas of deletion
Move the selection or cursor to the left on the Timeline
Move the selection or cursor to the right on the Timeline
Alt+Left Arrow
Ctrl+Left Arrow
Alt+Right Arrow
Ctrl+Right Arrow
Home
End
Down Arrow
Up Arrow
Shift+Right Arrow
Go to the beginning of the video
Go to the end of the video
Go to the beginning of the selection
Go to the end of the selection
Enlarge the selection by 1 frame
Alt+Shift+Right Arrow
Ctrl+Shift+Right Arrow
Shift+End
Shift+Home
Shift+Left Arrow
Alt+Shift+Left Arrow
Ctrl+Shift+Left
Enlarge the selection to the end of the video
Enlarge the selection to the beginning of the video
Narrow the selection by 1 frame
+
Zoom in
-
Zoom out
/
Full zoom
Space
Start/stop playback
Ctrl+R
Start scenes cutting
Ctrl+Z
Undo the last performed action
Shift+Ctrl+Z
Redo the last performed action
Ctrl+F
Start the scenes search
Ctrl+O
Open video file
Ctrl+S
Save the current edition as a project
Ctrl+1
Quickly switch to Set Source pane
Ctrl+2
Quickly switch to Preview Video pane
Ctrl+3
Quickly switch to Detect Scenes pane
Ctrl+4
Quickly switch to Create DVD Menu pane
F8
Add chapters for DVD menu creation
F4
Open Selection Range window
F1
Open help file
AVS4YOU
AVS Video ReMaker
Adding Files
When you switch into Set Source work mode, you can add the video files to the list, organize them
and delete them from the file list. The following buttons on the right side will help you work with the
files:
Add File(s)... - use this button to load the video files into AVS Video ReMaker .
Note : you can load not only one but several files if they have the same parameters frame size (height, width), frame rate, coded with the same codec and so on.
Move Up - use this option to move the file selected in the file list up as related to the other
files.
Note : it is possible to use this option only if several files are loaded into AVS Video
ReMaker .
Move Down - use this option to move the file selected in the file list down as related to the
other files.
Note : it is possible to use this option only if several files are loaded into AVS Video
ReMaker .
Delete File - use this option to remove the currently selected file from the file list.
Delete All Files - use this option to remove all the files and clear the file list.
Additional File Parameters - use this option to view some additional file parameters, such
as Audio Tracks present in the file.
When you add the files to the list, you can also view the following information on the loaded video file:
Section
Parameter
Description
Path and Name
Video file name and the directory on the computer hard disk drive
where it is situated.
Duration
The length of the movie (hours: minutes: seconds).
Codec
The video codec used to compress the video clip.
Frame Size
(pixels)
The
number
of
pixels
(horizontally/vertically).
Frame Rate
(frames
per
second)
The number of video frames displayed every second.
Bit Rate
(kilobits
second)
The number of bits transferred per second.
File
Video
Audio
per
that
form
the
video
image
Codec
The audio codec used to compress the audio component of the clip.
Frequency
(Hertz)
The audio track sampling frequency specified in hertz.
Channels
The number of channels in the audio track (mono - one channel,
stereo - two channels, quadro - four channels, 4.1 - five channels,
5.1 - six channels, 6.1 - seven channels, 7.1 - eight channels).
Bit Rate
(kilobits
second)
per
The number of data points used to approximate the true wave form
of the video file audio component.
After all the files are added you can view the files in Preview Video mode, search scenes and
commercials in Detect Scenes mode or go to Create DVD Menu mode.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video ReMaker
To delete the unwanted scenes in the Preview Video mode you will need to switch into this mode
using the appropriate button of the Main Panes . After that select the scene with the mouse. First
select the beginning of the scene with the left mouse button and without releasing it drag it to the
ending limit of the scene. You can move the boundaries after that with the mouse.
Use the Zoom buttons to change the scale of the movie on the Timeline . This is done to simplify the
accurate search for the place where the scene begins and ends:
- use this button to scale up the video timeline representation, that
is very useful when you would like to find the exact place in your
movie;
- use this button to scale down the video timeline representation,
that can be useful when you search for the next place in your
movie;
- use this button to return to actual video representation in the
Timeline , that can be useful to view all the changes you've made
to your movie.
After you select an area with the mouse or using the Selection Range window, you can use the
Delete buttons of the Deletion Toolbar to set the deletion areas:
- use this button to add an area of deletion, it will be
added to the area that is currently selected and
highlighted in the lower part of the Timeline ;
- use this button to remove the currently selected
area of deletion, you can select it just clicking it with
the left mouse button;
- use this button to remove all the areas of deletion
that you currently have on the Timeline , you can
make new selections afterwards.
After you make all the selections and set all the areas of deletions, you can press the Remake Now!
Here you can select the output file Name , destination Path , video Format (if available) and decide
whether you would like to save all the parts of the file, that will be formed after the deletions are
made, into one file or into several files. See the Splitting and Merging Files section for more on
that. If you work with MPEG2/DVD video files, the Burn movie to disc after processing option will
become available. When it is enabled, the AVS Video ReMaker will record the resulting files onto an
optical disc using the internal burn engine. After that you will need to press the Start button and will
see the deletion progress on the progress bar. It will take some time depending on the file length and
your computer configuration.
Note : if the dimensions of the MPEG2 image coincide with the PAL or NTSC parameters, the
program will let you save the video into DVD PAL or NTSC format, that can be selected in the
Format drop-down list.
You can also use the Detect Scenes to find the scenes in your movie and make easier the process of
the search for the movie scenes beginning and end. To switch to this mode click the Detect Scenes
button of the Main Panes .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video ReMaker
Deleting Scenes in Scenes Navigation Mode
If you have a lot of scenes in your movie that you would like to delete, for instance, commercials in a
TV show, you can use the scenes navigation function of the AVS Video ReMaker program. It will
search for the scenes present in your movie and after that you will be able to select all the unwanted
scenes and delete them. To switch to this mode click the Detect Scenes button of the Main Panes .
You will need to use the right pane to select the scene search type - Detect Scenes Changes or
Detect TV Commercials . As can be seen from the name of the search type, the first one is used for
any videos, whereas the second one is used primarily to detect the TV commercials and cut them out.
Note : if you select the second detection type, every scene containing commercial will be given a
'Commercial' caption.
When you set the necessary scenes search type, you can press the Start Detection button to start
searching for the scenes present in the movie. It will take some time depending on the movie length,
parameters set, movie type and your computer configuration.
After the scene search is complete, you will see the scenes list in the scenes navigation window:
If you selected Detect TV Commercials option you will see the following scenes list:
When you select the scene with the mouse, it will have the Play
button. You can use it to make
sure the scene you select is the one you need. The Player buttons can be also used to preview the
selected scenes.
After that you can select a scene to be deleted and press the Add Area of Deletion button of the
Deletion Toolbar . The same way you can select all the other scenes, that will be marked in red in
the scenes navigation window:
After you make all the selections and set all the areas of deletions, you can press the Remake Now!
Here you can select the output file Name , destination Path , video Format (if available) and decide
whether you would like to save all the parts of the file, that will be formed after the deletions are
made, into one file or into several files. See the Splitting and Merging Files section for more on
that. If you work with MPEG2/DVD video files, the Burn movie to disc after processing option will
AVS4YOU
AVS Video ReMaker
Creating DVD Menus
When using MPEG2/DVD video files it might be useful to create DVD menu for your video. To do that
click the Create DVD Menu button of the Main Panes . The program will change view:
You can also Change background or even Customize your DVD menu using the respective buttons.
In the right part of the program window the DVD Chapters area is placed. It lets you select the
episodes that will be used as chapters in your movie:
To add chapters, please click with the mouse cursor within the Timeline area in the place, where you
want the chapter to begin. After that use the Add button to create a chapter. The same way all the
other chapters are created. You can delete the unwanted chapters using the Remove button or all the
chapters using the Clear button.
Note
:
when using MPEG2/DVD video files the DVD Chapters area is available in
Preview Video mode. Use the Show/Hide Chapters List button to show or
hide the DVD Chapters area.
to be able to create a DVD menu, the video files need to meet the following
criteria:
1. The video files added to the file list must be coded with the MPEG2 video
codec only. That is the codec that the DVD video files are coded with;
2. The video files added to the file list must have the parameters meeting
NTSC or PAL standards that allow to create a DVD menu. These
parameters restrictions include:
Picture resolution:
720x480 or 352x240 for a DVD recorded in NTSC standard
and
720x576 or 352x288 for a DVD recorded in PAL standard
Frame Rate:
29.97 frames per second for a DVD recorded in NTSC standard
and
25 frames per second for a DVD recorded in PAL standard
If you would like to create the DVD menu for your video files and it cannot be done using
AVS Video ReMaker , you can use the AVS Video Converter instead. Using AVS Video
Converter you can reconvert your video files with the proper parameters for NTSC or PAL
standard, create a DVD menu and also add various video and audio effects.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video ReMaker
Splitting and Merging Files
It sometimes might be necessary to split one video file into several parts (for instance, if you want to
separate several video clips and save every one of them as a single file, etc) or, quite the other way
round, merge several separate files in one. To do that you should do the following:
Load files into AVS Video ReMaker in the Set Source mode. If you plan to split one file into
several, you should add this one file to the file list. If you plan to merge several files into a
single one, you will need to add all of them to the file list.
Note : the files must have the same parameters - frame size (height, width), frame rate,
coded with the same codec and so on so that you could merge them without the need of
reconversion.
Detect and select the unnecessary scenes in the Detect Scenes or Preview Video work
modes. Mark them for deletion using the Deletion Toolbar .
Use the Player Buttons in the Preview Video mode to make sure that you marked the right
scenes for deletion.
If necessary (and if available) Create DVD Menu in the appropriate mode.
When all the preparations are made, click the Remake Now! button to start processing of the
file. The following window will open:
Here you can select the output file Name , destination Path and video Format (if available).
If you plan to split the file into several parts, select the Save all sections into separate
files option. All the episodes present between the areas of deletion will be saved as separate
files having the same name as has been selected but with the ordinal notation added (1, 2, 3
and so on) after the selected file name.
If you plan to merge several files into one or if you do not plan to split the single file into
separate parts, select the Save all sections into a single file option. All the sections of the
single file together with all the video files in the file list will be joined into one single file.
If you work with MPEG2/DVD video files, the Burn movie to disc after processing option will
AVS4YOU
AVS Video ReMaker
Using Projects
For your additional convenience we added the possibility to save your current editions as projects, so
that you could keep them on your hard disk drive and work with them later without need to look for
the files on your computer. Working with projects is extremely easy.
After you add a video file to the AVS Video ReMaker you can save the list of all the changes as a
separate project. The next time you need to edit the same file with the same settings, all you will have
to do is to load the saved project.
Use the Open project , Save project and the Save Project As... options of the Top Menu to save
and open previously saved projects:
Open Project - use this option to load previously saved project. It will have the *.vcp
extension and will be associated with AVS Video ReMaker by default. When the project is
opened the file and all the selection and deletion areas previously added to it will be added to
the Timeline . If a file has been deleted or moved, it will not be added and the corresponding
message will be displayed. If a file has been modified, its last version will be added to your
edition.
Save Project - use this option to save the current edition as a project file. It will contain the
list of all the selections and deletions you have added to your file, DVD menus created, will
have the *.vcp extension and will be associated with AVS Video ReMaker by default.
Save Project As... - use this option to save the current project under a different file name. It
will contain the list of all the selections and deletions you have added to your file, DVD menus
created, will have the *.vcp extension and will be associated with AVS Video ReMaker by
default.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to Archos
Overview
AVS Video to Archos is a wizard-styled application and a powerful tool, which allows you to convert
your favorite video files and DVD movies and transfer them directly to Archos. No additional
application is needed.
You can use AVS Video to Archos to do the following:
copy DVDs quality lossless to a Archos with a button touch;
convert various video files for Archos - all today’s key formats are supported;
upload videos directly to the portable without any additional application;
copy the entire movie or just a part of it. Cut out unnecessary parts of video and complete the
conversion process.
To start Step one go to your computer's Start menu and choose All Programs -> AVS4YOU ->
Mobiles -> AVS Video to Archos .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to Archos
Step 1: Choosing Source Video
First you need to choose what file type you would like to convert: DVD video or other video file. To do
that click the Browse... button and select the appropriate source from the list.
You should choose DVD video file if you have a movie on a DVD disc and, alternatively, you should
choose other video file type if you have an input movie in MPEG-4 format.
After you press the Browse... button you will be suggested to choose the path of the source file or
folder on either your computer hard disk drive or on CD/DVD.
Press Audio track to select audio language (there can be several audio tracks in one DVD, you should
select the one you want).
Once the source file path is entered you will be able to see and change the following information:
File name - use this option to select the name for the output video file.
Note : you can only change the file name, the extension will always be .avi , so that
Archos could handle the resulting video correctly.
Max file size (MB) - use this option to set the size (measured in Megabytes) for the output
video file.
Quality - use this option to set the quality-conversion speed ratio from the available presets Best quality (the movie will be converted with the best possible quality but the conversion
process will take more time), Normal quality/Medium speed (the movie will be converted
with normal quality and the conversion process will be a little faster - set by default) and
Maximal speed (the movie will be converted at the highest speed possible for the chosen
preset at the expense of the quality).
Temp folder - use this option to set a temporary folder that will be used to store the output
files that will be uploaded to your device.
Note : if you close the program before the uploading is finished, the file will be deleted
and the uploading will be interrupted. So the program have to run to insure the
successful uploading process.
You can also use the following controls to view the input video file:
Use the Play button to play the source video file to preview
it.
Use the Stop button to stop the source video file while
previewing it.
Use the Slider to find a specific place in the movie while
previewing it.
When you are ready to proceed to the next step press the Next>> button to go to Step two .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to Archos
Step 2: Determining Conversion Range
If you are sure that you want to convert the entire DVD movie or video file then leave checked I want
to convert the entire DVD/video movie and then simply press Next>> to go to Step three .
But usually it is better to try and see the result of so to speak "test conversion": when you choose a
small part of a movie and convert it into the selected format. After that if you are satisfied with the
output and made sure you can playback it on the device you can convert the whole movie with the
same settings or change the settings if you see something wrong. Partial conversion is also useful
when you want to cut the scenes from the movie or select only a part of a movie, for instance a music
video clip.
To do this mark I want to convert a part of my DVD/video movie:
There are two ways to select the range of the episode you would like to convert:
1. Enter the start time (hours:minutes:seconds) in the Set conversion starting point box
using keyboard or clicking with the mouse. The episode end time is entered in the Set
conversion finishing point box. The Selected range duration (hours:minutes:seconds) of
the episode can be seen in the middle part of the window.
2. The second way is to select the range of the part of the movie using the Range box. Here
you can change the initial and the final point of conversion moving the Range box boundaries.
The digits above show the actual place of the scene time in the movie. The Selected range
duration (hours:minutes:seconds) of the episode can be seen in the middle part of the
window.
Use the following buttons to:
- scale up to find the precise place of the scene beginning or end;
- scale down to navigate through the movie;
- return to actual length of the movie;
- view the episode beginning and end scene to make sure the place you have chosen is
the one you really wanted.
After you determined the conversion range press the Next>> button to go to Step three .
If you decide to change the source file path to select another movie press <<Back to return to Step
one .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to Archos
Step 3: Conversion Progress
The third step is the longest in the conversion process. It takes up to several hours depending on
different parameters: movie duration, CPU strength, etc. In this window you can choose to preview the
conversion process marking the Preview box (it is marked by default).
You will see the Overall progress in percentage and on the progress bar:
.
The Elapsed time shows how much time has gone since the beginning of the conversion process and
the Remaining time shows estimated time left till the conversion finishes.
You can press the Stop button to cancel the process.
After the conversion is over you will be offered to upload your file to your device.
Press the Close button to finish the work with AVS Video to Archos .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to BlackBerry
Overview
You would like to watch your favorite movies on the go, but have no time to puzzle over the tweaks?
Then AVS Video to BlackBerry is the right choice for you. AVS Video to BlackBerry is a one-click
wizard-styled software for transferring DVDs and video files to BlackBerry mobile phone. You will need
to follow only three easy steps to copy movies and convert video files of all key formats to your
BlackBerry. AVS Video to BlackBerry directly uploads videos to BlackBerry once the conversion is
over. Up-to-date BlackBerry models are supported!
You can use AVS Video to BlackBerry to do the following:
copy DVDs quality lossless to BlackBerry with a button touch to a wide variety of BlackBerry
models including the latest ones;
convert various video files for BlackBerry. All today’s key formats are supported;
conversion process.
Mobiles -> AVS Video to BlackBerry .
AVS4YOU
Note : you can only change the file name, the extension will always be .avi , so that the
BlackBerry could handle the resulting video correctly.
video file.
it.
previewing it.
previewing it.
AVS4YOU
video clip.
window.
one .
AVS4YOU
.
Press the Close button to finish the work with AVS Video to BlackBerry .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
Overview
AVS Video to GO is a wizard-styled application and a powerful tool, which allows the user to convert
DVDs or video files and save them in MPEG-4 format to watch them later on different types of devices:
DVD/MPEG-4 player (with DivX/XviD support), Sony PSP handheld device, Apple iPod, Archos DVR,
Epson P-2000/P-4000 Multimedia Storage Viewers, Portable Media Player (PMP), Personal Computer
and GSM or CDMA mobile phone capable of playing video files. (See the supported device list for
more detail).
You don't need to be an expert to create your own video files: just follow our five easy steps and
AVS Video to GO will do everything for you - choose output file parameters, convert video files and
even show it for you to estimate the quality of the output file. At the same time if you are an expert in
home video you might want to change the output file and codec settings in custom mode or even
convert a part of a movie to make sure all the settings are correct for the best quality.
There are several possible reasons to use AVS Video to GO :
if you want to save your favorite DVD movie in MPEG-4 format for storing it on hard disk drive
of your personal computer;
if you want to watch your favorite movie on your handheld device or mobile phone while
traveling;
if you want to share the movie with your friend over the Internet or GSM/CDMA networks;
if you rented a movie and want to keep it for yourself to watch it over and over again;
if you created your own video and want to adapt it for watching on home or handheld
DVD/MPEG-4 player or any other device supported by AVS Video to GO .
Mobiles -> AVS Video to GO .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
that click the Browse... button and select the appropriate source from the list:
You should choose DVD video file if you have a movie on a DVD disc and:
you want to convert DVD video files to play the movie on your video device
that doesn't support DVD video files format;
DVD
folder
from
you want to reduce the DVD video file size to store it on your personal
computer hard disk drive or to write it on one or two CD-R/CD-RW discs;
you want to share the movie with your friend over the Internet or GSM/CDMA
network;
you want to take the movie along with you to watch it on your portable device
while traveling.
You should choose other video file type if you have a movie in MPEG-4 format and:
you want to convert the movie you created to suit your your video playback
device;
Video file
you want to reduce the video file size to store it on your personal computer
hard disk drive or to write it on one or two CD-R/CD-RW discs;
you want to share the movie with your friend over the Internet or GSM/CDMA
network;
you want to take the movie along with you to watch it on your portable device
while traveling.
Once the source file path is entered you will see the file information:
Video parameters:
Size - the number of pixels that form the video image (horizontally/vertically).
Frame rate - the number of video frames displayed every second.
Duration - length of the movie (hours:minutes:seconds).
Audio parameters:
Bit rate - the number of data points used to approximate the true wave form (kilobits per
second).
7.1 - eight channels).
Frequency - sampling frequency specified in hertz.
Duration - length of the movie soundtrack (hours:minutes:seconds).
it.
previewing it.
previewing it.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
to convert the entire DVD/video movie
and then simply press Next>> to go to Step three .
output and made sure you can playback it on the chosen device you can convert the whole movie with
the same settings or change the settings if you see something wrong. Partial conversion is also useful
video clip.
window.
one .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
Step 3: Output File Format
When you get to Step three there are two ways to continue the conversion process:
1. If you know what type of device you are going to convert video for and do not want to change any
specific settings then stay in Simple mode .
2. If you would like to customize some settings or to experiment with advanced output file and codec
features then press the Switch to custom mode button to go to Custom mode .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
Step 3 - Simple Mode
In simple mode the following window will be seen:
It is not too complicated and you need only to point out which device you are going to use to watch
the movie after you converted it, type of the storage for the output file and its capacity. The other
video settings (audio and video formats, bit rates, video frame rate, frame size, encoding type, audio
frequency and number of audio channels) will be adjusted automatically according to the chosen
device preset. The conversion speed will depend not only on the source video file type and the chosen
conversion range, but also on the chosen device: video will be converted faster for portable devices
that have smaller screens with lower resolutions (video with smaller frame sizes), and slower for the
devices that have larger screens.
It is also possible to choose the quality-conversion speed ratio from the following presets:
Best quality - the movie will be converted with the best possible quality but the conversion
process will take more time;
Normal quality/Medium speed - the movie will be converted with normal quality and the
conversion process will be a little faster;
Maximal speed - the movie will be converted at the highest speed possible for the chosen
preset at the expense of the quality.
The possible devices presets include:
-
use this preset if you plan to watch your movie on a portable device with
memory stick card that can have the capacity of 512Mb, 1Gb and 2 Gb
(you should find out what kind of card you have);
-
use this preset if you plan to watch your movie on an iPod with hard disk
drive that can have the capacity of 5 Gb and 10 Gb (you should see your
iPod datasheet to find out what hard disc drive capacity you have);
-
use this preset if you plan to watch your movie on a portable media
player device with hard drive storage. Depending on its capacity you can
select the output file size (entering it in digits or using the up and down
arrows);
-
arrows);
-
use this preset if you plan to watch your movie on a portable multimedia
storage device with hard drive storage. Depending on its capacity you can
arrows);
-
use this preset if you plan to watch your movie on a BlackBerry mobile
phone. Depending on the capacity of the memory card used you can
arrows);
-
use this preset if you plan to watch your movie on a portable DVD player
that can playback MPEG-4 (AVI) files. You can save the resulting file on
one or two CD-R or CD-RW discs that have the capacity of 650, 700 and
800 Mb;
-
arrows);
-
use this preset if you plan to watch your movie on a DVD player that can
playback MPEG-4 (AVI) files. You can save the resulting file on one or two
CD-R or CD-RW discs that have the capacity of 650, 700 and 800 Mb;
-
use this preset if you plan to watch your movie on your personal
computer or notebook. You can choose file size manually (entering it in
digits or using the up and down arrows);
-
use this preset if you plan to watch your movie on your mobile phone
compatible with GSM standards. Select the output file size (capacity)
according to the memory stick card capacity that you have - 512Mb, 1 Gb
or 2 Gb;
-
use this preset if you plan to watch your movie on your mobile phone
compatible with CDMA standards. Select the output file size (capacity)
according to the memory stick card capacity that you have - 512Mb, 1 Gb
or 2 Gb.
After you select the device, type of file storage and its capacity press the Next>> button to go to
Step four .
If you need to change some settings in the previous step press the <<Back button to return to Step
two .
If you would like to change some additional settings press the Switch to custom mode button.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
Step 3 - Custom Mode
If you are going to change some settings of the future output file or of the codec used to convert the
video files you should press the Switch to custom mode button thus going to custom mode:
It is possible to return to simple mode whenever you want simply pressing the Switch to simple
mode button.
Here you can change any output file settings you like:
File Parameters
Video
preset
Preset parameters fitted for the specific device you have (see the Advanced
Settings section to find out what kind of playback devices are supported by the AVS
Video to GO ).
File type
Type of the output file that depends on the playback device (can be selected from
the list).
Number
of files
Number of the output files (can be one or two).
Size
Output file size specified in megabytes (can be entered manually or changed using
the up and down arrows).
Output Video Parameters
Format
Format of the output file (MPEG-4, MPEG-4 DivX, MPEG-4 XviD or H.264).
Encoding
Number of passes to perform the encoding (single or two pass).
Bit rate
The number of bits transferred per second (can be entered manually or changed
using the up and down arrows).
Frame
rate
The number of video frames displayed every second (can be selected from the list).
Frame
size
The number of pixels that form the video image (horizontally/vertically) - can be
selected from the list.
Output Audio Parameters
Format
Format of the output file audio component (can be selected from the list).
Bit rate
The number of data points used to approximate the true wave form (kilobits per
second) - can be selected from the list.
Frequency
Sampling frequency specified in hertz (can be selected from the list).
Channels
Number of channels in the audio track (can be selected from the list).
See the Advanced Settings section for more detail on different file settings.
If you would like to change some of the specific codec settings press the Advanced... button. See the
MPEG-4 codec settings and H.264 codec settings section for more detail on how different codec
settings can influence the final output video quality.
After you are satisfied with all the settings in this step press the Next>> button to go to Step four .
If you need to change some settings in the previous step press the <<Back button to return to Step
two .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
Step 4: Selecting Destination File Path
During Step four you can specify the path for the output file and its name:
Here the Path can be selected either from the pull down list or (if you choose Browse ) you can
specify a folder on your PC where the output file will be created.
Note : you will need enough free hard disk space to store the output file. It depends on the file
size you selected in Step three (simple or custom mode - 512 to 1500 megabytes).
You can also change the File name to any you like or leave it unchanged.
You can also take a look at all the changes made and compare the parameters of the input and the
output files:
Video properties:
Frame size - the number of pixels that form the video image (horizontally/vertically).
Frame rate - the number of video frames displayed every second.
Duration - length of the movie (hours:minutes:seconds).
Compression type - type of format used to code the video information into the video file.
Audio properties:
Bit rate - the number of data points used to approximate the true wave form (kilobits per
second).
channels, quadro - four channels, 4.1 - five channels, 5.1 - six channels, 6.1 - seven
channels, 7.1 - eight channels).
Frequency - sampling frequency specified in hertz.
Format - the format used to encode the audio component of the movie.
If you are satisfied with all the parameters press the Start button to start the conversion process .
If you want to change some of the settings press the <<Back button to return to Step three .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
The fifth step is the longest in the conversion process. It takes up to several hours depending on
different parameters: movie duration, CPU strength and file and codec settings. In this window you
can choose to preview the conversion process marking the Preview box (it is marked by default).
.
After the conversion is over you will be offered to upload your file to the device selected at Step three
, or burn it to a compact disc.
Press the Close button to finish the work with AVS Video to GO .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
Output File Format Settings
[File type ]
[Number of files ]
[File size ]
File type - the extension used to designate the file so that the codec could identify and decode it
correctly. It depends on the device you are going to watch it on and the codec type used to compress
the file:
File type
Details
AVI (XviD)
Use this setting if you plan to watch the output video file on a DVD player with
DivX/XviD support , a portable DVD player with DivX/XviD support ,
Creative Zen Vision player , Archos DVR , a portable media player or a
personal computer . The file will be converted using XviD codec that is
compatible with the above devices. If you find that you cannot playback the file
converted with this setting try AVI (DivX) instead.
AVI (DivX)
Use this setting if you plan to watch the output video file on a DVD player with
DivX/XviD support , a portable DVD player with DivX/XviD support ,
Creative Zen Vision player , Archos DVR , a portable media player or a
personal computer . The file will be converted using DivX codec that is
compatible with the above devices. If you find that you cannot playback the file
converted with this setting try AVI (XviD) instead.
3GP (GSM)
Use this setting if you plan to watch the output video file on a GSM phone. The file
will be converted using the codec that is compatible with GSM phones that support
video files playback.
3G2
(CDMA)
Use this setting if you plan to watch the output video file on a CDMA phone. The
file will be converted using the codec that is compatible with CDMA phones that
support video files playback.
MP4 (ISO)
Use this setting if you plan to watch the output video file on a personal computer
, Epson P-2000/P-4000 Multimedia Storage Viewers or a mobile phone (GSM or
CDMA ) with MP4 files playback support. The file will be converted using the
standard MP4 codec that can be played on the above devices.
MP4 (PSP)
Use this setting if you plan to watch the output video file on a Sony PSP
handheld device. The file will be converted using the modification of the MP4
codec that is compatible with Sony PSP handheld .
MP4 (iPod)
Use this setting if you plan to watch the output video file on an Apple iPod device.
The file will be converted using the modification of the MP4 codec that is compatible
with Apple iPod .
File type can be chosen from the preset list only and cannot be altered.
[Back to the Top ]
Number of files - the number of files used to represent the output video movie. It depends on the
destination storage capacity:
Number
files
of
Details
1 video file
Use this setting if you do not want to split the output file and can fit it to the
destination storage. Usually used when the file is going to be stored on personal
computer hard disk drive, Creative Zen Vision player , Archos DVR hard
disk drive, Epson P-2000/P-4000 Multimedia Storage Viewers, portable
media player hard disk drive, Apple iPod hard disk drive, one CD-R, CD-RW or
memory stick card for Sony PSP handheld device, mobile GSM or CDMA
phone.
2 video files
Use this setting if you want to split the output file into two smaller parts to fit it
to the destination storage. Usually used when the file is going to be stored on
two CD-R's or CD-RW's for watching on a DVD player with DivX/XviD
support , Creative Zen Vision player , Archos DVR , Epson P-2000/P4000 Multimedia Storage Viewers or a portable DVD player with DivX/XviD
support .
Number of files can be chosen from the preset list only and cannot be altered.
[Back to the Top ]
File size - the size of the output video file. Depends on the destination storage capacity.
Presets include:
File size
Details
512 Mb
Use this setting if you want to fit your output video file into one memory stick card
with the capacity of 512 megabytes for Sony PSP handheld device, mobile GSM
or CDMA phone.
650 Mb
Use this setting if you want to fit your output video file into one or two CD-R's or
CD-RW's with the capacity of 650 megabytes for watching on a DVD player with
DivX/XviD support or a portable DVD player with DivX/XviD support .
700 Mb
800 Mb
1 Gb
Use this setting if you want to fit your output video file into either one memory
stick card with the capacity of 1 gigabyte for Sony PSP handheld device, mobile
GSM or CDMA phone or when the file is going to be stored on personal computer
hard disk drive, Creative Zen Vision player , Archos DVR hard disk drive,
Epson P-2000/P-4000 Multimedia Storage Viewers or portable media player
or Apple iPod hard disk drive.
1.5 Gb
Use this setting if your output video file is going to be stored on personal
computer hard disk drive, Apple iPod , Creative Zen Vision player , Archos
DVR hard disk drive, Epson P-2000/P-4000 Multimedia Storage Viewers or
portable media player hard disk drive that have enough capacity.
Use this setting if you want to fit your output video file into either one memory
2 Gb
stick card with the capacity of 2 gigabytes for Sony PSP handheld device, mobile
GSM or CDMA phone or when the file is going to be stored on personal computer
hard disk drive, Apple iPod , Creative Zen Vision player , Archos DVR , Epson
P-2000/P-4000 Multimedia Storage Viewers or portable media player hard
disk drive that has enough free space.
File size can be altered manually to suit your personal needs - you can enter the values using the
keyboard or with the mouse clicks.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
Output Video Parameters
[Format ]
[Encoding ]
[Bit rate ]
Format - file video format used to encode the movie.
[Frame rate ]
[Frame size ]
Format
Details
MPEG-4
ISO/IEC open standard for video encoding developed by MPEG (Moving
Picture Experts Group). It is characterized by a small output video file size
and quite good picture quality even when a relatively low bit rate is used.
The most known resulting output when you use MPEG-4 format for
compression is the AVI file type which is commonly used in home video. It is
coded with XviD, DivX, 3ivx, Nero Digital and other video codecs. Other file
types can be found in the output file format section .
MPEG-4 DivX
coded with DivX video codec.
MPEG-4 XviD
coded with XviD video codec.
H.264
H.264, or AVC, for Advanced Video Coding, is a digital video codec standard
which is noted for achieving very high data compression. It was written by the
ITU-T Video Coding Experts Group together with the ISO/IEC Moving Picture
Experts Group as the product of a collective partnership effort known as the
Joint Video Team. The intent of the H.264/AVC project was to create a
standard that would be capable of providing good video quality at bit rate
that are substantially lower (e.g., half or less) than what previous standards
would need (e.g., relative to MPEG-2, H.263, or DivX and XviD).
Format setting can be chosen from the preset list only and cannot be altered.
[Back to the Top ]
Encoding - number of passes used to perform the movie encoding.
Encoding
Details
Single pass
Use this setting to perform encoding of the movie file with not too good
picture quality (with the presence of so called "noises" that make the picture
not too clear). In this mode, the movie is processed once.
Two pass
Use this setting to perform encoding of the movie file with good picture quality
to produce the best quality encodes. In this mode, the movie is processed
twice and conversion takes more time than when Single pass mode is
chosen.
Number of passes setting can be chosen from the preset list only and cannot be altered.
[Back to the Top ]
Bit rate - the number of bits transferred per second. The higher the bit rate the better the quality of
the resulting video but the output file size also gets larger at higher bit rate values. The value will
change automatically to fit the the destination storage capacity taking into consideration all the other
changes you make. It is also possible to enter the bit rate manually if you need to do so.
Bit rate setting can be altered manually to suit your personal needs - you can enter the values using
the keyboard or with the mouse clicks.
[Back to the Top ]
Frame rate - the number of video frames displayed every second. Depends on the device used to
playback the output video file and the video file format. When transferred over the network also
depends on the connection speed.
Frame rate
Details
10 fps
Use this setting if you want to compress the video file for watching it on your
mobile phone (GSM or CDMA ) or want to send it via GSM or CDMA network
or in video conferences over the Internet.
12 fps
15 fps
20 fps
Use this setting if you want to compress the video file for sending it or
streaming over the Internet.
23.976 fps
Use this setting if you want to compress the PAL-format video file for watching
it on your personal computer , DVD player with DivX/XviD support ,
portable DVD player with DivX/XviD support , Apple iPod , Creative
Zen Vision player , Archos DVR or portable media player .
24 fps
Zen Vision player , Archos DVR , Epson P-2000/P-4000 Multimedia
Storage Viewers or portable media player .
25 fps
Zen Vision player , Archos DVR , Epson P-2000/P-4000 Multimedia
Storage Viewers or portable media player .
29.97 fps
Use this setting if you want to compress the NTSC-format video file for
watching it on your personal computer , DVD player with DivX/XviD
support , portable DVD player with DivX/XviD support , Sony PSP
handheld device, Apple iPod , Creative Zen Vision player , Archos DVR
or portable media player .
30 fps
Use this setting if you want to compress the NTSC-format video file for
watching it on your personal computer , DVD player with DivX/XviD
support , portable DVD player with DivX/XviD support , Creative Zen
Vision player , Archos DVR , Epson P-2000/P-4000 Multimedia Storage
Viewers or portable media player .
Original
Use this setting if you want to keep the frame rate of the original movie
picture unchanged in the output video file or if you are unsure which preset to
use.
Frame rate setting can be chosen from the preset list only and cannot be altered.
[Back to the Top ]
Frame size (resolution) - the number of pixels that form the video image (horizontally/vertically).
The larger the frame size the more processing power is used to encode and decode the video file. Too
small frame size causes the quality of the picture to be inapplicable for watching on a large screen. If
the video is converted for a portable device that has a small screen with low resolution it is necessary
to reduce the frame size to fit the screen resolution, otherwise the device might not be able to
playback the output video. One should bear in mind that the conversion with smaller frame sizes takes
less time than that with greater resolution values.
Frame size
Details
Preset
Use this setting if you want to change the size of the movie picture in the
output video file. It is changed proportionally as related to the original movie
frame size.
Original
Use this setting if you want to leave the size of the original movie picture
unchanged in the output video file.
Frame size setting can be chosen from the preset list only and cannot be altered.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
Output Audio Parameters
[Format ]
[Bit rate ]
[Frequency ]
[Channels ]
Format - format of the audio component used in the output video file.
Format
MPEG-4 AAC
(LC)
Details
MPEG-4 Advanced Audio Coding (Low Complexity) audio codec used for
coding audio signal with low and normal bit rates (64 - 256 kbps) and is the
most used object type in AAC encoders and decoders nowadays because of its
low system requirements, i.e. CPU and memory resources. So available
hardware decoders in portable devices usually only play MPEG-4 AAC (LC)
files and nothing else. As long as the bit rates do not usually drop below 80-96
kbps/stereo for music content it is efficient enough to maintain good sound
quality at these settings. When used for purely speech coding, AAC (LC) can
be used with much lower bit rates (down to 8-12 kbps/mono), because
there's only one channel, and the sample rate in the input file or bit stream
usually is 8 kHz (cutoff at 4 kHz or lower).
Use this setting together with the audio bit rate value of 64 - 256 kbps if
you plan to playback the output video file on Sony PSP handheld device,
Epson P-2000/P-4000 Multimedia Storage Viewers or Apple iPod .
AMR ACELP
Narrowband
Adaptive Multi-Rate Code-Excited Linear Prediction speech codec is part of the
3GPP standard for mobile phones and is used for coding audio signal with
very low bit rates (4.75 - 12.2 kbps). It is very useful when compressing
media files for watching them on the mobile GSM or CDMA phones and for
transferring them over the mobile networks because it allows to minimize the
output file size and still have acceptable results.
Use this setting together with the audio bit rate value of 4.75 - 12.2 kbps if
you plan to playback the output video file on a mobile GSM or CDMA phone.
MPEG-1 Layer 3
The MPEG-1 Layer 3 algorithm development started in 1987 with a joint
cooperation of Fraunhofer-Gesellschaft IIS-A and the University of Erlangen.
It was standardized by the ISO as MPEG Audio Layer 3 and soon became
the de-facto standard for audio encoding due to the high compression rates
(1/12 of the original size, still retaining considerable quality), the high
availability of decoders and the low CPU requirements for playback (a 486
DX2-66 is enough for real-time decoding). It supports sampling frequencies
from 32 kHz to 48 kHz.
Use this setting together with the audio bit rate value of 96 - 320 kbps if
you plan to playback the output video file on a DVD player with DivX/XviD
support , portable DVD player with DivX/XviD support , personal
computer , Creative Zen Vision player , Archos DVR or portable media
player .
Format setting can be chosen from the preset list only and cannot be altered.
[Back to the Top ]
Bit rate - the number of data points used to approximate the true wave form. The higher the bit rate
the better the quality of the resulting audio but the output file size also gets larger at higher bit rate
values. Different types of devices require different bit rate values and might not playback the output
file if the bit rate is not appropriate. The value can be chosen from the given presets.
Bit rate
Details
96 - 320 kbps
Use this setting together with the MPEG-1 Layer 3 audio format if you plan
to playback the output video file on a DVD player with DivX/XviD support
, portable DVD player with DivX/XviD support , personal computer ,
Creative Zen Vision player , Archos DVR , Epson P-2000/P-4000
Multimedia Storage Viewers or portable media player .
64 - 256 kbps
Use this setting together with the MPEG-4 AAC (LC) audio format if you
plan to playback the output video file on Sony PSP handheld device or
Apple iPod .
4.75 - 12.2 kbps
Use this setting together with the AMR ACELP Narrowband audio format if
you plan to playback the output video file on a mobile GSM or CDMA phone.
Bit rate setting can be chosen from the preset list only and cannot be altered.
[Back to the Top ]
Frequency - sampling frequency specified in hertz. The highest possible pitch in the sound is equal to
one-half that of the set sampling frequency.
Frequency
Details
48000 Hz
Use this setting if the input video file sampling frequency is 48000 hertz and if
you plan to playback the output video file on a device that supports the sound
with such sampling frequency. The highest possible pitch in the sound of the
file will be 24000 hertz, above the top of human hearing range. The movie
can be played on a DVD player with DivX/XviD support , portable DVD
player with DivX/XviD support , personal computer , Sony PSP
handheld device (together with H.264 output video format), Creative Zen
Vision player , Archos DVR or portable media player .
44100 Hz
Use this setting if the input video file sampling frequency is 44100 hertz or if
you want to downsample it to 44100 hertz and if you plan to playback the
output video file on a device that supports the sound with such sampling
frequency. The highest possible pitch in the sound of the file will be 22100
hertz, approximately the top of human hearing range. The movie can be
played on a DVD player with DivX/XviD support , portable DVD player
with DivX/XviD support , personal computer , Creative Zen Vision
player , Archos DVR , Epson P-2000/P-4000 Multimedia Storage Viewers
or portable media player .
32000 Hz
Use this setting if the input video file sampling frequency is 32000 hertz or the
output video file sampling frequency needs to be downsampled to 32000
hertz. The highest possible pitch in the sound of the file will be 16000 hertz,
enough for recording human speech. The movie can be played on a DVD
player with DivX/XviD support , portable DVD player with DivX/XviD
support , personal computer , Apple iPod , Creative Zen Vision player ,
Archos DVR or portable media player .
24000 Hz
Use this setting if the input video file sampling frequency is 24000 hertz or the
output video file sampling frequency needs to be downsampled to 24000
hertz. The highest possible pitch in the sound of the file will be 12000 hertz,
enough for recording human speech. The movie can be played on a DVD
player with DivX/XviD support , portable DVD player with DivX/XviD
support , personal computer , Sony PSP handheld device (together with
MPEG-4 output video format), Apple iPod , Creative Zen Vision player ,
Archos DVR or portable media player .
12000 Hz
Use this setting if the input video file sampling frequency is 12000 hertz. The
highest possible pitch in the sound of the file will be 6000 hertz. The movie
can be played on a Sony PSP handheld device, Apple iPod , Creative Zen
Vision player , Archos DVR or portable media player .
8000 Hz
Use this setting if the input video file sampling frequency is 8000 hertz. The
highest possible pitch in the sound of the file will be 4000 hertz. The movie
can be played on a Sony PSP handheld device, Apple iPod , portable
media player , mobile GSM or CDMA phone.
Frequency setting can be chosen from the preset list only and cannot be altered.
[Back to the Top ]
Channels - number of channels in the audio track of the movie.
Channels
Details
Mono
Use this setting if the input video file contains only one audio channel or if you
plan to playback the output video file on a mono device.
Stereo
Use this setting if the input video file contains two audio channels and you
plan to playback the output video file on a stereo device.
Channels setting can be chosen from the preset list only and cannot be altered.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Devices Supported by AVS Video to GO
- a portable video player that uses memory stick cards as storage for media
files. Can playback files that have MP4 format adapted for Sony PSP handheld
device. Memory stick cards capacity can range between 128 megabytes and 2
gigabytes (the most suitable for video files are 512Mb, 1 Gb and 2 Gb).
- a portable player that has hard disk drive as storage for media files. Can
playback files that have MP4 format adapted for Apple iPod devices. Hard disk
drive capacity can range between 5 and 10 gigabytes (see your iPod
specifications datasheet for detail).
- a portable video player with a hard disk drive storage where video files are
copied before playback. Depending on its capacity the output file size can be
selected. Can playback files with H.264 or MPEG-4 (AVI) format coded with DivX
or XviD codecs.
or XviD codecs.
- a portable multimedia storage viewer with a hard disk drive storage where
media files are stored. Depending on its capacity the output file size can be
selected. Can playback files with MPEG-4 (MP4) format.
- mobile phone that uses memory stick cards as storage for media files. Can
playback files that have MPEG4 format adapted for a mobile phone. Memory
stick cards capacity can range between 128 megabytes and 2 gigabytes (the
most suitable for video files are 512Mb, 1 Gb and 2 Gb).
- a portable video player of DVD discs with hardware (i.e. no additional
software is needed) support of H.264 or MPEG-4 (AVI) files coded with DivX or
XviD codecs playback. The player uses CD-ROM (CD-R or CD-RW) and DVDROM (DVD-R/RW/DL or DVD+R/RW/DL) discs as storage devices, their capacity
can range between 650-800 megabytes (for CD's) and 4.7-18 gigabytes (for
DVD's).
or XviD codecs.
- a home video player of DVD discs with hardware (i.e. no additional software is
needed) support of H.264 or MPEG-4 (AVI) files coded with DivX or XviD codecs
playback. The player uses CD-ROM (CD-R or CD-RW) and DVD-ROM (DVDR/RW/DL or DVD+R/RW/DL) discs as storage devices, their capacity can range
between 650-800 megabytes (for CD's) and 4.7-18 gigabytes (for DVD's).
Sometimes has hard disk drive as internal storage.
- a personal computer or notebook. Can store the media files on hard disk
drive, CD-ROM (CD-R or CD-RW) and DVD-ROM (DVD-R/RW/DL or
DVD+R/RW/DL) discs. With software support can playback files with AVI format
coded with H.264 or DivX or XviD codecs and MP4 (ISO) format.
- a mobile phone compatible with GSM standards that uses memory stick cards
as storage for media files. Can playback files that have 3GP or MP4 format
adapted for GSM phone. Memory stick cards capacity can range between 128
megabytes and 2 gigabytes (the most suitable for video files are 512Mb, 1 Gb
and 2 Gb).
- a mobile phone compatible with CDMA standards that uses memory stick
cards as storage for media files. Can playback files that have 3G2 or MP4 format
adapted for CDMA phone. Memory stick cards capacity can range between 128
megabytes and 2 gigabytes (the most suitable for video files are 512Mb, 1 Gb
and 2 Gb).
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
The codec settings can be changed when you press the Advanced... button in Custom mode of the
third step. The following tabs of the codec settings window are available:
Main settings - include Quantization type , Trellis quantization , Profile level ,
Grayscale enabled , Chroma optimizer , Interlacing encoding , Lumimasking enabled
and Quarter pixel .
interval , Use chroma motion , Turbo mode , Cartoon mode and Global motion
compensation .
Quantizer offset .
optimizations .
-
include
Automatically
detect
optimizations
,
Force
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
Main
[Trellis quantization ] [Profile level ]
] [Chroma optimizer ]
[Interlacing encoding ]
[Grayscale enabled
[Quarter pixel ]
Quantization
type
H.263
Details
if the resolution (frame size ) is above average (for instance, 720x480) the
900 kbps.
cartoons.
MPEG
The default value is H.263 .
[Back to the Top ]
Trellis quantization setting can be either checked or unchecked.
The default value is On .
[Back to the Top ]
Profile level - restricts the usage of MPEG-4 tools and limits the encoded bit rate so that the output
movie is compatible with hardware decoders. If you are acquainted with XviD codec settings you will
find that the Profile levels coincide with the XviD profiles. In the table below you can see which
profile allows you to change the specific codec settings and use different quantization types, what
maximum resolution, frame rate or bit rate is recommended for every profile.
Lumimasking Frames
enabled
VOPs
176x144x15
not
Simple @ L0
64 kbps not allowed
fps
allowed
176x144x15
not
Simple @ L1
64 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
352x288x15
not
Simple @ L2
128 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
352x288x15
not
Simple @ L3
384 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
176x144x15
not
ARTS @ L1
64 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
352x288x15
not
ARTS @ L2
128 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
352x288x30
not
ARTS @ L3
384 kbps
allowed
fps
allowed
352x288x30
2000
not
ARTS @ L4
allowed
fps
kbps
allowed
176x144x30
AS @ L0
128 kbps
allowed
allowed
fps
176x144x30
AS @ L1
128 kbps
allowed
allowed
fps
352x288x15
AS @ L2
384 kbps
allowed
allowed
fps
352x288x30
AS @ L3
768 kbps
allowed
allowed
fps
352x576x30
3000
AS @ L4
allowed
allowed
fps
kbps
720x576x30
8000
AS @ L5
allowed
allowed
fps
kbps
Quantization
type
Interlacing
encoding
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 only
not allowed
H.263 or
MPEG
H.263 or
MPEG
H.263 or
MPEG
H.263 or
MPEG
H.263 or
MPEG
H.263 or
MPEG
pixel
compensation
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not
allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
not allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
The default value is AS @ L5 .
[Back to the Top ]
source video file.
The default value is Off .
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
Interlacing encoding - encodes frames as interlaced - only if your source contains interlacing
artifacts (i.e. fields instead of progressive frames). There is no guarantee that the picture will be
displayed correctly on some devices when this option is enabled. Recommended to use this option to
convert fully interlaced source video for watching it on a TV screen only (not recommended when used
on a personal computer).
Interlacing encoding setting can be either checked or unchecked.
[Back to the Top ]
video clips.
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
Motion
chroma motion ]
[Turbo mode ]
[Cartoon mode ]
[Max key interval ]
[Use
[Global motion compensation ]
given bit rate.
Motion
type
search
Details
recommended.
0 (None)
1 (Very Low)
also be huge.
2 (Low)
3 (Medium)
4 (High)
5 (Very High)
6 (Ultra High)
The default value is 6 (Ultra High) .
[Back to the Top ]
VHQ Mode
Details
0 (Off)
1 (Mode Decision)
2 (Limited Search)
3 (Medium Search)
4 (Wide Search)
The default value is 4 (Wide Search) .
[Back to the Top ]
The default value is 0 .
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
will be much lower.
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
pictures).
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
B-VOPs
[Use B-VOPs ]
[Quantizer ratio ]
[Quantizer offset ]
I
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
I
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
I
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
I
P
B
P
B
P
B
P
B
[Back to the Top ]
This value is for information purposes only and cannot be changed.
[Back to the Top ]
following formula:
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
Optimization
[Back to the Top ]
technology.
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
that would be capable of providing good video quality at bit rate that are substantially lower (e.g.,
half or less) than what previous standards would need (e.g., relative to MPEG-2, H.263, or DivX and
XviD).
The codec settings can be changed when you press the Advanced... button in Custom mode of the
third step. The following tabs of the codec settings window are available:
MBs and Frames settings - include Partitions , B-Frames
More settings - include Motion Estimation , Miscellaneous options
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
Rate Control
[Bitrate ]
[Scene cuts ]
[Back to the Top ]
51 .
[Back to the Top ]
sometimes flickering. The possible values vary from 0 to the number of the frames in the
video. The default value is 25 .
the screen longer. The possible values vary from 0 to the number of the frames in the video.
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
MBs and Frames
[Partitions ]
[B-Frames ]
[Back to the Top ]
quality.
motion).
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to GO
More Settings
[Back to the Top ]
.
[Back to the Top ]
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to iPod
Overview
You would like to watch your favorite movies on the go, but have no time to puzzle over the tweaks?
Then AVS Video to iPod is the right choice for you. AVS Video to iPod is a one-click wizard-styled
software for transferring DVDs and video files to iPod. You will need to follow only three easy steps to
copy movies and convert video files of all key formats to your iPod. AVS Video to iPod directly
uploads videos to iPod once the conversion is over. Up-to-date iPod models are supported!
You can use AVS Video to iPod to do the following:
copy DVDs quality lossless to iPod with a button touch to a wide variety of iPod models
including the latest ones;
convert various video files for iPod. All today’s key formats are supported;
upload videos directly to the portable without launching iTunes;
conversion process.
Mobiles -> AVS Video to iPod .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to iPod
Note : you can only change the file name, the extension will always be .m4v , so that
Apple iPod could handle the resulting video correctly.
video file.
it.
previewing it.
previewing it.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to iPod
video clip.
window.
one .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to iPod
.
Press the Close button to finish the work with AVS Video to iPod .
You can still disconnect your iPod from the computer, no data will be lost in case you haven't tried
to copy it to iPod using some other software.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to PSP
Overview
AVS Video to PSP is a wizard-styled application and a powerful tool, which allows you to convert your
favorite video files and DVD movies and transfer them directly to Sony PSP. No additional application is
needed.
You can use AVS Video to PSP to do the following:
copy DVDs quality lossless to a Sony PSP with a button touch;
convert various video files for PSP - all today’s key formats are supported;
upload videos directly to the portable without any additional application;
conversion process.
Mobiles -> AVS Video to PSP .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to PSP
Note : you can only change the file name, the extension will always be .mp4 , so that
Sony PSP could handle the resulting video correctly.
video file.
it.
previewing it.
previewing it.
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to PSP
video clip.
window.
one .
AVS4YOU
AVS Video to PSP
.
Press the Close button to finish the work with AVS Video to PSP .
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Bitrate
Bitrate is defined as the number of data points used to approximate the true wave form. Obviously,
the higher the number, the more accurately the wave form is approximated.
For example, the current de facto standard is to encode MP3 at 192 kbps, or 192,000 bits per second.
The CODEC takes the bitrate into consideration as it writes each frame to the bitstream. If the bitrate
is low, the irrelevancy and redundancy criteria will be measured harshly, and more subtlety will be
stripped out, resulting in a lower-quality product. If the bitrate is high, the codec will be applied with
leniency, and the end result will sound better. Of course, the file size of the end product corresponds
directly with the bitrate.
192 kbps is an example of a constant bitrate (CBR ) mode. Constant Bit Rate (CBR) encoding
maintains the same bitrate throughout an encoded file. All that means is no matter what, there will
always be 192 kbps written into the bitstream. If your audio has moments of silence, it is captured and
encoded at that rate, as are areas of very diverse frequencies (that might sound better if encoded to a
higher bitrate).
Variable Bit Rate (VBR) is an MP3 encoding method that's used when file size is not an issue. As it's
name implies, the bitrate is varied throughout the file. The codec guesses which parts could benefit
from more bits per second, and which can use less. The result is a much higher quality file.
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Frequency
Sampling frequency also impacts fidelity. The sampling frequency is essentially the number of times
the sound event is quantized within a given time period. Sampling frequencies are specified in
KiloHertz (KHz), a term meaning samples per second. The key in understanding how sampling
frequency affects fidelity is the Nyquist sampling theorem. Basically, when applied to audio signals the
Nyquist theorem states that the highest possible pitch in the sound is one-half that of the sampling
frequency.
For example, "CD-quality" sound requires 16-bit words sampled at 44.1 KHz. Essentially this means
44,100 16-bit words (705,600 bits) are used to digitally describe each second of sound on a compact
disc. The highest pitch possible is 22.05 KHz (approximately the top of human hearing range), which is
half of 44.1 KHz.
AVS4YOU
Appendix
MP3 Advanced
MP3 Advanced window contains 4 tabs, which are:
General
Filtering
VBR
Expert
General
At the General tab you can select the necessary Channels . The suggested choice includes the
following variants: Stereo , Joint Stereo , Forced Joint Stereo , Dual Channels and Mono . See
the description of each mode in the table below:
Channel
Description
Stereo
In this mode, the encoder makes no use of potentially existing correlations
between the two input channels. It can, however, negotiate the bit demand
between both channels, i.e. give one channel more bits if the other contains
silence.
Joint stereo
In this mode, the encoder will make use of a correlation between both
channels. The signal will be matrixed into a sum ("mid") and difference
("side") signal. For quasi-mono signals, this will give a significant gain in
encoding quality. This mode does not destroy phase information like IS
stereo that may be used by other encoders. This setting can be used to
encode DOLBY ProLogic surround signals.
Forced
Stereo
Joint
Dual Channels
This mode will force MS joint stereo on all frames. It's faster and it uses
some special mid and side masking threshold.
In this mode, the 2 channels will be totally independently encoded. Each
channel will have exactly half of the bitrate. This mode is designed for
applications like dual languages encoding (for example: English in one
channel and French in the other). Using this encoding mode for regular
stereo files will result in a lower quality encoding.
In the right part you will find the opportunity to set Encoder Quality . You can specify the output
quality; thus you can trade off encoding time against sound quality. The default (normal) is
recommended for the lower bitrates (<160 kbps), high quality for bitrates >160 kbps. The voice
quality is more or less optimized to generate the best quality for voice
Mono
This option will generate a mono file, if the input file is a stereo file, the input
stream will be downsampled to a mono file by averaging the left and right
channel.
In the right part you will find the opportunity to set Encoder Quality . You can specify the output
quality; thus you can trade off encoding time against sound quality. The default (normal) is
recommended for the lower bitrates (<160 kbps), high quality for bitrates >160 kbps. The voice
quality is more or less optimized to generate the best quality for voice
There are some built-in presets you can use. They have for the most part been subject to and tuned
via rigorous double blind listening tests to verify and achieve this objective. These are continually
updated to coincide with the latest developments that occur and as a result should provide you with
nearly the best quality currently possible. You can find them in Preset and Alt-Preset lists.
Presets available:
Phone , SW , AM , FM , Voice , Radio , Tape , HiFi , CD , Studio , R3Mix .
Alt-Presets available:
Preset
Description
None
Do not use any alt-presets
Fast Standard
VBR mode preset. It should generally be understandable to most people with
most music and is already quite high in quality. The resulting bitrate should
be within the 170-210 kbps range, according to music complexity. Enables
the new fast VBR method for a Standard preset. Its disadvantage is that
often the bitrate will be slightly higher than with the normal mode and
quality may be slightly lower also.
Standard
VBR mode preset. It should generally be understandable to most people with
most music and is already quite high in quality. The resulting bitrate should
be within the 170-210kbps range, according to music complexity.
Fast Extreme
VBR mode preset. If you have extremely good hearing and similar
equipment, this preset will provide slightly higher quality than the "standard"
mode. The resulting bitrate should be within the 200-240 kbps range,
according to music complexity. The "fast"-option increases speed significantly
but may give a tiny bit lower quality.
Extreme
VBR mode preset. If you have extremely good hearing and similar
equipment, this preset will provide slightly higher quality than the "standard"
mode. The resulting bitrate should be within the 200-240 kbps range,
according to music complexity.
Insane
CBR mode preset. The “insane”-option gives you the current theoretical
maximum quality possible. The output files are flat 320 kbps. Using this may
be a little insane, since the difference in quality in between “extreme” and
“insane” is minimal. However, if you simply don't care about file size, want
maximum quality, or you have hardware that can't handle VBR files, then
you could use this option.
You can also select Mpeg Tag Version out of ID3 Ver.1 or ID3 Ver.2 .
ID3 Ver.1
The audio format MPEG layer I, layer II and layer III (MP3) has no native way of saving information
about the contents, except for some simple yes/no parameters like "private", "copyrighted" and
"original home" (meaning this is the original file and not a copy). A solution to this problem was
introduced with the program "Studio3" by Eric Kemp alias NamkraD in 1996. By adding a small chunk
of extra data in the end of the file one could get the MP3 file to carry information about the audio and
not just the audio itself.
The placement of the tag, as the data was called, was probably chosen as there were little chance that
it should disturb decoders. In order to make it easy to detect a fixed size of 128 bytes was chosen. The
tag has the following layout (as hinted by the scheme to the right):
Song title
30 characters
Artist
30 characters
Album
30 characters
Year
4 characters
Comment
30 characters
Genre
1 byte
If one sums the size of all these fields we see that 30+30+30+4+30+1 equals 125 bytes and not 128
bytes. The missing three bytes can be found at the very beginning of the tag, before the song title.
These three bytes are always "TAG" and is the identification that this is indeed an ID3 tag. The easiest
way to find a ID3v1/1.1 tag is to look for the word "TAG" 128 bytes from the end of a file.
As all artists doesn't have a 30 character name it is said that if there is some bytes left after the
information is entered in the field, those bytes should be file with the binary value 0. You might also
think that you cannot write that much in the genre field, being one byte big, but it is more clever than
that. The byte value you enter in the genre field corresponds to a value in a predefined list. The list
that Eric Kemp created had 80 entries, ranging from 0 to 79.
ID3 Ver.2
ID3v2 is a new tagging system that lets you put enriching and relevant information about your audio
files within them. In more down to earth terms, ID3v2 is a chunk of data prepended to the binary
audio data. Each ID3v2 tag holds one or more smaller chunks of information, called frames. These
frames can contain any kind of information and data you could think of such as title, album, performer,
website, lyrics, equalizer presets, pictures etc. The block scheme to the right is an example of how the
layout of a typical ID3v2 tagged audio file may look like.
One of the design goals were that the ID3v2 should be very flexible and expandable. It is very easy to
add new functions to the ID3v2 tag, because, just like in HTML, all parsers will ignore any information
they don't recognize. Since each frame can be 16MB and the entire tag can be 256MB you'll probably
never again be in the same situation as when you tried to write a useful comment in the old ID3 being
limited to 30 characters.
Speaking of characters, the ID3v2 supports Unicode so even if you use the Bopomofo character set
you'll be able to write in your native language. You can also include in which language you're writing so
that one file might contain e.g. the same lyrics but in different languages.
Even though the tag supports a lot of byte consuming capabilities like inline pictures and even the
possibility to include any other file, ID3v2 still tries to use the bytes as efficient as possibly. If you
convert an ID3v1 tag to an ID3v2 tag it is even likely that the new tag will be smaller. If you convert
an ID3v1 tag where all fields are full (that is, all 30 characters are used in every field) to an ID3v2 tag
it will be 56 bytes bigger. This is the worst case scenario for ID3v1 to ID3v2 conversion.
Since it's so easy to implement new functionality into ID3v2, one can hope that we'll see a lot of
creative uses for ID3v2 in the future. E.g. there is a built-in system for rating the music and counting
how often you listen to a file, just to mention some brainstorm results that are included. This feature
can be used to build playlists that play your favorite songs more often than others.
[Back to the top ]
Filtering
Highpass Filter cuts the lowest frequencies and passes the highest. The Lowpass Filter allows only
the lower frequencies to be present into the output signal; it will cut the beautiful crystal sound of a
violin (frequencies over 10 KHz), but if it could amplify rather than just pass the low frequencies, than
it would enhance your favorite disco music with lots of percussions and bass.
Highpass filtering frequency (in kHz) : Frequencies below the specified one will be cut off.
Width of Highpass filter (in kHz): The width of the highpass filter. The default is 15% of the
highpass frequency.
Lowpass filtering frequency (in kHz): Frequencies above the specified one will be cut off.
Width of Lowpass filter (in kHz): The width of the lowpass filter. The default is 15% of the lowpass
frequency.
Regarding to the Nyquist Sampling Theorem the sample rate have to be at least two times higher than
the highest frequency of analog audio signal. For example, the human ear can detect sound across the
frequency range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz. According to the sampling theorem, one should sample sound
signals at least at 40 kHz in order for the reconstructed sound signal to be acceptable to the human
ear.
So applying the low-pass analog filter to a file with sample rate of 8kHz you should take into
consideration that the frequency parameter of this method have to be at least two times less ( < 4
kHz) than the file's sample rate.
[Back to the top ]
VBR
At VBR tab you should select Coding Method first. The description of each method can be found in the
table below:
Coding
Method
Description
None
Don't use VBR, instead it is encoding with a Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
Default
Use the default VBR method (currently set to VBR-MTRH )
Old
The functional approach, based on maskings, bisection in the bit domain
New
The approach, based on maskings and direct noise allocation
MTRH
A merger of old and new (VBR) routine
ABR
The Average Bit Rate (ABR) setting, the encoding principle is based on perceptual
entropy, but more like CBR than VBR
Maximum VBR Bitrate: Allows to specify an maximum bitrate when using VBR (Variable Bit Rate),
this selecting depends on what base bitrate you have chosen in the main encoder tab. It's
recommended to leave this set to 320 kbit/s unless you want low quality VBR files.
VBR Quality: In VBR mode, you are able to specify a quality setting which will affect encoding bitrate
allocation. If you use quality 0, the max bitrate will be reached easily, while using quality 9 the bitrate
usually will be around the base bitrate. The lower the VBR quality value, the better the audio quality,
but also the bigger the output file. Recommended setting for high quality VBR encoding is 1 or 0.
Write VBR Header: This tag is embedded in frame 0 of the MP3 file. It lets VBR aware players
correctly seek and calculate playing times of VBR files.
Target bitrate for ABR: The allowed range of the ABR bitrate is 4 - 310 kbit/s, you can use any
integer value within that range.
[Back to the top ]
Expert
At Expert tab you can find the opportunity to set the following options:
include CRC-Checksum
When enabled, the encoder will calculate the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) for the MP3
frames, and will add the CRC value to the MP3 stream.
comply as much as possible to ISO MPEG spec
With this option, the encoder will enforce the 7680 bit limitation on total frame size. This
results in many wasted bits for high bitrate encodings.
allow block types to differ between channels
Allows the left and right channels to use different block types. Normally this is not allowed,
only because the FhG encoder does not seem to allow it either.
short blocks
Encode all frames using short blocks.
bit reservoir
Enable bit reservoir.
You can also set ATH Control function, useful for low volume. ATH is used to approximate an equal
loudness curve. Select one of the suggested modes:
ATH
Mode
Control
Description
Default
Only
This option ignores the output of the psy-model and only use masking from
the ATH. Might be useful at very high bitrates or for testing the ATH.
Disabled
Disable any use of the ATH (absolute threshold of hearing) for masking.
Normally, humans are unable to hear any sound below this threshold.
Only for
blocks
short
Ignore psychoacoustic model for short blocks, use ATH only.
There are also three De-emphasis options: default , 0/15 microseconds and citt j.17 .
[Back to the top ]
AVS4YOU
Appendix
You can find the available MP3 parameters combinations in the table below:
Mono
Stereo
Frequency
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
48 KHz
64 Kbps
320 Kbps
128 Kbps
320 Kbps
44 KHz
56 Kbps
320 Kbps
112 Kbps
320 Kbps
32 KHz
40 Kbps
320 Kbps
80 Kbps
320 Kbps
24 KHz
32 Kbps
160 Kbps
64 Kbps
160 Kbps
22 KHz
32 Kbps
160 Kbps
56 Kbps
160 Kbps
16 KHz
32 Kbps
160 Kbps
40 Kbps
160 Kbps
12 KHz
24 Kbps
160 Kbps
32 Kbps
160 Kbps
11 KHz
16 Kbps
160 Kbps
32 Kbps
160 Kbps
8 KHz
8 Kbps
160 Kbps
8 Kbps
160 Kbps
Frequency
8 KHz
11.025 KHz
16 KHz
22.05 KHz
24 KHz
32 KHz
44.1 KHz
48 KHz
Bitrate mono stereo mono stereo mono stereo mono stereo mono stereo mono stereo mono stereo mono stereo
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
192
224
256
320
384
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
MP3 supports all the combinations of the frequency and bitrate if the bitrate varies from Minimum to
Maximum values for the current supported frequency.
AVS4YOU
Appendix
You can find the available MP2 parameters combinations in the table below:
Frequency
Bitrate
16 KHz
22.05 KHz
24 KHz
32 KHz
44.1 KHz
48 KHz
mono stereo mono stereo mono stereo mono stereo mono stereo mono stereo
8
+
16
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
24
+
+
+
+
+
+
32
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
40
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
48
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
56
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
64
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
80
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
96
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
112
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
128
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
144
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
160
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
192
+
+
+
+
+
+
224
+
+
+
+
+
+
256
+
+
+
+
+
+
320
384
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
MONO and STEREO
Bitrate
Minimum
Maximum
48 - 320 Kbps
22 KHz
48 KHz
40 Kbps
22 KHz
24 KHz
32 Kbps
22 KHz
48 KHz
8 - 24 Kbps
22 KHz
24 KHz
MP2 supports all the combinations of the frequency and bitrate if the frequency varies from Minimum
to Maximum values for the current supported bitrate.
AVS4YOU
Appendix
OGG Vorbis Options
In OGG Vorbis Options window you will be able to set the advanced options of your output file
format.
Note : you can select either VBR Enabled or Quality Enabled parameter .
VBR Enabled
In case you enabled VBR by checking the VBR Enabled check-box, you will find the opportunity to set
Current nominal bitrate , Current minimum bitrate and Current maximum bitrate .
[Back to the top ]
Quality Enabled
In case the Quality Enabled check-box is checked, you can increase or decrease the quality of
compression.
[Back to the top ]
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Available OGG Vorbis Parameters Combinations
You can find the available Ogg Vorbis parameters combinations in the table below:
Mono
Stereo
Frequency
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
48 KHz
48 Kbps
192 Kbps
48 Kbps
320 Kbps
44 KHz
48 Kbps
128 Kbps
48 Kbps
256 Kbps
32 KHz
48 Kbps
112 Kbps
48 Kbps
192 Kbps
24 KHz
32 Kbps
56 Kbps
48 Kbps
160 Kbps
22 KHz
32 Kbps
56 Kbps
48 Kbps
160 Kbps
16 KHz
48 Kbps
96 Kbps
48 Kbps
192 Kbps
12 KHz
32 Kbps
48 Kbps
48 Kbps
96 Kbps
11 KHz
48 Kbps
48 Kbps
48 Kbps
64 Kbps
8 KHz
8 Kbps
24 Kbps
16 Kbps
48 Kbps
Ogg Vorbis supports all the combinations of the frequency and bitrate if the bitrate varies from
Minimum to Maximum values for the current supported frequency.
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Overview
This list includes the mobile devices which can handle so-called Real Music ringtones and media files of
different types. New phones will be added on a regular basis.
Apple iPod
Sony PSP
Archos DVR
BlackBerry Pearl
Samsung Players
Creative Players
iRiver
SanDisk Sansa e200 series
Epson P-2000/P-4000 (P-3000/P-5000)
Cowon iAudio X5
Alcatel
BenQ-Siemens
Fly
LG
Motorola
NEC
Nokia
Panasonic
Pantech
Philips
Sagem
Samsung
Sharp
Siemens
SonyEricsson
Toshiba
Note : if you could not find your phone model in the list, you can consult your mobile phone
manual or manufacturer web site to find out whether it supports some media formats and has got
Bluetooth or Infrared communication capabilities.
The columns Bluetooth and Infrared indicate the transfer possibilities available for each model:
"+" means that the transfer possibility exists;
"-" under Bluetooth or Infrared means that this transfer method is not available;
Bluetooth is an industrial specification for wireless personal area networks, also known as IEEE
802.15.1. Bluetooth provides a way to connect and exchange information between devices like
personal digital assistants (PDAs), mobile phones, laptops, PCs, printers and digital cameras via a
secure, low-cost, globally available short range radio frequency.
Bluetooth is a radio standard primarily designed for low power consumption, with a short range (power
class dependent: 1 meter, 10 meters, 100 meters) and with a low-cost transceiver microchip in each
device.
Infrared data transmission is also employed in short-range communication among computer
peripherals and personal digital assistants or mobile phones. These devices usually conform to
standards published by IrDA, the Infrared Data Association. Remote controls and IrDA devices use
infrared light-emitting diodes (LEDs) to emit infrared radiation which is focused by a plastic lens into a
narrow beam. The beam is modulated, i.e. switched on and off, to encode the data. The receiver uses
a silicon photodiode to convert the infrared radiation to an electric current. It responds only to the
rapidly pulsing signal created by the transmitter, and filters out slowly changing infrared radiation from
ambient light. Infrared communications are useful for indoor use in areas of high population density.
Infrared does not penetrate walls and so does not interfere with other devices in adjoining rooms.
Infrared is the most common way for remote controls to command appliances.
The USB mobile devices it can communicate with the computer in the following ways:
Devices that represent USB Mass Storage Device Class (MSC or UMS ) are seen as a
removable drive in the system and some of them as a fixed drive.
Devices representing USB MTP Device Class use Media Transfer Protocol (MTP )
supported by Microsoft Windows Media Player 10 and 11.
Devices that use Microsoft ActiveSync for communication, i.e. mobile phones, smartphones
and PDAs or pocket PCs with Microsoft Windows Mobile or Microsoft Windows CE installed. For
these devices support you need to have a personal computer running Windows 2000 SP4,
Windows 2003, Windows XP with ActiveSync program v4.5 or later installed or running
Windows Vista with Windows Mobile Device Center v6 or later installed.
Depending on the communication type used different file types might be available for upload to the
same devices.
2004 - 2007 Online Media Technologies Ltd., London, UK. All rights reserved.
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Apple iPod
Audio
Frequency response : 20Hz to 20,000Hz
Audio formats supported:
MP3 16 to 320 Kbps (8 to 320 Kbps for iPod shuffle)
MP3 VBR
AAC 16 to 320 Kbps (8 to 320 Kbps for iPod shuffle)
Protected AAC (from iTunes Music Store, M4A, M4B, M4P)
Audible (formats 2, 3, and 4)
WAV
Apple Lossless
AIFF
Upgradable firmware enables support for future audio formats.
Video (iPod Video only)
Video formats supported:
H.264 video , up to 1.5 Mbps, 640 by 480 pixels, 30 frames per sec., Low-Complexity
version of the H.264 Baseline Profile with AAC-LC audio up to 160 Kbps, 48 kHz, stereo audio
in .m4v, .mp4, and .mov file formats;
H.264 video , up to 768 Kbps, 320 by 240 pixels, 30 frames per sec., Baseline Profile up to
Level 1.3 with AAC-LC audio up to 160 Kbps, 48 kHz, stereo audio in .m4v, .mp4, and .mov
file formats;
MPEG-4 video , up to 2.5 Mbps, 640 by 480 pixels, 30 frames per sec., Simple Profile with
AAC-LC audio up to 160 Kbps, 48 kHz, stereo audio in .m4v, .mp4, and .mov file formats.
Upgradable firmware enables support for future video formats.
Photo support
Syncs iPod-viewable photos in formats:
JPEG
BMP
GIF
TIFF
PSD (Mac only)
PNG
Text support (except iPod Shuffle)
TXT (.txt files)
VCARD (.vcf files)
Note : iPod first and second generation models (iPod 1G & iPod 2G) are not supported. Upload to
all the later models is supported via USB interface only.
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Sony PSP
Audio support
UMD:
Memory Stick:
H.264/MPEG-4 AVC Main Profile Level 3
Linear PCM
ATRAC3plus
ATRAC3plus
MP3 (MPEG 1/2 Audio Layer 3)
Linear PCM (WAV form)
AAC (MP4 form)
WMA
Video support
UMD:
Memory Stick:
H.264/MPEG-4 AVC Main Profile Level 3
MPEG-4 SP (MPEG-4 AAC)
H.264/MPEG-4 AVC Main Profile (MPEG-4
AAC)
Photo support
Memory Stick:
JPEG (Conforms with DCF 2.0/Exif 2.21)
TIFF
GIF
PNG
BMP
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Archos
Archos AV 500 and AV 700
Audio playback:
Stereo MP3 decoding at 30-320 kb/s CBR & VBR
WMA (including protected WMA files)
WAV (PCM & ADPCM)
Video playback:
MPEG-4 SP with B-Frames with stereo sound
AVI file format (audio/video file container by Microsoft) near DVD quality up to 720x480 @ 30
f/s (NTSC), 720x576 @ 25 f/s (PAL) (has not been certified by DivX, Inc., may not read all
DivX® 4.0 & 5.0 files; does not read DivX® 3.11 & 6.0 files)
Microsoft WMV9 Simple Profile up to 352x288@30f/s and 800 KBit/s; supports WM DRM
Photo viewer:
JPEG (except progressives)
BMP
Archos 404/504/604
Audio playback:
Stereo MP3 decoding at 30-320 Kbits/s CBR & VBR
WMA
Protected WMA
WAV (PCM/ADPCM)
With optional software plug-ins:
AAC music files (UMS only, see the Overview for more detail)
AC3 stereo sound files
Video playback:
MPEG-4 (ASP@L5 AVI, up to 720x480 @ 30 f/s (NTSC), 720x576 @ 25 f/s (PAL))
WMV (MP@ML, up to 720x480 @ 30 f/s (NTSC), 720x576 @ 25 f/s (PAL))
With optional software plug-ins:
H.264 up to 720x480 @ 30 f/s (NTSC), 720x576 @ 25 f/s (PAL) and AAC sound (UMS only,
see the Overview for more detail)
MPEG-2 MP@ML up to 10 Mbps (up to 720x480 @ 30 f/s (NTSC), 720x576 @ 25 f/s (PAL))
and AC3 stereo sound (UMS only, see the Overview for more detail)
Photo viewer:
JPEG
BMP
PNG
Certain audio and video bitrates, video and photo resolutions, and/or file variations may not be
compatible.
AVS4YOU
Appendix
BlackBerry Pearl
Audio playback:
.mp3
.wav
.m4a
.m4b
.aac
.amr
.mid
Video playback:
.avi
.3gp
The MPEG4 video files with resolution 320 by 240 pixels at 30 frames per second are supported.
Photo viewer:
.jpg
.jpeg
.bmp
.gif
.tif
.tiff
.png
compatible.
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Samsung Players
Samsung YP-T8/T8N/T7F/D1
Audio support:
MPEG1/2/2.5 Layer3 (.mp3 - 8 Kbps~320 Kbps, 8 kHz~48 kHz)
WMA (.wma - 5 Kbps~320 Kbps, 8 kHz~48 kHz)
Ogg (.ogg - Q1~Q10)
Video support:
.svi (Samsung VIdeo - special MPEG4 video file type with video resolution 208x176 and frame
rate 15 fps with MP3 audio of 44,1 kHz 128 Kbps)
.mpg (resolution 160x128 and frame rate 15 fps with MP3 audio of 44,1 kHz 128 Kbps)
.avi (resolution 160x128 and frame rate 15 fps with MP3 audio of 44,1 kHz 128 Kbps)
.wmv (resolution 160x128 and frame rate 15 fps with MP3 audio of 44,1 kHz 128 Kbps)
Image support:
.jpg (file size no more than 3 MB)
.bmp
.gif
Text support:
.txt
Samsung YP-T9
Audio support:
Ogg (.ogg - Q1~Q10) (UMS only, see the Overview for more detail)
Video support:
.svi (Samsung VIdeo - special MPEG4 video file type with video resolution 208x176 and frame
rate 15 fps with MP3 audio of 44,1 kHz 128 Kbps) (UMS only, see the Overview for more
detail)
Image support:
Text support:
.txt (UMS only, see the Overview for more detail)
Samsung YP-T7
Audio support:
Ogg (.ogg - Q1~Q10)
Image support:
.bmp
.gif
Text support:
.txt
Samsung YP-K5/K3
Audio support:
Ogg (.ogg - Q1~Q10) (UMS only, see the Overview for more detail)
Image support:
Text support:
.txt (UMS only, see the Overview for more detail)
Samsung YP-T6/U3/U2/U1/F2/F1/C1/55
Audio support:
Ogg (.ogg - Q1~Q10)
Samsung YP-Z5/YH-925
Audio support:
Image support:
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Creative Players
Creative ZEN Stone/Nano Plus
Audio support:
Creative ZEN Stone/Sleek/ Micro/Neeon
Audio support:
WAV
Creative ZEN V/Sleek Photo/ Microphoto
Audio support:
WAV
Image support:
.jpg
.jpeg
Creative ZEN Vision/Vision W/ Vision:M/V Plus/ Neeon 2
Audio support:
WAV
Video support:
.avi
.mpg
.mpeg
.wmv
Image support:
.jpg
.jpeg
AVS4YOU
Appendix
iRiver
iRiver H10
Audio support:
MP3 (32 to 320 Kbps)
MP3 VBR
WMA (32 to 192 Kbps)
Photo support:
JPEG (the progressive JPG is not supported)
Text support:
TXT
iRiver U10
Audio support:
MPEG 1/2/2.5 Layer 3 (8 to 320 Kbps)
WMA (8 to 320 Kbps)
OGG (up to Q10)
ASF
Video support:
AVI (AVI compatible with MPEG4 SP (Simple Profile) QVGA (320x240) or less/ 15 frames per
second or less/ 384 kbps or less with audio MP3 128 kbps 44.1 kHz CBR)
Photo support:
JPEG (the progressive JPG is not supported)
Text support:
TXT
AVS4YOU
Appendix
SanDisk Sansa® e200 Series
Audio support:
MP3 (8 to 320 Kbps)
WMA (8 to 320 Kbps), including WMA with DRM protection
Video support:
MJPEG (up to 176 by 240 pixels, 15 frames per sec., specifically converted and with duration
no more than 10 minutes) (UMS only, see the Overview for more detail)
Photo support:
JPEG (specifically converted from GIF, BMP and TIFF) (UMS only, see the Overview for more
detail)
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Epson P-2000/P-4000 (P-3000/P-5000)
Audio support:
MP3 (.mp3 - MPEG-1 Layer 3) - maximum bit rate 320 kbps (48KHz, 16bit Stereo)
AAC (.m4a) - maximum bit rate 320 kbps (48KHz, 16bit Stereo)
Video support:
Motion JPG (.mov, .avi) - maximum resolution 640 x 480 pixels, minimum resolution 160 x
112 pixels, supported audio CODEC: µ-LAW, A-LAW, PCM
MPEG-4 (.asf, .mp4, .mov, .avi) - maximum resolution 640 x 480 pixels, minimum resolution
160 x 112 pixels, supported audio CODEC: AAC, MP3, G726(ADPCM), µ-LAW, A-LAW, PCM
Photo File Format support:
JPEG (.jpeg, .jpg, .jpe) - minimum image size 160 x 120 pixels, maximum image size 17.8
Megapixels, maximum image aspect ratio 8:1
TIFF (.tif, .tiff) - display TIFF file stored in header created by EPSON F-3200 scanner
RAW (.nef, .crw, .erw, .cr2, .orf, .mrw, .pef, .erf) - select DSLR (display JPEG stored in
header)
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Cowon iAudio X5
Audio playback:
.mp3
.wma
.ogg
.wav
.asf
.flac
Video playback:
.avi (MPEG4 video files with resolution is 160 by 120 pixels at 15 frames per second)
Photo viewer:
.jpg
Text support:
.txt
compatible.
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Alcatel
Please select your phone model from the list:
Model
557
Audio
Video
Additional
Bluetooth
Infrared
557
PCM,
MIDI,
iMelody,
AMR, ADPCM, SP-MIDI,
SMAF
3GP
(H263/AMR,
MPEG4),
MPEG4
JPG, GIF, BMP,
aGIF,
PNG,
WBMP
-
+
GlamPhone
#1 ELLE
SP-MIDI,
AAC
3GP
(H263/AMR,
MPEG4),
MPEG4
JPG, GIF, BMP,
aGIF,
PNG,
WBMP
-
+
One Touch
355
SP-MIDI, MIDI, iMelody,
AMR
JPG, GIF, BMP,
aGIF
-
-
One Touch
556
SP-MIDI, SMAF,
MIDI,
iMelody,
ADPCM
WBMP,
PNG,
JPG, GIF, BMP,
aGIF
-
-
One Touch
565
SMAF
-
+
One Touch
756
AMR, MP3
-
+
One Touch
757
AMR,
iMelody,
MIDI,
MP3, PCM, SP-MIDI
aGIF, BMP, GIF,
JPG,
PNG,
WBMP
-
+
One
TouchC550
SP-MIDI, MIDI
BMP, GIF, JPG,
WBMP
-
-
One
TouchC550c
SP-MIDI, MIDI
BMP, GIF, JPG,
WBMP
-
-
One
TouchC552
SP-MIDI, PCM,
AMR,
ADPCM,
(option), AMRnb
WBMP,
PNG,
JPG, GIF, BMP,
aGIF
-
+
One
TouchC560
SP-MIDI, MIDI
BMP, GIF, JPG,
WBMP
-
-
MIDI,
AMR,
PCM,
AMR,
MIDI,
AAC
3GP
(H263/AMR,
MPEG4),
MPEG4
3GP
(H263/AMR,
MPEG4),
MPEG4
One
TouchC630
MIDI, SP-MIDI
BMP, GIF, JPG,
WBMP
-
-
One
TouchC635
MIDI, SP-MIDI
BMP, GIF, JPG,
WBMP
-
-
One
TouchC651
ADPCM, AMR, iMelody,
MIDI, SMAF, SP-MIDI
3GP
(H263/AMR,
MPEG4),
MPEG4
aGIF, GIF, PNG,
WBMP
-
+
One
TouchC652
SP-MIDI,
MIDI,
(option), AMRnb
3GP
(H263/AMR,
MPEG4),
MPEG4
WBMP,
PNG,
JPG, GIF, BMP,
aGIF
-
+
MP3, M4A
3GP
(H263/AMR,
MPEG4),
MPEG4
WBMP,
PNG,
JPG, GIF, BMP,
aGIF
+
-
MP3, M4A
3GP
(H263/AMR,
MPEG4),
MPEG4
WBMP,
PNG,
JPG, GIF, BMP,
aGIF
+
-
One
TouchC717
MP3, M4A, AAC
3GP
(H263/AMR,
MPEG4),
MPEG4
WBMP,
PNG,
JPG, GIF, BMP,
aGIF
+
-
One
TouchC750
SP-MIDI, MIDI, AMRnb,
AMR,
ADPCM,
AAC
(option)
3GP
(H263/AMR,
MPEG4),
MPEG4
WBMP,
PNG,
JPG, GIF, BMP,
aGIF
-
+
MP3, MPEG4, AAC
3GP
(H263/AMR,
MPEG4),
MPEG4
WBMP,
PNG,
JPG, GIF, BMP,
aGIF
+
-
One
TouchC825
MP3, MPEG4, AAC
3GP
(H263/AMR,
MPEG4),
MPEG4
WBMP,
PNG,
JPG, GIF, BMP,
aGIF
+
-
One
TouchE100
iMelody, MIDI
-
-
One
TouchE157
MIDI, SP-MIDI
JPG
-
-
One
TouchE158
SP-MIDI, MIDI
JPG
-
-
One
TouchC701
One
TouchC707
One
TouchC820
AAC
One
TouchE159
SP-MIDI, MIDI
JPG
-
-
One
TouchE160
SP-MIDI, MIDI
JPG
-
-
One
TouchE252
MIDI, SP-MIDI
JPG
-
-
One
TouchE256
MIDI, SP-MIDI
JPG
-
-
One
TouchE257
MIDI, SP-MIDI
JPG
-
-
One
TouchE260
MIDI, SP-MIDI
JPG
-
-
One
TouchE801
MIDI, SP-MIDI, MP3
WBMP,
GIF, BMP
JPG,
-
-
One
TouchE801c
MIDI, SP-MIDI, MP3
WBMP,
GIF, BMP
JPG,
-
-
One
TouchE805
MIDI, MP3, SP-MIDI
aGIF, BMP, GIF,
JPG, WBMP
-
-
One
TouchS853
SP-MIDI, SMAF, PCM,
MP3,
MIDI,
iMelody,
AMRnb, AMR, ADPCM,
AAC (option)
WBMP,
PNG,
JPG, GIF, BMP,
aGIF
+
+
3GP
(H263/AMR,
MPEG4),
MPEG4
AVS4YOU
Appendix
BenQ-Siemens
Model
Audio
Video
C31
Additional
Infrared
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
C31
MP3, AMR, MIDI, AAC
C75
MIDI, WAV
C81
MP3, AAC, AAC+
CF61
MP3, AAC, WMA
CL71
MP3, MIDI, iMelody
3GP (H.263/AMR)
+
-
CL75
Poppy
MIDI
H.263
-
+
CX70
MIDI, WAV, AMR
-
+
CX75
MP3,
AAC,
MIDI, WAV
3GPP/MPEG4
+
+
E52
MP3, AAC
H.263/3GP
+
-
E61
MP3, AAC, AAC+
-
-
E71
MP3, AAC, AAC+
-
-
E81
AAC, eAAC+, MP3,
iMelody, MIDI, XMF
+
-
EF51
MP3,
AAC+
+
-
EF61
MP3, AAC, WMA
+
-
EF71
MP3, AAC, WMA
H.263
+
-
EF81
MP3,
AAC,
AAC++, MIDI
MPEG4,
3GPP,
H.263, Real video
+
-
EF91
MMP3, AAC, AAC+,
eAAC+, MIDI, WAV,
iMelody, SMAF, AMR
+
-
EL71
MP3,
AAC,
MIDI, WAV
+
-
M315
iMelody, SMAF, MIDI
+
-
WMA,
H.263/3GP
Bluetooth
H.263, MPEG4
AAC+,
H.263/MPEG4
AAC,
AAC+,
AAC+,
MPEG4, 3GP
JPEG,
PNG,
GIF,
WBMP,
BMP
M580
YAMAHA,
iMelody, MIDI
M65
MIDI, WAV
M75
MP3,
AAC,
MIDI, WAV
M81
SMAF,
+
-
3GPP/MPEG4
-
+
3GPP/MPEG4
+
+
MP3,
AAC,
AAC+,
eAAC+, AMR-NB
3GPP/MPEG4
-
+
ME75
AAC,
WAV
3GPP
-
+
P50
MP3,
WAV,
AMR, MIDI
+
+
P51
MP3,
AMR,
MIDI
+
-
S500
iMelody, MIDI QMD,
MP3
-
+
S81
MP3,
AMR
+
-
S65
MIDI, WAV, AMR
3GPP/H.263
+
+
S75
MP3,
AAC,
AAC++
H.263/MPEG4
+
+
S88
MP3, AAC+, AMR
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SK65
MIDI, WAV
PEG4/3GPP/H.263
+
+
SL65
MIDI, WAV
MPEG4/3GPP/H.263
-
+
SL65
ESCADA
MIDI, WAV
MPEG4/3GPP/H.263
-
+
SL75
MP3,
AAC,
AAC++
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
AAC+,
AAC+,
AAC,
WAV,
MIDI,
WMA,
AAC+,
WMA,
AAC+,
MPEG4,
H.263, WMV
3GP,
MS Word, MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF
H.263,
MPEG4/H.263
WMA,
AAC+,
AAC+,
3GPP,
3GPP,
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Fly
Model
Audio
Video
2040
Additional
Bluetooth
Infrared
2040
MP3
MP4, 3GP
+
+
2040i
AAC, M4A, WAV
MP4, 3GP
+
+
2060
MP3
+
-
2080
MP3,
MID
MP4, 3GP
+
-
IQ-110
MID, MP3, WMA, WAV,
AMR
AVI,
WMV
+
-
LX800
Sapphire
MP3,
MID
MP4, 3GP
+
-
MP220
MP3
-
-
MP300
MP3
-
-
MP400
MP3
-
-
MP500
MP3, WAV
MP4, 3GP
-
+
MP600
MP3,
MID
MP4, 3GP
-
-
MX200
MIDI, iMelody, WAV, MP3
MP4, 3GP
-
+
MX200i
MP3,
MID
AAC,
AMR,
WAV,
MP4, 3GP
-
+
MX230
MP3,
MID
AAC,
AMR,
WAV,
MP4, 3GP
+
+
MX300
MIDI, iMelody, WAV, MP3,
AAC, M4A, WAV
MP4, 3GP
+
+
S299
MIDI
-
-
SL300m
MP3,WAV, MIDI
-
+
SL400m
MP3
-
-
SL500i
MP3, WAV, MIDI, iMelody,
AMR, AAC, M4A
+
+
AAC,
AAC,
AAC,
AMR,
AMR,
AMR,
WAV,
WAV,
WAV,
ASF,
MP4, 3GP
MP4, 3GP
JPG, JPEG, GIF,
BMP
SL500m
AMR, AAC, M4A
MP4, 3GP
JPG, JPEG, GIF,
BMP
+
+
SL600
AMR, AAC
MP4, 3GP
JPG, JPEG, GIF,
BMP
+
-
SX210
MP3,
MID
AAC,
AMR,
WAV,
MP4, 3GP
+
+
SX240
MP3,
MID
AAC,
AMR,
WAV,
MP4, 3GP
+
-
TS2050
(Fly
Toshiba)
MP3, AAC, AAC+, AMR
MP4, 3GP
+
-
TS2060
(Fly
Toshiba)
MPEG4, MP3, AAC, AAC+,
AMR, MIDI, SP-MIDI
+
-
V30
MIDI
-
-
VK1500
MP3
-
-
VK2010
MIDI, MP3, AAC, iMelody
+
-
VK2020
MIDI, MP3, AAC, iMelody
+
-
VK3100
MP3, AAC
-
-
VK4500
MP3
+
-
-
-
X10
JPG, BMP, GIF,
PNG
JPG
X3
MIDI, MMF
-
-
X7
MIDI, MMF
-
-
X7a
MIDI, MMF
-
-
Z007
MIDI
-
-
Z200
MIDI
-
-
Z300
MIDI
-
-
Z300a
MIDI, MMF
-
-
Z400
MIDI, MMF
-
-
Z500
MIDI, MMF
-
-
Z600
MP3
-
-
AVS4YOU
Appendix
LG
Model
Audio
Video
C1200
Additional
Bluetooth
Infrared
C1200
AMR, MIDI, iMelody
-
-
C2200
MIDI
-
-
C2500
MP3, AMR, WAV
-
-
C3400
MP3
-
-
C3600
MIDI, MP3
-
-
F1200
MP3
-
-
F3000
MP3, AAC
MJPEG
+
-
F7200
MP3, MMF
MPEG4
+
-
G7100
DXM
-
+
G8000
MP3
-
+
HD4000
MIDI
-
-
KE500
MIDI, MP3, AMR
+
-
KE600
MP3, AAC, AAC+, AAC++
+
+
KE770
MIDI, MP3, AMR
MP4
+
-
KE800
MIDI, MP3, AMR
MP4
+
-
KE970
MIDI, MP3, AMR
3GP
+
-
KG130
MIDI, MP3
-
-
KG200
MIDI, MP3
-
-
KG245
MIDI, MP3
-
-
KG300
MIDI, MP3, AMR
+
-
KG320
MIDI, MP3
-
-
KG800
MP3, AAC
-
+
KG810
MIDI, MP3
-
-
KG920
MIDI, MP3
-
-
MPEG4
3GP
MP4
L1100
MIDI
LP1000
JPEG
-
+
MIDI
-
-
LX5350
MIDI
-
-
M4410
MP3
+
-
M6100
MP3, AAC, WMA
3GP
-
-
P7200
MP3, AAC, AAC+ AAC++
MPEG4
+
-
S5200
AAC, MP3, WMA
3GP
+
-
T5100
AAC,
MIDI
MPEG4
-
+
TD4000
MIDI
-
-
TM520
CMX MIDI
-
-
TM540
CMX MIDI
-
-
U8150
AAC, MP3
MPEG4
+
+
U8200
AAC, MP3
MPEG4
+
+
U8380
MP3
-
-
U880
MMF, MP3
-
-
VX10
CMX MIDI
-
-
VX2000
CMX MIDI
-
-
VX4400
CMX MIDI
-
-
VX6000
CMX MIDI
-
-
AMR,
MP3,
MMF,
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Motorola
Please select your phone model from the list: A630
Model
Audio
Video
Additional
Bluetooth
Infrared
+
-
+
-
A630
MIDI, MP3, WAV
A840
MP3
C118
iMelody
BMP
-
-
C155
AMR, iMelody, MIDI
WBMP,
GIF87/89A,
JPEG, PNG
-
-
C257
MIDI, iMelody
WBMP,
GIF87/89A,
JPEG, PNG
-
-
C261
MIDI, iMelody
WBMP,
GIF87/89A,
JPEG, PNG
-
-
C390
MP3
MPEG4
-
-
E398
MIDI, SP-MIDI, WAV,
MP3, AMR, iMelody
MPEG4+AMR,
H.263+AMR
+
-
E550
AMR, MP3, WAV
+
-
E815
AMR, MP3, WAV
+
-
L2
MIDI, SP-MIDI,
MP3, AMR, AAC
WAV,
MPEG4+AMR,
H.263+AMR
WBMP,
GIF87/89A,
JPEG, PNG
+
-
L6
MIDI, SP-MIDI,
MP3, AMR, AAC
WAV,
MPEG4+AMR,
H.263+AMR
JPEG,
BMP,
EXIF,
WBMP,
GIF87/89A,
PNG
+
-
MOTOKRZR
K1
MIDI, MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
MOTORAZR
Maxx V6
AAC,
AAC+,
AAC+
Enhanced,
AMR
NB,
AMR WB, MP3, RA v9,
WAV, WMA v9, XMF
MPEG4,
H.263, WMV
v9 ,RV v9
+
-
MOTORAZR
V3xx
AAC+, AAC+ Enhanced,
AMR NB, AMR WB, MP3,
WMA v9, XMF
MPEG4, WMV
v9 , H.263
+
-
MPEG4
JPEG,
BMP,
GIF, EXIF
MOTORIZR
MP3, AAC, AAC+, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
MOTOROKR
E1
MIDI, MP3, WAV, AAC
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
MOTOSLVR
L7
MP3, AAC
+
-
MOTOSLVR
L9
MP3, AAC, AAC+, AAC+
enhanced, AMR, WAV
MPEG4
+
-
MPx220
iMelody, MIDI, SP-MIDI,
WAV, MP3, AMR, WMA
MPEG4+AMR,
H.263+AMR
JPEG,
BMP,
EXIF,
WBMP,
GIF87/89A,
PNG
+
+
PEBL
MP3
JPEG
+
-
Q
MIDI, MP3, AAC, WAV,
WMA, WAX, QCELP
+
-
RAZR V3
MIDI, SP-MIDI, WAV,
MP3, AMR, iMelody
MPEG4+AMR,
H.263+AMR
+
-
RAZR V3m
MP3, AAC
MPEG4
+
-
ROKR
AAC, MP3, WMA, MIDI,
SP-MIDI, WAV, AMR,
AAC+
MPEG4
BMP,
GIF,
JPEG, EXIF
+
-
SLVR
AAC, AMR, MIDI, MP3,
MPEG4, WAV
MPEG4
BMP,
EXIF,
GIF,
JPEG,
PNG, WBMP
+
-
-
-
JPEG,
BMP,
EXIF,
WBMP,
GIF87/89A,
PNG
V171
AMR, iMelody, MIDI
JPEG,
BMP,
WBMP,
GIF87/89A,
PNG
V177
MIDI, iMelody
WBMP,
GIF87/89A,
JPEG, PNG
-
-
V180
MIDI, SP-MIDI, WAV,
MP3, AMR, iMelody
MPEG4+AMR,
H.263+AMR
JPEG,
BMP,
EXIF,
WBMP,
GIF87/89A,
PNG
-
-
V220
MIDI, SP-MIDI, WAV,
MP3,
AMR,
iMelody,
MMA, WMA
MPEG4+AMR,
H.263+AMR
JPEG,
BMP,
EXIF,
WBMP,
GIF87/89A,
PNG
-
-
V235
AAC, MP3, MIDI
MPEG4
-
-
V300
AMR, MP3, WAV
-
-
JPEG,
BMP,
GIF, EXIF
V360
MP3, AAC, MIDI
V525
+
-
AMR, MP3
+
-
V550
AMR, MP3
+
-
V557
MP3, WAV
+
-
V600
AMR, MP3, WAV, MIDI,
iMelody
3GP, MPEG4
JPEG,
GIF,
EXIF , BMP
+
-
V635
MP3
MPEG4,
H.263
JPEG,
GIF,
EXIF , BMP
+
-
V80
AMR, MP3
+
-
V980
AMR, MP3, WAV
-
-
W220
MIDI, SP-MIDI,
iMelody
-
-
-
-
W375
MPEG4
AMR,
œ 3
AVS4YOU
Appendix
NEC
Model
Audio
Video
e101
Additional
Bluetooth
Infrared
e101
AMR
JPEG,
WBMP,
BMP, PNG, GIF
-
-
e122
MIDI
JPEG,
WBMP,
PNG,
GIF87a,
GIF89a
-
-
e228
AMR, MIDI, MP3, AAC,
WMA, WAV
MPEG4, WMV
GIF, PNG, BMP,
WBMP, JPEG
-
-
e242
AMR, MP3, MIDI
MPEG 4, 3GP
GIF,
JPEG,
WBMP, BMP
-
+
e313
AMR-NB, MIDI,
WMA, WAV, AAC
MP3,
ASF, MPEG4,
3GP, WMV
GIF, PNG, BMP,
WBMP,
JPG,
JFIF, JPE, JPEG
-
-
e338
AMR-NB, MIDI,
AAC, WMA, WAV
MP3,
MPEG4, WMV
GIF, PNG, BMP,
WBMP, JPEG
-
-
e540
AMR, MP3, MFM, MIDI
(SMF)
MPEG 4, 3GP
GIF,
WBMP,
PNG
+
+
e606
MPEG4 AAC, WMA, AMR,
MIDI (SMF)
MPEG4
JPG, GIF, BMP
+
-
e616
AMR-NB, MIDI,
WMA, WAV, AAC
MP3,
ASF, MPEG4,
3GP, WMV
GIF, PNG, BMP,
WBMP,
JPG,
JFIF, JPE, JPEG
+
-
e616V
AMR-NB, MIDI,
WMA, WAV, AAC
MP3,
ASF, MPEG4,
3GP, WMV
GIF, PNG, BMP,
WBMP,
JPG,
JFIF, JPE, JPEG
+
-
e949
MIDI, MP3
MPEG4
GIF, JPEG
+
-
e959
MP3, AAC,HE-AAC
MPEG4/H.263
+
-
N343i
SMF, AMR, MFI
JPEG,
WBMP,
PNG,
GIF87a,
GIF89a
-
-
N400i
SMF
MPEG4
GIF, JPEG
-
-
N401i
SMF
MPEG4
GIF, JPEG
-
-
JPEG,
BMP,
N410i
SMF
MPEG4
GIF, JPEG
-
-
N411i
MFI,
SMF
(SP-MIDI,
MIDI), iMelody, AAC,
AMR
MPEG4
GIF89a,
GIF87a, JPEG,
PNG, WBMP
+
+
N412i
MP3
MPEG4
JPEG, GIF87a,
GIF89a,
PNG,
WBMP
+
-
N500iS
MP3, AAC, HE-AAC
MPEG4/H.263
+
-
N908
MP3, AAC, AAC+
3GP, MPEG4
+
-
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Nokia
Model
E50
E60
Audio
AAC, MP3
AMR, AAC, MP3, NBAMR, WB-AMR
Video
E50
Additional
Bluetooth
Infrared
3GPP,
RealMedia
JPEG,
MS
Word,
MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF, Mobile
ZIP
+
+
3GP,
3GPP,
H.263,
RealMedia
JPEG,
MS
Word,
MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF, Mobile
ZIP
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
+
+
-
+
-
E61
AMR, AAC, MP3, NBAMR, WB-AMR
3GP,
3GPP,
H.263,
RealMedia
JPEG,
MS
Word,
MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF, Mobile
ZIP
E61i
AAC, MP3
3GPP,
RealMedia
PDF
E65
AAC, MP3
3GPP,
RealMedia
N-Gage
MP3, AAC, MIDI, WAV
E70
MP3, AAC, WAV, NBAMR, WB-AMR
N-Gage QD
MP3, AAC, MIDI, WAV
N70
MP3,
AAC,
Real
Audio, WAV, AMR,
AMR-WB,
AMR-NB,
AU, MIDI, eAAC+
3GP,
3GPP,
H.263,
RealMedia
H.263,
MPEG4,
3GPP
3GP,
JPEG,
MS
Word,
MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF
JPG,
JPEG,
JPEG2000,
EXIF 2.2, GIF
87/89, PNG,
BMP
(WBMP), MBM,
MS Word, MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF
N71
WMA, MP3, eAAC+,
AAC+, M4A, MPEG4
ACC LC, AMR-NB,
AMR-WB,
MIDI,
RealAudio
Voice,
RealAudio7,
RealAudio8
H.263,
MPEG4, 3GPP
JPEG,
JPEG2000,
EXIF 2.2, GIF
87/89, PNG,
BMP
(WBMP), MBM
+
+
N72
SP-MIDI,
WB-AMR,
MP3,
AAC,
eAAC,
eAAC+, RealAudio
H.263,
MPEG4, 3GPP,
RealVideo
JPEG,
MS
Word,
MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF
+
-
N73
SP-MIDI,
WB-AMR,
MP3,
AAC,
eAAC,
eAAC+,
RealAudio,
WMA
H.263,
MPEG4, 3GPP,
RealVideo
JPEG,
MS
Word,
MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF
+
+
N76
MP3,
WAV,
MIDI,
AAC, eAAC, eAAC+,
M4A, WMA
+
-
3GPP, MPEG4
AVC
JPEG,
MS
Word,
MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF
+
+
3GP,
AVI,
H.263, MPEG1, MPEG-4, RV
(Real Video)
BMP,
GIF,
ICO,
JPEG,
PNG,
TIFF,
SVG-tiny,
PDF
+
-
N90
MP3,
AAC,
Real
Audio, WAV, AMR,
AMR-WB,
AMR-NB,
AU, MIDI, eAAC+
H.263,
MPEG4+AACLC
JPEG,
JPEG2000,
EXIF 2.2, GIF
87/89, PNG,
BMP
(WBMP), MBM,
MS Word, MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF
+
-
N91
MP3, AAC, AAC+,
eAAC+,
Real
V8,
WAV, WMA, M4A,
AWB, SP-Midi, AMR,
WB-AMR, AMR-NB
H.263,
MPEG4, Real
Video 8, 3GPP
JPEG,
GIF
87a/89a,
WBMP, BMP,
PNG
+
-
N92
MP3, AAC, AAC+,
eAAC+, WAV, Nokia
Ring
Tones, AMR,
AMR-WB,AMR-NB,
AU, MIDI, WMA, M4A,
RealAudio
Voice,
RealAudio7,
RealAudio8
H.263, MPEG4, H.264 AVC,
Real Video
JPEG,
JPEG2000,
EXIF 2.2, GIF
87/89, PNG,
BMP
(WBMP), MBM
+
+
N80
MP3,
AAC,
eAAC+, WMA
eAAC,
N800
AAC, AMR, MP2, MP3,
RA (RealAudio), WAV,
WMA
N93
MP3,
AAC,
AAC+, WMA
eAAC,
eAAC,
MPEG-4,
H.264/AVC,
H.263/3GPP,
RealVideo
8/9/10
JPEG, EXIF
+
+
MPEG-4,
H.264/AVC,
H.263/3GPP,
RealVideo
8/9/10
JPEG, EXIF
+
+
MPEG-4,
H.264/AVC,
H.263/3GPP,
RealVideo
8/9/10
JPEG, EXIF
+
+
-
-
N93i
MP3,
AAC,
AAC+, WMA
N95
MP3,
AAC,
eAAC,
AAC+, WMA, eAAC+,
M4A
2626
AMR, MP3, MIDI
3200
MIDI
JPEG, PNG
-
-
3230
AMR,
MIDI
JPEG,
GIF87a/89a,
EXIF, WBMP,
BMP,
MBM,
PNG
+
+
3250
eAAC+, MPEG4 AAC,
MP3, ARM-NB, ARMWB, MIDI, RealAudio
Voice,
RealAudio7,
RealAudio8,
RealAudio10, WMA
+
-
3300
AAC, MP3
-
-
3650
MIDI,
RealAudio
3GP (MPEG4
H.263),
RealVideo
+
+
3660
WAV, RealAudio
3GP (MPEG4
H.263),
RealVideo
+
+
H.263
-
+
H.263
-
+
MP3,
WAV,
WAV,
5140
H.263
Real Video
5140i
AMR, MP3, MIDI
5200
MP3, SP-MIDI, AAC,
AAC+, AAC+
+
+
5300
XpressMusic
MP3,
MIDI,
AAC,
AAC+, AAC+, WMA
+
+
5500
MIDI,
MP3,
AMR,
AAC, eAAC+, AAC+,
H.263,
MPEG4,
Real
JPEG,
GIF,
EXIF, WBMP,
BMP,
MBM,
PNG,
MS
5500
AAC, eAAC+, AAC+,
WMA, Real Audio
5510
AAC, MP3
5700
XpressMusic
MP3, AAC,
eAAC+, WMA
AAC+,
MPEG4,
Video
Real
3GP/MPEG-4
SP,
MPEG-4
AVC
PNG,
MS
Word,
MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF
+
+
-
-
JPEG
+
+
JPEG,
GIF,
animated
GIF,
BMP,
WBMP
-
-
6020
MIDI
6060
MP3, MIDI
-
-
6070
MP3, MIDI
-
+
6080
AMR, MP3, MIDI
-
+
6101
MP3, MIDI
3GPP
(H.263+AMR,
MPEG4+AMR)
-
+
6103
MP3, MIDI
3GPP
(H.263+AMR,
MPEG4+AMR)
+
+
6111
AMR, AAC, MP3, MIDI
3GPP
(H.263+AMR,
MPEG4+AMR)
+
+
6125
AMR, MP3, MP4, AAC,
AAC+, eAAC+, WMA,
MIDI
3GPP
(H.263+AMR,
MPEG4+AMR)
+
+
6131
MP3,
MP4,
AAC,
AAC+, eAAC+, WMA,
MIDI
H.263, H.264
(eAAC+),
3GPP
+
-
6151
MP3,
M4A
3GPP (H.263,
MPEG4)
+
+
-
+
H.263
-
+
6170
AAC,
eAAC+,
AMR, MP3
6220
3GPP
(H.263+AMR,
MPEG4+AMR)
JPEG,
GIF,
animated
GIF,
BMP,
WBMP
6230
AMR, MP3, AAC
3GPP
(H.263+AMR,
MPEG4+AMR)
+
+
6230i
AMR, AAC, MP3, M4A,
MIDI
3GPP
(H.263+AMR,
MPEG4+AMR)
+
+
6233
AMR,
MP3,
MP4,
eAAC+, AAC, MIDI
6260
MP3
6270
AMR, AAC, MP3, M4A,
MIDI
6280
6288
3GPP
(H.263+AMR,
MPEG4+AMR)
+
+
+
+
3GPP
(H.263+AMR,
MPEG4+AMR)
+
+
AMR, AAC, MP3, M4A,
MIDI
3GPP
(H.263+AMR,
MPEG4+AMR)
+
+
MP3,
AMR
3GPP/MP4
+
+
+
+
H.263, H.264
+
-
+
+
MS Word, MS
PowerPoint
AAC,
eAAC+,
6290
MP3, eAAC+
6300
MP3,
MP4,
AAC+, eAAC+
6600
WAV
RealMedia,
3GPP
AMR, MP3, WAV, AAC
3GPP
(H.263+AMR,
MPEG4+AMR),
Real Video
JPEG,
GIF87a/89a,
EXIF, WBMP,
BMP,
MBM,
PNG
+
-
3GPP
(H.263+AMR,
MPEG4+AMR),
Real Video
JPEG,
GIF87a/89a,
DCF
(readonly), WBMP,
BMP,
MBM,
PNG,
MS
Word,
MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF
+
-
3GPP
(H.263+AMR,
MPEG4+AMR),
Real Video
JPEG,
GIF87a/89a,
DCF
(readonly), WBMP,
BMP,
MBM,
PNG,
MS
Word,
MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF
+
-
6630
6670
6680
MP4/3GPP
MS Word, MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF
AAC,
AMR,
MP3,
WAV,
AAC, MIDI, SP-MIDI
AMR,
MP3,
Audio, AAC
Real
JPEG,
GIF87a/89a,
DCF
(read-
6681
AMR,
MP3,
Audio, AAC
Real
3GPP
(H.263+AMR,
MPEG4+AMR),
Real Video
only), WBMP,
BMP,
MBM,
PNG,
MS
Word,
MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF
JPEG,
GIF87a,
GIF89a,
WBMP, PNG
+
-
-
+
6800
MIDI, SP-MIDI
6810
AMR
+
+
6820
AMR
+
+
6822
AMR
+
+
7200
MIDI
JPEG, PNG
-
+
7250i
AMR
JPEG, PNG
-
+
7260
MIDI
-
+
7270
MP3, AAC, MIDI
-
+
7280
AMR, MIDI
+
+
3GP
JPEG,
MS
Word,
MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF
-
+
MPEG, H.263,
MPEG4
JPEG,
GIF,
EXIF, WBMP,
BMP,
MBM,
PNG,
MS
Word,
MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF
+
-
3GP
JPEG,
MS
Word,
MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF
+
-
+
-
+
+
7360
7370
3GP
(H.263,
MPEG4)
3GPP
MP3, AAC, MIDI
MP3,
AMR,
AAC, M4A
MIDI,
7373
MP3,
AAC,
eAAC+, AAC+
7380
AMR, MP3, AAC, M4A,
MIDI
7390
MP3,
AAC,
eAAC+, AAC+
M4A,
M4A,
JPEG, PNG
3GP
3GPP, H.263,
MPEG4
JPEG,
MS
Word,
MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint,
PDF
7600
MP3, AAC
3GPP
+
+
7610
AMR, MP3, AAC
3GPP (H.263,
MPEG4), Real
Video
JPEG,
GIF87a/89a,
EXIF,
DCF,
WBMP, BMP,
MBM, PNG
+
-
7700
MP3, AAC, RealAudio
7 & 8, WAV, MIDI,
AMR-NB
3GPP (H.263,
MPEG4), Real
Video
JPEG,
GIF,
BMP,
PNG
animated GIF
+
-
3GPP (H.263,
MPEG4), Real
Video
JPEG,
GIF,
WBMP, BMP,
MBM,
PNG,
D51TIFF/F,
animated
GIF,
Macromedia
Flash 6
+
-
7710
MP3, AAC, RealAudio
7 & 8, WAV, MIDI,
AMR
8800
MP3, AAC, MIDI
+
-
8800 Sirocco
Edition
MP3, AAC, MIDI
+
-
9110
Communicator
WAV
JPEG, GIF
+
-
9210i
Communicator
WAV,
AU,
WVE,
RealAudio 7 & 8, RNG
RealVideo 7 &
8
GIF,
CGM,
Corel/Novell
SHW,
MBM,
SDW,
PCX,
DCX,
PNG,
JPG,
JIF,
VSD,
BMP,
RLE,
ICO,
CUR,
WMF,
EM,
Macromedia
Flash,
ZIP,
TAR,
TAZ,
TGZ,
MS
Word,
MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint
+
-
9300
MP3,
AAC,
Audio, MIDI
Real
3GPP (H.263,
MPEG4), Real
Video
MS Word, MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint
+
+
9300i
MP3,
AAC,
Audio, MIDI
Real
3GPP (H.263,
MPEG4), Real
Video
MS Word, MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint
+
+
9500
Communicator
AMR,
MP3,
MIDI, AAC
WAV,
3GPP (H.263,
MPEG4), Real
Video
MS Word, MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint
+
+
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Panasonic
Model
Audio
Video
A500
Additional
Bluetooth
Infrared
GIF, JPEG, PNG,
WBMP
-
+
A500
MIDI
MX6
MP3
H.263,
MPEG4
-
+
MX7
MP3
H.263,
MPEG4
+
-
H.263,
MPEG4
JPEG,
WBMP,
GIF 87a, 89a,
Animated GIF,
PNG (including
transparency),
SVG Tiny 1.1
-
+
H.263,
MPEG4
JPEG,
WBMP,
GIF 87a, 89a,
Animated GIF,
PNG (including
transparency),
SVG Tiny 1.1
+
+
H.263,
MPEG4
JPEG,
WBMP,
GIF 87a, 89a,
Animated GIF,
PNG (including
transparency),
SVG Tiny 1.1
-
+
JPEG,
WBMP,
GIF 87a, 89a,
Animated GIF,
PNG (including
transparency),
SVG Tiny 1.1
-
+
+
+
-
+
SA6
SA7
VS2
SMF, SMAF, SMAF Phrase,
SP-MIDI,
WAV,
AAC,
AAC+, MP3, AMR-NB
SP-MIDI,
WAV,
AAC,
AAC+, MP3, AMR-NB
SP-MIDI,
WAV,
AAC,
AAC+, MP3, AMR-NB
VS3
SP-MIDI,
WAV,
AAC,
AAC+, MP3, AMR-NB
H.263,
MPEG4
VS6
MP3
H.263,
MPEG4
VS7
SP-MIDI,
WAV,
AAC,
AAC+, MP3, AMR-NB
H.263,
MPEG4
JPEG,
WBMP,
GIF 87a, 89a,
Animated GIF,
PNG (including
transparency),
SVG Tiny 1.1
X200
SMAF
X300
SMAF
X400
MIDI
X500
SMAF
X700
AMR, WAV
X701
AMR, WAV, MMF, MP3
X800
AMR, WAV
JPEG
-
+
JPEG
-
-
JPEG
-
+
MotionJPEG
JPEG
-
-
RealMedia,
3GPP,
MPEG4
H.263
MS Word,
Excel,
PowerPoint
+
+
+
+
+
+
H.263
H.263,
MPEG4
MS Word,
Excel,
PowerPoint
MS
MS
MS
MS
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Pantech
Model
Audio
Video
C300
Additional
Bluetooth
Infrared
C300
G-MIDI, iMelody, MP3
-
-
G300
IMY, MIDI, MMF
-
-
G500
IMY, MIDI, MMF
-
-
G600
IMY, MIDI, MMF
-
-
G670
IMY, MIDI, MMF
-
-
G700
IMY, MIDI, MMF
-
-
G800
IMY, MIDI, MMF
+
-
G900
IMY, MIDI, MMF
-
-
GB100
IMY, MIDI
-
-
GB200
IMY, MIDI
-
-
GB300
IMY, MIDI, MMF
-
-
GF100
IMY, MIDI, MMF
-
-
GF200
IMY, MIDI, MMF
-
+
GF500
IMY, MIDI, MMF, MP3
-
+
GI100
IMY, MIDI, MMF
-
-
PG-1000S
IMY, MIDI
-
-
PG-1200
IMY, MIDI, MMF, MP3
-
-
PG-1400
IMY, MIDI, MMF, MP3
-
-
PG-1405
IMY, MIDI, MMF
-
-
PG-1500
IMY, MIDI, MMF, MP3
-
-
PG-1600
IMY, MIDI, MMF, MP3
MJPEG
-
-
PG-1800
MP3
MJPEG
+
-
PG-1900
MIDI, MMF, MP3, iMelody
MJPEG
-
-
PG-2800
iMelody, MIDI, MMF, MP3
MJPEG
-
-
MJPEG
PG-3000
IMY, MIDI, MMF, MP3
-
+
PG-3200
IMY, MIDI, MMF, MP3
-
-
PG-3300
IMY, MIDI, MMF, MP3
MJPEG
-
+
PG-3500
IMY, MIDI,
AAC, AAC+
MMF,
MP3,
MPEG4
+
-
PG-3600
IMY, MIDI,
AAC, AAC+
MMF,
MP3,
MPEG4
+
-
PG-3600V
MP3, AAC, AAC+, WMA
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
PG-3700
IMY, MIDI,
AAC+, AMR
MPEG4,
H.263,
3GPP
-
-
MJPEG
-
+
MP3,
AAC,
PG-3800
MS Word, MS
Excel,
MS
PowerPoint, PDF
PG-3900
MP3, AAC, AAC+, SMF,
MIDI
MPEG4,
H.263
+
+
PG-6100
IMY, MIDI,
AAC, AAC+
MJPEG
+
+
PG-6200
MP3, AAC, AAC+, AMR
MPEG4
+
-
PG-8000
IMY, MIDI,
AAC, AAC+
MPEG4
+
+
S100
MP3
MJPEG
+
-
U4000
MP3, AAC, AAC+, AAC++
MPEG4
+
-
U5000
MP3,
AAC,
SMF(MIDI)
MPEG4,
H.263
+
+
MMF,
MMF,
MP3,
MP3,
AAC+,
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Philips
Model
Audio
Video
162
Additional
Bluetooth
Infrared
162
MIDI, SP-MIDI
BMP, GIF, GIF
(87a & 89a),
JPEG
-
-
355
AMR, ADPCM, MIDI, SPMIDI
BMP, GIF (87a &
89a), JPEG
-
-
362
AMR, MIDI
BMP, GIF, GIF
(87a & 89a),
JPEG
-
+
390
AMR, MIDI,
MIDI, AAC
MPEG4,
3GP
BMP, GIF (87a &
89a), JPEG
-
-
568
AMR, MIDI, SP-MIDI
3GP, H.263
BMP, GIF, GIF
(87a & 89a),
JPEG
-
-
588
AMR, MIDI,
MIDI, WAV
MP3,
SP-
MPEG4,
H.263
BMP, GIF, JPEG
-
+
598
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
MIDI, AAC, WAV
SP-
MPEG4,
H.263
BMP, GIF, JPEG
+
-
655
ADPCM, AMR, MIDI, SPMIDI
BMP, GIF, GIF
(87a & 89a),
JPEG
-
+
760
BMP, GIF (87a &
89a), JPEG
-
+
766
MIDI, SMAF, iMelody
BMP, GIF, JPEG,
PNG
-
-
768
AMR, MIDI, MP3, SMAF,
AAC
JPEG
+
+
9@98
Xenium
MIDI, SP-MIDI
BMP, GIF (87a &
89a), JPEG
-
-
9@9a
Xenium
MIDI
BMP, GIF, GIF
(87a & 89a),
JPEG
-
-
9@9d
Xenium
AMR, MIDI
BMP, GIF, GIF
(87a & 89a),
JPEG
+
+
MP3,
SP-
3GP, H.263
9@9e
Xenium
BMP, GIF, GIF
(87a & 89a),
JPEG
-
+
9@9f
Xenium
MIDI
BMP, GIF, GIF
(87a & 89a),
JPEG
-
-
9@9g
Xenium
AMR, MIDI
BMP, GIF, GIF
(87a & 89a),
JPEG
+
+
9@9i
Xenium
BMP, GIF, GIF
(87a & 89a),
JPEG
-
+
9@9m
Xenium
AMR, MIDI, MP3, SP-MIDI
H.263, 3GP
JPEG
+
+
9@9r
Xenium
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
MIDI, AAC, WAV
H.263,
MPEG4
BMP, GIF, JPEG
+
-
9@9t
Xenium
AMR, MIDI, SP-MIDI, MP3
BMP, GIF, GIF
(87a & 89a),
JPEG
-
+
960
AMR, MIDI, MP3, SMAF,
AAC
JPEG
+
+
968
AMR, MIDI, MP3
BMP, GIF (87a &
89a), JPEG, PNG
-
-
S200
MIDI
-
-
S220
MIDI
BMP, GIF, GIF
(87a & 89a)
-
-
S660
BMP, GIF (87a &
89a), JPEG, PNG
-
-
S800
BMP, GIF (87a &
89a), JPEG, PNG
-
-
S890
BMP, GIF (87a &
89a), JPEG
-
-
S900
MIDI, MP3, AMR
BMP, GIF, JPEG
-
-
SP-
3GP, H.263
3GP,
MPEG4
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Sagem
Model
Audio
Video
my405X
Additional
Bluetooth
Infrared
my405X
MP3
-
-
my501C
MP3, AAC
+
-
my600X
MP3, AAC+, eAAC+
+
-
my700X
MP3, AAC, AAC+, eAAC+,
WAV
+
-
my800X
MP3, AAC, AAC+, eAAC+
+
-
myC-2
AMR, iMelody, MIDI, WAV
BMP, GIF, JPEG,
PNG
-
-
myC2-2
BMP, GIF, JPEG,
PNG
-
-
myC3-2j
(PCM, ADPCM), MP3
-
-
myC5-2
-
-
myC5-2v
MP3, AAC
-
-
myS-7
AMR, MIDI, WAV, MP3,
WMA
JPEG
+
+
myX-2
JPEG
-
-
myX-3
BMP, GIF, JPEG,
PNG
-
-
myX3-2
-
+
myX-3d
-
+
myX-4
AMR, MIDI
-
-
myX5-2
AMR, WAV
JPEG
-
+
myX-6
BMP,
GIF,
animated
GIF,
JPEG, PNG
-
+
JPEG
MPEG4
BMP, GIF, JPEG,
PNG
myX6-2
AMR,
iMelody,
MIDI,
WAV,
AAC,
HE-AAC
(AAC+)
myX-7
WMA
myX-8
WMA
myZ-5
MP3, AAC
BMP,
GIF,
animated
GIF,
JPEG, PNG
+
+
MPEG4
JPEG
-
+
MPEG4
JPEG
+
+
-
-
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Samsung
Model
Audio
Video
D500
Additional
Bluetooth
Infrared
D500
MIDI
H.263,
3GP,
MPEG4
-
-
Javelin
MP3
MPEG4
-
-
MM-A900
MP3
MPEG4
+
-
MM-A920
MP3
MPEG4
+
-
MPEG4
+
+
+
-
SCH-A890
SCH-A950
MP3, AAC
SCH-S350
MP3, AAC
MPEG4,
3GP
+
-
SCH-V500
MP3, AAC
MPEG4,
3GP
+
-
SCH-V600
MP3, AAC
MPEG4,
3GP
+
-
SCH-V770
MP3
MPEG4
+
+
SGH-D300
MP3, AAC
-
-
SGH-D307
MP3, AAC
+
-
SGH-D410
SMAF
Motion JPG
-
+
SGH-D500
MP3, SMAF, AAC
MPEG4,
H.263
+
+
SGH-D520
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-D600
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
+
SGH-D700
MIDI, WAV, MP3
MPEG4,
H.263/AMR
+
+
SGH-D710
MIDI, WAV, MP3
-
+
SGH-D720
WMA, MP3, AAC, AAC+
+
+
MPEG4,
H.263
JPEG
MPEG4,
3GP, Real
Video
+
-
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4
+
-
SGH-D820
MP3, WMA, AAC, AAC+,
eAAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
MS Word,
PowerPoint
+
-
SGH-D830
MP3, AAC, AAC+, WMA
MPEG4,
H.263
MS Word, MS
PowerPoint, MS
Excel
+
-
SGH-D840
MP3,
AAC,
AAC+(e), WMA
AAC+,
MPEG4,
H.263
MS Word, MS
PowerPoint, MS
Excel
+
-
SGH-D870
MP3,
AAC,
AAC+(e)
AAC+,
MPEG4,
H.263
MS Word, MS
PowerPoint, MS
Excel
+
-
SGH-D900
MP3,
AAC,
AAC+(e)
AAC+,
MPEG4,
H.263
MS Word, MS
PowerPoint, MS
Excel
+
-
SGHD900i
MP3,
AAC,
AAC+(e)
AAC+,
MPEG4,
H.263
MS Word, MS
PowerPoint, MS
Excel
+
-
SGH-E250
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-E300
iMeldody,
AMR
SMAF,
MIDI,
MJPEG
-
+
SGH-E310
iMelody,
SMAF,
(SMF), AMR
MIDI
-
+
SGHE350E
MP3
MPEG4,
H.263
-
+
SGH-E360
MP3
MPEG4,
H.263
-
+
SGH-E370
MP3
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-E380
MP3, AAC, AAC+, WMA
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-E390
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-E480
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-E490
MP3, AAC
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-D730
MP3, MIDI,
Audio, AAC
SGH-D800
WAV,
Real
MS
SGH-E500
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-E530
MP3, AAC
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-E570
H.263, AMR
+
-
SGH-E600
MJPEG
-
-
SGH-E610
SMAF
MJPEG
-
+
SGH-E620
MP3
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-E630
MP3, AAC
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-E700
SMAF
-
+
SGH-E710
SMAF, MIDI (SMF)
-
+
SGH-E720
MP3
+
-
SGH-E730
MP3, AAC
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-E750
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-E760
MP3, AAC, AAC+
H.263,
3GP,
MPEG4
+
-
SGH-E770
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
MJPEG
SGH-E780
WBMP, GIF
AGIF, JPEG
&
SGH-E790
MP3, AAC, AAC+, AAC++,
WMA
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-E830
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
MJPEG
-
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
SGH-E850
SGH-E870
MP3, AAC, AAC+, WMA
MPEG4,
H.263
SGH-E900
MP3,
AAC,
AAC+(e), WMA
MPEG4,
H.263
SGH-F300
MP3, AAC,
AAC+, WMA
AAC+,
AAC+,
e-
MPEG4,
H.263
MS Word, MS
PowerPoint, MS
Excel
SGH-i300
WMA, MP3, AAC, AAC+,
Ogg Vorbis
WMV,
MPEG4,
H.263,
H.264
SGH-i310
MP3,
AAC,
AAC+,
AAC+(e), WMA, WAV,
Ogg Vorbis
H.263,
H.264
SGH-i320
MP3, AAC, AAC+, WMA,
WAV, Ogg Vorbis
MPEG4,
H.263
SGH-i520
MMF, XMF, WAV, M4A,
MP3,
AAC,
AAC+,
RealAudio, WMA
+
+
MS Word, MS
PowerPoint, MS
Excel
+
-
MS Word, MS
PowerPoint, MS
Excel
+
-
H.263,
MPEG4,
H.264,
Real, WMV
+
-
SGH-i600
MP3, AAC, AAC+, WMA,
WAV
H.263,
H.264,
MPEG4,
WMV
+
-
SGH-i700
MP3
MPEG4,
H.263, ASF
-
+
SGH-i710
AAC, AAC+, WMA, MP3,
WAV
MPEG4,
H.263,
H.264,
WMV
+
-
SGH-i750
AMR, MP3
MPEG4,
H263
+
+
SGH-P200
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
-
-
SGH-P207
MP3, AAC
MPEG4,
3GP
-
-
SGH-P300
MP3, AAC
MPEG4,
3GP
+
+
SGH-P310
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-P730
MP3
H.263,
MPEG4,
ASF
-
+
SGH-P738
MP3
MPEG4
-
+
SGH-P900
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-P910
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGHS400i
AAC, M4A
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
MS Pocket Office
SGHS410i
MP3, AAC
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGHS500i
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-T100
MP3, AAC
-
-
SGH-T500
MP3, AAC
-
-
SGH-T809
MP3, AAC
MPEG4,
3GP
+
-
SGH-U100
MP3, AAC, AAC+,
AAC+, WMA, WMDRM
e-
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-U300
MP3, AAC, eAAC+, WMA,
WMDRM
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-U600
MP3, AAC,
AAC+, WMA
e-
MPEG4,
H.263, AAC
+
-
SGH-U700
MP3, AAC, eAAC+, WMA,
WMDRM
MPEG4,
H.263, Real
+
-
SGH-V100
SMAF
MPEG4
-
+
SGH-V200
SMAF
-
+
SGH-X670
MP3, AAC, AAC+
+
-
+
-
+
-
AAC+,
SGH-X630
H.263, AMR
MS Word, MS
PowerPoint, MS
Excel
SGH-X700
MP3
SGH-X800
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-X810
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-X820
MP3,
AAC,
AAC+(e), WMA
AAC+,
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-X830
MP3,
AAC,
AAC+(e), WMA
AAC+,
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-X900
MP3, AAC
-
-
SGH-Z105
MP3
-
-
SGHZ107v
SMAF
-
+
SGH-Z130
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-Z140
MP3, AAC, AAC+
H.263, 3GP
-
+
SGH-Z150
Real Audio
eAAC+
+
-
SGH-Z300
Real Audio
MPEG4,
H.263, Real
Video
+
+
SGH-Z310
Real Audio
MPEG4,
H.263, Real
Video
+
-
SGH-Z320i
Real Audio
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-Z330
Real Audio
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-Z350
Real Audio
MPEG4,
H.263, Real
Video
+
-
SGH-Z400
MP3,
AAC,
AAC+(e)
MPEG4,
H.263
+
-
SGH-Z500
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263,
H.264
+
+
SGH-Z510
MP3, AAC, AAC++, eAAC,
WMA
MPEG4,
3GP
+
-
SGH-Z520
Real Audio
MPEG4,
H.263, Real
Video
MS Word,
Excel, PDF
MS
+
-
SGH-Z540
eAAC+, RealAudio
MPEG4,
H.263, Real
Video
MS Word,
PowerPoint
MS
+
-
SGH-Z550
MP3,
AAC,
AAC+(e)
MPEG4,
H.263, Real
Video
MS Word,
PowerPoint
MS
+
-
SGH-Z560
eAAC+
MPEG4,
H.263, Real
Video
MS Word,
Excel, PDF
MS
+
-
SGH-Z600
RealAudio
MPEG4,
H.263, Real
Video
MS Word,
PowerPoint
MS
+
+
SGH-Z700
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.263
+
+
SGH-Z710
MP3, AAC, AAC++, WMA
MPEG4,
H.263, Real
Video
MS Word, MS
PowerPoint, MS
Excel, PDF
+
-
SGH-Z720
MP3, AAC,
AAC+, WMA
MPEG4,
H.263, AMR
PDF, HTML,JPG,
TXT
+
-
AAC+,
AAC+,
AAC+,
e-
MS Word,
Excel, PDF
MS Word,
PowerPoint
MS
MS
SPH-A800
MP3
MPEG4
+
-
SPHV7800
MP3, AAC
MPEG4
+
+
SPHV7900
MP3, AAC, AAC+
MPEG4,
H.264
-
+
Thor
MP3
MPEG4
+
-
Microsoft Office,
Macromedia
Flash
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Sharp
Model
Audio
Video
550SH
Additional
Bluetooth
Infrared
550SH
MP3, AAC, AAC+, AAC+e
H.263+AMR
+
-
703
MP3, AAC, AAC+
H.263+AMR
+
+
770SH
MP3, AAC, AAC+, AAC+e
H.263+AMR
+
-
902
SMAF, MP3
3GP
+
+
903
MP3, AAC, AAC+
H.263+AMR
+
+
GX15
AMR, SMAF
+
+
GX25
AMR, SMAF
+
+
GX29
SMAF, MIDI
+
-
GX-E30
AMR,
SMAF,
iMelody, MP3
+
+
GX-F200
AMR, SMAF, MIDI, MMF
+
+
GX-L15
AMR, SMAF
+
+
GX-T300
AAC, MP3
+
-
TM100
SMAF,
AMR
BMP,
WBMP,
PNG,
WPNG,
GIF, NVA
-
+
TM200
AAC, MP3, SMAF, MIDI,
iMelody, WAVE, AMR
JPEG
+
-
WX-T71
MP3, AAC, AAC+
H.263 (with
AMR audio)
+
+
WX-T81
MP3, AAC, AAC+
H.263/MPEG4
(with
AMR
audio)
+
-
MIDI,
GIF, BMP, PNG,
WBMP, WPNG,
NEVa
GIF, BMP, PNG,
WBMP, WPNG,
NEVa
H.263+AMR
MIDI,
3GP
GIF, BMP, PNG,
WBMP, WPNG,
NEVa
GIF, BMP, PNG
iMelody,
3GPP (H.263,
MPEG4)
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Siemens
Model
Audio
Video
C65
Additional
JPEG
Bluetooth
Infrared
-
+
C65
AMR
C75
AMR, WAV
-
+
CF62
AMR
-
-
CF75
MIDI, SP MIDI, AMR, WAV
-
+
CFX65
AMR
-
+
CL75
AMR
-
+
CX65
AMR, MIDI, WAV
-
+
CX70
AMR, MIDI, WAV
-
+
CX75
AMR, AAC, MP3
+
+
M55
AMR, WAV
-
-
M65
AMR, MIDI, WAV
-
+
M75
AMR, AAC, MP3
+
+
MC60
AMR, WAV
-
-
ME75
MIDI, WAV
MPEG4,
3GP
-
+
P50
MP3, WAV, WMA, AMR,
MIDI
MPEG4,
3GP,
H.263,
WMV
+
+
S55
SMAF, MIDI, AMR, MMF
+
+
S65
AMR, WAV, MP3
MPEG4
JPEG
+
+
S75
MP3, AAC, AAC++
MP4, Real
Video
8,
MPEG4
MS Word, MS
Excel,
PDF,
Mobile ZIP
+
+
SF65
MIDI, SP MIDI, WAV
JPEG, GIF, BMP,
WBMP
-
+
JPEG, GIF, PNG,
BMP, WBMP
3GPP, H263
JPEG
BMP,
WBMP,
JPEG, GIF, PNG
MS Word, MS
Excel, PDF, MS
PowerPoint
SK65
AMR, MIDI, SP MIDI, WAV
SL55
AMR, SMAF
SL65
AMR, WAV
SL75
SX1
MPEG4,
H.263
+
+
-
+
MPEG4,
3GPP H.263
-
+
AMR, AAC, AAC+, MP3
MP4,
MPEG4,
Real Video
8
+
+
AMR, AMR
WAV, MP3
MPEG4,
H.263, Real
Video
+
+
Real
Audio,
JPEG
JPEG, MS Word,
MS Excel
AVS4YOU
Appendix
SonyEricsson
Model
Audio
Video
F500i
Additional
3GPP,
MPEG4
Bluetooth
Infrared
-
+
F500i
AMR, MIDI, MP3
J100i
MP3 (option)
-
-
J210i
AMR, MP3 (option)
-
+
J300i
AMR, MIDI, MP3, AAC
MPEG4
-
+
K300i
AMR, MIDI, MP3, AAC
3GP
JPEG
-
+
K310i
AMR, MIDI, MP3, AAC
3GP
JPEG
-
+
K320i
AMR, MIDI, MP3, AAC
3GP
JPEG
+
+
K500i
AMR, MIDI, MP3, AAC
3GP,
MPEG4
JPEG
-
+
K510i
AMR, MIDI, MP3, AAC
3GP,
MPEG4
JPEG
+
+
K550i
AMR, MIDI, MP3, AAC
MPEG4
JPEG
+
+
K600i
AMR, MIDI, MP3, AAC
MPEG4
JPEG
+
+
K610i
AMR, MIDI, MP3, AAC
MPEG4
JPEG
+
-
K618
JPEG
+
-
K700i
AMR, MIDI, MP3, AAC
MPEG4
JPEG
+
+
K750i
AMR, MIDI, MP3, AAC
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
K790i
AMR, MIDI, MP3, AAC
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
K800i
AMR, MIDI, MP3, AAC
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
K810i
AMR, MIDI, MP3, AAC
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
M600i
AMR, MIDI, MP3, AAC
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
M608c
MP3, AAC, ACC+, eAAC+,
m4a
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
P1i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
MPEG4
JPEG, MS Word,
MS Excel, MS
PowerPoint, PDF
+
+
P800
AMR, WAV
JPEG, MS Word,
MS Excel, MS
PowerPoint, PDF
+
+
P900
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, MS Word,
MS Excel, MS
PowerPoint, PDF
+
+
P910i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, MS Word,
MS Excel, MS
PowerPoint, PDF
+
+
P990i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1, MS Word,
MS Excel, MS
PowerPoint, PDF
+
+
S500i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
S700i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
T610
AMR, MIDI
JPEG
+
+
T630
AMR, MIDI
JPEG
+
+
T650i
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
-
V630i
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
-
V800
SMAF, MP3, AAC
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
W200i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
-
+
W300i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
W550i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
W580i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
-
W610i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
W660i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
-
AAC,
W700i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
W710i
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
W800i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
W810i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
W850i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
W880i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
-
W900i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
W950i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
Z1010
AMR, MP3, WAV
MPEG4
JPEG
+
+
Z300i
AMR, MIDI
-
-
Z520i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
Z525
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
Z530i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
Z550i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
Z600
AMR, MIDI
Z610i
Z710i
AMR, MIDI
Z800i
AMR, MIDI, MP3,
WAV
AAC,
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
-
JPEG
+
+
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
-
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
MPEG4
JPEG, SVG Tiny
1.1
+
+
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Toshiba
Model
Portégé
G500
Audio
MP3,
AAC,
AAC+,
eAAC+, WMA, AMRNB
Video
Portégé G500
Additional
Bluetooth
Infrared
+
-
-
-
H.263/MPEG4,
WMV
TS 10
JPEG
TS 605
MP3, AAC, AAC+
AMR/MPEG4,
H.263/MPEG4
+
-
TS 608
AMR, MP3, AAC+
MPEG4/AMR/AAC
+
-
TS 705
MP3,
ACC,
ACC+,
Enhanced AAC+, XMF,
SMAF
MPEG 4, H.263
+
-
TS 803
SP-MIDI, SMAF, XMF,
MP3, AAC, AMR
H.263,
Real,
MPEG4, 3GPP
+
+
TS 808
MP3, ACC, ACC+, XMF,
SMAF
MPEG 4, H.263
+
-
TS 921
SP-MIDI, SMAF, XMF,
MP3, AAC, AMR
H.263,
Real,
MPEG4, 3GPP
+
+
JPEG,
GIF,
PNG, SVG Tiny
JPEG,
PNG
GIF,
AVS4YOU
Appendix
AVS DVD Player Frequently Asked Questions
Table of contents
1. Is there a user guide or manual available for this software?
2. What are audio and video codecs?
3. I cannot load my movie to playback it with the AVS DVD Player and get an error message.
What should I do?
4. Do I need to install any additional codecs to play DVDs on my computer?
5. What is bit rate ?
6. What is frame rate?
7. Which operating system I can use AVS DVD Player with?
8. When I try to playback a DVD video disc using AVS DVD Player , I get a message 'The
parental level of the player has been set'. What does it mean and what should I do with it?
Answers
You can download the offline help file from the www.avs4you.com site or contact our
support team at [email protected] every time you experience any difficulties using our
software.
After you download and run the help file, it will be installed and you will be able to use it from
the windows Start menu - All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Help or pressing the F1 button
when the program is running.
[Back to the Top ]
A video or audio Codec (COmpression/DECompression) is a software component allowing to
encode data to be stored on a media (CD, DVD, etc...) and/ to decode it to be visualized or
heard. There are also so-called "hard" codecs usually embedded to camcorders or digital video
players or professional and semi-professional video cards for video editing and composing.
[Back to the Top ]
3. I cannot load my movie to playback it with the AVS DVD Player and get an error
message. What should I do?
The reason that the AVS DVD Player cannot playback your movie file might be the following:
The DVD or video file is either corrupted or, if the playback is done from a disc, the
surface of the disc might be scratched or it might be unreadable for your CD/DVD drive.
You should use another movie file or disc in this case or try to restore the disc using
AVS Video ReMaker program that can be downloaded and installed from our website .
The format of the file might not be supported by the AVS DVD Player . See the
supported file formats table to make sure that the format of the video file is among
the supported types.
Note : that Quick Time video files sometimes require the Apple Quick Time
player installed to playback them. In this case you should download and install the
Quick Time player from the Apple company home page.
You have just bought your DVD drive and its region code is not set yet. See the
respective page on how to set your drive region code.
[Back to the Top ]
4. Do I need to install any additional codecs to play DVDs on my computer?
No, you do not. All the necessary codecs needed to playback DVD movies on your personal
computer are included in AVS DVD Player installation package. You can start watching DVDs
right after the player is installed.
[Back to the Top ]
5. What is bit rate?
Bit rate very often used when speaking of video or audio quality and file size - defines how
much physical space one second of audio or video takes in bits (note : not in bytes ). The higher
the bit rate, the more times per second the original sound and video are sampled, thus
yielding a more faithful reproduction and better sound and picture quality.
[Back to the Top ]
In basic terms, a video can be thought of as being made up of numerous snapshots, called
frames. Frame rate defines how many pictures i.e. frames one second of video or audio
contains, normally used acronym for frame rate is fps - frames per second. Human eye can't
see picture changes after the frame rate is more than ~24fps.
Video files with higher frame rates show motion better but have larger file sizes. Typical frame
rates are 29.97 for NTSC video (in American TV system), 25 for PAL (European system) video,
and 24 for film.
[Back to the Top ]
7. Which operating system I can use AVS DVD Player with?
AVS DVD Player is supported by the following platforms:
7.
Windows versions
Windows 9x versions
4.0.950
Windows 95
Unsupported
4.0.1111
Windows 95 OSR 2 & OSR 2.1
Unsupported
4.0.1212
Windows 95 OSR 2.5
Unsupported
4.1.1998
Windows 98
Unsupported
4.1.2222
Windows 98 Second Edition
Unsupported
4.9.3000
Windows Me
Unsupported
Windows NT versions
4.0.1381
Windows NT 4.0 & NT 3.51
Unsupported
5.0.2195
Windows 2000
Supported
5.01.2600
Windows XP
Supported
6.0.6000
Windows Vista
Supported
You can easily find out your Windows' version info. Go to Start menu and select Run . Type
winver and click [OK] .
[Back to the Top ]
8. When I try to playback a DVD video disc using AVS DVD Player, I get a message
'The parental level of the player has been set'. What does it mean and what should
I do with it?
All the movies that are shown in the theaters and sold on DVDs can be categorized (and
usually are categorized) as to their suitability for people of different ages. This ranking system
differs in various countries but nevertheless it always includes limitations for watching by
people of different age groups. In the table below you can see the differences in this ranking
systems in the United States and in the UK:
United States
Unrestricted:
G (General Audiences) - All ages admitted.
PG (Parental Guidance Suggested) - Some material may
not be suitable for young children. These films contain some
mild language, humor, and/or violence.
PG-13 (Parents Strongly Cautioned) - Some material
may be inappropriate for children under 13. These films may
contain some nudity, sexuality, language, humor, and/or
violence.
Restricted:
R (Restricted) - Under 17 requires accompanying parent
or adult guardian 21 years or older with photo I.D. These
films contain, strong adult language, strong sexuality,
nudity, strong violence, and/or gore, and drug use.
NC-17 - No one 17 and under admitted (18 and older
ONLY) Films contain excessive graphic violence, sex,
aberrational behavior, drug abuse, strong adult language, or
any other elements which, when present, most parents
would consider too strong and therefore off-limits for
viewing by their children.
Others:
NR (Not Rated) - Used for independent or foreign films
that are in limited release. Also used by a film that is soon
to be released and has trailers out for promotional
purposes, but has not yet received a final rating.
X - The precursor to the current NC-17 rating that unlike
the other ratings was not trademarked and because of this
it became so widely used by the US pornography industry.
United Kingdom
Unrestricted:
UC (Universal : Children) - Suitable for all. Videos
classified 'UC' are particularly suitable for pre-school
children.
U (Universal) - Suitable for all.
PG (Parental Guidance) - General viewing but some
scenes may be unsuitable for young children.
Restricted:
12A (12 Accompanied/Advisory) - Suitable for 12 years
and over. No one younger than 12 may see a '12A' film in a
cinema unless accompanied by an adult.
12 - Suitable for 12 years and over. No one younger than
12 may rent or buy a '12' rated video.
15 - Suitable only for 15 years and over . No one younger
than 15 may see a '15' film in a cinema. No younger than
15 may rent or buy a '15' rated video.
18 - Suitable only for adults. No one younger than 18 may
see an '18' film in a cinema. No one younger than 18 may
rent or buy an '18' rated video.
R18 (Restricted 18) - To be shown only in specially
licensed cinemas, or supplied only in licensed sex shops, and
to adults of not less than 18 years. These films contain
sexually explicit, pornographic content.
When you insert a DVD video disc that has one of the restricting ratings, the player will show
the 'The parental level of the player has been set' message. It means that this movie might
not be suitable for watching if you have not reached a certain age. So you should decide
whether to continue or cancel watching this video.
Press Yes (Continue with some discs) to go on watching the movie or Stop to cancel the
movie playback.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
Appendix
AVS Video Converter Frequently Asked Questions
Table of Contents
1. My Converter would not run/perform correctly/I experience problems with using my AVS
Video Converter. What do I do?
2. I enter my License key and they don't work. What do I do wrong?
3. I lost my License key and I want to reinstall the converter. What do I do now?
4. How can I get rid of the message in the middle of the finished movie?
5. How can I reinstall the program?
6. When I try to register the software Internet connection window pops up. Why?
7. I'm trying to find a video converter to convert wmv and/or mpg to asf so that I can stream it
with a Windows Media Server. Does your software do this?
8. Does this product allow me to rotate an entire AVI video 90 degrees? For example I shot a
video on my digital camera when the camera was held in portrait mode. Now I need to rotate
the video so that it can be viewed correctly.
10. Does you product support Windows Media 9?
12. What Video Codecs does AVS Video Converter work with?
13. What video formats are supported by AVS Video Converter?
14. What is bitrate?
16. My Windows Media Player will not play my newly converted DVD file. What do I do?
17. My computer DVD player handles my newly converted DVD files, but my home DVD player
won't take them! How do I go about it?
18. When I capture video, there seems to be a file size limit of 4 GB per file. How can I change
this?
19. I have recorded a DVD, but on my home hardware DVD player it only plays in black and
white. Why is it so and what can be done?
Answers
1. My Converter would not run/perform correctly/I experience problems with using
my AVS Video Converter. What do I do?
No matter what kind of problem you are experiencing - an unsupported file, de-synch or an
error message, in most cases, this problem is already FIXED or can be fixed within a few
easy steps.
Our team is constantly working at correcting reported errors, adding requested features,
eliminating the known bugs.
If your AVS Video Converter would not launch, or you receive an error message or the
software hangs - please run the Repair option. This will refresh the components of the AVS
Video Converter in your system. Here's a brief instruction on how to do it:
1. Close AVS Video Converter
2. Next follow Start > All Programs > AVS4YOU > Repair
If you have done the Repair and your problem persists, please make sure that you are using
the latest version. We constantly update AVS Video Converter on our site with bug fixes
and extended format support versions. You can always download the latest available version
HERE .
[Back to the Top ]
2. I enter my License key and it doesn't work. What do I do wrong?
It is important to enter your License key exactly as you received it in your registration
letter, because "John Doe" and "John A. Doe" or "JOHN DOE" are not the same thing.
The simplest way is to copy the License key from your registration letter and to paste it to
the appropriate box of the registration window.
To do this:
1. highlight your License key in your registration letter, received from us and rightclick it;
2. select "Copy" in the right-click menu;
3. move the cursor to the appropriate box in the registration window of the AVS Video
Converter ;
4. right-click the the box and select "Paste" from the menu.
Some tips to remember:
1. Make sure that there is no space before and after the License key .
2. Make sure that you are not mistaking the letter "O" for the figure "0" (zero).
Internet connection is necessary to complete the registration. Make sure your computer has
access to Internet, otherwise you won't be able to register the software!
You might also need to disable your antivirus or firewall or make sure that the AVS Video
Converter program is allowed to access internet.
If you are sure that you are entering a correct License key , please visit our Support Page
to receive help.
[Back to the Top ]
If you need to retrieve a lost License key , please visit our Support Page to receive
immediate help.
[Back to the Top ]
The ad banner is only in the unregistered version. If you activate the program, there will be
no text or other messages in your movies.
[Back to the Top ]
5.
If you want to reinstall the program, you can follow the link to download the latest version of
the program, copy the file to your hard drive and then run .exe file. To activate the program
you will have to use your License key .
Note : Internet connection is obligatory for the software registration!
[Back to the Top ]
Internet connection is necessary to contact our server and complete the registration process.
AVS Video Converter use Internet connection only once when you register them.
[Back to the Top ]
7. I'm trying to find a video converter to convert wmv and/or mpg to asf so that I
can stream it with a Windows Media Server. Does your software do this?
There is not need to convert wmv to asf. Windows Media Server supports wmv files perfectly.
WMV is a more advanced format than ASF, we may say that ASF is a previous version of
WMV.
[Back to the Top ]
8. Does this product allow me to rotate an entire AVI video 90 degrees? For example
I shot a video on my digital camera when the camera was held in portrait mode.
Now I need to rotate the video so that it can be viewed correctly.
You can rotate an entire media file with the Rotation effect.
[Back to the Top ]
You can download the offline help file from the www.avs4you.com site or contact our
support team at [email protected] every time you experience any difficulties using
our software.
After you download and run the help file, it will be installed and you will be able to use it from
the windows Start menu - All Programs -> AVS4YOU -> Help or pressing the F1 button
when the program is running.
[Back to the Top ]
10. Does you product support Windows Media 9?
AVS Video Converter supports decoding of Windows Media 9 into other formats, moreover
we are watching for the new releases of Microsoft and include support for them in our
program. WM Profile list box includes all profiles related to WMV series 9 format except ones
named Windows Media 8.
[Back to the Top ]
A video or audio Codec (COmpression/DECompression)
encode data to be stored on a media (CD, DVD, etc...)
heard. There are also so-called "hard" codecs usually
video players or professional and semi-professional
composing.
is a software component allowing to
and/ to decode it to be visualized or
embedded to camcorders or digital
video cards for video editing and
[Back to the Top ]
12. What Video Codecs does AVS Video Converter work with?
Basically AVS Video Converter works with all of the video codecs installed at your
computer. Here is the description of the most common ones:
"XviD MPEG-4 Video Codec" http://www.xvid.org/
XviD is an MPEG4 video codec which is being developed under the open source model, much
like the LAME MP3 encoder. It's based upon the efforts made in the Open Source project
"OpenDivX" by DivX Networks, which shut it down and closed the source with all the ideas
and work spent by many coders from the net. Since the start-over, XviD is developing very
fast and is evolving into a very high quality codec.
"DivX 5.0.5 Codec" http://www.divx.com/
DivX was originally a hack of the Microsoft MPEG4v3 codec, but has since become a
completely separate codec. It is available in both free and purchased versions.
DivX is the most common codec used in the groups, although you will find several versions of
the DivX codec that are all used.
The most common versions are 3.11, 4.0n , and 5.0. Officially, installing the most recent
version of the codec will allow playing older versions, however, there have been complaints
of lowered quality and compatibility when playing files created with the older codecs. Version
3.11 can be installed separately of later versions without much hassle. Getting versions 4
and 5 to coexist on a single computer is very difficult.
"MS MPEG-4 v1,2,3 driver 4.1.0.3927"
These three codecs were the first MPEG4 codecs used. Because better codecs that are also
freely available are now present, these codecs should no longer be used for new encodes. It
is, however, still necessary to install some or all of these codecs depending on your operating
system to support older encodes.
[Back to the Top ]
13. What video formats are supported by AVS Video Converter?
AVI
is short for "Audio Video Interleave", the original Microsoft file format for Microsoft's Video for
Windows standard. It is an audio video standard designed by Microsoft and is apparently
audio information. Files in this format have an .AVI extension. However, Video for Windows
does not require any special hardware, making it the lowest common denominator for
multimedia applications.
MPEG
Gives excellent compression with little loss in quality of the video. MPEG support three types
of data - video, audio and streaming. There are a number of standards: among them there
are two flavors of MPEG available today. MPEG-1 was designed to provide VHS video quality
and CD audio quality at a combined data rate of 150 kilobytes per second. MPEG-1 is
displayed at 30 frames per second in a frame that is 352x240 (horizontal x vertical) pixels in
size. This allows relatively high quality video images to be stored in relatively small file sizes
for playback across computer networks or CD-ROM delivery. MPEG-2 is the other side of the
compression coin. It is a broadcast standard specifying a playback size of 720 x 480 pixels at
60 fields per second. Data rates can range from 2 to 10 megabits per second. This means
large file sizes and data rates that require specialized hardware for playback. MPEG-2 is one
of the core compression technologies for DVD. See the MPEG site for more information.
WMV
This is Microsoft's new standard for audio and video which is closely tied with the Windows
Operating System. The player is able to play Windows Media Video (.wmv) and Advanced
Streaming Format (.asf) files, and also other formats such as QuickTime, AVI, MPEG and
MP3. See the Windows Media site for more information.
RM
RealMedia provides one of the oldest and most widespread (85% of all web-accessing
their user information site .
VOB
DVD video movie file. DVD is the new generation of optical disc storage technology. DVD is
essentially a bigger, faster CD that can hold cinema-like video, better-than-CD audio, still
photos, and computer data. DVD aims to encompass home entertainment, computers, and
business information with a single digital format. It has replaced laserdisc, is well on the way
to replacing videotape and video game cartridges, and could eventually replace audio CD and
CD-ROM. DVD has widespread support from all major electronics companies, all major
computer hardware companies, and all major movie and music studios.
MOV
MOV is a file extension for QuickTime Video Clip. QuickTime is a video and animation system
developed by Apple Computer. QuickTime is built into the Macintosh operating system and is
used by most Mac applications that include video or animation. PCs can also run files in
QuickTime format, but they require a special QuickTime driver. QuickTime supports most
encoding formats, including Cinepak, JPEG, and MPEG. QuickTime is competing with a
number of other standards, including AVI and ActiveMovie. For more information see the
Apple site and their Support page .
MPEG-4
ISO/IEC open standard for video encoding developed by MPEG (Moving Picture Experts
Group). It is characterized by a small output video file size and quite good picture quality
even when a relatively low bit rate is used. The most known resulting output when you use
MPEG-4 format for compression is the AVI file type which is commonly used in home video. It
is coded with XviD, DivX, 3ivx, Nero Digital and other video codecs. Other file types can be
found in the output file format section.
SWF
Macromedia/Adobe Flash format is used to create video files that can be easily placed to your
home page as they use not too much space and are supported by most browsers (in case the
necessary plugin is installed). See the Adobe web site for more info on this format.
Note : all these formats are supported for output. The list of the input video formats
that are supported by the software is much wider: AVI (DivX, XviD, etc.), DV AVI, MP4
(inc. Sony PSP and Apple iPod), WMV, 3GP, 3G2, QuickTime (MOV, QT), DVD, VOB,
VRO,MPG, MPEG 1,2,4, DAT, VCD, SVCD, ASF, MJPEG, H.263, H.264, Real Video (RM,
RMVB), DVR-MS, MKV, OGM, FLV.
[Back to the Top ]
14. What is bitrate?
Bit rate very often used when speaking of video or audio quality and file size - defines how
much physical space one second of audio or video takes in bits (note : not in bytes ). The
higher the bit rate, the more times per second the original sound is sampled, thus yielding a
more faithful reproduction and better sound. When choosing an MP3, weigh the advantage of
a higher bit rate against the size of the file. Generally speaking, a bit rate of 128 kbps or
higher will provide satisfactory sound quality.
The same is with the video picture: the higher the bit rate, the better the picture quality
although the output video file size also gets larger. If it is possible to save the output file onto
a storage with a large capacity the use of higher video bit rates can be recommended.
Selecting the proper audio and video bit rate for your projects depends on the playback
target: if you're making a VCD for playback on a DVD player, the video must be exactly 1150
Kbps and the audio 224 Kbps.
Selecting the proper bit rate for your projects depends on the playback target.
[Back to the Top ]
frames . Frame Rate defines how many pictures e.g.. frames one second of video or audio
contains, normally used acronym for framerate is fps - f rames p er s econd. Human eye
can't see picture changes after the framerate is more than ~24fps.
Video files with higher frame rates show motion better but have larger file sizes. Typical
frame rates are 29.97 for NTSC video (in American TV system), 25 for PAL (European
system) video, and 24 for film. When exporting low-bandwidth versions, select a frame rate
that is 1/2, 1/3, or 1/4 of the original frame rate. Setting a frame rate higher than the
original frame rate will make the file larger but will not improve the quality.
Note : MPEG format only supports 23.976, 24, 25, 29.97, 30 frame rates.
[Back to the Top ]
16. My Windows Media Player will not play my newly converted DVD file. What do I
do?
Windows Media Player requires installation of special plug-ins to be able to play DVDs. You
can download them from the official Microsoft site.
[Back to the Top ]
17. My computer DVD player handles my newly converted DVD files, but my home DVD
player won't take them! How do I go about it?
We do not guarantee that our software supports all home DVD players. That's why we
strongly recommend that you test DVD's created with the help of AVS Video Converter on
your home DVD-players before purchase.
Also, make sure that your DVD-disc is compatible with your DVD drive and DVD player
(check that your drive and player accept DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, depending on
your disc).
[Back to the Top ]
18. When I capture video, there seems to be a file size limitation of 4 GB per file. How
can I change this?
Certain file systems have file size limitation. If your HDD is formatted using FAT32 system,
you cannot create files larger than 4 GB on it. If your files are split into 4 GB files when you
capture, and you are sure that you haven't set this split, it means that your HDD is using
FAT32 file system. Normally, Windows XP and 2000 offer to format your HDD using NTFS ,
but you can also select FAT32, when you install the OS. The only way out of this situation is
reformat your HDD using a more up-to-date NTFS file system, or capture video to a HDD
which is already using this file system.
[Back to the Top ]
19. I have recorded a DVD, but on my home hardware DVD player it only plays in black
and white. Why is it so and what can be done?
The television standards differ in different countries. That's why it is possible, that either your
hardware DVD player or your television set support only one of the standards. For instance,
you recorded your DVD disc in PAL standard (using DVD PAL preset), but your hardware
player is only NTSC compatible (which is quite common for North America). So you should
pay attention to what standard you choose, when you select the preset for creating DVD,
VCD or SVCD video discs. If you do not know what standard is supported by the television
sets and DVD players in your country, see the table below:
NTSC
PAL
American Samoa, Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados,
Belize, Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil (uses PAL-M system, based on NTSC-M
standard but using PAL color encoding - most films on DVD discs and VHS
are NTSC, so DVD players and VCRs are NTSC-compatible), British Virgin
Islands, Canada, Cayman Islands, Chile, Colombia, Costa Rica, Cuba,
Diego Garcia, Dominica, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador,
Grenada, Guam, Guatemala, Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Japan,
Leeward Islands, Marshall Islands, Mexico, Micronesia, Midway Atoll (a US
military base), Montserrat, Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua, Palau,
Panama, Peru, Philippines, Puerto Rico, Saipan also known as Northern
Mariana Islands, Samoa, South Korea, St. Kitts and Nevis, St. Lucia, St.
Vincent and the Grenadines, Suriname, Taiwan, Tonga, Trinidad and
Tobago, U.S. Virgin Islands, United States, Venezuela
Afghanistan, Albania, Andorra, Angola, Argentina, Armenia, Ascension
Island, Australia, Austria, Azerbaijan, Bahrain, Bangladesh, Belarus,
Belgium, Benin, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Botswana, Brazil (NTSC & PAL),
Brunei, Bulgaria, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Cambodia (Kampuchea),
Cameroon, Canary Islands, Cape Verde, Central African Republic, Chad,
China (mainland), Christmas Island, Congo (Democratic Republic), Congo
(People's Republic), Cook Islands, Cote d'Ivoire, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech
Republic, Denmark, Djibouti, East Germany, East Timor, Easter Island,
Egypt, Equatorial Guinea, Eritrea, Estonia, Ethiopia, Falkland Islands,
Faroe Islands, Fiji, Finland, France, French Guiana, French Polynesia,
Gabon, Gambia, Gaza & West Bank, Georgia, Germany, Ghana, Gibraltar,
Greece, Greenland, Guadeloupe, Guinea, Guinea-Bissau, Hong Kong and
Macau, Hungary, Iceland, India, Indonesia, Iran, Iraq, Ireland, Israel,
Italy, Jordan, Kazakhstan, Kenya, Kuwait, Kyrgyzstan, Laos, Latin
America, Latvia, Lebanon, Lesotho, Liberia, Libya, Liechtenstein, Lithuania,
Luxembourg, Madagascar, Malawi, Malaysia, Maldives, Mali, Malta,
Martinique,
Mauritania,
Mauritius,
Moldova,
Monaco,
Mongolia,
Montenegro, Morocco, Mozambique, Myanmar, Namibia, Nepal,
Netherlands, New Caledonia, New Zealand, Niger, Nigeria, Norfolk Island,
North Korea, Norway, Oman, Pakistan, Papua New Guinea, Paraguay,
Poland, Portugal (including Madeira and Azores), Qatar, Republic of
Ireland, Republic of Macedonia, Reunion, Romania, Russia, Rwanda, SaintPierre and Miquelon, Saudi Arabia, Senegal, Serbia, Seychelles, Sierra
Leone, Singapore, Slovakia, Slovenia, Solomon Islands, Somalia, South
Africa, Spain, Sri Lanka, Sudan, Swaziland, Sweden, Switzerland, Syria,
Tahiti, Tajikistan, Tanzania, Thailand, Togo, Tristan da Cunha, Tunisia,
Turkey, Turkmenistan, Uganda, Ukraine, United Arab Emirates, United
Kingdom, Uruguay, Uzbekistan, Vanuatu, Vatican City, Vietnam, Wallis
and Futuna, Yemen, Zambia, Zanzibar, Zimbabwe
Countries with TV broadcast in SECAM standard (Andorra, Armenia, Azerbaijan, Belarus,
Benin, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Cambodia (Kampuchea), Central African Republic, Chad,
Congo (Democratic Republic), Congo (People's Republic), Cote d'Ivoire, Djibouti, Equatorial
Guinea, France, French Guiana, French Polynesia, Gabon, Georgia, Guadeloupe, Iran,
Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Libya, Madagascar, Mali, Martinique, Mauritania, Mauritius,
Moldova, Monaco, Mongolia, Morocco, New Caledonia, Niger, Reunion, Russia, Rwanda,
Saint-Pierre and Miquelon, Saudi Arabia, Senegal, Tahiti, Tajikistan, Togo, Tunisia,
Turkmenistan, Uzbekistan, Wallis and Futuna) use DVD players with PAL support.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
Appendix
FAQ
1. My AVS Video Editor would not run/perform correctly/I experience problems with using my
AVS Video Editor. What do I do?
2. I enter my License key and they don't work. What do I do wrong?
7. Can I transform 4:3 files to 16:9 files and vice versa with the help of this software?
8. I have a video file which I would like to apply some effects and filters to and save it exactly
with the same format parameters without recompression. Can this be done with your
software?
9. What video formats can I save my file to?
10. What is aspect ratio feature and how is it different from video resolution?
11. When I capture video, there seems to be a file size limit of 4 GB per file. How can I change
this?
Answers
1. My Editor would not run/perform correctly/I experience problems with using my
AVS Video Editor. What do I do?
No matter what kind of problem you are experiencing - an unsupported file, de-synch or an
error message, in most cases, this problem is already FIXED or can be fixed within a few easy
steps.
Our team is constantly working at correcting reported errors, adding requested features,
eliminating the known bugs.
If your AVS Video Editor would not launch, or you receive an error message or the software
hangs - please run the Repair option. This will refresh the components of the AVS Video
Editor in your system. Here's a brief instruction on how to do it:
1. Close AVS Video Editor
2. Next follow Start > All Programs > AVS4YOU > Repair
If you have done the Repair and your problem persists, please make sure that you are using
the latest version. We constantly update AVS Video Editor on our site with bug fixes and
extended format support versions. You can always download the latest available version HERE
.
[Back to the Top ]
2. I enter my License key and it doesn't work. What do I do wrong?
2.
It is important to enter your License key exactly as you received it in your registration letter,
because "John Doe" and "John A. Doe" or "JOHN DOE" are not the same thing.
The simplest way is to copy the License key from your registration letter and to paste it to
the appropriate box of the registration window.
To do this:
1. highlight your License key in your registration letter, received from us and rightclick it;
2. select "Copy" in the right-click menu;
3. move the cursor to the appropriate box in the registration window of the AVS Video
Editor ;
4. right-click the the box and select "Paste" from the menu.
Some tips to remember:
1. Make sure that there is no space before and after the License key .
2. Make sure that you are not mistaking the letter "O" for the figure "0" (zero).
Internet connection is necessary to complete the registration. Make sure your computer has
access to Internet, otherwise you won't be able to register the software!
You might also need to disable your antivirus or firewall or make sure that the AVS Video
Editor program is allowed to access internet.
If you are sure that you are entering a correct License key , please visit our Support Page
to receive help.
[Back to the Top ]
3. I lost my License key and I want to reinstall AVS Video Editor. What do I do now?
If you need to retrieve a lost License key , please visit our Support Page to receive
immediate help.
[Back to the Top ]
The ad banner is only in the unregistered version. If you activate the program, there will be no
text or other messages in your movies. To get rid of the banner in the projects which you
have created with the unregistered version you will only need to recompile the projects. To do
that open the previously saved project and, if you would like to, add some effects or edit it the
way you like. After that simply save the created movie into the format you need. There will be
no message in the middle of the output movie.
[Back to the Top ]
If you want to reinstall the program, you can follow the link to download the latest version of
the program, copy the file to your hard drive and then run .exe file. To activate the program
you will have to use your License key .
Note : Internet connection is obligatory for the software registration!
[Back to the Top ]
6.
Internet connection is necessary to contact our server and complete the registration process.
AVS Video Editor uses Internet connection only once when you register it. If you would like
to use AVS Video Editor on a computer which has no Internet connection, please contact our
support team via our Support Form .
[Back to the Top ]
7. Can I transform 4:3 files to 16:9 files and vice versa with the help of this software?
Yes, you can. Starting with version 3.2 AVS Video Editor supports aspect correction. Just
follow the steps:
Start a new project. Select the necessary aspect - 4:3 or 16:9;
Import a video file you would like to transform. Place it to the working area.
Click the right mouse button to open the video file properties window, select Aspect ,
and use Crop to get rid of the mattes (black bars) on top-bottom or on the sides of the
video.
Save video into necessary format. You will be offered to use aspect correction, so that
your output movie could be displayed without distortions.
The output movie will have a new aspect ratio.
Note : when using the Crop function, parts of the movie picture will be deleted together
with the mattes to maintain the selected aspect ratio. If you do not want to lose any part
of the movie picture, please leave the black bars untouched.
[Back to the Top ]
8. I have a video file which I would like to apply some effects and filters to and save it
exactly with the same format parameters without recompression. Can this be done
with your software?
Practically, it is impossible to save the actual FILE after applying changes to it without
recompression. However, AVS Video Editor provides features which will let you totally avoid
recompression necessity and quality loss during the process of editing.
The ideology of AVS Video Editor is built around working with projects rather than with
particular video files. Working with a project allows you to save the sequence of changes in the
file settings and all the applied effects and only need to save the file when you are absolutely
complete with editing.
To save the project in which you are editing a particular video file, do the following:
Select Project in the File menu and pick one of the saving options, instead of selecting Save
Movie File .
Note : if you select the Save Movie File option, your video will be recompressed while saving. If
you saved a project instead, next time you open it and go to Video Effects menu, all the changes
that you have applied to your video file during the previous editing session will be reflected on the
timeline:
[Back to the Top ]
9. What video formats can I save my file to?
AVI
is short for "Audio Video Interleave", the original Microsoft file format for Microsoft's Video for
Windows standard. It is an audio video standard designed by Microsoft and is apparently
audio information. Files in this format have an .AVI extension. However, Video for Windows
does not require any special hardware, making it the lowest common denominator for
multimedia applications.
MPEG
Gives excellent compression with little loss in quality of the video. MPEG support three types of
data - video, audio and streaming. There are a number of standards: among them there are
two flavors of MPEG available today. MPEG-1 was designed to provide VHS video quality and
CD audio quality at a combined data rate of 150 kilobytes per second. MPEG-1 is displayed at
30 frames per second in a frame that is 352x240 (horizontal x vertical) pixels in size. This
allows relatively high quality video images to be stored in relatively small file sizes for
playback across computer networks or CD-ROM delivery. MPEG-2 is the other side of the
compression coin. It is a broadcast standard specifying a playback size of 720 x 480 pixels at
60 fields per second. Data rates can range from 2 to 10 megabits per second. This means
large file sizes and data rates that require specialized hardware for playback. MPEG-2 is one of
the core compression technologies for DVD. See the MPEG site for more information.
WMV
This is Microsoft's new standard for audio and video which is closely tied with the Windows
Operating System. The player is able to play Windows Media Video (.wmv) and Advanced
Streaming Format (.asf) files, and also other formats such as QuickTime, AVI, MPEG and MP3.
See the Windows Media site for more information.
RM
RealMedia provides one of the oldest and most widespread (85% of all web-accessing
their user information site .
QuickTime (MOV)
MOV is a file extension for QuickTime Video Clip. QuickTime is a video and animation system
developed by Apple Computer. QuickTime is built into the Macintosh operating system and is
used by most Mac applications that include video or animation. PCs can also run files in
QuickTime format, but they require a special QuickTime driver. QuickTime supports most
encoding formats, including Cinepak, JPEG, and MPEG. QuickTime is competing with a number
of other standards, including AVI and ActiveMovie. For more information see the Apple site
and their Support page .
[Back to the Top ]
10. What is aspect ratio feature and how is it different from video resolution?
Video resolution is a constant measure which describes the width and the height of a video file
in pixels.
Easiest way to explain aspect ratio is to say that it means the ratio between the width of
the picture and the height of the picture . Normal TV's aspect ratio is 4:3 (1.33:1) Academy Standard, NTSC Television.
When the time came for the television industry to decide what shape TV would take (in the
early 1950s), the US National Television Standards Committee (NTSC) selected Academy
Standard as the official aspect ratio for TV broadcasting in the United States (the current TV
standard in the U.S. is also called NTSC, after the organization that set the standard). Up to
the 50s all video production was made with this aspect ratio.
After the 50s film industry was faced with a problem: so many people were buying TVs and
staying at home to watch them, that theater attendance began to decline dramatically, which
lead to the appearance of wide screen aspect ratio.
There are two "standardized" widescreen ratios that are by far the most common: Academy
Flat (HDTV's) 16:9 - (1.85:1) and Anamorphic Scope (2.35:1) . Other less used ratios
include 1.66:1 and 2.20:1 . So, as you can see, aspect ratio is in fact a relative measure.
When it comes to file format, Aspect ratio is defined for all formats, except AVI, so in case
with conversion to AVI to avoid vertical or horizontal deformation of the picture it is better to
set up resolution which correlates to a particular aspect ratio. Here's a small table, which
correlates most common AVI video resolutions with aspect ratios:
4:3
640 x 480
16:9
640 x 360
2.20:1
640 x 292
2.35:1
640 x 272
[Back to the Top ]
11. When I capture video, there seems to be a file size limit of 4 GB per file. How can I
change this?
Certain file systems have file size limitation. If your HDD is formatted using FAT32 system,
you cannot create files larger than 4 GB on it. If your files are split into 4 GB files when you
capture, and you are sure that you haven't set this split, it means that your HDD is using
FAT32 file system. Normally, Windows XP and 2000 offer to format your HDD using NTFS ,
but you can also select FAT32, when you install the OS. The only way out of this situation is
reformat your HDD using a more up-to-date NTFS file system, or capture video to a HDD
which is already using this file system.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
Appendix
AVS DVD Copy How To
Table of contents
1. I have a rewritable disc with closed session, but want to add some files to it as it has much
free space. How can I do that?
Answers
1. I have a rewritable disc with closed session, but want to add some files to it as it
has much free space. How can I do that?
You cannot add files to a closed rewritable disc without erasing it. But you can retain the
information already stored on the disc. To do that you need to copy your files from the disc to
some place on your computer, then start the AVS DVD Copy and erase the rewritable disc.
After that you can add the previously saved files to your compilation, add new files and click
the Burn button. As a result you will have new files added to the disc where all your files are
saved as well.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
Appendix
AVS Video to GO How To
Table of Contents
1. I am absolutely new to movie conversion as I never did it before. Will it not be too difficult
for me to use this software and how do I convert my media files?
2. I have a DVD which is the collection of music video clips. How do I convert only specific clips
I need?
3. I have a DVD and I want to be able to watch the movie on my Sony PSP (portable Media
Player, Mobile phone) while traveling. How do I convert it?
4. I made some changes in Custom mode at Step two of the AVS Video to GO and want to
save them to use the next time I convert. How do I do that?
5. My DVD movie has several language tracks in it. How do I choose between them?
6. I have a homemade video and want to share a part of it with my friend over the Internet
(over a mobile phone). How can I do that?
7. My DVD movie has black areas in the upper and in the lower parts of the screen. How do I
crop them?
Answers
1. I am absolutely new to movie conversion as I never did it before. Will it not be too
difficult for me to use this software and how do I convert my media files?
If you are new to movie conversion we can recommend that you start with the AVS Video
to GO as this software doesn't require any special knowledge on movie conversion. It has a
simple user friendly interface that will guide you easily through the conversion process so
that you need to know only few things: the path to the source DVD or video file, the type of
the device you would like to watch your movie on and the capacity of the storage your device
has. If you know this information you will easily manage the conversion process without any
knowledge. Just follow our five steps and everything will be done for you. Start with Step
one of the AVS Video to GO and see for yourself that movie conversion can be easier than
ever before.
[Back to the Top ]
2. I have a DVD which is the collection of music video clips. How do I convert only
specific clips I need?
If you want to save only specific clips from a DVD you will need to choose every clip
separately. At Step two of the AVS Video to GO choose I want to convert a part of my
DVD movie and after that select the initial and the final point of the first video clip.
Remember to see the clip beginning and end scene pressing the
button to make sure the
place you have chosen is the one you really wanted. After that you follow the other steps to
get down to the conversion process. Once the conversion of the first clip is over you return to
Step one , choose the same DVD and select the time boundaries of the second video clip.
The same succession of action can be repeated as many times for as many clips as needed.
[Back to the Top ]
3.
3. I have a DVD and I want to be able to watch the movie on my Sony PSP (Portable
Media Player, Mobile phone) while traveling. How do I convert it?
Follow steps one to two of the AVS Video to GO to choose the source video file(s) for the
movie you would like to take along with you. At Step three you select the portable device
you would like to use on the road for the movie watching. If you want to change some
specific settings press the Switch to custom mode button to customize the output video
file. AVS Video to GO software have several presets of the most common devices used to
watch the movies.
[Back to the Top ]
4. I made some changes in Custom mode at Step two of the AVS Video to GO and
want to save them to use the next time I convert. How do I do that?
When you made some changes to the presets you have in Custom mode of the AVS Video
to GO you might want to save them for future use. To do that press the Save preset as...
button, choose the name of the preset and press the OK button. Your preset will be saved in
your program folder (by default it will be C:\Program Files\AVS4YOU\AVS Video to
GO\presets\ ).
If you want to use it the next time you convert the movie you will need to press the Load
preset... button to load it.
If you have some presets you no longer need you might want to delete them pressing the
Delete preset... button.
[Back to the Top ]
5. My DVD movie has several language tracks in it. How do I choose between them?
After you selected the path to the DVD video files at Step one of the AVS Video to GO you
will get the information on the language tracks that are present in the movie in the Audio
track box:
Pressing the Pull down
language you need.
button you can choose between the audio languages to select the
[Back to the Top ]
6. I have a homemade video and want to share a part of it with my friend over the
Internet (over a mobile phone). How can I do that?
Select the path to the source video at Step one and at Step two choose I want to convert
a part of my DVD/video movie. After that select the initial and the final point of the video
you want to share. Remember to see the beginning and end scene pressing the
button to
make sure the place you have chosen is the one you really wanted. At Step three you select
the device you would like to use to send your movie, after that press the Switch to custom
mode button to change the size of the output video file so that you could send it over the
Internet or over a mobile phone.
[Back to the Top ]
7. My DVD movie has black areas in the upper and in the lower parts of the screen.
How do I crop them?
You do not need to do anything to crop the black areas in the upper and in the lower parts of
the screen. They are needed to retain the original video picture sides ratio, so that the video
player could playback the output file without distortion.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
Appendix
AVS Video Converter How To
Table of Contents
1. How to convert video files from one format to another using AVS Video Converter?
2. How to select input file or files?
3. How to change output file name and location?
4. How to remove Interlacing Artifacts?
5. How to delete parts of my video?
6. How can I uninstall divx 5.0 without removing your program?
7. How do I export a frame from a specific part of the video clip?
8. How do I remove your entry from the right click context menu (when I right click the a file)?
9. When I open a wmv I get a message saying it is not indexed. How can I convert or edit this
file?
10. How do I add text to my videos?
11. How to rotate video?
12. How to apply effects to a file using AVS Video Converter?
13. How to join (merge) files?
14. How determine what type of file am I converting?
15. How can I create a video with no audio?
16. How can I switch between different interface languages?
17. How can I convert DVD files to another format?
18. How can I divide my DVD video into chapters?
19. How do I run a help file for AVS Video Converter?
20. How do I make a screenshot?
21. How to change skins for AVS Video Converter?
Answers
1. How to convert video files from one format to another using AVS Video Converter?
AVS Video Converter enables you to convert your videos to various formats quite
easily in only a few steps:
Step 1: Select a file that you would like to convert by clicking the Browse... button
near the Input File Name field. Select a format you would like your result file to have
clicking the one of the buttons in the upper menu. E.g. - if you would like to convert
your file to AVI format - select To AVI and so on.
Step 2: Determine your output file location and name by clicking the Browse... button
next to the Output File Name field. Please not, that you CANNOT change output file
name and path in the main window directly, but only through MS Windows Explorer
windows that are opened when you click Browse...
Step 3: Press Convert Now! button and wait for the process to be over.
[Back to the Top ]
2. How to select input file or files?
You can select a file which you would like to convert clicking the Browse... button next to
the Input File Name field. In an opened Windows Explorer window select a needed file.
You can also select multiple files. To add and delete files from the list, use plus and minus ( +
and - ) buttons.
Note : if you use Browse... , your input file will simply be replaced, and no files will be
added. But afterwards you will need to specify if you would like to convert them
simultaneously to separate files (using Batch Mode processing) or convert them all into
one single file (which is set upon default).
[Back to the Top ]
3. How to change output file name and location?
You cannot change output file name and location through the main window interface directly.
This was done to eliminate the number of error, which may occur if you enter a wrong path.
When you click the Browse... button, a Windows Explorer window opens. Using this window,
you can select a location for the output file and change the default name in the File Name
field.
[Back to the Top ]
4. How to remove Interlacing Artifacts?
INTERLACING ARTIFACT
frames . The frame rate , or the number of frames displayed each second, is 29.97 in the
United States and other NTSC based countries. For the sake of simplicity, we can round this
number to 30 frames per second (fps). In many European countries, they use a PAL or
SECAM video system that displays exactly 25 fps.
A television, however, does not deal with video in terms of frames. Instead, it displays a
video using half-frames, called fields . Each frame contains exactly two fields. One field is
made up of the odd horizontal lines in a frame. This is called the odd field or the top field
since it contains the top line of the image. The other field is made up of the even horizontal
lines in a frame. This is called the even field or bottom field . Here is an illustration:
COMPLETE
FRAME
ODD FIELD
EVEN FIELD
Since there are two fields in every frame, a television actually updates the display at 60 fields
per second (or 50 fields per second for PAL/SECAM video). Each field is displayed 1/60th of a
second after the preceding field (or 1/50th of a second for PAL/SECAM video).
However, when watching video on a television (interlaced display), the split isn't noticeable
by human eyes. This is because, among other things, a television doesn't produce as crisp an
image as does a computer monitor. Therefore, in only one of the four setups will the split be
noticeable: interlaced video on a progressive display (monitor). This split in the image across
fields due to motion is what is known as an interlacing artifact .
REMOVING INTERLACING ARTIFACT
AVS Video Converter allows you to remove interlacing artifact using deinterlacing filter.
You can use remove interlacing artifact by removing one field of a video (the Even or Odd
lines) and then Interpolate or duplicate them.
How to apply:
Step 1: Open input file clicking the Browse... button
Step 2: Choose the output format and click the Edit button
Step 3: To apply the deinterlacing effect choose Add ->Effect ->Deinterlace in the
Effects area
Step 4: Check Even and/or Interpolate check-boxes, if needed
Step 5: Press Start Preview .
Note : there is no need to apply this filter for high quality non-interlaced video.
[Back to the Top ]
5. How to delete parts of my video?
To delete parts of your input file:
Step 1: Choose the area you want to delete by clicking the left mouse button and
dragging the slider along the navigation line. The selected area will be highlighted
Step 2: click the Add Area of Deleting button and close the Edit window to return to
main menu
Step 3: Set parameters of profile if applicable
Step 4: Press Convert Now! to start conversion.
[Back to the Top ]
6. How can I uninstall DivX 5.0 without removing your program?
You can uninstall any video codec without removing AVS Video Converter :
Step
Step
Step
Step
1: Go to your Control panel -> Sounds and Multimedia
2: Click the Hardware tab, then select Video Codecs from the Devices list
3: Click the Properties button, after that click the Properties tab
4: Select the video codec you want to uninstall and click Remove .
[Back to the Top ]
7. How do I export a frame from a specific part of the video clip?
You can easily export frames from your input files and save them to your hard drive as JPEG,
PNG, BMP, WMF or EMF:
Step 1: Enter your input video file
Step 2: Click the Edit button. The Edit Input File(s) window will appear
Step 3: Set the cursor to a frame you want export (use Left Arrow and Right Arrow
keys to navigate along the file by frames and Ctrl + Left Arrow and Ctrl + Right
Arrow to navigate along the file by 10 frames)
Step 4: click the Export Frame button, select the output file format in Save as
window and click Save.
[Back to the Top ]
8. How do I remove your entry from the right click context menu (when I right click
the a file)?
Windows related question. You should find Send To folder in your Documents and Setting
. You can edit you right click context menu removing or adding components to this folder.
Notice that Send To folder has Hidden attribute, so make sure that you've set Show
hidden files and folders option in Control Panel -> Folder Options ->View.
[Back to the Top ]
9. When I open a wmv I get a message saying it is not indexed. How can I convert or
edit this file?
There are a lot of ASF files that are not indexed. Basically it means that these files were
intended for streaming only and it's not supposed to use them for editing or seeking. AVS
Video Converter can read and convert some of ASF-files. So far as it's a kind of old format
we don't have a special support for them. In case you need to edit not indexed file, you
should:
Step 1: Convert your input fie to some other supported format without applying any
effects
Step 2: After conversion the file becomes indexed one and you will be able to add
different effects, edit it, etc.
[Back to the Top ]
10. How do I add text to my videos?
The Text effect allow you to include any message to your video. How to apply:
Step
Step
Step
Step
Step
Step
Step
2: Choose the output format and click the Edit button
3: To add the text effect choose Add->Draw->Text in the Effects area
4: Select the text properties following the menu
5: Type in the text you want to appear in your movie
6: Set fade-in and fade-out area
7: Press Start Preview .
[Back to the Top ]
11. How to rotate video?
The Rotate effect allows you to revolve your video. How to apply:
Step
Step
Step
area
Step
Step
Step
2: Choose the output format and click the Edit button
3: To apply the Rotate effect choose Add->Transform->Rotate in the Effects
4: Select the rotation angle following the menu
5: Set fade-in and fade-out area
6: Press Start Preview .
[Back to the Top ]
12.
12. How to apply effects to a file using AVS Video Converter?
You can not only convert files using our program, but also apply a variety of effects, delete
parts of files, add text lines and so on. To apply effects to a file, which you want to convert,
click Edit button in the menu in the upper part of the main window.
The window is divided into 4 main parts. On the right - the upper part shows TimeLine of
your video file where all applied effects, adjustments, and changes are reflected. There you
can change Fade In and Fade Out settings. Below you can preview your file (without audio)
and check how the applied changes will look in the output file, or play the input file. For these
purposes click Start Play or Start Preview buttons respectively.
In the Effects field you can apply various changes and adjustments to your video file. Click
the Add button and select the needed effect, transformation or adjustment. You can read
more about what each of the changes on the list does to your video in our Help File .
Note : the effects will only be applied during the process of conversion. If you would like
to leave the same file format - simply select this format for your output file.
[Back to the Top ]
13. How to join (merge) files?
You can merge several files in one with the help of AVS Video Converter .
To select the list of files which you would like to merge, click "+ " button and select files in
the Windows Explorer window. Use "- " buttons to delete files from the list. After you have
selected input files, set the output file name and location. Choose the necessary format and
start converting. Please make sure, that Split option is disabled.
[Back to the Top ]
14. How determine what type of file am I converting?
To learn the type of your input file and some of its technical specifications, such as bitrate,
frame rate, video and audio compression codecs and other click the << Advanced button
twice. In the opened window you will be able to check both your input and our output file
formats and technical specifications.
[Back to the Top ]
15. How can I create a video with no audio?
Select input file, set output file parameters, then go to Edit profile. and select No audio in
Audio Bitrate box. Close Profile Editor and convert the file.
[Back to the Top ]
16. How can I switch between different interface languages?
Open AVS Video Converter , press Ctrl+Shitf+F12, close the converter and reopen it. The
language will change. If it is not the language you need, please repeat the operation.
[Back to the Top ]
17. How can I convert DVD files to another format?
To have a good quality output video you need to select only VIDEO_TS.IFO file as Input File
Name when converting a DVD video. For more info please refer to our Help file (Help >
Features > Working with DVDs > Converting DVD files to another format ).
[Back to the Top ]
18.
18. How can I divide my DVD video into chapters?
You can divide your video into chapters, i.e. to create a single level menu that allows you to
select which video to play. To create chapters:
Step 1: Open input file clicking the Browse... button
Step 2: Select To DVD as output format
Step 3: Click the Edit button
Step 4: Add the markers indicating the beginning of each chapter using the timeline
Step 5: Use the Edit DVD menu button
to see the created menu and DVD Menu
Style drop-down list to select the menu style
Step 6: Close the Edit window
Step 7: Press the Convert now! button to start conversion.
To add markers :
Step 1: Put the timeline cursor at the position where you'd like to set a marker
Step 2: Click the Add button located in the Markers area. The name of marker shown
as Position:# will appear in the markers list.
Step 3: Use the Edit DVD menu button
to see the created menu and DVD Menu
Style drop-down list to select the menu style
[Back to the Top ]
19. How do I run a help file for AVS Video Converter?
To read AVS Video Converter documentation, please run AVS Video Converter and click
'F1' on your keyboard. Or follow Start > All Programs > AVS Video Converter > AVS
Video Converter Help .
[Back to the Top ]
20. How do I make a screenshot?
When you are experiencing difficulties or run onto error messages, our support staff may ask
you to make a screenshot of your program window or error message.
To make a screenshot:
- Run AVS Video Converter
- Open a file you want to convert
- Select a preset for the output file
- Click << Advanced two time to show input and output file parameters
- Press Alt+PrtScn to copy the screenshot to the clipboard
- Open a graphics editing program (e.g. Microsoft Paint , select Start\Run... , enter
'mspaint' and press OK to start it)
- Press Ctrl+V to paste the screenshot from the clipboard
- Save the image in PNG format
- Attach the image file to the bug report email
[Back to the Top ]
21. How to change skins for AVS Video Converter?
To change a skin for any of the Video Converter :
Step 1: Run AVS Video Converter
Step 2: In the upper right-hand corner of the program window click the a small arrow
or the letter S in some skins
and select a skin from a fall-out menu.
Note : if you change the skin back to the default view, the program will be restarted.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
Appendix
How To
1. I'm rather new with this product. What shall I start with?
2. How do I add videos, audio or pictures to my Media Library? What multimedia sources can I
use?
3. How do I start editing a particular audio track or a video clip?
4. What is timeline and how do I use it? How is it different from storyboard?
5. How can I insert a picture for a project and have it displayed for a certain number of frames?
6. Can I create a DVD photo slide show with this software?
7. There are several types of DVDs, which ones does AVS Video Editor support?
8. How do I delete a scene in a movie file, which I do not want to use in my project?
9. How do I add/remove the envelope point?
Answers
1. I'm rather new with this product. What shall I start with?
If you are just starting your work with AVS Video Editor , the first thing you do is creating a
new project. There are 2 sample projects which are included in the installation of the AVS
Video Editor which you can take a look at - they appear listed in the Media Library area
when you first launch the software.
To create a new project select File >> Project >> New and specify the parameters for your
project. Next time you start the Editor, it will appear in the list of projects.
When you have created a project, you will be taken to the Editor main window , which looks
like this:
Here you can add multimedia data to your Media Library , place files on the story-board, edit
particular files.
For more information, please refer to our help file, which can be downloaded from our web site
or read online, under Getting Started section.
[Back to the Top ]
2. How do I add videos, audio or pictures to my Media Library? What multimedia
sources can I use?
To add a multimedia file to the Media Library , select Start menu in the left hand side of the
Editor interface. Then, depending on what type of file you would like to add, select Import
Media and then Add Video , Add Audio or Add Image options. When you click on one of
these options, a Windows Explorer window will appear, where you can browse your system for
a particular file, including your HDD, a CD, a DVD, inserted in your CD or DVD drive or
removable devices, such as portable HDDs or a photo camera, connected to your computer.
If you are importing a video file, you can also split it into scenes, having ticked the necessary
option.
You can select Capture option and having configured the capture device, capture video from
your TV-Tuner, capture card or digital video camera, connected to your computer. Please
check out our help file for more information about capturing.
[Back to the Top ]
3. How do I start editing a particular audio track or a video clip?
When you placed a movie or several movie files in the story board, select the Create Movie
option from the menu. Here you can add transitions, effects, or mix audio. Each time you
select a particular option, timeline mode is switched on so that you can visually judge the
editing process. To edit an audio file in an audio editor, select the Add Audio option, add an
audio track to the timeline and select Edit Audio in Editor button (F4) in the timeline menu.
After you are done with editing the audio track, exit the Editor .
[Back to the Top ]
4. What is timeline and how do I use it? How is it different from storyboard?
AVS Video Editor provides both timeline and storyboard editing.
Storyboard editing allows users to put their video clips in order as they would pictures on the
page of a photo album with each picture representing a separate video clip.
Timeline editing allows users to arrange their video clips against the backdrop of a timeline.
This is useful if you want to synchronize sound effects, titles, and background music. They all
can be queued to enter the stage at a precise time.
[Back to the Top ]
5. How can I insert a picture for a project and have it displayed for a certain number
of frames?
To assign the time during which your picture will be shown, left-click the picture file on the
story-board, select Property menu and set the necessary display time in the Duration field.
[Back to the Top ]
6. Can I create a DVD photo slide show with this software?
To create a DVD Photo Slide show do the following:
Step 1: Create a new project, specify its parameters.
Step 2: Select Import Media - Add Image and browse for files you would like to import.
Step 3: Drag and Drop the pictures you would like to have in your slide show.
Step 4: Apply transitions in the Create Movie menu.
Step 5: Save the sequence of pictures as a movie file (recommended - AVI format).
Step 6: Select Burn DVD and follow the wizard instructions to burn your slideshow onto a
DVD disc.
[Back to the Top ]
7. There are several types of DVDs, which ones does AVS Video Editor support?
AVS Video Editor works with the following media types: DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW, DVD-RAM,
DVD-DL (dual layer).
Note : before you create a DVD, make sure that it is compatible with your DVD drive and
your home DVD player!
[Back to the Top ]
8. How do I delete a scene in a movie file, which I do not want to use in my project?
If you need to delete a whole scene from a movie file do the following:
Step 1: When importing a file, tick Split into Scenes option. Your file will be added to a
Media Library already split into scenes.
Step 2: Simply drag and drop to the story board the scenes you need to include in your movie
from the Media Library area.
If you need to cut out a part of a particular film, do the following:
Step 1: Select a scene on the storyboard and hit Create Movie >> Video Effects .
Step 2: On the timeline, select the area you would like to remove by dragging a mouse,
holding a left key presses.
Step 3: Click Delete option on the timeline menu (the Scissors button).
If you need to undo the operation, select Undo Storyboard operation option in the
storyboard menu pane.
[Back to the Top ]
9. How do I add/remove the envelope control point?
To add a control point to the envelope, double-click within the envelope line (where the mouse
cursor changes to a hand) and drag the control point to the location where you want it. In
case you move the point more than 20 pixels over the track line up or down, the point will be
deleted.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Enabling the DMA Mode
DMA mode - Direct Memory Access - allows certain hardware subsystems within a computer to access
system memory for reading and/or writing independently of the CPU. Many hardware systems use
DMA including disk drive controllers, graphics cards, network cards, and sound cards.
DMA is an essential feature of all modern computers, as it allows devices of different speeds to
communicate without subjecting the CPU to a massive interrupt load. Otherwise, the CPU would have
to copy each piece of data from the source to one of its registers, and then write it back again to the
new location. During this time the CPU would be unavailable for other tasks.
A DMA transfer essentially copies a block of memory from one device to another. While the CPU
initiates the transfer, the transfer itself is performed by the DMA Controller. A typical example is
moving a block of memory from external memory to faster, internal (on-chip) memory. Such an
operation does not stall the processor, which as a result can be scheduled to perform other tasks. It is
essential in providing so-called zero-copy implementations of peripheral device drivers as well as
functionalities such as network packet routing, file copy, streaming video over a network, etc.
To enable the DMA mode you should do the following:
1. Go to the Windows Start menu and select Control Panel ;
2. In the Control Panel window choose the System icon, double-click it to open the system
properties window;
3. In the Hardware tab there is a Device Manager button:
You should click it to open the Device Manager window:
Here you should find IDE ATA/ATAPI controllers among the other devices and click the "+" in front
of it to open the list of available IDE channels that the controller has.
4. Double-click the Primary IDE Channel caption to open the controller properties window:
In the Advanced Settings tab you will see the Transfer Mode drop-down box where the current
transfer mode is displayed. To change the transfer mode and enable DMA you should open the dropdown box and choose DMA if available option:
After that click OK to accept the changes you have made. The same can be done for the Secondary
IDE Channel . After you enabled DMA modes for the IDE channels you can close the device manager
window. Sometimes the reboot might be needed to apply all the changes.
Note : not all the controllers allow the user to change the transfer mode. If you install the third
party driver for your computer IDE controller see the instructions that go along with the driver
software. Usually when the special driver for the controller is installed the DMA mode is enabled
automatically by the driver software.
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Disc Types
AVS4YOU programs currently support three types of optical disc formats that are available for
consumer use. This section will better explain the purpose of these formats and their place in history.
With the support of other disc types and formats the corresponding information will be added.
Compact Discs
Digital Versatile Discs
DVDs of different capacities
DVDs of different medium type
Blu-Ray Discs
Compact Discs
Digital Audio Compact Discs (CD-DA) were first introduced to the consumer audio market in 1980 by
Philips and Sony as an alternative to vinyl records and magnetic tape cassettes. In 1984, Philips and
Sony extended the technology to include data storage and retrieval and introduced a new format: the
Data Compact Disc (CD-ROM).
Since then, the Compact Disc has dramatically changed the way that we listen music and handle
electronic information. With a capacity of up to 700 megabytes of computer data or 80 minutes of high
quality audio, the Compact Disc has revolutionized the distribution of every kind of electronic
information.
In 1990, Philips and Sony extended the technology again and the Compact Disc became recordable
(CD-R). Before the introduction of the CD-R technology, compact discs were produced in commercial
replication plants by stamping the media with a pre-recorded master. Today, discs are produced in
replication plants where large quantities are required. For small production volumes (up to 500 copies
or more, depending on your location and manufacturers in your market), it can be significantly less
expensive to master your own discs using commercially available Compact Disc writing drives.
Whether a Compact Disc was stamped at a replication facility or "burned" using a compact disc
recorder, it can theoretically be read by any available CD-ROM drive. In reality, some inexpensive
media and CD players do not work very well together. Only the physical composition of a commercially
replicated disc and a CD-R disc are different. The former is coated with a reflective layer of aluminum
resulting in a typical silver color. The latter is coated with a reflective layer behind a thin layer of dye
(colors can range from blue, silver, green, and others).
In 1997 Compact Disc ReWritable (CD-RW) - a rewritable optical disc format - was introduced. While a
prerecorded compact disc has its information permanently stamped into its polycarbonate plastic
substrate, a CD-RW disc contains a phase-change alloy recording layer composed of silver, indium,
antimony and tellurium. An infra-red laser beam is employed to selectively heat and melt the
crystallized recording layer into an amorphous state or to anneal it at a lower temperature back to its
crystalline state. The different reflectance of the resulting areas make them appear like the pits and
lands of a prerecorded CD. A CD-RW recorder can rewrite 700 MB of data to a CD-RW disc roughly
1000 times.
A Compact Disc contain blocks (or sectors) of 2352 bytes each, going from the center hole to the outer
diameter. The block at logical address 0 (beginning of the disc) is located near the center of the disc;
the last addressable block (end of the disc) is located near the outer edge of the disc.
Blank discs are usually available in the following sizes (block sizes approximated).
21
63
74
80
minutes
minutes
minutes
minutes
=
=
=
=
94500 blocks
283500 blocks
333000 blocks
360000 blocks
[Back to the Top ]
Digital Versatile Discs
In January of 1995, Sony was the first to showcase Digital Versatile Disc technology after having
announced co-development six months earlier. Three weeks later, Pioneer, Time Warner, and Toshiba
announced their own version of DVD, which had major differences from the format developed by
Philips and Sony. Immediately disputes started over which format should be used, since each had their
own advantages and disadvantages.
The disputes did not stop until May of 1995, when a major report was released by leading hardware
and software manufacturers (Apple, Compaq, Fujitsu, HP, IBM, and Microsoft), stating that the two
formats were not going to be supported by the industry when there were clear advantages in using
one format. The result was a mix of the two formats and the formation of the DVD Forum by all
companies involved in the two original formats (Matsushita, Mitsubishi, Pioneer, Philips, Hitachi, JVC,
Sony, Thompson, Toshiba, and Time Warner).
In 1996, the specifications for DVD-ROM and DVD-Video were finalized and DVD players began to ship
to market. One year later, the DVD Forum worked on the specifications for the first recordable (DVDR) implementation of DVD. In November of 1997, Pioneer announced the first DVD-R drives, while
Matsushita and Toshiba released the first DVD erasable (DVD-RAM) drives.
During 1998, a new coalition was formed to develop re-writable discs specifically for storage of data
based on 25-year-old CD patents. This format was initially called DVD+RW and was not allowed to use
the DVD logo after the DVD Forum ruled that it could not be used in the branch technology. While the
technologies between the two formats are similar, licensing rules dictate differences, some of which
can be witnessed in the logo branding of devices and media.
Much like Compact Discs, Digital Versatile Discs are comprised of a continuous spiral of blocks (or
sectors) starting from the center hole ending at the outer rim of the disc. The blocks are only of size
2048 bytes, making the format less complicated.
There are several types of DVD discs depending on their capacity and on the medium type .
[Back to the Top ]
The main types of DVDs that differ as to their capacity are:
First side
DVD disc
types
Second side
Total
capacity
First layer
capacity
Second layer
capacity
First layer
capacity
Second layer
capacity
DVD-5
4.7 Gb
-
-
-
4.7 Gb
DVD-9
4.3 Gb
4.3 Gb
-
-
8.6 Gb
DVD-10
4.7 Gb
-
4.7 Gb
-
9.4 Gb
DVD-14
4.3 Gb
4.3 Gb
4.7 Gb
-
13.3 Gb
DVD-18
4.3 Gb
4.3 Gb
4.3 Gb
4.3 Gb
17.2 Gb
DVD-5 - single sided, single layer (disc capacity about 4.7 Gb, the working surface of such a disc is
situated on one side of it and consists of one layer only);
DVD-9 - single sided, double layer (disc capacity about 8.6 Gb, the working surface of such a disc is
situated on one side of it and consists of two layers about 4.3 Gb each);
DVD-10 - double sided, single layer on both sides (disc capacity about 9.4 Gb, the working surfaces of
such a disc are situated on both its sides and either consists of one layer about 4.7 Gb);
DVD-14 - double sided, double layer on one side and single layer on the other side (disc capacity
about 13.3 Gb, the working surfaces of such a disc are situated on both its sides and consist of two
layers about 4.3 Gb each on one side and one layer about 4.7 Gb on the other side);
DVD-18 - double sided, double layer on both sides (disc capacity about 17.2 Gb, the working surfaces
of such a disc are situated on both its sides and either consists of two layers about 4.3 Gb each).
Note : the DVD capacity is measured in the so called decimal gigabytes (one gigabyte is equal
to 1000 megabytes). The real size of the DVDs is smaller when measured in the so called
computer gigabytes or gibibytes (one gigabyte is equal to 1024 megabytes).
[Back to the Top ]
The disc medium can be:
DVD-ROM (read only, industrially manufactured)
A factory-made DVD that is manufactured by a press. The DVD specification Version 1.0 was
announced in 1995 and finalized in September 1996. "DVD" was originally an acronym for "digital
video disc"; some members of the DVD Forum believe that it should stand for "digital versatile disc", to
indicate its potential for non-video applications. Toshiba adheres to the interpretation of "digital
versatile disc". The DVD Forum never reached a consensus on the matter, however, and so today the
official name of the format is simply "DVD"; the letters do not "officially" stand for anything.
DVD-R (R = Recordable once)
A DVD-Recordable or DVD-R is an optical disc with a larger storage capacity than a CD-R, typically 4.7
GB instead of 700 Mb, although the capacity of the original standard was 3.95 Gb. The DVD-R format
was developed by Pioneer in autumn of 1997. It is supported by most DVD players, and is approved by
the DVD Forum. A DVD-R can be written to only once.
DVD-RW (RW = ReWritable)
A DVD-RW is a rewritable optical disc with equal storage capacity to a DVD-R, typically 4.7 GB. The
format was developed by Pioneer in November 1999 and has been approved by the DVD Forum. Unlike
DVD-RAM, it is playable in about 75% of conventional DVD players. The primary advantage of DVD-RW
over DVD-R is the ability to erase and rewrite to a DVD-RW disc. According to Pioneer, DVD-RW discs
may be written to about 1,000 times before needing replacement, making them comparable with the
CD-RW standard. DVD-RW discs are commonly used for volatile data, such as backups or collections of
files. They are also increasingly used for home DVD video recorders.
DVD-R DL (double layer)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) (Also Known as DVD-R9) is a derivative of the DVD-R format standard. DVD-R
DL discs employ two recordable dye layers, each capable of storing nearly the 4.7 GB of a single-layer
disc, almost doubling the total disc capacity to 8.54 GB. Discs can be read in many DVD devices (older
units are less compatible) and can only be written using DVD±RW DL burners.
DVD+R (R = Recordable once)
A DVD+R is a writable optical disc with 4.7 GB of storage capacity. The format was developed by a
coalition of corporations, known as the DVD+RW Alliance, in mid 2002. Since the DVD+R format is a
competing format to the DVD-R format, which is developed by the DVD Forum, it has not been
approved by the DVD Forum, which claims that the DVD+R format is not an official DVD format. The
DVD+R format is divergent from the DVD-R format. Hybrid drives that can handle both, often labeled
"DVD±RW", are very popular since there is not yet a single standard for recordable DVDs. There are a
number of significant technical differences between the dash and plus formats, and although most
consumers would not notice the difference, the plus format is considered by some to be better
engineered.
DVD+RW (RW = ReWritable)
A DVD+RW is a rewritable optical disc with equal storage capacity to a DVD+R, typically 4.7 GB
(interpreted as 4.7 · 109, actually 2295104 sectors of 2048 bytes each). The format was developed by
a coalition of corporations, known as the DVD+RW Alliance, in late 1997, although the standard was
abandoned until 2001, when it was heavily revised and the capacity increased from 2.8 GB to 4.7 GB.
Credit for developing the standard is often attributed unilaterally to Philips, one of the members of the
DVD+RW Alliance. Although DVD+RW has not yet been approved by the DVD Forum, the format is too
popular for manufacturers to ignore, and as such, DVD+RW discs are playable in 3/4 of today's DVD
players. Unlike the DVD-RW format, DVD+RW was made a standard earlier than DVD+R.
DVD+R DL (double layer)
DVD+R DL (Double Layer), also known as DVD+R9, is a derivative of the DVD+R format created by
the DVD+RW Alliance. Its use was first demonstrated in October 2003. DVD+R DL discs employ two
recordable dye layers, each capable of storing nearly the 4.7 GB of a single-layer disc, almost doubling
the total disc capacity to 8.55 GB. Discs can be read in many DVD devices (older units are less
compatible) and can only be created using DVD+RW DL and Super Multi drives. The latest DL drives
write double layer discs slower (2.4x to 8x) than single-layer media (8x-16x). A double layer rewritable
version called DVD+RW DL is also in development but is expected to be incompatible with existing DVD
devices.
DVD-RAM (random access rewritable)
DVD-RAM (DVD–Random Access Memory) is a disc specification presented in 1996 by the DVD Forum,
which specifies rewritable DVD-RAM media and the appropriate DVD writers. DVD-RAM media are used
in computers as well as camcorders and personal video recorders since 1998. You can identify a DVDRAM disc due to lots of little rectangles distributed on the surface of the data carrier. Compared with
other writeable DVDs, DVD-RAM is more closely related to hard disk technology, as it has concentric
tracks instead of one long spiral track. Unlike the competing formats DVD+R, DVD-R, DVD+RW and
DVD-RW, you do not need special DVD burning software to write or read DVD-RAMs on a computer.
DVD-RAMs can be accessed like a usual floppy disk or hard drive. DVD-RAM is more suited to data
backups and use in camcorders than DVD±RW. The advantages of DVD-RAM discs are the following:
long durability of minimum 30 years and they can be rewritten more than 100,000 times, and also the
fact that no DVD burning software required in computers as the discs can be used and accessed like a
removable hard disk.
[Back to the Top ]
Blu-Ray Discs
Blu-ray Disc (BD) is a next-generation optical disc format meant for storage of high-definition video
and high-density data. The Blu-ray standard was jointly developed by a group of leading consumer
electronics and PC companies called the Blu-ray Disc Association (BDA), led by Sony and Philips. Bluray has information capacity per layer of 25 gigabytes.
Blu-ray gets its name from the shorter wavelength (405 nm) of a "blue" (technically blue-violet) laser
that allows it to store substantially more data than a DVD, which has the same physical dimensions but
uses a longer wavelength (650 nm) red laser.
BD-R (R = Recordable once)
A single-layer Blu-ray disc (BD) can fit 23.3, 25, or 27 GB; this is enough for approximately four hours
of high-definition video with audio. A dual-layer BD can fit 46.6, 50, or 54 GB, enough for
approximately eight hours of HD video. Capacities of 100 GB and 200 GB, using four and eight layers
respectively, are currently being researched; TDK has already announced a four-layer 100 GB disc.
BD-RE (RE = REwritable)
The BD-RE (rewritable) standard is available, along with the BD-R (recordable) and BD-ROM formats,
which became available in mid-2004, as part of version 2.0 of the Blu-ray specifications. BD-ROM prerecorded media are to be available by early 2006.
In addition to 12 cm discs, an 8 cm variation for use with camcorders is planned that will have a
capacity of 15 GB.
To ensure that the Blu-ray Disc format is easily extendable (future-proof) it also includes support for
multi-layer discs, which should allow the storage capacity to be increased to 100GB/200GB (25GB per
layer) in the future simply by adding more layers to the discs.
Blu-ray drives currently in production can transfer approximately 36 Mbit/s (54 Mbit/s for BD-ROM),
but 2x speed prototypes with a 72 Mbit/s transfer rate are in development. Rates of 8x or more are
planned for the future.
Because the Blu-ray standard places data so close to the surface of the disc, early discs were
susceptible to dust and scratches and had to be enclosed in plastic caddies for protection. The solution
to this problem arrived in January 2004 with the introduction of a clear polymer that gives Blu-ray
discs unprecedented scratch resistance. The coating, developed by TDK Corporation under the name
"Durabis," allows BDs to be cleaned safely with only a tissue - a procedure that can damage CDs,
DVDs. Bare BDs with the coating are reportedly able to withstand attack by a screwdriver.
[Back to the Top ]
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Aspect Ratio
The evolution of film and TV aspect ratios
Original aspect ratio
Letterboxing and Pillar Boxing
Working with aspect ratio in AVS Video Editor
Selecting aspect ratio when you create a new project
Changing aspect ratio in video file properties
Saving movies using aspect correction
The aspect ratio of an image is its displayed width divided by its height (usually expressed as "x:y").
For instance, the aspect ratio of a traditional television screen is 4:3, or 1.33:1. High definition
television uses an aspect of 16:9, or about 1.78:1. Aspect ratios of 2.39:1 or 1.85:1 are frequently
used in cinematography, while the aspect ratio of a sync-sound 35 mm film frame is around 1.37:1
(also known as "Academy" ratio). Silent films which used the full frame were shot in 1.33:1.
The evolution of film and TV aspect ratios
The 4:3 ratio for standard television has been in use since television's origins and many computer
monitors use the same aspect ratio. Since 4:3 is the aspect ratio of the usable frame within the
Academy format once the soundtrack had been taken into account, films could be satisfactorily viewed
on TV in the early days of the medium. When cinema attendance dropped, Hollywood created
widescreen aspect ratios to immerse the viewer in a more realistic experience and, possibly, to make
broadcast films less enjoyable if watched on a regular TV set.
16:9 is the format of Japanese and American HDTV as well as European non-HD widescreen television
(EDTV). Many digital video cameras have the capability to record in 16:9. Anamorphic DVD transfers
store the information in 16:9 vertically stretched to 4:3; if the TV can handle an anamorphic image the
signal will be de-anamorphosed by the TV to 16:9. If not, the DVD player will unstretch the image and
add letterboxing before sending the image to the TV. Wider ratios such as 1.85:1 and 2.39:1 are
accommodated within the 16:9 DVD frame by adding some additional masking within the image itself.
Within the motion picture industry, the convention is to assign a value of 1 to the image height, so
that, for example, an anamorphic frame is described as 2.39:1 or just "2.39". This way of speaking
comes about because the width of a film image is restricted by the presence of sprocket holes and a
standard intermittent movement interval of 4 perforations, as well as an optical soundtrack running
down the projection print between the image and the perforations on one side. The most common
projection ratios in American theaters are 1.85 and 2.39.
The 16:9 format adopted for HDTV is actually narrower than commonly-used cinematic widescreen
formats. Anamorphic widescreen (2.39:1) and American theatrical standard (1.85:1) have wider
aspect ratios, while the European theatrical standard (1.66:1) is just slightly less. (IMAX, contrary to
some popular perception, is 1.33:1, the traditional television aspect ratio.)
Super 16mm film is frequently used for television production due to its lower cost, lack of need for
soundtrack space on the film itself, and aspect ratio similar to 16:9 (Super 16mm is natively 1.66
whilst 16:9 is 1.78).
[Back to the Top ]
Original aspect ratio
Original Aspect Ratio is a home cinema term for the aspect ratio or dimensions in which a film or
visual production was produced — as envisioned by the people involved in the creation of the work. As
an example, the film Gladiator was released to theaters in the 2.39:1 aspect ratio. It was filmed in
Super 35 and, in addition to being presented in cinemas and television in the original aspect ratio of
2.39:1, it was also broadcast without the mattes its original aspect ratio release had.
[Back to the Top ]
Letterboxing and pillar boxing
Letterboxing is the practice of transferring widescreen films to video formats while preserving the
original aspect ratio. Since the video display is most often a more square aspect ratio than the original
film, the resulting video must include masked-off areas above and below the picture area (often
referred to as "black bars," or, more accurately, as mattes). Letterboxing takes its name from the
similarity of the resulting image to a horizontal opening in a postal letter box.
Letterboxing offers an alternative to the pan and scan or full screen method of transferring a
widescreen film to video. In pan and scan, the original image is cropped to to suit the 1.33:1 (or 4:3)
ratio of the television screen. In contrast, letterboxing preserves most of the original composition of
the film as seen in the theater.
Pillar boxing refers to what happens when a 1.33:1 image is displayed on a wider screen, adding
bars on the side. The pillar box effect occurs in widescreen video displays when black bars (mattes or
masking) are placed on the sides of the image. It becomes necessary when video that was not
originally designed for widescreen is shown on a widescreen display. The original material is shrunk
and placed in the middle of the widescreen frame. "Pillar box", sometimes called windowboxing, comes
from the similarity of this display to free-standing mailboxes in the UK and the British Commonwealth.
[Back to the Top ]
Working with aspect ratio in AVS Video Editor
When you work with video files in AVS Video Editor , it is sometimes necessary to set their aspect
ratio parameters. You will need to select the initial aspect parameters when you start creating
a new project , you can change the video file aspect ratio settings in the properties window
and finally, you can use the aspect correction option when you save your video file into the
available video formats . See the sections below to get more information on this topics.
Selecting aspect ratio when you create a new project
When you create a new project it is necessary to select the future video image aspect ratio. The fact
is, hardware and software DVD players can playback your created DVDs in accordance with their
aspect ratio that will not always coincide with the image physical width to height ratio. That is why you
should bear this in mind when you create a new project and save your movie later in DVD or MPEG
format. You should decide from the very beginning what aspect ratio your movie will have.
When you save your movie in DVD or MPEG format, you can choose 4:3 aspect ratio if you plan to
watch your movie using a common television set, or 16:9 aspect ratio to watch your video on a
widescreen TV.
When you save your movie in all other supported formats (AVI, RM, and others), it is strongly
recommended that you leave Original Aspect setting.
If you have already created a project with the settings like in this one but with other video material
and used the Crop function in the video properties, you can set here the crop percentage that will be
used by default in your current project. If you need to change it, you can do that later, using the video
file properties.
[Back to the Top ]
Changing aspect ratio in video file properties
When you add a video clip to the Storyboard you can view its properties and change some of them if
necessary.
In the Aspect tab you can modify the aspect ratio of your video clip. It might be useful if the video
was prerecorded with distortions - elongated in horizontal or vertical dimension. You can correct that
changing current aspect width and current aspect height, selecting Custom aspect ratio in the upper
drop-down list, leave the Original aspect, or change it to the 4 to 3 or 16 to 9 ratio.
You can also use the Video Crop Scale option to cut out the editor created mattes (black areas), but
please note, that a part of image will also be lost. You cannot cut out the mattes initially present in the
video material using this function. This function is similar to pan and scan option in DVD players.
[Back to the Top ]
Saving movies using aspect correction
Sometimes your video file aspect ratio does not coincide with the physical resolution width to height
ratio. If you leave the parameters this way there can be image distortions during playback. To correct
this situation the aspect correction function was introduced into AVS Video Editor . You can use
this function when you save your video into all the main formats, except DVD and MPEG. These two
formats use the aspect ratio in-built identification and you can set their aspect ratio when you create
a new project . For all the other formats three options are available:
1. Use aspect correction - the Video Editor will correct the initial project frame size to
optimally fit the set aspect ratio. For instance, the editor can increase or decrease the video
frame height so that the physical width to height ratio coincided with the aspect ratio.
Note : when you convert and save your video file into 3GP format and into MP4 format
for mobile phones, this option is disabled. This is done due to the fact that mobile phones
support only videos with fixed frame sizes that cannot be altered in accordance with
aspect ratio.
2. No aspect correction - the Video Editor will correct the initial aspect ratio according to the
video file physical frame size ratio. If the aspect ratio is wider than that of the physical
dimensions', the editor can add mattes above or below the image (letterboxing). In case the
aspect ratio is narrower than the physical dimensions ratio, the editor can add mattes on the
sides of the image (pillow boxing).
3. Resize - free resize with no aspect correspondence. All the aspect related changes will be
neglected and discarded. The image will be resized according to the width and height
specified.
[Back to the Top ]
http://www.avsmedia.com/
AVS4YOU
Appendix
Glossary
[A ] [B ] [C ] [D ] [E ] [F ] [G ] [H ] [I ] [J ] [K ] [L ] [M ] [N ] [O ] [P ] [Q ] [R ] [S ] [T ] [U
] [V ] [W ] [X] [Y] [Z]
A
artifacts
Unusual or unwanted video distortion. Examples of artifacts include flicker, jitter, degradation of
resolution, and aspect ratio abnormalities.
aspect ratio
The aspect ratio is the relationship of screen width to height. Standard broadcast TV has a ratio of 4 to
3. Widescreen commonly has a ratio of 16 to 9 (although 1.85:1 and 2.11:1 are also used). To show
widescreen movies on a standard TV screen, either letterbox (with black bars above and below the
image) or 'pan and scan' (which crops the movie to fit the screen) are common techniques.
AVI
Audio Video Interleave (AVI) format is the standard Windows format for audio/video data.
[Back to the Top ]
B
B-frames
Bidirectional frames - frames used in MPEG-4 format that are compressed based on the frames before
and after them. Have the greatest compression ratio among all frame types. See B-VOPs codec
settings section for more detail.
bandwidth
A network's capacity for transferring an amount of data in a given time.
bidirectional frames
See B-frames .
bit rate
The number of bits transferred per second.
brightness
The value of a pixel along the black-white axis.
B-VOPs
An option that allows the codec algorithm to use so called bidirectional frames that are much smaller in
size than usual frames and are predicted based on the frames before and after them.
[Back to the Top ]
C
capture
To record audio, video, or still images as digital data in a file.
capture device
Hardware that transfers audio and video from an external source, such as a VCR or camcorder, to a
computer.
chapters
DVD discs can be split up into titles, and then further into chapters. For example, on a disc with
multiple sporting events, each event may be designated as a separate title. Each period in the
individual sporting event or title may be designated a chapter.
chroma motion
An algorithm that lets the codec detect motion in an advanced way and calculate the possibility to
additionally compress the output file without the quality loss.
chroma optimizer
An algorithm used to produce a better impression of objects edges by reducing the noise around them.
clip
1. The audio, video, or still images within DVD discs. Clips are stored in collections.
2. The audio, video, or still images within AVS Video Editor .
clip creation
The process of detecting and splitting video content into separate clips.
codec
An abbreviation for COmpressor/DECompressor. Software or hardware used to compress and
decompress digital media.
compression
A process for removing redundant data from a digital media file or stream to reduce its size or the
bandwidth used.
content
Audio, video, images, text, or any other information that is contained in a digital media file or stream.
CSS
"Content Scramble System". The official DVD-Video digital encryption scheme.
[Back to the Top ]
D
data rate
The speed of a data transfer process, usually expressed in kilobytes (thousands of bytes) per second.
See also bit rate .
decode
The process of converting the data on a DVD into the video image on the screen.
decompress
Convert video and audio data from a compressed form back into its original form.
delta frames
See P-frames .
digital video (DV)
Video images and sound stored in a digital format.
to download
To transfer a file over a network in response to a request from the device that receives the data.
Downloaded content is kept on the receiving device for playback on demand. In contrast, streamed
content is played as it is delivered.
DVD
Digital Versatile Disc - an optical disc used to store information that has rather a large capacity as
compared with usual CD's. Needs special DVD drive to read such a disc.
[Back to the Top ]
E
encode
Convert video or audio into a compressed format.
[Back to the Top ]
F
frame
One of many sequential images that make up video.
frame drop ratio
The percentage of frames that don't have any important information and thus can be dropped.
frame rate
The number of video frames displayed per second. Higher frame rates generally produce smoother
movement in the picture.
frame size
The number of pixels that form the video image (horizontally/vertically).
full motion video
Content that shows 30 (interlaced) or 24 (film content) frames per second.
[Back to the Top ]
G
global motion compensation
An algorithm that helps while coding the objects that only change their size or place in the picture but
keep static.
[Back to the Top ]
H
highlight
Activate or focus menu or selection. When the cursor is moved over an option on a DVD menu, that
menu often changes color. It is then "highlighted".
[Back to the Top ]
I
I-frames
Also called intraframes or keyframes - frames with a very small compression ratio used to form the
base of the video picture. See B-VOPs codec settings section for more detail.
import
The process of bringing existing digital audio, video, and still image files into AVS Video Converter or
AVS Video Editor programs.
interframes
See P-frames .
intraframes
See I-frames .
[Back to the Top ]
J
jitter
The smoothness of frame delivery over time.
[Back to the Top ]
K
keyframes
See I-frames .
[Back to the Top ]
L
letterboxing
The practice of transferring widescreen films to video formats while preserving the original aspect
ratio.
lumimasking
An algorithm used to apply more compression to very dark and very bright areas where it cannot be
easily noticed by the human eye.
[Back to the Top ]
M
matte (usually used in plural - mattes)
The masked-off areas above and below the picture area, used to maintain original aspect ratio when
viewing video on the screen with a different aspect ratio.
max consecutive B-VOPs
Maximum number of sequential bidirectional frames in the video stream.
max key interval
Maximum number of delta frames (interframes) between two keyframes (intraframes).
motion search type
An algorithm that allows the codec to search for the motions in the movie and better compress them
with a higher quality.
movie file
The file created by combining the audio, video, and still images contained in your project.
MPEG
Moving Picture Experts Group. MPEG-1 is the video format on video CD and CD-I. MPEG-2 or DVD offer
better quality and twice the runtime per disc.
MSC
Devices that represent USB Mass Storage Device Class (MSC or UMS ) are seen as a removable drive
in the system and some of them as a fixed drive.
MTP
Devices representing USB MTP device class use Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) supported by Microsoft
Windows Media Player 10 8 11.
multimedia
Any format that contains more than one media, such as text, still images, sound, animation, and
video.
[Back to the Top ]
N
navigation
Accessing the features of a DVD-Video disc.
NTSC
National Television Systems Committee. A committee of the Electronic Industries Association that
prepared the standards for commercial television broadcasting in the United States, Canada, Japan,
and parts of Central and South America. The NTSC format has 525 scan lines (rows) of resolution at
frame rate of thirty frames per second.
[Back to the Top ]
O
output file
The file that is a result of conversion of a source file.
[Back to the Top ]
P
PAL
Phase Alteration Line. This standard is used for commercial broadcasting in most of Europe, Australia,
and parts of Central and South America. PAL format displays at 625 scan lines (rows) of resolution at
frame rate of 25 frames per second.
P-frames
Delta frames or interframes - frames used in MPEG-4 format to increase the compression ratio. A row
of P-frames is placed between two I-frames - thus the name interframes was given. See B-VOPs
codec settings section for more detail.
pillow boxing
The practice of transferring films having aspect ratio of 1.33:1 to wide screens while preserving the
original aspect ratio.
pixel
Picture cell. This is the smallest independent unit of a digital image; similar to each dot on your
monitor.
pixel depth
The number of bits of color information per pixel.
player
A program or device that displays multimedia content, typically animated images, video, and audio.
project file
The file created when you save the results of adding various clips to the workspace when you work
with AVS Video Editor . This file is saved with an .vep extension.
[Back to the Top ]
Q
QT
Apple Quick Time format for audio/video data.
quantizer
Detail removal factor (DRF), or the degree of picture blur due to details reduction. Used to allow
picture compression.
quantizer offset
The offset used to calculate frames quantizer.
quantizer ratio
The ratio used to calculate frames quantizer.
[Back to the Top ]
R
to record
To capture audio, video, or still images as digital data in a file.
regional coding
Region code - the software protection used on DVD discs to prevent unauthorized playback of the discs
made in one country to be played in another country.
There are 7 regions: (1) Canada, U.S., US Territories; (2) Europe, Japan, South Africa, Middle East
(including Egypt); (3) Southeast Asia, East Asia (including Hong Kong); (4) Australia, New Zealand,
Pacific Islands, Central America, Mexico, South America, Caribbean; (5) Former Soviet Union, Indian
Subcontinent, Africa (also North Korea, Mongolia); (6) China and (7) Transcontinental - used for
watching DVD movies onboard the planes, ships and so forth.
resolution
See Frame size
RGB model
Color spectrum represented by mixing red, green, and blue (RGB) colored light in various proportions
and intensities.
RM
Real Media streaming format for audio/video data.
[Back to the Top ]
S
source
Audio and video content that can be captured and encoded from devices installed on your computer or
from a file.
split
The process of dividing an audio or video clip into two parts.
still image
A graphic file, such as a .bmp, .gif, or .jpg.
storyboard
A view of the workspace that focuses on the sequencing of your clips (used in AVS Video Editor ).
subtitle
Subtitles show the words being spoken on top of video content. They are often used for language
translations.
[Back to the Top ]
T
timeline
1. The area of the user interface that shows the timing and arrangement of files that make up a media
file.
2. A view of the workspace that focuses on the timing of your clips.
titles
Video programs can be split up into titles, and then further into chapters . A good example of titles is
when a DVD contains a movie (one title), the trailer for the movie (a second title), and biographies of
the actors (a third title), all on the same disc.
transition
The method of smoothly moving from one video clip or photo to another.
trim
Hiding parts of a file or clip without deleting them from the original source. Files and clips can be
trimmed by adjusting the start or end trim points. Used in AVS Video Editor .
[Back to the Top ]
U
UMS
Devices that represent USB Mass Storage Device Class (MSC or UMS) are seen as a removable drive in
the system and some of them as a fixed drive.
[Back to the Top ]
V
VBR
Variable bit rate. This allows DVD compression methods to use more or less compression according to
the complexity of the picture.
VHQ Mode
An algorithm that decides which format will be used to store motion vectors thus reducing the file size.
[Back to the Top ]
W
widescreen
Most TVs display in 4:3 ratio. Widescreen display shows you the same ratio that is used for movies,
which is frequently 16:9. If the title is being shown on a widescreen TV it can be shown in its original
aspect ratio without the display of the black bars above and below the image.
Windows Media file
A file containing audio, video, or script data that is stored in Windows Media Format. Depending on
their content and purpose, Windows Media files use a variety of file name extensions, such as: .wma,
.wme, .wms, .wmv, .wmx, .wmz, or .wvx.
workspace
The area of AVS Video Editor in which you create your movies. It consists of two views: storyboard
and timeline, which act as a container for work in progress.
[Back to the Top ]

AVS4YOU Programs Help

Transcription

Similar documents

Hotmail/Live/ MSN/Outlook.com

Capturing with Phillips DVDR985

- Saurashtra University

Time Sheet Reminder

Disney Princess Magic Wand Laptop

Sirius Satellite Radio Operations

Go to Website highereduhry.com Click on online admission button

Bticino 334202 (5 Wire)

Windwood Studio is offering a DVD of Theatre on Main`s production

Connecting Windows 8 to the Switch to the desktop - Crye